2013 Chevrolet Silverado

Chevrolet Silverado Owner Manual - 2013 - crc2 - 8/13/12 Black plate (1,1)
2013 Chevrolet Silverado Owner Manual M
In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1 Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-7 Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24 Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1
Performance and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31 Warning Lights, Gauges, and Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-23
Keys, Doors, and Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-29 Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-33
Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-46 Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . 9-39
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Universal Remote System . . . . 5-54 Drive Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53
Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-56
Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-59
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Object Detection Systems . . . . 9-62
Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-68
Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-74
Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Conversions and
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 Add-Ons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-105
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17 Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 Rear Seat Infotainment . . . . . . . 7-38 General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22 Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50 Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39 Trademarks and License Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Agreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
2013 Chevrolet Silverado Owner Manual M
Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47 OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84 OnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89 OnStar Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-93 OnStar Additional
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-3
Special Application
Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Additional Maintenance
and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Recommended Fluids,
Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . 11-12
Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 11-16
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1
Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-2
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-17
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19
Introduction iii
Please refer to the purchase Canadian Vehicle Owners

documentation relating to your
specific vehicle to confirm each of Propritaires Canadiens
the features found on your vehicle. A French language copy of this
For vehicles first sold in Canada, manual can be obtained from your
substitute the name General dealer or from:
Motors of Canada Limited for
The names, logos, emblems, Chevrolet Motor Division wherever it On peut obtenir un exemplaire de
slogans, vehicle model names, and appears in this manual. ce guide en franais auprs du
vehicle body designs appearing in concessionnaire ou l'adresse
this manual including, but not limited If the vehicle has the Duramax suivante:
to, GM, the GM logo, CHEVROLET, diesel engine, see the Duramax
the CHEVROLET Emblem, diesel supplement for additional and Helm, Incorporated
SILVERADO, and Z71 are specific information on this engine. Attention: Customer Service
trademarks and/or service marks of 47911 Halyard Drive
If the vehicle is a hybrid, see the Plymouth, MI 48170
General Motors LLC, its hybrid supplement for more
subsidiaries, affiliates, or licensors. information.
Using this Manual
This manual describes features that Keep this manual in the vehicle for
may or may not be on your specific quick reference. To quickly locate information about
vehicle either because they are the vehicle, use the Index in the
options that you did not purchase or back of the manual. It is an
due to changes subsequent to the alphabetical list of what is in the
printing of this owner manual. manual and the page number where
it can be found.
Litho in U.S.A.

Part No. 22974446 B Second Printing 2012 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.
iv Introduction
Danger, Warnings, and Vehicle Symbol Chart

Cautions Here are some additional symbols
that may be found on the vehicle
Warning messages found on vehicle and what they mean. For more
labels and in this manual describe information on the symbol, refer to
hazards and what to do to avoid or the Index.
reduce them. A circle with a slash through it is a
safety symbol which means Do
0 : Adjustable Pedals
Danger indicates a hazard with a
high level of risk which will result in Not, Do not do this, or Do not let 9 : Airbag Readiness Light
serious injury or death. this happen. # : Air Conditioning
Warning or Caution indicates a ! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)
hazard that could result in injury or Symbols
death. The vehicle has components and % : Audio Steering Wheel Controls
labels that use symbols instead of or OnStar
{ WARNING text. Symbols are shown along with
the text describing the operation or
$ : Brake System Warning Light
These mean there is something information relating to a specific
" : Charging System
that could hurt you or other component, control, message, I : Cruise Control
people. gauge, or indicator. B : Engine Coolant Temperature
M : This symbol is shown when O : Exterior Lamps
Notice: This means there is you need to see your owner manual
something that could result in for additional instructions or # : Fog Lamps
property or vehicle damage. This information. . : Fuel Gauge
would not be covered by the * : This symbol is shown when + : Fuses
vehicle's warranty. you need to see a service manual
for additional instructions or 3 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam
information. Changer
Introduction v
j : LATCH System Child

Restraints
* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp
: : Oil Pressure
g : Outside Power Foldaway
Mirrors
O : Power
/ : Remote Vehicle Start
> : Safety Belt Reminders
7 : Tire Pressure Monitor
_ : Tow/Haul Mode
d : Traction Control/StabiliTrak
M : Windshield Washer Fluid
vi Introduction
2 NOTES
In Brief 1-1
In Brief Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27

Passenger Sensing Driver Information
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
Instrument Panel Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 Rear Vision
Instrument Panel (Base/Uplevel Steering Wheel Camera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
Version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 1-28
Instrument Panel (Premium Throttle and Brake Pedal Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
Version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 Universal Remote System . . . 1-29
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
Initial Drive Information Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-7 Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-18 Performance and Maintenance
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18 StabiliTrak System . . . . . . . . . 1-31
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21 Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-31
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22 Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-32
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . 1-32
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Vehicle Features Driving for Better Fuel
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24 Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25 Roadside Assistance
Heated and Ventilated Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . 1-25 Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26 OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
Head Restraint Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-26
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
1-2 In Brief
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel (Base/Uplevel Version)
In Brief 1-3
A. Air Vents on page 810. H. Instrument Panel Storage on S. Automatic Transfer Case
B. Turn and LaneChange Lever. page 41. Control (If Equipped). See
See Turn and Lane-Change I. Integrated Trailer Brake Four-Wheel Drive on
Signals on page 65. Controller (If Equipped). See page 1029.
Windshield Wiper/Washer on Trailer Towing on page 977. T. Ashtray (If Equipped). See
page 54. J. Exterior Lamp Controls on Ashtrays on page 510 and
page 61. Cigarette Lighter on page 59.
C. Driver Information Center (DIC)
Buttons. See Driver Information K. Data Link Connector (DLC) (Out U. StabiliTrak System on
Center (DIC) on page 529. of View). See Malfunction page 956 (If Equipped).
D. Hazard Warning Flashers on Indicator Lamp on page 521. Ultrasonic Parking Assist on
page 65 (Out of View). L. Hood Release. See Hood on page 962 (If Equipped).
E. Instrument Cluster on page 104. Pedal Adjust Button (If

page 511. M. Parking Brake on page 954. Equipped). See Adjustable
Throttle and Brake Pedal on
F. Shift Lever. See Automatic N. Dome Lamps on page 67. page 924.
Transmission on page 933. Fog Lamps on page 66 (If Exhaust Brake (If Equipped).
Tow/Haul Selector Button (If Equipped). See Brakes in the Duramax
Equipped). See Tow/Haul Mode O. Cruise Control on page 959. diesel supplement.
on page 938.
P. Steering Wheel Adjustment on V. Power Outlets on page 59.
Range Selection Mode (Allison page 52.
Transmission and Hydra-Matic
6Speed Button) (If Equipped). Q. Horn on page 54.
See Manual Mode on R. Steering Wheel Controls on
page 937. page 52 (If Equipped).
G. Infotainment on page 71.
1-4 In Brief
W. Climate Control Systems (with

Air Conditioning) on page 81 or
Climate Control Systems (with
Heater Only) on page 84
(If Equipped).
Dual Automatic Climate Control
System on page 85
(If Equipped).
X. Power Take Off (PTO) Control
(If Equipped). See Power Take
Off (PTO) in the Duramax diesel
supplement.
Y. Passenger Airbag Off Control
(If Equipped). See Airbag
On-Off Switch on page 329.
In Brief 1-5
Instrument Panel (Premium Version)

1-6 In Brief
A. Air Vents on page 810. H. Infotainment on page 71. R. Horn on page 54.
B. Turn and LaneChange Lever. I. Exterior Lamp Controls on S. Steering Wheel Controls on
See Turn and Lane-Change page 61. page 52.
Signals on page 65. J. Integrated Trailer Brake T. Climate Control Systems (with
Windshield Wiper/Washer on Controller (If Equipped). See Air Conditioning) on page 81 or
page 54. Trailer Towing on page 977. Climate Control Systems (with
C. Instrument Cluster on K. Dome Lamps on page 67. Heater Only) on page 84 (If
page 511. Equipped).
L. Automatic Transfer Case
D. Hazard Warning Flashers on Control (If Equipped). See Dual Automatic Climate Control
page 65 (Out of View). Four-Wheel Drive on System on page 85 (If
page 1029. Equipped).
E. Shift Lever. See Automatic
Transmission on page 933. M. Data Link Connector (DLC) (Out U. Power Outlets on page 59.
Range Selection Mode (If of View). See Malfunction Cigarette Lighter (If Equipped).
Equipped). See Manual Mode Indicator Lamp on page 521. See Ashtrays on page 510 and
on page 937. N. Hood Release. See Hood on Cigarette Lighter on page 59.
F. Tow/Haul Mode on page 938 (If page 104.

Equipped). O. Parking Brake on page 954.
G. Driver Information Center (DIC) P. Cruise Control on page 959.
Buttons. See Driver Information Q. Steering Wheel Adjustment on
Center (DIC) on page 529. page 52.
In Brief 1-7
V. StabiliTrak System on Initial Drive

page 956 (If Equipped).
Pedal Adjust Button
Information
(If Equipped). See Adjustable This section provides a brief
Throttle and Brake Pedal on overview about some of the
page 924. important features that may or may
Ultrasonic Parking Assist on not be on your specific vehicle.
page 962 (If Equipped). For more detailed information, refer
Exhaust Brake (If Equipped). to each of the features which can be
See Brakes in the Duramax found later in this owner manual.
diesel supplement.
Remote Keyless Entry
W. Passenger Airbag Off Control
(If Equipped). See Airbag (RKE) System K : Press to unlock the driver door.
On-Off Switch on page 329. The RKE transmitter is used to Press K again within three seconds
remotely lock and unlock the doors to unlock all remaining doors.
from up to 60 m (195 ft) away from Q: Press to lock all doors. Lock
the vehicle. and unlock feedback can be
personalized. See Vehicle
Personalization (With DIC Buttons)
on page 546.
L : Press and release to locate
the vehicle. Press L and hold for
more than two seconds to sound the
panic alarm. Press L again to
cancel the panic alarm.
1-8 In Brief
See Keys on page 21 and Remote Canceling a Remote Start Power Door Locks
Keyless Entry (RKE) System
To cancel a remote start, do one of
Operation on page 22.
the following:
Remote Vehicle Start . Aim the RKE transmitter at the
vehicle and press and hold /
With this feature the engine can be
started from outside of the vehicle. until the parking lamps turn off.
. Turn on the hazard warning
Starting the Vehicle flashers.
1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the . Turn the vehicle on and then
vehicle. back off.
2. Press and release Q. See Remote Vehicle Start on
3. Immediately after completing page 24. Crew Cab Premium Trim Shown,
Step 2, press and hold / for at Uplevel Similar
least two seconds or until the
Door Locks
turn signal lamps flash. There are several ways to lock and
When the vehicle starts, the parking unlock the vehicle.
lamps will turn on and remain on as From outside, use the Remote
long as the engine is running. The Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or
doors will be locked and the climate the key in the driver door.
control system may come on. From inside, use the power door
The engine will continue to run for locks or the manual door locks. To
10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a lock or unlock the door with the
10-minute time extension. Remote manual locks, push down or pull up
start can be extended only once. on the manual lock knob.
In Brief 1-9
Power Windows Press the switch to lower the

window. Pull the switch up to raise
it. See Windows on page 218 and
Power Windows on page 218.
Power Sliding Rear Window
Base Trim
For vehicles with power door locks: Crew Cab Premium Trim Shown,
Q: Press to lock the doors. Other Models Similar
K: Press to unlock the doors. The driver door has a switch to
control all windows. Each
See Door Locks on page 26 and passenger door has a switch to
Power Door Locks on page 27. control that window. The power If equipped, the power sliding rear
windows work when the ignition is in window works when the ignition has
Windows ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY, been turned to ACC/ACCESSORY
or Retained Accessory Power or ON/RUN, or when Retained
Manual Windows (RAP). See Retained Accessory Accessory Power (RAP) is active.
Turn the hand crank on each door Power (RAP) on page 928. See Retained Accessory Power
to manually raise or lower the (RAP) on page 928.
manual windows. . Press the switch to open the
window.
1-10 In Brief
. Pull the switch to close the 3. Try to move the seat back and
. If available, raise or lower the
window. forth to be sure the seat is entire seat by moving the entire
The power sliding rear window locked in place. control up or down.
cannot be operated manually. See Seat Adjustment on page 33. See Power Seat Adjustment on
page 35.
Seat Adjustment Power Seats
Lumbar Adjustment
Manual Seats Manual Lumbar
To adjust a power seat, if equipped:

. Move the seat forward or
To adjust the seat: rearward by sliding the control If equipped, increase or decrease
1. Lift the bar to unlock the seat. forward or rearward. manual lumbar support by turning
the knob forward or rearward.
2. Slide the seat to the desired . If available, raise or lower the
position and release the bar. front or rear part of the seat See Lumbar Adjustment on
cushion by moving the front or page 35.
rear of the control up or down.
In Brief 1-11
Power Lumbar To raise or lower the height of 2. Move the seatback to the
the support, press and hold the desired position, and then
top or bottom of the control. release the lever to lock the
See Lumbar Adjustment on seatback in place.
page 35. 3. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked.
Reclining Seatbacks
To return the seatback to the upright
Manual Reclining Seatbacks position:
1. Lift the lever fully without
applying pressure to the
seatback, and the seatback will
return to the upright position.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to
To adjust the power lumbar support, make sure it is locked.
if equipped:
See Reclining Seatbacks on
. On vehicles with two-way page 36.
lumbar, press and hold the top
or bottom of the control to
increase or decrease lumbar
support.
. On vehicles with four-way To recline a manual seatback:
lumbar, press and hold the front
1. Lift the lever.
or rear of the control to increase
or decrease lumbar support.
1-12 In Brief
Power Reclining Seatbacks Memory Features Heated and Ventilated

Seats
To adjust a power seatback,

if equipped: If available, the controls on the Heated and Cooled Seat Buttons
driver door are used to program and
. Tilt the top of the control Shown, Heated Seat Buttons
recall memory settings for the driver
rearward to recline. seat, outside mirrors, and the Similar
. Tilt the top of the control forward adjustable throttle and brake pedals, If available, the buttons are on the
to raise. if equipped. front doors. To operate, the ignition
See Memory Seats on page 38 and must be in ON/RUN.
See Reclining Seatbacks on
page 36. Vehicle Personalization (With DIC H : If available, press to cool
Buttons) on page 546. the seat.
I : Press to heat the
seatback only.
In Brief 1-13
J: Press to heat the seat and Safety Belts Passenger Sensing

seatback. System
Press the button once for the The passenger sensing system,
highest setting. With each press of if equipped, turns off the front
the button, the seat will change to outboard passenger frontal airbag
the next lower setting, and then to under certain conditions. No other
the off setting. The lights indicate airbag is affected by the passenger
three for the highest setting and one sensing system.
for the lowest.
If the vehicle has one of the
See Heated and Ventilated Front indicators pictured in the following
Seats on page 39. illustrations, then the vehicle has a
passenger sensing system for the
Head Restraint right front passenger position unless
Adjustment Refer to the following sections for there is an airbag off switch located
important information on how to use in the glove box.
Do not drive until the head restraints
for all occupants are installed and safety belts properly. If there is an airbag off switch, the
adjusted properly. . Safety Belts on page 312. vehicle does not have a passenger
sensing system. See Airbag On-Off
To achieve a comfortable seating . How to Wear Safety Belts Switch on page 329 for more
position, change the seatback Properly on page 313. information.
recline angle as little as necessary
while keeping the seat and the head
. Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 314. The passenger airbag status
restraint height in the proper . Lower Anchors and Tethers for indicator will be visible on the
position. Children (LATCH System) on overhead console when the vehicle
page 347. is started.
See Head Restraints on page 32
and Seat Adjustment on page 33.
1-14 In Brief
Exterior Mirrors 4. Press either (A) or (B) again to

deselect the mirror.
Power Mirrors
See Power Mirrors on page 214.
If the vehicle has power folding
mirrors:
United States 1. Press (C) to fold the mirrors out
to the driving position.
2. Press (D) to fold the mirrors in to
the folded position.
See Folding Mirrors on page 215.
The mirrors may also include a
memory function that works with the
Canada and Mexico memory seats. See Memory Seats
See Passenger Sensing System on Crew Cab Premium Trim with on page 38.
page 332 for important information. Power Folding Mirrors Shown,
Uplevel Similar
Mirror Adjustment 1. Press (A) or (B) to select the
Using hood-mounted air deflectors driver or passenger side mirror.
and add-on convex mirror 2. Press the arrows on the control
attachments could decrease mirror pad to move the mirror up,
performance. down, right, or left.
3. Adjust each outside mirror so
that a little of the vehicle and the
area behind it can be seen.
In Brief 1-15
See Power Mirrors on page 214. Manually pull out the mirror head to
Keep the selector switch in the extend it for better visibility when
center position when not adjusting towing a trailer. See Trailer-Tow
either outside mirror. Mirrors on page 214.
Manual Mirrors Heated Mirrors
If the vehicle has manual mirrors, For vehicles with heated mirrors:
they can be adjusted by moving the Press 1 to heat the mirrors. If the
mirror up and down or left to right to vehicle has a towing mirror, only the
see a little of the side of the vehicle, upper glass of the mirror is heated.
and have a clear view behind the The lower convex part of the towing
vehicle. mirrors is not heated.
Crew Cab Uplevel Trim without
Manual Folding Mirrors See Rear Window Defogger under
Power Folding Mirrors
If the vehicle has manual folding Climate Control Systems (with Air
1. Move the selector switch located Conditioning) on page 81 or
mirrors, push the mirror toward the
above the four-way control pad Climate Control Systems (with
vehicle. Push the mirror outward, to
to the left or right to choose Heater Only) on page 84 or Dual
return to its original position.
either the driver side or Automatic Climate Control System
passenger side mirror. Manually fold the mirrors inward to on page 85.
prevent damage when going
2. Press one of the four arrows Park Tilt Mirrors
through an automatic car wash.
located on the control pad to
move the mirror in the desired See Folding Mirrors on page 215. If the vehicle has the memory
direction. package, the exterior mirrors tilt to a
Trailer-Tow Mirrors preselected position when the
3. Adjust each outside mirror so vehicle is in R (Reverse). This
If the vehicle has towing mirrors,
that a little of the vehicle and the feature lets the driver view the curb
they can be adjusted for a clearer
area behind it can be seen. when parallel parking. The mirrors
view of the objects behind you.
1-16 In Brief
return to the original position when Automatic Dimming Rearview To adjust the steering wheel:
the vehicle is shifted out of Mirror 1. Hold the steering wheel and pull
R (Reverse), or the ignition is turned For vehicles with an automatic the lever.
off or to OFF/LOCK. dimming rearview mirror, the mirror 2. Move the steering wheel up
This feature can be programmed will automatically reduce the glare or down.
through the Driver Information from the headlamps from behind.
Center (DIC). See Vehicle The dimming feature comes on 3. Release the lever to lock the
Personalization (With DIC Buttons) when the vehicle is started. wheel in place.
on page 546. See Automatic Dimming Rearview Do not adjust the steering wheel
Interior Mirror Mirror on page 217. while driving.
Adjustment Steering Wheel Throttle and Brake Pedal

Hold the rearview mirror in the Adjustment Adjustment
center and move it to view the area
behind the vehicle. On vehicles with this feature, you
can change the position of the
Manual Rearview Mirror throttle and brake pedals.
For vehicles with a manual rearview
mirror, push the tab forward for
daytime use and pull it for nighttime
use to avoid glare from the
headlamps from behind. See
Manual Rearview Mirror on
page 217.
The control used to adjust the
pedals is located on the instrument
panel below the climate control
system.
In Brief 1-17
Press the bottom of the control to For more information about interior
move the pedals closer to your lamps, see:
body. Press the top of the control to . Dome Lamps on page 67.
move the pedals away.
. Reading Lamps on page 68.
See Adjustable Throttle and Brake
. Instrument Panel Illumination
Pedal on page 924.
Control on page 67.
Interior Lighting
Exterior Lighting
Dome Lamps
k : Press the button in and the
The dome lamps are located in the dome lamps remain off when a door
overhead console. is opened. Press the button again to
They come on when any door is return it to the extended position so
opened and turn off after all the that the dome lamps come on when
doors are closed. a door is opened.
Turn the instrument panel Reading Lamps
brightness knob located below the For vehicles with reading lamps in
dome lamp override button, the overhead console, press the
clockwise to the farthest position to button located next to the lamp to The exterior lamp control is on the
manually turn on the dome lamps. turn it on or off. instrument panel to the left of the
The dome lamps remain on until the steering wheel.
knob is turned counterclockwise. The vehicle may also have reading
lamps in other locations. The lamps
Dome Lamp Override are fixed and cannot be adjusted.
The dome lamp override button is
located next to the exterior lamps
control.
1-18 In Brief
There are four positions. See: 6: Turn the band up for more
O: Turns off the automatic . Exterior Lamp Controls on frequent wipes or down for less
headlamps and Daytime Running page 61 frequent wipes.
Lamps (DRL). Turn the headlamp . Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) w : Slow wipes.
control to the off position again to
turn the automatic headlamps or
on page 63 1 : Fast wipes.
DRL back on. . Fog Lamps on page 66 L : Push the paddle at the top of
For vehicles first sold in Canada, the lever to spray washer fluid on
the off position will only work when Windshield Wiper/Washer the windshield.
the vehicle is shifted into P (Park). See Windshield Wiper/Washer on
AUTO: Automatically turns on the page 54.
headlamps, parking lamps,
taillamps, instrument panel lights, Climate Controls
roof marker lamps (if equipped), and These systems control the heating,
license plate lamps. cooling, and ventilation.
; : Turns on the parking lamps, The front wiper control is located on
taillamps, instrument panel lights, the turn and lane-change lever.
roof marker lamps (if equipped), and
license plate lamps. The windshield wipers are controlled
5 : Turns on the headlamps, by turning the band with z on it.
parking lamps, taillamps, instrument 8: For a single wipe, turn to 8 ,
panel lights, roof marker lamps (if then release. For several wipes,
equipped), and license plate lamps. hold the band on 8 longer.
9 : Turns the windshield
wipers off.
In Brief 1-19
Climate Control System (With Air Conditioning)
A. Fan Control E. Outside Air

B. Temperature Control F. Air Recirculation
C. Air Delivery Mode Control G. Rear Window Defogger
D. Air Conditioning
1-20 In Brief
Climate Control System (With Heater Only)
A. Fan Control See Climate Control Systems (with

B. Temperature Control Air Conditioning) on page 81 or
C. Air Delivery Mode Control Heater Only) on page 84.
In Brief 1-21
Dual Automatic Climate Control System Transmission

Range Selection Mode
The Range Selection Mode switch,

if equipped, is located on the shift
lever.
To enable the Range Selection
A. Driver and Passenger J. Rear Window Defogger
feature:
Temperature Controls K. Air Conditioning
1. Move the column shift lever to
B. Fan Control L. PASS (Passenger) the M (Manual) position. The
C. AUTO See Climate Control Systems (with current range will appear next to
D. Defrost Air Conditioning) on page 81 or the M. This is the highest
Climate Control Systems (with attainable range with all lower
E. Air Recirculation gears accessible. As an
Heater Only) on page 84 or Dual
F. Outside Air Automatic Climate Control System example, when 5 (Fifth) gear is
on page 85 (If Equipped). selected, 1 (First) through
G. Air Delivery Mode Control 5 (Fifth) gears are available.
H. Display
I. Power Button
1-22 In Brief
2. Press the plus/minus buttons, Manual Transfer Case Electronic Transfer Case
located on the steering column
shift lever, to select the desired
range of gears for current driving
conditions. See Manual Mode on
page 937.
While using Range Selection Mode,
cruise control and the Tow/Haul
mode can be used.
Grade Braking is not available when
Range Selection Mode is active.
See Tow/Haul Mode on page 938.
Four-Wheel Drive This transfer case shift lever is on This transfer case knob is located
If the vehicle has Four-Wheel Drive, the floor to the right of the driver. next to the steering column.
you can send the engine's driving
power to all four wheels for extra
traction.
Transfer Case Buttons
The vehicle will have one of these
three styles of transfer case
controls. Use these controls to shift
into and out of the different
Four-Wheel Drive modes.
In Brief 1-23
Automatic Transfer Case 2 m (Two-Wheel-Drive High): This N (Neutral): Shift the transfer case
setting is used for driving in most to Neutral only when towing the
street and highway situations. vehicle. See Recreational Vehicle
Towing on page 1089 or Trailer
AUTO (Automatic Four-Wheel Towing on page 977.
Drive): This setting is ideal for use
when road surface traction 4 n (Four-Wheel-Drive Low): This
conditions are variable. setting sends maximum power to all
four wheels. You might choose
4 m (Four-Wheel High): Use the Four-Wheel-Drive Low if you are
Four-Wheel-Drive High position driving off-road in deep sand, deep
when extra traction is needed, such mud, deep snow, and while climbing
as on snowy or icy roads or in most or descending steep hills.
off-road situations.
See Four-Wheel Drive on
This transfer case knob is located page 941.
next to the steering column.
Each transfer case design offers
different drive options. The list
below describes the different drive
options that may be available.
1-24 In Brief
Vehicle Features f : Turn to manually select radio

stations or press to set the bass or
Radio(s) treble.
SEEK or SEEK: Seek or scan
stations.
4: Press to switch the display
between the radio station frequency
and the time. While the ignition is
off, press this button to display the
time. Press to display additional text
information related to the current
FM-RDS or SiriusXM station; or CD,
MP3, or WMA song. If information is
available during SiriusXM, CD, MP3,
or WMA playback, the song title
information displays on the top line
of the display and artist information
displays on the bottom line. When
information is not available, NO
INFO displays.
Radio with USB, CD, and DVD (MP3) For more information about these
and other radio features, see
O : Press to turn the system on BAND: Press to choose between Operation on page 77.
and off. Turn to increase or FM, AM, or SiriusXM, if equipped.
decrease the volume.
In Brief 1-25
For vehicles with a Rear Seat Setting the Clock variety of programming and
Entertainment System (RSE) and commercial-free music, coast to
To set the time and date:
Rear Seat Audio System (RSA), see coast, and in digital-quality sound.
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) 1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/
A fee is required to receive the
System on page 738 and Rear ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, then
SiriusXM service.
Seat Audio (RSA) System on press O , to turn the radio on.
page 748 for more information. For more information, refer to:
2. Press H to display HR, MIN, . www.siriusxm.com or call
Storing Radio Stations MM, DD, and YYYY (hour, 1-866-635-2349 (U.S.)
A maximum of 36 stations can be minute, month, day, and year).
stored as favorites using the six
. www.xmradio.ca or call
3. Press the softkey located under 1-877-209-0079 (Canada)
softkeys located below the radio any one of the labels to be
station frequency tabs and by using changed. See Satellite Radio on page 712.
the radio FAV button. Press FAV to
go through up to six pages of 4. To increase or decrease the time Portable Audio Devices
favorites, each having six favorite or date, turn f clockwise or
stations available per page. Each counter-clockwise. This vehicle may have an auxiliary
page of favorites can contain any input located on the radio faceplate
For detailed instructions on setting and a USB port located in the center
combination of AM, FM, or SiriusXM
the clock for the vehicle's specific console or on the instrument panel.
stations.
audio system, see Clock on External devices such as an iPod,
For more information, see Storing page 57. laptop computer, MP3 player, CD
Radio Stations in AM-FM Radio on changer, or USB storage device can
page 710. Satellite Radio be connected to the auxiliary port
SiriusXM is a satellite radio service using a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) input cable
based in the 48 contiguous United or the USB port depending on the
States and 10 Canadian provinces. audio system.
SiriusXM satellite radio has a wide
1-26 In Brief
See Using the Auxiliary Input Jack Steering Wheel Controls b / g : Press to silence the vehicle
and Using the USB Port in speakers only. Press again to turn
Auxiliary Devices on page 734. the sound on. Press and hold longer
than two seconds to interact with
Bluetooth OnStar or Bluetooth systems,
For vehicles with a Bluetooth if equipped.
system, it allows users with a +e: Press to increase volume.
Bluetooth-enabled cell phone to
make and receive hands-free calls e: Press to decrease volume.
using the vehicles audio system
SRCE: Press to switch between
and controls.
the radio and CD, and for equipped
The Bluetooth-enabled cell phone vehicles, the DVD, front auxiliary,
must be paired with the Bluetooth and rear auxiliary.
system before it can be used in the
vehicle. Not all phones will support If available, some audio controls : Press to seek the next radio
can be adjusted at the steering station, the next track or chapter
all functions. For more information,
wheel. while sourced to the CD or DVD
see www.gm.com/bluetooth and
slot, or to select tracks and folders
Bluetooth on page 750. w : Press to go to the next favorite on an iPod or USB device.
radio station, track on a CD,
or folder on an iPod or USB For more information, see Steering
device. Wheel Controls on page 52.
c / x : Press to go to the
previous favorite radio station, track
on a CD, or folder on an iPod or
USB device. Press to reject an
incoming call, or to end a call.
In Brief 1-27
Cruise Control [ : Press to disengage cruise Driver Information

control without erasing the set Center (DIC)
speed from memory.
The DIC display is at the bottom of
See Cruise Control on page 959. the instrument cluster. It shows the
status of many vehicle systems and
Navigation System enables access to the
If the vehicle has a navigation personalization menu.
system, there is a separate
navigation manual that includes
information on the radio, audio
players, and navigation system.
The navigation system provides
detailed maps of most major
freeways and roads. After a
T : Press to turn the system on destination has been set, the
or off. The indicator light is on when system provides turn-by-turn
cruise control is on and turns off instructions for reaching the
when cruise control is off. destination. In addition, the system
+ RES: Press briefly to make the can help locate a variety of points of
vehicle resume to a previously set interest (POIs), such as banks,
airports, restaurants, and more. The DIC buttons are on the
speed, or press and hold to instrument panel, next to the
accelerate. See the navigation manual for more steering wheel.
SET : Press to set the speed and information.
Some vehicles do not have the
activate cruise control or make the buttons shown, however some of
vehicle decelerate. the menus can be viewed by using
the trip odometer reset stem.
1-28 In Brief
3 : Press to display the V : Press to set or reset certain Rear Vision

odometer, trip odometer, fuel range, functions and to turn off or Camera (RVC)
average economy, fuel used, timer, acknowledge messages on the DIC.
instantaneous economy and Active If available, the RVC displays a view
For more information, see Driver
Fuel Management indicator, and Information Center (DIC) on
of the area behind the vehicle when
transmission temperature. The the vehicle is shifted into
page 529. R (Reverse). This is displayed on
compass and outside air
temperature will also be shown in Vehicle Customization the inside rearview mirror or the
the display. The temperature will be navigation screen, if equipped.
Some vehicle features can be
shown in C or F depending on the To clean the camera lens, near the
programmed by using the DIC
units selected. tailgate handle, rinse it with water
buttons next to the steering wheel.
T: Press to display the oil life, These features include: and wipe it with a soft cloth.
units, tire pressure readings for For more information, see Rear
. Language
vehicles with the Tire Pressure Vision Camera (RVC) on page 964.
Monitor System (TPMS), trailer . Door Lock and Unlock Settings
brake gain and output information . RKE Lock and Unlock Feedback Ultrasonic Parking Assist
for vehicles with the Integrated
Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system, . Lighting If available, this system uses
engine hours, compass zone . Chime Volume sensors on the rear bumper to
setting, and compass recalibration. assist with parking and avoiding
. Memory Features objects while in R (Reverse).
U: Press to customize the feature
It operates at speeds less than
settings on your vehicle. See See Vehicle Personalization (With
DIC Buttons) on page 546. 8 km/h (5 mph). URPA uses audible
Vehicle Personalization (With DIC
beeps to provide distance and
Buttons) on page 546 for more
system information.
information.
Keep the sensors on the vehicle's
rear bumper clean to ensure proper
operation.
In Brief 1-29
See Ultrasonic Parking Assist on power outlets while the ignition is in involved, it may be helpful to have
page 962. LOCK/OFF may cause the vehicle's another person assist with
battery to run down. programming the transmitter.
Power Outlets See Power Outlets on page 59. See Universal Remote System on
Accessory power outlets can be page 554.
used to plug in electrical equipment, Universal Remote System
such as a cell phone, MP3 Sunroof
player, etc.
Extended Cab
The vehicle may have two
accessory power outlets located
below the climate control system,
or may have one accessory power
outlet and one cigarette lighter. The
cigarette lighter is designed to fit Vehicles with the Universal Remote
only in the receptacle closest to the System will have these buttons
driver. located in the headliner.
There may be another accessory This system provides a way to
power outlet in the rear cargo area. replace up to three remote control
If the vehicle has a floor console, transmitters used to activate
there is an accessory power outlet devices such as garage door
inside the storage bin and one on openers, security systems, and
the rear of the floor console. home automation devices. On vehicles with a sunroof, the
The accessory power outlets are Read the instructions completely sunroof only operates when the
powered, even when the ignition is before attempting to program the ignition is in ACC/ACCESSORY or
in LOCK/OFF. Continuing to use transmitter. Because of the steps ON/RUN, or when Retained
1-30 In Brief
Accessory Power (RAP) is active. The sunroof also has a roller On vehicles with a sunroof, the
See Retained Accessory Power sunshade that can be used to block sunroof only operates when the
(RAP) on page 928. the rays of the sun. To open the ignition is in ACC/ACCESSORY or
Vent: From the closed position, sunshade, press and unlatch it, and ON/RUN, or when Retained
press and hold the rear of the switch roll it back. To close, pull it forward Accessory Power (RAP) is active.
to vent the sunroof. To close the and latch it into the closed position. See Retained Accessory Power
sunroof, press and hold the front of See Sunroof (Crew Cab) on (RAP) on page 928.
the switch. page 221 or Sunroof (Extended Vent: From the closed position,
Open: From the vent position, the Cab) on page 220. press the rear of the passenger side
sunroof can be fully opened either switch (B) to vent the sunroof.
Crew Cab
manually or by using the Manual-Open/Manual-Close: To
express-open feature. To open open the sunroof, press and hold
manually, press the rear of the the rear of the driver side switch (A)
switch to the first detent and hold until the sunroof reaches the
until the sunroof has reached the desired position. Press and hold the
desired position. To open using front of the driver side switch to
express-open, press the rear of the close it.
switch to the second detent and Express-Open/Express-Close: To
release. The sunroof will move to express-open the sunroof, fully
the full open position. To stop the press and release the rear of the
sunroof partway, press the switch a driver side switch (A) until the
second time. sunroof reaches the desired
Close: From the vent, or open position. To express-close the
position, press and hold the front of A. Open or Close sunroof, fully press and release the
the switch to close the sunroof. front of the driver side switch. Press
B. Vent the switch again to stop it.
In Brief 1-31
When the sunroof is opened, an air Performance and . Press and release g again to
deflector will automatically raise. turn on both systems.
The air deflector will retract when Maintenance For more information, see
the sunroof is closed.
StabiliTrak System on page 956.
The sunroof also has a sunshade StabiliTrak System
that you can pull forward to block If equipped, the vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor
the rays of the sun. The sunshade traction control system that limits
must be opened and closed This vehicle may have a Tire
wheel spin and the StabiliTrak Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).
manually. system that assists with directional
If an object is in the path of the control of the vehicle in difficult
sunroof while it is closing, the driving conditions. Both systems
anti-pinch feature will detect the turn on automatically every time the
object and stop the sunroof. vehicle is started.
See Sunroof (Crew Cab) on . To turn off traction control, press
page 221 or Sunroof (Extended and release g on the instrument
Cab) on page 220. panel. The appropriate DIC The low tire pressure warning light
message displays. See Ride alerts to a significant loss in
Control System Messages on pressure of one of the vehicle's
page 542. tires. If the warning light comes on,
. To turn off both traction control stop as soon as possible and inflate
and StabiliTrak, press and hold the tires to the recommended
g until g illuminates and the pressure shown on the Tire and
appropriate DIC message Loading Information label. See
displays. See Ride Control Vehicle Load Limits on page 915.
System Messages on page 542. The warning light will remain on until
the tire pressure is corrected.
1-32 In Brief
The low tire pressure warning light Resetting the Oil Life System See Engine Oil Life System on
may come on in cool weather when To reset the Engine Oil Life System page 109.
the vehicle is first started, and then on most vehicles:
turn off as the vehicle is driven. This Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)
may be an early indicator that the 1. Display OIL LIFE REMAINING
tire pressures are getting low and on the DIC. If the vehicle does Vehicles that have a yellow fuel cap
the tires need to be inflated to the not have DIC buttons, the can use either unleaded gasoline or
proper pressure. vehicle must be in P (Park) to ethanol fuel containing up to 85%
access this display. ethanol (E85). See Fuel E85 (85%
The TPMS does not replace normal Ethanol) on page 971. For all other
monthly tire maintenance. Maintain 2. Press and hold the SET/RESET vehicles, use only the unleaded
the correct tire pressures. button on the DIC, or the trip gasoline described under
odometer reset stem if the Recommended Fuel on page 969.
See Tire Pressure Monitor System vehicle does not have DIC
on page 1058. buttons, for more than
five seconds. The oil life will
Driving for Better Fuel
Engine Oil Life System change to 100%. Economy
The engine oil life system calculates On all vehicles, the Engine Oil Life Driving habits can affect fuel
engine oil life based on vehicle use System can be reset as follows: mileage. Here are some driving tips
and, on most vehicles, displays a to get the best fuel economy
DIC message when it is necessary 1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with
possible.
to change the engine oil and filter. the engine off.
. Avoid fast starts and accelerate
The oil life system should be reset 2. Fully press the accelerator pedal
smoothly.
to 100% only following an oil slowly three times within
change. five seconds. . Brake gradually and avoid
abrupt stops.
3. Display OIL LIFE REMAINING
on the DIC. If the display shows . Avoid idling the engine for long
100%, the system is reset. periods of time.
In Brief 1-33
. When road and weather
conditions are appropriate, use
Roadside Assistance Roadside Assistance and OnStar
(U.S. and Canada)
cruise control. Program
If the vehicle has an active OnStar
. Always follow posted speed U.S.: 1-800-243-8872 subscription, contact OnStar and the
limits or drive more slowly when TTY Users (U.S. Only): vehicles current GPS location will
conditions require. 1-888-889-2438 be sent to an OnStar advisor to
. Keep vehicle tires properly assess the situation, contact
Canada: 1-800-268-6800
inflated. Roadside Assistance, and relay the
Mexico: 01-800-466-0800 exact location to send help.
. Combine several trips into a
single trip. As the owner of a new Chevrolet,
you are automatically enrolled in the OnStar
. Replace the vehicle's tires with Roadside Assistance program.
the same TPC Spec number If equipped, this vehicle has a
molded into the tire's sidewall See Roadside Assistance Program comprehensive, in-vehicle system
near the size. (Mexico) on page 137 or Roadside that can connect to a live Advisor
Assistance Program (U.S. and for Emergency, Security, Navigation,
. Follow recommended scheduled Canada) on page 1311. Connection, and Diagnostic
maintenance. Services. See OnStar Overview on
page 141.
1-34 In Brief
2 NOTES
Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1
Keys, Doors, and Exterior Mirrors

Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Keys and Locks
Windows Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer-Tow Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . .
2-14
2-14 Keys
Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Keys and Locks Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 { WARNING
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Park Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 Leaving children in a vehicle with
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 the ignition key is dangerous and
Interior Mirrors children or others could be
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
Manual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 2-17 seriously injured or killed. They
System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Automatic Dimming Rearview could operate the power windows
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 or other controls or make the
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Windows vehicle move. The windows will
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 function with the keys in the
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Manual Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 ignition, and children or others
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 could be caught in the path of a
Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Rear Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 closing window. Do not leave
Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 children in a vehicle with the
Doors
Rear Doors ignition key.
Roof
(Extended Cab) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Sunroof (Extended Cab) . . . . . 2-20
Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Sunroof (Crew Cab) . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Vehicle Security
Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Vehicle Alarm System . . . . . . . 2-10
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . 2-12
2-2 Keys, Doors, and Windows
With an active OnStar subscription,

. If the transmitter is still not
an OnStar Advisor may remotely working correctly, see your
unlock the vehicle. See OnStar dealer or a qualified technician
Overview on page 141. for service.
Remote Keyless Entry Remote Keyless Entry

(RKE) System (RKE) System Operation
See Radio Frequency Statement on The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
page 1320 for information transmitter functions work up to
regarding Part 15 of the Federal 60 m (195 ft) away from the vehicle.
Communications Commission (FCC) There are other conditions which
rules and Industry Canada can affect the performance of the
The key is used for the ignition and Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.
all door locks. transmitter. See Remote Keyless
If there is a decrease in the RKE Entry (RKE) System on page 22.
The key has a bar-coded key tag operating range:
that the dealer or qualified locksmith
can use to make new keys. Store . Check the distance. The
this information in a safe place, not transmitter may be too far from
in the vehicle. the vehicle.
See your dealer if a replacement . Check the location. Other
key or additional key is needed. vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal.
If the vehicle has an ignition and it
becomes difficult to turn the key, . Check the transmitter's battery.
inspect the key blade for debris. See Battery Replacement later
Periodically clean with a brush in this section.
or pick.
when Q is pressed again within Pressing K on the RKE transmitter

three seconds. See Vehicle disarms the content theft-deterrent
Personalization (With DIC Buttons) system. See Vehicle Alarm System
on page 546 for additional on page 210.
information. L (Vehicle Locator/Panic
Pressing Q arms the content Alarm): Press and release to
theft-deterrent system. See Vehicle locate the vehicle. The turn signal
Alarm System on page 210. lamps flash and the horn sounds
three times.
K (Unlock): Press once to unlock
only the driver door. If K is pressed Press and hold L for more than
again within three seconds, all two seconds to activate the panic
With Remote Start (without remaining doors unlock. The interior alarm. The turn signal lamps flash
Remote Start Similar) lamps may come on and stay on for and the horn sounds repeatedly for
/ (Remote Vehicle Start): For 20 seconds or until the ignition is 30 seconds. The alarm turns off
turned on. when the ignition is moved to ON/
vehicles with this feature, press /
RUN or L is pressed again. The
to start the engine from outside the If enabled through the DIC, the turn
vehicle using the RKE transmitter. signal lamps flash twice to indicate ignition must be in LOCK/OFF for
See Remote Vehicle Start on unlocking has occurred. See Vehicle the panic alarm to work.
page 24 for additional information. Personalization (With DIC Buttons) Programming Transmitters to
Q (Lock): Press to lock all the on page 546. If enabled through the the Vehicle
doors. DIC, the exterior lights may turn on.
See Approach Lighting under Only RKE transmitters programmed
If enabled through the Driver Vehicle Personalization (With DIC to this vehicle will work. If a
Information Center (DIC), the turn Buttons) on page 546. transmitter is lost or stolen, a
signal lamps flash once to indicate replacement can be purchased and
locking has occurred. If enabled programmed through your dealer.
through the DIC, the horn chirps When the replacement transmitter is
programmed to this vehicle, all 3. Insert the new battery, positive

remaining transmitters must also be side facing down. Replace with a
reprogrammed. Any lost or stolen CR2032 or equivalent battery.
transmitters will no longer work 4. Snap the transmitter back
once the new transmitter is together.
programmed. Each vehicle can
have up to eight transmitters
programmed to it. See your dealer Remote Vehicle Start
for transmitter programming. If available, this feature allows you
to start the engine from outside of
Battery Replacement the vehicle. It may also start up the
Replace the battery if the REPLACE vehicle's heating or air conditioning
BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY systems and rear window defogger.
To replace the battery:
message displays in the DIC. Normal operation of the system will
1. Separate the transmitter with a return after the key is turned to the
Notice: When replacing the
flat, thin object, such as a flat ON/RUN position.
battery, do not touch any of the
head screwdriver.
circuitry on the transmitter. Static If the vehicle has an automatic
from your body could damage the . Carefully insert the tool into climate control system, the climate
transmitter. the notch located along the control system will default to a
parting line of the heating or cooling mode depending
transmitter. Do not insert on the outside temperatures. If the
the tool too far. Stop as vehicle does not have an automatic
soon as resistance is felt. climate control system, the system
. Twist the tool until the will turn on at the setting the vehicle
transmitter is separated. was set to when the vehicle was
last turned off.
2. Remove the old battery. Do not
use a metal object.
During a remote start, if the vehicle There are other conditions which The engine will continue to run
has an automatic climate control can affect the performance of the for 10 minutes. Repeat the steps
system and heated seats, the transmitter. See Remote Keyless for a 10-minute time extension.
heated seats will turn on during Entry (RKE) System on page 22 for Remote start can be extended
colder outside temperatures and will additional information. only once.
shut off when the key is turned to / (Remote Start): This button will After entering the vehicle during a
ON/RUN. If the vehicle does not be on the RKE transmitter if the remote start, insert and turn the key
have an automatic climate control vehicle has remote start. to ON/RUN to drive the vehicle.
system, during remote start,
manually turn the heated seats on To start the vehicle using the remote To cancel a remote start:
and off. See Heated and Ventilated start feature: . Aim the RKE transmitter at the
Front Seats on page 39 for 1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle and press and hold /
additional information. vehicle. until the parking lamps turn off.
Laws in some communities may
restrict the use of remote starters.
2. Press and release Q. . Turn on the hazard warning
For example, some laws may flashers.
3. Immediately press and hold /
require a person using the remote until the turn signal lamps flash.
. Turn the ignition on and then
start to have the vehicle in view If you cannot see the vehicle's back off.
when doing so. Check local
lamps, press and hold / for at The vehicle can be remote started
regulations for any requirements on two separate times between driving
remote starting of vehicles. least two seconds.
sequences. The engine will run for
Do not use the remote start feature When the vehicle starts, the 10 minutes after each remote start.
if the vehicle is low on fuel. The parking lamps will turn on and
remain on while the vehicle is Or, you can extend the engine run
vehicle may run out of fuel. time by another 10 minutes within
running. The doors will be
The RKE transmitter range may be locked and the climate control the first 10 minute remote start time
less while the vehicle is running. system may come on. frame, and before the engine stops.
For example, if Q and then / are Remote Start Ready

WARNING (Continued)
pressed again after the vehicle has If the vehicle does not have the
been running for five minutes, remote vehicle start feature, it may doors are not locked. So, all
10 minutes are added, allowing the have the remote start ready feature. passengers should wear
engine to run for 15 minutes. This feature allows your dealer to safety belts properly and the
The additional 10 minutes are add the manufacturer's remote doors should be locked
considered a second remote vehicle vehicle start feature. whenever the vehicle is
start. See your dealer to add the driven.
Once two remote starts, or a single manufacturer's remote vehicle start . Young children who get into
remote start with one time extension feature to the vehicle. unlocked vehicles may be
has been done, the vehicle must be unable to get out. A child can
started with the key. After the key is Door Locks be overcome by extreme heat
removed from the ignition, the and can suffer permanent
vehicle can be remote started again. { WARNING injuries or even death from
heat stroke. Always lock the
The vehicle cannot be remote vehicle whenever leaving it.
started if the key is in the ignition, Unlocked doors can be
the hood is not closed, or if there is dangerous. . Outsiders can easily enter
an emission control system . Passengers, especially through an unlocked door
malfunction and the check engine children, can easily open the when you slow down or stop
light is on. doors and fall out of a moving the vehicle. Locking the doors
vehicle. When a door is can help prevent this from
Also, the engine will turn off during a happening.
remote vehicle start if the coolant locked, the handle will not
temperature gets too high or if the open it. The chance of being
oil pressure gets low. thrown out of the vehicle in a
crash is increased if the
(Continued)
There are several ways to lock and Power Door Locks

unlock the vehicle.
From outside, use the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or
the key in the driver door.
From inside, use the power door
locks or manual door locks. To lock
or unlock the door with the manual
locks, push down or pull up on the
manual lock knob.
Base Trim
Crew Cab Premium Trim Shown, For vehicles with power door locks:
Up-Level Similar Q: Press to lock the doors.
K: Press to unlock the doors.
Delayed Locking
The vehicle may have the delayed
locking feature. When locking the
doors with the power lock switch
and a door is open, the doors will
lock five seconds after the last door
is closed. You will hear three chimes
to signal that the delayed locking
feature is in use.
Pressing the power lock switch Lockout Protection

twice will override the delayed
locking feature and immediately lock If the driver side power door lock
all the doors. switch is pressed when the driver
door is open and the key is in the
This feature will not operate if the ignition, all of the doors will lock and
key is in the ignition. then the driver door will unlock.
This feature can be programmed If the passenger side power door
using the Driver Information lock switch is pressed when the
Center (DIC). See Delay Door front passenger door is open and
Lock under Vehicle Personalization the key is in the ignition, all of the
(With DIC Buttons) on page 546. doors will lock and then the front
passenger door will unlock. Open the rear doors to access the
Automatic Door Locks
security locks on the inside edge of
The vehicle may have an automatic Safety Locks each door.
lock/unlock feature. This feature can The vehicle has rear door security To set the locks, insert a key into
be programmed using the Driver locks to prevent passengers from the slot and turn it to the horizontal
Information Center (DIC). See opening the rear doors from the position. The door can only be
Vehicle Personalization (With DIC inside. opened from the outside with the
Buttons) on page 546.
door unlocked. To return the door to
normal operation, turn the slot to the
vertical position.
Doors WARNING (Continued)

Rear Doors easily lose their balance and fall
(Extended Cab) in response to vehicle
maneuvers. Falling from a moving
vehicle may result in serious
injuries or death. Do not allow
people to ride on the tailgate. Be
sure everyone in your vehicle is in
a seat and using a safety belt
properly.
To open a rear access door from the
inside, first open the front door. On vehicles with a lock on the
Then, use the handle located on the tailgate, use the key to lock or
inside of the rear access door unlock the tailgate.
to open. Open the tailgate by lifting up on its
handle while pulling the
To open a rear access door from the Tailgate tailgate down.
outside, first open the front door.
To shut the tailgate, firmly push it
Then, use the handle located on the
front edge of the rear access door to
{ WARNING upward until it latches.
open it. It is extremely dangerous to ride After closing the tailgate, pull it back
The rear access door must be on the tailgate, even when the to be sure it latches securely.
closed before the front door can vehicle is operated at low speeds.
close. People riding on the tailgate can
(Continued)
Tailgate Removal 1. Raise the tailgate slightly, pull Vehicle Security

out and hold the cable retaining
The tailgate can be removed to This vehicle has theft-deterrent
clip (A). Push the cable (C) up
allow for different loading situations. features; however, they do not make
and off of the bolt (B). Repeat on
Assistance may be needed with the the vehicle impossible to steal.
the other side.
removal to avoid damage to the
vehicle. 2. With the tailgate about halfway
open, lift the right edge of the Vehicle Alarm System
On vehicles with a Rear Vision
tailgate from the lower pivot. This vehicle may have a content
Camera, it must be disconnected
before removing the tailgate. See On vehicles with the tailgate theft-deterrent alarm system.
Rear Vision Camera (RVC) on assist feature, raise the tailgate
page 964. nearly all the way to the closed
position prior to removing the
To remove the tailgate:
left edge.
3. Move the tailgate to the right to
release the left edge.
Reverse this procedure to reinstall This is the security light.
the tailgate. Make sure the tailgate
is secure.
To arm the theft-deterrent system: the horn will sound for about Testing the Alarm
1. Open the door. 30 seconds, then will turn off to save
To test the alarm:
the battery power.
2. Lock the door with the Remote 1. Lower the driver window and
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. The theft-deterrent system will not
open the driver door.
The security light should flash. activate if the doors are locked with
the key or the manual door lock. 2. Press lock on the RKE
If the delayed locking feature is It activates only if you use the transmitter.
active, the alarm will not be power door lock switch or the RKE 3. Close the door and wait for the
activated until all doors are transmitter. The vehicle can be security light to go out.
closed and the security light started with the correct key if the
goes off. alarm is set off. 4. Reach in through the window,
unlock the door with the manual
3. Close all doors. The security To avoid setting off the alarm by door lock, and open the door.
light will stop flashing and go off accident: This should set off the alarm.
after approximately 30 seconds.
The system is armed when the
. If you do not want to activate the If the alarm does not sound when it
security light goes off. theft-deterrent system, the should but the headlamps flash,
vehicle should be locked with check to see if the horn works. The
If a locked driver door is opened the door key after the doors are horn fuse may be blown. To replace
without using the RKE transmitter, a closed. the fuse, see Fuses and Circuit
10 second pre-alarm will occur. The . Always unlock a door with the Breakers on page 1040.
horn will chirp and the lights will
flash. If the key is not placed in the RKE transmitter. If the alarm does not sound or the
ignition and turned to START or the If the alarm is set off, press unlock headlamps do not flash, see your
door is not unlocked by pressing the on the RKE transmitter or place the dealer for service.
unlock button on the RKE key in the ignition and turn it to
transmitter during the 10 second START.
pre-alarm, the alarm will go off. The
vehicle's headlamps will flash and
Immobilizer The security light will come on if If the vehicle does start, the first key
there is a problem with arming or may be faulty. See your dealer who
See Radio Frequency Statement on disarming the theft-deterrent can service the PASS-Key III+ to
page 1320 for information system. have a new key made.
regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) When the PASS-Key III+ system It is possible for the PASS-Key III+
rules and Industry Canada senses that someone is using the decoder to learn the transponder
Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310. wrong key, it prevents the vehicle value of a new or replacement key.
from starting. Anyone using a Up to 10 keys may be programmed
Immobilizer Operation trial-and-error method to start the for the vehicle. The following
vehicle will be discouraged because procedure is for programming
This vehicle has PASS-Key III+ of the high number of electrical key additional keys only. If all the
(Personalized Automotive Security codes. currently programmed keys are lost
System) theft-deterrent system. or do not operate, you must see
If the engine does not start and the
PASS-Key III+ is a passive your dealer or a locksmith who can
security light on the instrument
theft-deterrent system. service PASS-Key III+ to have keys
panel cluster comes on when trying
The system is automatically armed to start the vehicle, there may be a made and programmed to the
when the key is removed from the problem with the theft-deterrent system.
ignition. system. Turn the ignition off and try See your dealer or a locksmith who
The system is automatically again. can service PASS-Key III+ to get a
disarmed when the key is turned to If the engine still does not start, and new key blank cut exactly as the
ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY, the key appears to be undamaged, ignition key that operates the
or START from the LOCK/OFF try another ignition key. At this time, system.
position. you may also want to check the
You do not have to manually arm or fuse. See Fuses and Circuit
disarm the system. Breakers on page 1040. If the
engine still does not start with the
other key, the vehicle needs service.
To program the new additional key: 5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if Exterior Mirrors
additional keys are to be
1. Verify that the new key has a 1 programmed.
stamped on it. Convex Mirrors
If you lose or damage your
2. Insert the original, already PASS-Key III+ key, see your dealer
programmed key in the ignition or a locksmith who can service { WARNING
and start the engine. If the PASS-Key III+ to have a new
engine will not start, see your A convex mirror can make things,
key made. like other vehicles, look farther
dealer for service.
Do not leave the key or device that away than they really are. If you
3. After the engine has started, turn disarms or deactivates the cut too sharply into the right lane,
the key to LOCK/OFF, and theft-deterrent system in the vehicle. you could hit a vehicle on the
remove the key.
right. Check the inside mirror or
4. Insert the new key to be glance over your shoulder before
programmed and turn it to the changing lanes.
ON/RUN position within
five seconds of turning the
ignition to the LOCK/OFF The passenger side mirror is convex
position in Step 3. shaped. A convex mirror's surface is
curved so more can be seen from
The security light will turn off the driver seat.
once the key has been
programmed.
Manual Mirrors Manually pull out the mirror head to Power Mirrors
extend it for better visibility when
If the vehicle has manual mirrors, towing a trailer.
they can be adjusted by moving the
mirror up and down or left to right to The lower portion of the mirror is
see a little of the side of the vehicle, convex. A convex mirror's surface is
and have a clear view behind the curved to see more from the driver
vehicle. seat. The convex mirror can be
adjusted manually to the driver
Using hood-mounted air deflectors preferred position for better vision.
and add-on convex mirror
attachments could decrease mirror The mirror may have a turn signal
performance. arrow that flashes in the direction of
the turn or lane change.
Trailer-Tow Mirrors
Crew Cab Premium Trim with
Power Folding Mirrors Shown,
Other Models Similar
1. Press (A) or (B) to select the
driver or passenger side mirror.
2. Press the arrows on the control
pad to move the mirror up,
down, right, or left.
If the vehicle has towing mirrors, that a little of the vehicle and the
they can be adjusted for a clearer area behind it can be seen.
view of the objects behind you. 4. Press either (A) or (B) again to
deselect the mirror.
The mirrors may also include a 2. Press one of the four arrows Folding Mirrors
memory function that works with the located on the control pad to
memory seats. See Memory Seats move the mirror in the desired
on page 38 for more information. direction.
that a little of the vehicle and the
area behind it can be seen.
Keep the selector switch in the
center position when not adjusting
either outside mirror.
Crew Cab Premium Trim with

Power Folding Mirrors Shown,
Other Models Similar
Crew Cab UpLevel Trim without
Power Folding Mirrors Power Folding
1. Move the selector switch located If equipped with power folding
above the four-way control pad mirrors:
to the left or right to choose
1. Press (A) to fold the mirrors out
either the driver side or
to the driving position.
passenger side mirror.
2. Press (B) to fold the mirrors in to
the folded position.
The mirrors may also include a Manual Folding Heated Mirrors

memory function that works with the
If equipped with manual folding For vehicles with heated mirrors:
memory seats. See Memory Seats
mirrors, push the mirror toward the
on page 38 for more information.
vehicle. Push the mirror outward, to 1 (Rear Window Defogger):
Resetting the Power Folding return to its original position. Press to heat the mirrors. If the
Mirrors vehicle has towing mirrors, only the
Manually fold the mirrors inward to upper glass of the mirror is heated.
Reset the power folding mirrors if: prevent damage when going The lower convex part of the towing
through an automatic car wash. mirrors is not heated.
. The mirrors are accidentally
obstructed while folding. Automatic Dimming See Rear Window Defogger under
. They are accidentally manually Climate Control Systems (with Air
If equipped with an automatic
folded/unfolded. Conditioning) on page 81 or
dimming mirror, the driver outside
. The mirrors will not stay in the mirror automatically dimes for the
Heater Only) on page 84 or Dual
unfolded position. glare of the headlamps from behind.
Automatic Climate Control System
This feature is controlled by the on
. The mirrors vibrate at normal on page 85.
and off setting on the inside
driving speeds. rearview mirror.
Fold and unfold the mirrors one time See Automatic Dimming Rearview
using the mirror controls to reset Mirror on page 217.
them to their normal position.
A popping noise may be heard Turn Signal Indicator
during the resetting of the power
The vehicle may also have a turn
folding mirrors. This sound is normal
signal indicator on the mirror. An
after a manual folding operation.
arrow on the mirror flashes in the
direction of the turn or lane change.
Park Tilt Mirrors Interior Mirrors Automatic Dimming

If the vehicle has the memory Rearview Mirror
package, the passenger and/or Manual Rearview Mirror Adjustment
driver mirror tilts to a preselected To adjust the inside rearview mirror,
position when the vehicle is in Hold the rearview mirror in the
hold the rearview mirror in the
R (Reverse). This feature lets the center and move it to view the area
center and move it to view the area
driver view the curb when parallel behind the vehicle.
behind the vehicle.
parking. The mirror(s) return to the Operation
original position when the vehicle is For vehicles with a manual rearview
shifted out of R (Reverse), or the mirror, push the tab forward for For vehicles with an automatic
ignition is turned off or to daytime use and pull it rearward for dimming rearview mirror, the mirror
OFF/LOCK. nighttime use to avoid glare from will automatically reduce the glare of
the headlamps from behind. the headlamps from behind. The
Turn this feature on or off through dimming feature comes on each
the Driver Information Center (DIC). Vehicles with OnStar have three
control buttons at the bottom of the time the vehicle is started.
See Vehicle Personalization (With
DIC Buttons) on page 546. mirror. See a dealer for more O (On/Off): Press to turn the
information about OnStar and how dimming feature on or off.
to subscribe to it. See OnStar The vehicle may also have a Rear
Overview on page 141. Vision Camera (RVC). See Rear
Vision Camera (RVC) on page 964
If the vehicle has a RVC, the O
button for turning the dimming
feature on or off will not be
available.
Vehicles with OnStar have three Windows The vehicle aerodynamics are
additional control buttons located at designed to improve fuel economy
the bottom of the mirror. See a performance. This may result in a
dealer for more information about { WARNING pulsing sound when either rear
OnStar and how to subscribe to it. window is down and the front
See OnStar Overview on page 141. Never leave a child, a helpless windows are up. To reduce the
adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle, sound, open either a front window
Cleaning the Mirror especially with the windows or the sunroof, if equipped.
Do not spray glass cleaner directly closed in warm or hot weather.
on the mirror. Use a soft towel They can be overcome by the Manual Windows
dampened with water. extreme heat and suffer
permanent injuries or even death Turn the hand crank on each door
from heat stroke. to manually raise or lower the
manual windows.
Power Windows
{ WARNING
Children could be seriously
injured or killed if caught in the
path of a closing window. Never
leave keys in a vehicle with
children. When there are children
in the rear seat, use the window
lockout button to prevent
operation of the windows. See
Keys on page 21.
Push the switch down to lower the Window Lockout

window, and pull up the front of the
switch to raise the window.
Express-down Windows
The express-down feature allow the
driver and front passenger windows
to be lowered without holding the
switch. Push the switch down to the
second detent, then release, to
activate the express-down mode.
The express-down mode can be
Crew Cab Premium Trim Shown, canceled at any time by pulling up
Other Models Similar on the front of the switch. To open
the window partway, push the switch Crew Cab Premium Trim Shown,
The driver door has a switch to down to the first detent until the Other Models Similar
control all windows. Each window is at the desired position. o (Window Lockout): The driver
passenger door has a switch to
door power window switch has a
control that window. The power lockout feature. This feature
windows only work when the ignition prevents the rear windows from
is in ON/RUN or ACC/
operating, except from the driver
ACCESSORY, or when Retained
position. Press the switch to engage
Accessory Power (RAP) is active. or disengage the lockout feature. An
See Retained Accessory Power indicator light on the switch will
(RAP) on page 928.
come on when the lockout feature is
engaged, and will go off when
disengaged.
Rear Windows The power sliding rear window Roof

cannot be operated manually.
Power Sliding Rear Window
Sun Visors Sunroof (Extended Cab)
Pull the sun visor down to block

glare. Detach the sun visor from the
If equipped, the power sliding rear center mount to pivot to the side
window works when the ignition has window, or to extend along the rod, On vehicles with a sunroof, the
been turned to ACC/ACCESSORY if available. sunroof only operates when the
or ON/RUN, or when Retained ignition is in the ACC/ACCESSORY
Accessory Power (RAP) is active. or ON/RUN or the Retained
See Retained Accessory Power Accessory Power (RAP) is active.
(RAP) on page 928. See Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) on page 928.
. Press the switch to open the
window.
. Pull the switch to close the
window.
Vent: From the closed position, closed position. To open the roof sealing area using a clean
press and hold the rear of the switch sunshade, press and unlatch it, and cloth, mild soap, and water. Do not
to vent the sunroof. To close the roll it back. To close, pull it forward remove grease from the sunroof.
sunroof, press and hold the front of and latch it into the closed position.
the switch. When the sunroof is opened, an air Sunroof (Crew Cab)
Open: From the vent position, the deflector will automatically raise.
sunroof can be fully opened either The air deflector will retract when
manually or by using the the sunroof is closed.
express-open feature. To open
manually, press the rear of the
switch to the first detent and hold
until the sunroof has reached the
desired position. To open using
express-open, press the rear of the
switch to the second detent and
release. The sunroof will move to
the full open position. To stop the
sunroof partway, press the switch a
second time. Dirt and debris may collect on the A. Open or Close
sunroof seal or in the track. This
Close: From the vent, or open B. Vent
could cause an issue with sunroof
position, press and hold the front of
operation or noise. It could also plug On vehicles with a sunroof, the
the switch to close the sunroof.
the water drainage system. sunroof only operates when the
The sunroof also has a roller Periodically open the sunroof and ignition is in the ACC/ACCESSORY
sunshade that can be used to block remove any obstacles or loose or ON/RUN or the Retained
the rays of the sun. The roller debris. Wipe the sunroof seal and Accessory Power (RAP) is active.
sunshade can be manually operated See Retained Accessory Power
with the sunroof in an open or (RAP) on page 928.
Vent: From the closed position, If an object is in the path of the

press the rear of the passenger side sunroof while it is closing, the
switch (B) to vent the sunroof. anti-pinch feature will detect the
Manual-Open/Manual-Close: To object and stop the sunroof.
open the sunroof, press and hold
the rear of the driver side switch (A)
until the sunroof reaches the
desired position. Press and hold the
front of the driver side switch to
close it.
Express-Open/Express-Close: To
express-open the sunroof, fully
press and release the rear of the
driver side switch (A) until the Dirt and debris may collect on the
sunroof reaches the desired sunroof seal or in the track. This
position. To express-close the could cause an issue with sunroof
sunroof, fully press and release the operation or noise. It could also plug
front of the driver side switch. Press the water drainage system.
the switch again to stop it. Periodically open the sunroof and
When the sunroof is opened, an air remove any obstacles or loose
deflector will automatically raise. debris. Wipe the sunroof seal and
The air deflector will retract when roof sealing area using a clean
the sunroof is closed. cloth, mild soap, and water. Do not
remove grease from the sunroof.
The sunroof also has a sunshade
which can be pulled forward to block
sun rays. The sunshade must be
opened and closed manually.
Seats and Restraints 3-1
Seats and Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 Adding Equipment to the

Safety Belt Use During Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-37
Restraints Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19 Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-38
Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19 Replacing Airbag System
Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-20 Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Head Restraints Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-20
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 Child Restraints
Replacing Safety Belt System Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Front Seats Infants and Young
Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Airbag System Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-43
Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-5 Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22 Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-45
Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-24 Lower Anchors and Tethers
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 When Should an Airbag for Children (LATCH
Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25 System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
Heated and Ventilated Front What Makes an Airbag Replacing LATCH System
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27 Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-55
How Does an Airbag Securing Child Restraints
Rear Seats
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27 (Rear Seat Position) . . . . . . . . 3-55
Rear Seats (Extended Cab
What Will You See after an Securing Child Restraints
Full Bench) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28 (Center Front Seat
Rear Seats (All Split Bench
Airbag On-Off Switch . . . . . . . . 3-29 Position) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58
and Hybrid Full Bench) . . . . . 3-11
Passenger Sensing Securing Child Restraints
Safety Belts System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32 (Right Front Seat
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 Servicing the Airbag-Equipped Position) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58
How to Wear Safety Belts Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
3-2 Seats and Restraints
Head Restraints
Front Seats
The front seats have adjustable
head restraints in the outboard
seating positions.
{ WARNING
With head restraints that are not
installed and adjusted properly,
there is a greater chance that
occupants will suffer a neck/ Adjust the head restraint so that the The height of the head restraint can
spinal injury in a crash. Do not top of the restraint is at the same be adjusted. Pull the head restraint
drive until the head restraints for height as the top of the occupant's up to raise it. Try to move the head
all occupants are installed and head. This position reduces the restraint to make sure that it is
chance of a neck injury in a crash. locked in place.
adjusted properly.
To lower the head restraint, press
the button, located on the top of the
seatback, and push the restraint
down. Try to move the head
restraint after the button is released
to make sure that it is locked in
place.
The front seat outboard head
restraints are not designed to be
removed.
Rear Seats Front Seats

The rear seat has adjustable
headrests in the outboard seating Seat Adjustment
positions.
The height of the headrest can be { WARNING
adjusted. Pull the headrest up to
raise it. To lower the headrest, push You can lose control of the
down on the headrest. vehicle if you try to adjust a driver
seat while the vehicle is moving.
Rear outboard headrests are not
designed to be removed. Adjust the driver seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
Split Bench or Bucket Seat
To adjust the seat:
1. Lift the bar to unlock the seat.
2. Slide the seat to the desired
position and release the bar.
3. Try to move the seat back and
forth to be sure the seat is
locked in place.
Some vehicles have a folding front
bench seat.
{ WARNING
If either seatback is not locked, it
could move forward in a sudden
stop or crash. That could cause
injury to the person sitting there.
Always push and pull on the
seatbacks to be sure they are
locked.
Bench Seat 2. Pull one of the release levers, at { WARNING

To adjust the seat: each end of the seat on the
lower rear of the seatback, A safety belt that is improperly
1. Move the lever to the right to completely out. routed, not properly attached,
unlock the seat. or twisted will not provide the
3. While holding the lever out, fold
2. Slide the seat to the desired the seatback forward until it protection needed in a crash. The
position and release the lever. rests on the seat. person wearing the belt could be
3. Try to move the seat back and seriously injured. After raising the
4. Release the lever. rear seatback, always check to be
forth to make sure it is locked
into place. Do not try to release the sure that the safety belts are
seatback before pulling the properly routed and attached, and
Folding the Bench Seat release levers or the release are not twisted.
To fold the bench seat: system can be damaged.
1. Push back on the front of the
seatback.
Reverse the steps to raise the Power Seat Adjustment To adjust the seatback, see Power
seatback. Push and pull on the Reclining Seatbacks under
seatback to make sure the seatback Reclining Seatbacks on page 36.
is locked in the upright position
before driving. Make sure the safety Lumbar Adjustment
belts are not twisted or caught in the
seatback. Manual Lumbar
Center Seat
If equipped, the center front
seatback doubles as an armrest and
cupholder/storage area for the driver
and passenger when the center
front seat is not used. Do not use it
as a seating position when the To adjust a power seat, if equipped:
seatback is folded down.
. Move the seat forward or
rearward by sliding the control
forward or rearward.
front or rear part of the seat If equipped, increase or decrease
cushion by moving the front or manual lumbar support by turning
rear of the control up or down. the knob forward or rearward.
entire seat by moving the entire
control up or down.
Power Lumbar raise or lower the height of the

support, press and hold the top WARNING (Continued)
or bottom of the control.
For proper protection when the
vehicle is in motion, have the
Reclining Seatbacks seatback upright. Then sit well
back in the seat and wear the
{ WARNING safety belt properly.
Sitting in a reclined position when
the vehicle is in motion can be
dangerous. Even when buckled
up, the safety belts cannot do
their job.
The shoulder belt will not be
To adjust the power lumbar support, against your body. Instead, it will
if equipped: be in front of you. In a crash, you
. On vehicles with two-way could go into it, receiving neck or
lumbar, press and hold the top other injuries.
or bottom of the control to
The lap belt could go up over
increase or decrease lumbar
support. your abdomen. The belt forces
would be there, not at your pelvic
. On vehicles with four-way bones. This could cause serious Do not have a seatback reclined if
lumbar, press and hold the front internal injuries. the vehicle is moving.
or rear of the control to increase
or decrease lumbar support. To (Continued)
Manual Reclining Seatbacks To adjust a manual seatback: Power Reclining Seatbacks

1. Lift the lever.
{ WARNING The seatback will automatically
If either seatback is not locked, it fold forward.
could move forward in a sudden 2. To recline, move the seatback
stop or crash. That could cause rearward to the desired position,
injury to the person sitting there. then release the lever to lock the
Always push and pull on the seatback in place.
seatbacks to be sure they are 3. Push and pull on the seatback to
locked. make sure it is locked.
To return the seatback to the upright
position:
1. Lift the lever fully without To recline a power seatback,
applying pressure to the if equipped:
seatback, and the seatback will
return to the upright position.
. Tilt the top of the control
rearward to recline.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked.
. Tilt the top of the control forward
to raise.
Memory Seats Storing Memory Positions Memory Remote Recall

To save into memory: The memory feature can recall the
1. Adjust the driver seat, seatback driver seat, outside mirrors, and
recliner, both outside mirrors, pedals, if equipped, to stored
and the throttle and brake positions when entering the vehicle.
pedals, if equipped. To activate, unlock the driver door
See Power Mirrors on page 214 with the Remote Keyless
and Adjustable Throttle and Entry (RKE) transmitter. The driver
Brake Pedal on page 924. seat, outside mirrors, and adjustable
pedals, if equipped, will move to the
Not all mirrors and adjustable memory position associated with the
throttle and brake pedals will transmitter used to unlock the
have the ability to save and vehicle.
recall their positions.
This feature can be turned on or off
If available, the controls on the 2. Press and hold 1 until using the vehicle personalization
driver door are used to program and two beeps sound. menu. See Vehicle Personalization
recall memory settings for the driver (With DIC Buttons) on page 546.
seat, outside mirrors, and the 3. Repeat for a second driver
adjustable throttle and brake pedals, position using 2. To stop recall movement, press one
if equipped. To recall, press and release 1 or of the power seat controls, memory
2. The vehicle must be in P (Park). buttons, or power mirror buttons,
A single beep will sound. The seat, or the adjustable pedal switch.
outside mirrors, and adjustable If something has blocked the driver
throttle and brake pedals will move seat and/or the adjustable pedals
to the position previously stored for while recalling a memory position,
the identified driver. the recall may stop. Remove the
obstruction; then press and hold the
appropriate manual control for the A single beep sounds. The driver Heated and Ventilated
memory item that is not recalling for seat moves back approximately
two seconds. Try recalling the 8 cm (3 in). To move the seat back
Front Seats
memory position again by pressing farther, press B again until the
the appropriate memory button. seat is all the way back. { WARNING
If the memory position is still not
recalling, see your dealer for If something has blocked the driver If you cannot feel temperature
service. seat while recalling the exit position, change or pain to the skin, the
the recall may stop. Remove the seat heater may cause burns. To
Easy Exit Driver Seat obstruction; then press and hold the reduce the risk of burns, people
This feature can move the seat power seat control rearward for with such a condition should use
rearward to allow extra room to exit two seconds. Try recalling the exit care when using the seat heater,
the vehicle. position again. If the exit position is especially for long periods of
still not recalling, see your dealer for time. Do not place anything on
B (Easy Exit Driver Seat): Press service.
to recall the easy exit seat position. the seat that insulates against
The vehicle must be in P (Park). See Vehicle Personalization (With heat, such as a blanket, cushion,
DIC Buttons) on page 546. cover, or similar item. This may
If the easy exit seat feature is cause the seat heater to
programmed on in the vehicle
overheat. An overheated seat
personalization menu, automatic
heater may cause a burn or may
seat movement occurs when the
ignition key is removed. damage the seat.
Press the button once for the Remote Start Heated Seats
highest setting. With each press of When it is cold outside, the heated
the button, the seat will change to seats may turn on automatically
the next lower setting, and then to during a remote vehicle start. The
the off setting. The lights indicate heated seats will be canceled when
three for the highest setting and one the ignition is turned on. Press the
for the lowest. desired button to use the heated
The passenger seat may take seats after the vehicle is started.
longer to heat up. The lights on the heated seat
On vehicles with heated seats, the buttons do not turn on during a
heated seats are canceled remote start.
10 seconds after the ignition is The temperature performance of an
Heated and Cooled Seat Buttons
turned off. unoccupied seat may be reduced.
Shown, Heated Seat Buttons
Similar On vehicles with heated and cooled This is normal.
seats, the heated and cooled seats See Remote Vehicle Start on
If available, the buttons are on the are canceled when the ignition is
front doors. To operate, the ignition page 24.
turned off.
must be in ON/RUN.
To use this feature after restarting
H (Cooled Seat): If available, the vehicle, press the desired button
press to cool the seat. again.
I (Heated Seatback): Press to
heat the seatback only.
J (Heated Seat and Seatback):
Press to heat the seat and
seatback.
Rear Seats To fold the seat:

{ WARNING
1. Pull up on the front of the seat
Rear Seats (Extended cushion while pulling down on A safety belt that is improperly
the release strap under the seat routed, not properly attached,
Cab Full Bench) cushion. or twisted will not provide the
Folding the Rear Seat 2. Pull the seat cushion up until it protection needed in a crash. The
Notice: Folding a rear seat with latches with the seatback. person wearing the belt could be
the safety belts still fastened may 3. Pull forward on the seat cushion seriously injured. After raising the
cause damage to the seat or the to make sure it is locked in rear seatback, always check to be
safety belts. Always unbuckle the place. sure that the safety belts are
safety belts and return them to properly routed and attached, and
their normal stowed position To unfold the seat: are not twisted.
before folding a rear seat. 1. Push the seat cushion rearward
while pulling the release strap
under the seat cushion. Pull the Rear Seats (All Split
seat cushion down until it Bench and Hybrid Full
latches. Bench)
2. Pull up on the seat cushion to
make sure it is locked in place. Folding Rear Seat
Make sure the safety belts are Either side of the rear seat can be
not twisted or caught in the seat folded for added cargo space.
cushion. Notice: Folding a rear seat with
the safety belts still fastened may
cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the
safety belts and return them to Safety Belts

their normal stowed position WARNING (Continued)
before folding a rear seat. This section of the manual
describes how to use safety belts are more likely to be seriously
Make sure that nothing is on injured or killed. Do not allow
properly. It also describes some
the seat. passengers to ride in any area of
things not to do with safety belts.
To fold the seat, slowly pull the seat the vehicle that is not equipped
cushion up. { WARNING with seats and safety belts.
To return the seat to the normal Always wear a safety belt, and
seating position, slowly pull the seat Do not let anyone ride where a check that all passenger(s) are
cushion down. safety belt cannot be worn restrained properly too.
properly. In a crash, if you or your
Make sure the safety belts are not
passenger(s) are not wearing
twisted or caught in the seat This vehicle has indicators as a
safety belts, injuries can be much
cushion. reminder to buckle the safety belts.
worse than if you are wearing
safety belts. You can be seriously See Safety Belt Reminders on
{ WARNING injured or killed by hitting things
page 516.
A safety belt that is improperly inside the vehicle harder or by

routed, not properly attached, being ejected from the vehicle. In
or twisted will not provide the addition, anyone who is not
protection needed in a crash. The buckled up can strike other
person wearing the belt could be passengers in the vehicle.
seriously injured. After raising the It is extremely dangerous to ride
rear seatback, always check to be in a cargo area, inside or outside
sure that the safety belts are of a vehicle. In a collision,
properly routed and attached, and passengers riding in these areas
are not twisted. (Continued)
Why Safety Belts Work safety belts. That is why wearing Also, in nearly all states and in
safety belts makes such good all Canadian provinces, the law
sense. requires wearing safety belts.
Questions and Answers About How to Wear Safety Belts
Safety Belts
Properly
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle
after a crash if I am wearing a This section is only for people of
safety belt? adult size.
A: You could be whether you are There are special things to know
wearing a safety belt or not. about safety belts and children. And
Your chance of being conscious there are different rules for smaller
during and after a crash, so you children and infants. If a child will be
can unbuckle and get out, is riding in the vehicle, see Older
When riding in a vehicle, you travel much greater if you are belted. Children on page 339 or Infants
as fast as the vehicle does. If the and Young Children on page 341.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why Follow those rules for everyone's
vehicle stops suddenly, you keep should I have to wear safety
going until something stops you. protection.
belts?
It could be the windshield, the It is very important for all occupants
instrument panel, or the safety belts! A: Airbags are supplemental to buckle up. Statistics show that
systems only; so they work with unbelted people are hurt more often
When you wear a safety belt, you safety belts not instead of
and the vehicle slow down together. in crashes than those who are
them. Whether or not an airbag wearing safety belts.
There is more time to stop because is provided, all occupants still
you stop over a longer distance and, have to buckle up to get the There are important things to know
when worn properly, your strongest most protection. about wearing a safety belt properly.
bones take the forces from the

. Wear the shoulder belt over the
shoulder and across the chest.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
These parts of the body are best If the vehicle is a regular cab, then
able to take belt restraining all seating positions in the vehicle
forces. The shoulder belt locks if have a lap-shoulder belt. If the
there is a sudden stop or crash. vehicle is a crew or extended cab,
then all seating positions in the
{ WARNING vehicle have a lap-shoulder belt
except for the center front
You can be seriously injured, passenger position (if equipped),
or even killed, by not wearing which has a lap belt. See Lap Belt
your safety belt properly. on page 319 for more information.
. Sit up straight and always keep . Never allow the lap or The following instructions explain
your feet on the floor in front shoulder belt to become how to wear a lap-shoulder belt
of you. loose or twisted. properly.
. Always use the correct buckle . Never wear the shoulder belt 1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is
for your seating position. under both arms or behind adjustable, so you can sit up
your back. straight. To see how, see Seats
. Wear the lap part of the belt low in the Index.
and snug on the hips, just . Never route the lap or
touching the thighs. In a crash, shoulder belt over an
this applies force to the strong armrest.
pelvic bones and you would be
less likely to slide under the lap
belt. If you slid under it, the belt
would apply force on your
abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries.
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull

the belt across you. Do not let it
get twisted.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if
you pull the belt across you very
quickly. If this happens, let the
belt go back slightly to unlock it.
Then pull the belt across you
more slowly.
If the shoulder portion of a
passenger belt is pulled out all
the way, the child restraint
locking feature may be engaged. If the belt stops before it reaches 3. Push the latch plate into the
If this happens, let the belt go the buckle, when using the buckle until it clicks.
back all the way and start again. lap-shoulder belt in a rear center Pull up on the latch plate to
seating position of a crew-cab, make sure it is secure. If the belt
Engaging the child restraint tilt the latch plate and keep
locking feature may affect the is not long enough, see Safety
pulling the safety belt until it can Belt Extender on page 320.
passenger sensing system, be buckled.
if equipped. See Passenger If the latch plate will not go fully
Sensing System on page 332 into the buckle, check if the
for more information. correct buckle is being used.
Position the release button on
the buckle so that the safety belt
could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
4. If equipped with a shoulder belt Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster

height adjuster, move it to the
The vehicle has a shoulder belt
height that is right for you. See
height adjuster for the driver and
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
right front passenger.
later in this section.
Adjust the height so the shoulder
portion of the belt is on the shoulder
and not falling off of it. The belt
should be close to, but not
contacting, the neck. Improper
shoulder belt height adjustment
could reduce the effectiveness of
the safety belt in a crash. See How
To unlatch the belt, push the button to Wear Safety Belts Properly on
on the buckle. The belt should page 313.
return to its stowed position.
Before a door is closed, be sure the
safety belt is out of the way. If a
door is slammed against a safety
5. To make the lap part tight, pull belt, damage can occur to both the
up on the shoulder belt. safety belt and the vehicle.
It may be necessary to pull
stitching on the safety belt
through the latch plate to fully
tighten the lap belt on smaller
occupants.
Safety Belt Pretensioners

This vehicle has safety belt
pretensioners for front outboard
occupants. Although the safety belt
pretensioners cannot be seen, they
are part of the safety belt assembly.
They can help tighten the safety
belts during the early stages of a
moderate to severe frontal, near
frontal, or rear crash if the threshold
conditions for pretensioner
activation are met. And, if your
Regular and Crew Cab Extended Cab vehicle has side impact airbags,
To move the adjuster down for the On the extended cab, push down on safety belt pretensioners can help
regular and crew cabs, squeeze the the release button (A) and move the tighten the safety belts in a side
buttons (A) on the sides of the height adjuster to the desired crash or a rollover event.
height adjuster and move the height position. Pretensioners work only once. If the
adjuster to the desired position. You can move the adjuster up just pretensioners activate in a crash,
by pushing up on the shoulder belt they will need to be replaced, and
guide. probably other new parts for the
vehicle's safety belt system. See
After you move the adjuster to Replacing Safety Belt System Parts
where you want it, try to move it after a Crash on page 321.
down, without squeezing the buttons
for the regular and crew cabs,
or without pushing the release
button for extended cabs, to make
sure it has locked into position.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort

Guides
This vehicle may have rear shoulder
belt comfort guides. If not, they are
available through your dealer. The
guides may provide added safety
belt comfort for older children who
have outgrown booster seats and
for some adults. When installed and
properly adjusted, the comfort guide
positions the belt away from the
neck and head.
2. Place the guide over the belt 3. Be sure that the belt is not
Here is how to install a comfort
and insert the two edges of the twisted and it lies flat. The
guide to the shoulder belt:
belt into the slots of the guide. elastic cord must be under the
1. Remove the guide from its belt and the guide on top.
storage clip on the interior body.
{ WARNING
A safety belt that is not properly
worn may not provide the
protection needed in a crash. The
person wearing the belt could be
seriously injured. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder
(Continued)
To remove and store the comfort A pregnant woman should wear a

WARNING (Continued) guide, squeeze the belt edges lap-shoulder belt, and the lap
together so that the safety belt can portion should be worn as low as
and across the chest. These parts be removed from the guide. Slide possible, below the rounding,
of the body are best able to take the guide onto the storage clip. throughout the pregnancy.
belt restraining forces.
The best way to protect the fetus is
Safety Belt Use During to protect the mother. When a safety
Pregnancy belt is worn properly, it is more likely
that the fetus will not be hurt in a
Safety belts work for everyone,
crash. For pregnant women, as for
including pregnant women. Like all
anyone, the key to making safety
occupants, they are more likely to
belts effective is wearing them
be seriously injured if they do not
properly.
wear safety belts.
Lap Belt
This section is only for the lap belt.
To learn how to wear a lap-shoulder
belt, see Lap-Shoulder Belt on
page 314.
4. Buckle, position, and release the The vehicle may have a center
safety belt as described seating position with a lap safety
previously in this section. Make belt. The lap safety belt does not
sure the shoulder portion of the have a retractor.
belt is on the shoulder and not
falling off of it. The belt should
be close to, but not contacting,
the neck.
Safety Belt Extender

If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten
around you, you should use it.
But if a safety belt is not long
enough, your dealer will order you
an extender. When you go in to
order it, take the heaviest coat you
will wear, so the extender will be
long enough for you. To help avoid
personal injury, do not let someone
else use it, and use it only for the
To make the belt longer, tilt the latch To make the belt shorter, pull its free seat it is made to fit. The extender
plate and pull it along the belt. end as shown until the belt is snug. has been designed for adults. Never
use it for securing child seats. To
Buckle, position, and release it the If the belt is not long enough, see wear it, attach it to the regular safety
same way as the lap part of a Safety Belt Extender on page 320. belt. For more information, see the
lap-shoulder belt. Make sure the release button on the instruction sheet that comes with
buckle is positioned so you would the extender.
be able to unbuckle the safety belt
quickly if necessary. Safety System Check
Now and then, check that the safety
belt reminder light, safety belts,
buckles, latch plates, retractors, and
anchorages are all working properly.
Look for any other loose or
damaged safety belt system parts
that might keep a safety belt system
from doing its job. See your dealer Replacing Safety Belt See your dealer to have the safety
to have it repaired. Torn or frayed belt assemblies inspected or
safety belts may not protect you in a
System Parts after a replaced.
crash. They can rip apart under Crash New parts and repairs may be
impact forces. If a belt is torn or necessary even if the safety belt
frayed, get a new one right away. { WARNING system was not being used at the
Make sure the safety belt reminder time of the crash.
light is working. See Safety Belt A crash can damage the safety
belt system in the vehicle. Have the safety belt pretensioners
Reminders on page 516. checked if the vehicle has been in a
A damaged safety belt system
Keep safety belts clean and dry. may not properly protect the crash, or if the airbag readiness light
See Safety Belt Care on page 321. person using it, resulting in stays on after you start the vehicle
serious injury or even death in a or while you are driving. See Airbag
Safety Belt Care crash. To help make sure the
Readiness Light on page 517.
Keep belts clean and dry. safety belt systems are working
properly after a crash, have them
{ WARNING inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. possible.
It may severely weaken them. In
a crash, they might not be able to After a minor crash, replacement of
provide adequate protection. safety belts may not be necessary.
Clean safety belts only with mild But the safety belt assemblies that
soap and lukewarm water. were used during any crash may
have been stressed or damaged.
Airbag System All of the airbags in the vehicle will

have the word AIRBAG embossed
Here are the most important things
to know about the airbag system:
The vehicle has the following in the trim or on an attached label
airbags: near the deployment opening. { WARNING
. A frontal airbag for the driver. For frontal airbags, the word
AIRBAG will appear on the middle You can be severely injured or
. A frontal airbag for the right front killed in a crash if you are not
passenger. part of the steering wheel for the
driver and on the instrument panel wearing your safety belt even if
The vehicle may have the following for the right front passenger. you have airbags. Airbags are
airbags: designed to work with safety
With seatmounted side impact
. A seatmounted side impact belts, but do not replace them.
airbags, the word AIRBAG will
airbag for the driver. Also, airbags are not designed to
appear on the side of the seatback
. closest to the door. deploy in every crash. In some
A seatmounted side impact crashes safety belts are your only
airbag for the right front With roof-rail airbags, the word restraint. See When Should an
passenger. AIRBAG will appear along the Airbag Inflate? on page 325.
. A roof-rail airbag for the driver headliner or trim.
and the passenger seated Wearing your safety belt during a
Airbags are designed to supplement crash helps reduce your chance
directly behind the driver. the protection provided by safety
of hitting things inside the vehicle
. A roof-rail airbag for the right belts. Even though today's airbags
or being ejected from it. Airbags
front passenger and the person are also designed to help reduce
the risk of injury from the force of an are supplemental restraints to
seated directly behind the right the safety belts. Everyone in your
front passenger. inflating bag, all airbags must inflate
very quickly to do their job. vehicle should wear a safety belt
properly whether or not there is
an airbag for that person.
{ WARNING { WARNING
Because airbags inflate with great Children who are up against,
force and faster than the blink of or very close to, any airbag when
an eye, anyone who is up it inflates can be seriously injured
against, or very close to any or killed. Airbags plus
There is an airbag readiness light
airbag when it inflates can be lap-shoulder belts offer protection
on the instrument panel cluster,
seriously injured or killed. Do not for adults and older children, but
which shows the airbag symbol.
sit unnecessarily close to any not for young children and infants.
airbag, as you would be if sitting Neither the vehicle safety belt The system checks the airbag
on the edge of the seat or leaning system nor its airbag system is electrical system for malfunctions.
forward. Safety belts help keep designed for them. Young The light tells you if there is an
you in position before and during children and infants need the electrical problem. See Airbag
a crash. Always wear a safety protection that a child restraint Readiness Light on page 517 for
belt, even with airbags. The driver system can provide. Always more information.
should sit as far back as possible secure children properly in the
while still maintaining control of vehicle. To read how, see Older
the vehicle. Children on page 339 or Infants
Occupants should not lean on or and Young Children on
sleep against the door or side page 341.
windows in seating positions with
seat-mounted side impact airbags
and/or roof-rail airbags.
Where Are the Airbags?
The right front passenger airbag is Driver Side Shown, Passenger

in the instrument panel on the Side Similar
The driver airbag is in the middle of passenger side. If the vehicle has seatmounted side
the steering wheel. impact airbags for the driver and
right front passenger, they are in the
side of the seatbacks closest to
the door.
WARNING (Continued)
When Should an Airbag
Inflate?
that person causing severe injury Frontal airbags are designed to
or even death. The path of an inflate in moderate to severe frontal
inflating airbag must be kept or near-frontal crashes to help
clear. Do not put anything reduce the potential for severe
between an occupant and an injuries mainly to the driver's or right
airbag, and do not attach or put front passenger's head and chest.
anything on the steering wheel However, they are only designed to
hub or on or near any other inflate if the impact exceeds a
airbag covering. predetermined deployment
Driver Side Shown, Passenger Do not use seat accessories that threshold. Deployment thresholds
Side Similar are used to predict how severe a
block the inflation path of a
crash is likely to be in time for the
If the vehicle has roof-rail airbags seat-mounted side impact airbag.
airbags to inflate and help restrain
for the driver, right front passenger, Never secure anything to the roof the occupants.
and second row outboard of a vehicle with roof-rail airbags
passengers, they are in the ceiling Whether the frontal airbags will or
by routing a rope or tiedown should deploy is not based on how
above the side windows. through any door or window fast your vehicle is traveling.
opening. If you do, the path of an It depends largely on what you hit,
{ WARNING inflating roof-rail airbag will be the direction of the impact, and how
blocked. quickly your vehicle slows down.
If something is between an
occupant and an airbag, the
airbag might not inflate properly
or it might force the object into
(Continued)
Frontal airbags may inflate at Frontal airbags are not intended to less than full deployment. For more
different crash speeds. For inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear severe frontal impacts, full
example: impacts, or in many side impacts. deployment occurs.
. If the vehicle hits a stationary If the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Vehicles with dual stage airbags
object, the airbags could inflate Rating) of your vehicle is 3 855 kg also have seat position sensors
at a different crash speed than if (8,500 lb) or above, the vehicle has which enable the sensing system to
the vehicle hits a moving object. single stage airbags. If the GVWR is monitor the position of the driver
. If the vehicle hits an object that below 3 855 kg (8,500 lb) then the seat (all models), and on crew cab
deforms, the airbags could vehicle has dual stage airbags. and extended cab models the right
inflate at a different crash speed Vehicles with a full bench seat are front passenger seat on light duty
than if the vehicle hits an object equipped with single state airbags. models only. The seat position
that does not deform. You can find the GVWR on the sensor provides information that is
certification label on the rear edge used to determine if the airbags
. If the vehicle hits a narrow object of the driver door. See Vehicle Load should deploy at a reduced level or
(like a pole), the airbags could Limits on page 915 for more at full deployment.
inflate at a different crash speed information.
than if the vehicle hits a wide The vehicle may or may not have
object (like a wall). The vehicle may have dual-stage seat-mounted side impact and
frontal airbags. Dual-stage airbags roof-rail airbags. See Airbag System
. If the vehicle goes into an object adjust the restraint according to on page 322. Seat-mounted side
at an angle, the airbags could crash severity. The vehicle has impact and roof-rail airbags are
inflate at a different crash speed electronic frontal sensors, which intended to inflate in moderate to
than if the vehicle goes straight help the sensing system distinguish severe side crashes. In addition,
into the object. between a moderate frontal impact these roof-rail airbags are intended
Thresholds can also vary with and a more severe frontal impact. to inflate during a rollover or in a
specific vehicle design. For moderate frontal impacts, severe frontal impact. Seat-mounted
dual-stage airbags inflate at a level side impact and roof-rail airbags will
inflate if the crash severity is above
the system's designed threshold rollover event, roof-rail airbag How Does an Airbag
level. The threshold level can vary deployment is determined by the
with specific vehicle design. direction of the roll.
Restrain?
Roof-rail airbags are not intended to In moderate to severe frontal or
inflate in rear impacts. What Makes an Airbag near frontal collisions, even belted
A seat-mounted side impact airbag Inflate? occupants can contact the steering
is intended to deploy on the side of wheel or the instrument panel. In
In a deployment event, the sensing moderate to severe side collisions,
the vehicle that is struck. Both
system sends an electrical signal even belted occupants can contact
roof-rail airbags will deploy when
triggering a release of gas from the the inside of the vehicle.
either side of the vehicle is struck,
inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the
or if the sensing system predicts Airbags supplement the protection
airbag causing the bag to break out
that the vehicle is about to roll over provided by safety belts. Frontal
of the cover and deploy. The inflator,
on its side, or in a severe frontal airbags distribute the force of the
the airbag, and related hardware are
impact. impact more evenly over the
all part of the airbag module.
In any particular crash, no one can occupant's upper body, stopping the
Frontal airbag modules are located occupant more gradually. Seat
say whether an airbag should have
inside the steering wheel and mounted side impact and roof-rail
inflated simply because of the
instrument panel. For vehicles with airbags distribute the force of the
damage to a vehicle or because of
seatmounted side impact airbags, impact more evenly over the
what the repair costs were. For
there are airbags modules in the occupant's upper body.
frontal airbags, inflation is
side of the front seatbacks closest
determined by what the vehicle hits, Rollover capable roof-rail airbags
to the door. For vehicles with
the angle of the impact, and how are designed to help contain the
roof-rail airbags, there are airbag
quickly the vehicle slows down. For head and chest of occupants in the
modules in the ceiling of the vehicle,
seat-mounted side impact and outboard seating positions in the
near the side windows that have
roof-rail airbags, deployment is first and second rows. The rollover
occupant seating positions.
determined by the location and capable roof-rail airbags are
severity of the side impact. In a designed to help reduce the risk of
full or partial ejection in rollover The parts of the airbag that come
events, although no system can into contact with you may be warm, WARNING (Continued)
prevent all such ejections. but not too hot to touch. There may
be some smoke and dust coming problems following an airbag
But airbags would not help in many deployment, you should seek
types of collisions, primarily from the vents in the deflated
airbags. Airbag inflation does not medical attention.
because the occupant's motion is
not toward those airbags. See When prevent the driver from seeing out of
Should an Airbag Inflate? on the windshield or being able to steer The vehicle may have a feature that
page 325 for more information. the vehicle, nor does it prevent may automatically unlock the doors,
people from leaving the vehicle. turn on the interior lamps and
Airbags should never be regarded hazard warning flashers, and shut
as anything more than a supplement
to safety belts.
{ WARNING off the fuel system after the airbags
inflate. You can lock the doors, turn
When an airbag inflates, there off the interior lamps and hazard
What Will You See after may be dust in the air. This dust warning flashers by using the
an Airbag Inflates? could cause breathing problems controls for those features.
for people with a history of
After the frontal airbags and
seat-mounted side impact airbags
asthma or other breathing trouble. { WARNING
To avoid this, everyone in the
inflate, they quickly deflate, so
vehicle should get out as soon as A crash severe enough to inflate
quickly that some people may not
it is safe to do so. If you have the airbags may have also
even realize an airbag inflated.
Roof-rail airbags may still be at least breathing problems but cannot damaged important functions in
partially inflated for some time after get out of the vehicle after an the vehicle, such as the fuel
they deploy. Some components of airbag inflates, then get fresh air system, brake and steering
the airbag module may be hot for by opening a window or a door. systems, etc. Even if the vehicle
several minutes. For location of the If you experience breathing appears to be drivable after a
airbag modules, see What Makes (Continued) (Continued)
an Airbag Inflate? on page 327.
other parts. The service manual

WARNING (Continued) for your vehicle covers the need
to replace other parts.
moderate crash, there may be
concealed damage that could
. The vehicle has a crash sensing
make it difficult to safely operate and diagnostic module which
the vehicle. records information after a
crash. See Vehicle Data
Use caution if you should attempt Recording and Privacy on
to restart the engine after a crash page 1319 and Event Data
has occurred. Recorders on page 1319.
. Let only qualified technicians
In many crashes severe enough to work on the airbag systems.
United States
inflate the airbag, windshields are Improper service can mean that
broken by vehicle deformation. an airbag system will not work
Additional windshield breakage may properly. See your dealer for
also occur from the right front service.
passenger airbag.
. Airbags are designed to inflate Airbag On-Off Switch
only once. After an airbag If one of the switches pictured in the
inflates, you will need some new following illustrations is located in
parts for the airbag system. the glove box, the vehicle has an
If you do not get them, the airbag on-off switch that you can
airbag system will not be there use to manually turn on or off the
to help protect you in another right front passenger airbag.
crash. A new system will include
airbag modules and possibly Canada and Mexico
If the vehicle does not have an Child age 1 to 12. A child from turning off the airbag and
airbag off switch, it may have a age 1 to 12 must ride in the front allowing the passenger, even if
passenger sensing system. See seat because: belted, to hit the instrument
Passenger Sensing System on . My vehicle has no rear seat; panel or windshield in a crash.
page 332.
This switch should only be turned to
. Although children ages 1 to 12
ride in the rear seat(s) whenever
{ WARNING
the off position if the person in the possible, children ages 1 to 12
right front passenger position is a If the right front passenger airbag
sometimes must ride in the front is turned off for a person who is
member of a passenger risk group because no space is available in
identified by the national not in a risk group identified by
the rear seat(s) of my vehicle; or the national government, that
government as follows:
. The child has a medical person will not have the extra
Infant. An infant (less than 1 year condition which, according to the protection of an airbag. In a
old) must ride in the front seat child's physician, makes it crash, the airbag will not be able
because: necessary for the child to ride in to inflate and help protect the
. My vehicle has no rear seat; the front seat so that the driver person sitting there. Do not turn
can constantly monitor the off the passenger airbag unless
. My vehicle has a rear seat too child's condition.
small to accommodate a the person sitting there is in a risk
rear-facing infant seat; or Medical Condition. A passenger group.
. The infant has a medical has a medical condition which,
condition which, according to the according to his or her physician:
infant's physician, makes it . Causes the passenger airbag to
necessary for the infant to ride in pose a special risk for the
the front seat so that the driver passenger; and
can constantly monitor the . Makes the potential harm from
child's condition. the passenger airbag in a crash
greater than the potential harm
To turn off the right front passenger

airbag, insert the ignition key into WARNING (Continued)
the switch, push in, and move the
switch to the off position. To help avoid injury to yourself or
others, have the vehicle serviced
The word OFF or the off symbol will right away. See Airbag Readiness
come on in the passenger airbag Light on page 517 for more
status indicator located in the information, including important
overhead console to let you know safety information.
that the right front passenger airbag
is off, after the system check is
completed. The airbag off light will
come on and stay on to let you
United States know that the right front passenger's
airbag is off. See Airbag On-Off
Light on page 518.
{ WARNING
If the airbag readiness light ever
comes on and stays on, it means
that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. For
example, the right front
passenger airbag could inflate
even though the airbag on-off
Canada and Mexico switch is turned off.
(Continued)
To turn the right front passenger In addition, if the vehicle has a

airbag on again, insert the ignition passenger sensing system for the
key into the switch, push in, and right front passenger position, the
move the switch to the on position. label on the vehicle's sun visors
The right front passenger frontal refers to ADVANCED AIRBAGS.
airbag is now enabled (may inflate).
See Airbag On-Off Light on
page 518 for more information.
Passenger Sensing
System
United States
United States If the vehicle has one of the
indicators pictured in the following
illustrations, then the vehicle has a
passenger sensing system for the
right front passenger position,
unless there is an airbag off switch
located in the glove box. If there is
an airbag off switch, the vehicle Canada and Mexico
does not have a passenger sensing
The words ON and OFF, or the
system. See Airbag On-Off Switch
symbol for on and off, will be visible
during the system check. If you are
The passenger airbag status using remote start to start the
indicator will be visible on the vehicle from a distance, if equipped,
Canada and Mexico overhead console when the vehicle you may not see the system check.
is started. When the system check is
complete, either the word ON or
OFF, or the symbol for on or off, will We recommend that children be

be visible. See Passenger Airbag secured in a rear seat, including: an WARNING (Continued)
Status Indicator on page 520. infant or a child riding in a
rear-facing child restraint; a child passenger airbag inflates and the
The passenger sensing system will passenger seat is in a forward
turn off the right front passenger riding in a forward-facing child seat;
an older child riding in a booster position.
frontal airbag under certain
conditions. The driver airbag, seat seat; and children, who are large Even if the passenger sensing
mounted side impact airbags enough, using safety belts. system has turned off the right
(if equipped), and the roof-rail A label on the sun visor says, front passenger frontal airbag, no
airbags (if equipped) are not Never put a rear-facing child seat in system is fail-safe. No one can
affected by the passenger sensing the front. This is because the risk to guarantee that an airbag will not
system. the rear-facing child is so great, deploy under some unusual
The passenger sensing system if the airbag deploys. circumstance, even though the
works with sensors that are part of airbag is turned off.
the right front passenger seat and { WARNING Secure rear-facing child restraints
safety belt. The sensors are in a rear seat, even if the airbag
designed to detect the presence of A child in a rear-facing child
is off. If you secure a
a properly-seated occupant and restraint can be seriously injured
forward-facing child restraint in
determine if the right front or killed if the right front
the right front seat, always move
passenger frontal airbag should be passenger airbag inflates. This is
the front passenger seat as far
enabled (may inflate) or not. because the back of the
back as it will go. It is better to
rear-facing child restraint would
According to accident statistics, secure the child restraint in a
be very close to the inflating
children are safer when properly rear seat.
secured in a rear seat in the correct airbag. A child in a forward-facing
child restraint for their weight child restraint can be seriously
and size. injured or killed if the right front
(Continued)
If the vehicle does not have a rear The passenger sensing system is
seat that will accommodate a designed to turn on (may inflate) the { WARNING
rear-facing child restraint, a right front passenger frontal airbag
rear-facing child restraint should not anytime the system senses that a If the airbag readiness light ever
be installed in the vehicle, even if person of adult size is sitting comes on and stays on, it means
the airbag is off. properly in the right front that something may be wrong
passenger seat. with the airbag system. To help
The passenger sensing system is avoid injury to yourself or others,
designed to turn off the right front When the passenger sensing have the vehicle serviced right
passenger frontal airbag if: system has allowed the airbag to be
away. See Airbag Readiness
. The right front passenger seat is enabled, the on indicator will light
Light on page 517 for more
unoccupied. and stay lit to remind you that the
airbag is active. information, including important
. The system determines an infant safety information.
is present in a child restraint. For some children, including
children in child restraints, and for
. A right front passenger takes very small adults, the passenger If the On Indicator is Lit for a
his/her weight off of the seat for sensing system may or may not turn Child Restraint
a period of time. off the right front passenger frontal If a child restraint has been installed
. Or, if there is a critical problem airbag, depending upon the and the on indicator is lit:
with the airbag system or the person's seating posture and body
build. Everyone in your vehicle who 1. Turn the vehicle off.
passenger sensing system.
has outgrown child restraints should 2. Remove the child restraint from
When the passenger sensing wear a safety belt the vehicle.
system has turned off the right front properly whether or not there is
passenger frontal airbag, the off an airbag for that person. 3. Remove any additional items
indicator will light and stay lit to from the seat such as blankets,
remind you that the airbag is off. cushions, seat covers, seat
See Passenger Airbag Status heaters, or seat massagers.
Indicator on page 520.
4. Reinstall the child restraint 6. Restart the vehicle. because that person is not sitting
following the directions provided The passenger sensing system properly in the seat. If this happens,
by the child restraint may or may not turn off the use the following steps to allow the
manufacturer and refer to airbag for a child in a child system to detect that person and
Securing Child Restraints restraint depending upon the enable the right front passenger
(Center Front Seat Position) on childs seating posture and body frontal airbag:
page 358 or Securing Child build. It is better to secure the 1. Turn the vehicle off.
Restraints (Right Front Seat child restraint in a rear seat.
Position) on page 358 or 2. Remove any additional material
Securing Child Restraints (Rear If the Off Indicator is Lit for an from the seat, such as blankets,
Seat Position) on page 355. Adult-Size Occupant cushions, seat covers, seat
heaters, or seat massagers.
5. If, after reinstalling the child
restraint and restarting the 3. Place the seatback in the fully
vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, upright position.
turn the vehicle off. Then slightly 4. Have the person sit upright in
recline the vehicle seatback and the seat, centered on the seat
adjust the seat cushion, cushion, with legs comfortably
if adjustable, to make sure that extended.
the vehicle seatback is not
pushing the child restraint into 5. Restart the vehicle and have the
the seat cushion. person remain in this position for
two to three minutes after the on
Also make sure the child indicator is lit.
restraint is not trapped under the
vehicle head restraint. If this
happens, adjust the head If a person of adult-size is sitting in
restraint. See Head Restraints the right front passenger seat, but
on page 32. the off indicator is lit, it could be
Additional Factors Affecting operates. We recommend that you Servicing the

System Operation not use seat covers or other
aftermarket equipment except when
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Safety belts help keep the approved by GM for your specific Airbags affect how the vehicle
passenger in position on the seat vehicle. See Adding Equipment to should be serviced. There are parts
during vehicle maneuvers and the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on of the airbag system in several
braking, which helps the passenger page 337 for more information places around the vehicle. Your
sensing system maintain the about modifications that can affect dealer and the service manual have
passenger airbag status. See how the system operates. information about servicing the
Safety Belts and Child Restraints vehicle and the airbag system. To
in the Index for additional The on indicator may be lit if an
object, such as a briefcase, purchase a service manual, see
information about the importance of Service Publications Ordering
proper restraint use. handbag, grocery bag, laptop or
other electronic device, is put on an Information on page 1316.
If the shoulder portion of the belt is unoccupied seat. If this is not
pulled out all the way, the child
restraint locking feature will be
desired, remove the object from { WARNING
the seat.
engaged. This may unintentionally For up to 10 seconds after the
cause the passenger sensing vehicle is turned off and the
system to turn the airbag off for { WARNING battery is disconnected, an airbag
some adult size occupants. If this can still inflate during improper
Stowing of articles under the
happens, let the belt go back all the service. You can be injured if you
passenger seat or between the
way and start again. are close to an airbag when it
passenger seat cushion and
A thick layer of additional material, seatback may interfere with the inflates. Avoid yellow connectors.
such as a blanket or cushion, proper operation of the passenger They are probably part of the
or aftermarket equipment such as sensing system. airbag system. Be sure to follow
seat covers, seat heaters, and seat (Continued)
massagers can affect how well the
passenger sensing system
sensors, side impact sensors, passenger airbag(s). See

WARNING (Continued) or airbag wiring can affect the Passenger Sensing System on
operation of the airbag system. page 332.
proper service procedures, and
make sure the person performing In addition, the vehicle may have If you have any questions about
work for you is qualified to do so. a passenger sensing system for this, you should contact
the right front passenger's Customer Assistance before you
position, which includes sensors modify your vehicle. The phone
Adding Equipment to the that are part of the passenger's numbers and addresses for
seat. The passenger sensing Customer Assistance are in
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle system may not operate properly Step Two of the Customer
Q: Is there anything I might add if the original seat trim is Satisfaction Procedure in this
to or change about the vehicle replaced with non-GM covers, manual. See Customer
that could keep the airbags upholstery or trim, or with GM Satisfaction Procedure (U.S. and
from working properly? covers, upholstery or trim Canada) on page 132 or
A: Yes. If you add things that designed for a different vehicle. Customer Satisfaction
change your vehicle's frame, Any object, such as an Procedure (Mexico) on
bumper system, height, front end aftermarket seat heater or a page 134.
or side sheet metal, they may comfort enhancing pad or If the vehicle has rollover
keep the airbag system from device, installed under or on top roof-rail airbags, see Different
working properly. Changing or of the seat fabric, could also Size Tires and Wheels on
moving any parts of the front interfere with the operation of page 1068 for additional
seats, safety belts, the airbag the passenger sensing system. important information.
sensing and diagnostic module, This could either prevent proper
steering wheel, instrument deployment of the passenger
panel, roof-rail airbag modules, airbag(s) or prevent the
ceiling headliner or pillar garnish passenger sensing system from
trim, overhead console, front properly turning off the
Q: What if I added a snow plow? See Customer Satisfaction Where Are the Airbags? on
Will it keep the airbags from Procedure (U.S. and Canada) on page 324. See your dealer for
working properly? page 132 or Customer service.
A: We have designed our airbag Satisfaction Procedure (Mexico)
systems to work properly under on page 134. Replacing Airbag System
a wide range of conditions, In addition, your dealer and the Parts after a Crash
including snow plowing with service manual have information
vehicles that have the optional
Snow Plow Prep Package
about the location of the airbag
sensors, sensing and diagnostic
{ WARNING
(RPO VYU). But do not change module and airbag wiring. A crash can damage the airbag
or defeat the snow plow's systems in the vehicle.
tripping mechanism. If you do, Airbag System Check A damaged airbag system may
it can damage your snow plow not work properly and may not
and your vehicle, and it may The airbag system does not need
regularly scheduled maintenance or protect you and your
cause an airbag inflation.
replacement. Make sure the airbag passenger(s) in a crash, resulting
Q: Because I have a disability, readiness light is working. See in serious injury or even death. To
I have to get my vehicle Airbag Readiness Light on help make sure the airbag
modified. How can I find out page 517. systems are working properly
whether this will affect my after a crash, have them
airbag system? Notice: If an airbag covering is
damaged, opened, or broken, the inspected and any necessary
A: If you have questions, call airbag may not work properly. Do replacements made as soon as
Customer Assistance. The not open or break the airbag possible.
phone numbers and addresses coverings. If there are any
for Customer Assistance are in opened or broken airbag covers,
Step Two of the Customer have the airbag covering and/or
Satisfaction Procedure in this airbag module replaced. For the
manual. location of the airbags, see
If an airbag inflates, you will need to Child Restraints The manufacturer instructions that
replace airbag system parts. See come with the booster seat state the
your dealer for service. weight and height limitations for that
Older Children booster. Use a booster seat with a
If the airbag readiness light stays on
after the vehicle is started or comes lap-shoulder belt until the child
on when you are driving, the airbag passes the fit test below:
system may not work properly. Have . Sit all the way back on the seat.
the vehicle serviced right away. See Do the knees bend at the seat
Airbag Readiness Light on edge? If yes, continue. If no,
page 517. return to the booster seat.
. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.
Does the shoulder belt rest on
the shoulder? If yes, continue.
If no, try using the rear safety
belt comfort guide. See Rear
Safety Belt Comfort Guides
under Lap-Shoulder Belt on
Older children who have outgrown
page 314. If the shoulder belt
booster seats should wear the
still does not rest on the
vehicle safety belts.
shoulder, then return to the
booster seat.
. Does the lap belt fit low and
snug on the hips, touching the
thighs? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.

. Can proper safety belt fit be restraint system or infant restraint
maintained for the length of the system secured in a rear seating
trip? If yes, continue. If no, position.
return to the booster seat.
In a crash, children who are not
Q: What is the proper way to buckled up can strike other people
wear safety belts? who are buckled up, or can be
A: An older child should wear a thrown out of the vehicle. Older
lap-shoulder belt and get the children need to use safety belts
additional restraint a shoulder properly.
belt can provide. The shoulder
belt should not cross the face or { WARNING
neck. The lap belt should fit
snugly below the hips, just Never allow more than one child
touching the top of the thighs. to wear the same safety belt. The { WARNING
This applies belt force to the safety belt cannot properly spread Never allow a child to wear the
child's pelvic bones in a crash. the impact forces. In a crash, they safety belt with the shoulder belt
It should never be worn over the can be crushed together and behind their back. A child can be
abdomen, which could cause seriously injured. A safety belt seriously injured by not wearing
severe or even fatal internal must be used by only one person
injuries in a crash. the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a
at a time. crash, the child would not be
Also see Rear Safety Belt Comfort restrained by the shoulder belt.
Guides under Lap-Shoulder Belt on The child could move too far
page 314. forward increasing the chance of
According to accident statistics, head and neck injury. The child
children and infants are safer when might also slide under the lap
properly restrained in a child (Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
Infants and Young Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer
protection for adults and older
Children children, but not for young children
belt. The belt force would then be Everyone in a vehicle needs and infants. Neither the vehicle's
applied right on the abdomen. protection! This includes infants and safety belt system nor its airbag
That could cause serious or fatal all other children. Neither the system is designed for them. Every
injuries. The shoulder belt should distance traveled nor the age and time infants and young children ride
go over the shoulder and across size of the traveler changes the in vehicles, they should have the
the chest. need, for everyone, to use safety protection provided by appropriate
restraints. In fact, the law in every child restraints.
state in the United States and in Children who are not restrained
every Canadian province says properly can strike other people,
children up to some age must be or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
restrained while in a vehicle.
{ WARNING { WARNING
Never hold an infant or a child
Children can be seriously injured while riding in a vehicle. Due to
or strangled if a shoulder belt is crash forces, an infant or a child
wrapped around their neck and will become so heavy it is not
the safety belt continues to possible to hold it during a crash.
tighten. Never leave children For example, in a crash at only
unattended in a vehicle and never 40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)
allow children to play with the infant will suddenly become a
safety belts. 110 kg (240 lb) force on a person's
(Continued)
Q: What are the different types of

WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued) add-on child restraints?
arms. An infant should be child restraint in the right front A: Add-on child restraints, which
secured in an appropriate seat. Secure a rear-facing child are purchased by the vehicle
restraint. restraint in a rear seat. It is also owner, are available in four basic
better to secure a forward-facing types. Selection of a particular
child restraint in a rear seat. If you restraint should take into
must secure a forward-facing consideration not only the child's
weight, height, and age but also
child restraint in the right front
whether or not the restraint will
seat, always move the front
be compatible with the motor
passenger seat as far back as it vehicle in which it will be used.
will go.
For most basic types of child
restraints, there are many
different models available. When
purchasing a child restraint, be
sure it is designed to be used in
a motor vehicle. If it is, the
restraint will have a label saying
that it meets federal motor
{ WARNING vehicle safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer
Children who are up against, instructions that come with the
or very close to, any airbag when restraint state the weight and
it inflates can be seriously injured height limitations for a particular
or killed. Never put a rear-facing child restraint. In addition, there
(Continued)
are many kinds of restraints

WARNING (Continued)
Child Restraint Systems
available for children with
special needs.
Instead, it may settle up around
the child's abdomen. In a crash,
{ WARNING the belt would apply force on a
To reduce the risk of neck and body area that is unprotected by
head injury during a crash, infants any bony structure. This alone
need complete support. In a could cause serious or fatal
crash, if an infant is in a injuries. To reduce the risk of
rear-facing child restraint, the serious or fatal injuries during a
crash forces can be distributed crash, young children should
across the strongest part of an always be secured in appropriate
infant's body, the back and child restraints.
Rear-Facing Infant Seat
shoulders. Infants should always
be secured in rear-facing child A rear-facing infant seat provides
restraints. restraint with the seating surface
against the back of the infant.
The harness system holds the infant
in place and, in a crash, acts to
{ WARNING keep the infant positioned in the
A young child's hip bones are still restraint.
so small that the vehicle's regular
safety belt may not remain low on
the hip bones, as it should.
(Continued)
Securing an Add-On Child

Restraint in the Vehicle
{ WARNING
A child can be seriously injured or
killed in a crash if the child
restraint is not properly secured in
the vehicle. Secure the child
restraint properly in the vehicle
using the vehicle safety belt or
LATCH system, following the
Forward-Facing Child Seat Booster Seats instructions that came with that
A forward-facing child seat provides A booster seat is a child restraint child restraint and the instructions
restraint for the child's body with the designed to improve the fit of the in this manual.
harness. vehicle's safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a child To help reduce the chance of injury,
to see out the window. the child restraint must be secured
in the vehicle. Child restraint
systems must be secured in vehicle
seats by lap belts or the lap belt
portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by
the LATCH system. See Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH System) on page 347.
Children can be endangered in a Administration (NHTSA) website to We recommend that children and
crash if the child restraint is not locate the nearest child safety seat child restraints be secured in a rear
properly secured in the vehicle. inspection station. For CPST seat, including: an infant or a child
When securing an add-on child availability in Canada, check with riding in a rear-facing child restraint;
restraint, refer to the instructions Transport Canada or the Provincial a child riding in a forward-facing
that come with the restraint which Ministry of Transportation office. child seat; an older child riding in a
may be on the restraint itself or in a booster seat; and children, who are
Securing the Child Within the large enough, using safety belts.
booklet, or both, and to this manual. Child Restraint
The child restraint instructions are If a child restraint is secured in the
important, so if they are not right front passenger seat, and the
available, obtain a replacement { WARNING vehicle has a switch in the glove
copy from the manufacturer. A child can be seriously injured or box to manually turn off the right
Keep in mind that an unsecured front passenger airbag, see Airbag
killed in a crash if the child is not
child restraint can move around in a On-Off Switch on page 329 and
properly secured in the child
collision or sudden stop and injure Securing Child Restraints (Center
restraint. Secure the child Front Seat Position) on page 358
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly following the instructions
properly secure any child restraint in or Securing Child Restraints (Right
that came with that child restraint. Front Seat Position) on page 358
the vehicle even when no child is
in it. or Securing Child Restraints (Rear
Where to Put the Seat Position) on page 355 for
In some areas of the United States more information, including
and Canada, Certified Child Restraint important safety information.
Passenger Safety Technicians According to accident statistics,
(CPSTs) are available to inspect A label on the sun visor says,
children and infants are safer when Never put a rear-facing child seat in
and demonstrate how to correctly properly restrained in a child
use and install child restraints. In the front. This is because the risk to
restraint system or infant restraint the rear-facing child is so great,
the U.S., refer to the National system secured in a rear seating
Highway Traffic Safety if the airbag deploys.
position.
When securing a child restraint in a

{ WARNING WARNING (Continued) rear seating position, study the
instructions that came with your
A child in a rear-facing child Secure rear-facing child restraints child restraint to make sure it is
restraint can be seriously injured in a rear seat, even if the airbag compatible with this vehicle.
or killed if the right front is off. If you secure a
passenger airbag inflates. This is forward-facing child restraint in Child restraints and booster seats
because the back of the the right front seat, always move vary considerably in size, and some
rear-facing child restraint would the front passenger seat as far may fit in certain seating positions
better than others. Always make
be very close to the inflating back as it will go. It is better to
sure the child restraint is properly
airbag. A child in a forward-facing secure the child restraint in a
secured.
child restraint can be seriously rear seat.
injured or killed if the right front Depending on where you place the
passenger airbag inflates and the child restraint and the size of the
passenger seat is in a forward child restraint, you may not be able
position. { WARNING to access adjacent safety belt
assemblies or LATCH anchors for
Even if the passenger sensing A child in a child restraint in the additional passengers or child
system or airbag switch has center front seat can be badly restraints. Adjacent seating
turned off the right front injured or killed by the frontal positions should not be used if the
passenger frontal airbag, no airbags if they inflate. Never child restraint prevents access to or
system is fail-safe. No one can secure a child restraint in the interferes with the routing of the
guarantee that an airbag will not center front seat. It is always safety belt.
deploy under some unusual better to secure a child restraint in If the vehicle does not have a rear
circumstance, even though it is a rear seat. seat that will accommodate a
turned off. rear-facing child restraint, a
(Continued) Do not use child restraints in the
center front seat position.
rear-facing child restraint should not Make sure that a LATCH-compatible Lower Anchors
be installed in the vehicle, even if child restraint is properly installed
the airbag is off. using the anchors, or use the
Wherever a child restraint is vehicle's safety belts to secure the
installed, be sure to secure the child restraint, following the instructions
restraint properly. that came with that restraint, and
also the instructions in this manual.
Keep in mind that an unsecured When installing a child restraint with
child restraint can move around in a a top tether, you must also use
collision or sudden stop and injure either the lower anchors or the
people in the vehicle. Be sure to safety belts to properly secure the
properly secure any child restraint in child restraint. A child restraint must Lower anchors (A) are metal bars
your vehicle even when no child never be installed using only the top built into the vehicle. There are two
is in it. tether and anchor. lower anchors for each LATCH
In order to use the LATCH system in seating position that will
Lower Anchors and your vehicle, you need a child accommodate a child restraint with
Tethers for Children restraint that has LATCH lower attachments (B).
(LATCH System) attachments. The child restraint
manufacturer will provide you with
The LATCH system secures a child instructions on how to use the child
restraint during driving or in a crash. restraint and its attachments. The
LATCH attachments on the child following explains how to attach a
restraint are used to attach the child child restraint with these
restraint to the anchors in the attachments in your vehicle.
vehicle. This system is designed to
make installation of a child restraint Not all vehicle seating positions or
easier. child restraints have lower anchors
and attachments or top tether
anchors and attachments.
Top Tether Anchor Your child restraint may have a Lower Anchor and Top Tether
single tether (A) or a dual tether (C). Anchor Locations
Either will have a single
attachment (B) to secure the top
tether to the anchor.
Some child restraints that have a
top tether are designed for use with
or without the top tether being
attached. Others require the top
tether always to be attached. In
Canada, the law requires that
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top forward-facing child restraints have
of the child restraint to the vehicle. a top tether, and that the tether be
A top tether anchor is built into the attached. Be sure to read and follow
vehicle. The top tether the instructions for your child
attachment (B) on the child restraint Regular Cab Two-Passenger
restraint.
connects to the top tether anchor in Front Seat
the vehicle in order to reduce the
forward movement and rotation of
the child restraint during driving or in
a crash.
For regular cab models, there is an

anchor symbol on the covers to
assist you in locating the top tether
anchors.
Regular Cab Three-Passenger Crew and Extended Cab Rear Seat

Front Seat i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating
i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating positions with top tether anchors.
positions with top tether anchors. j (Lower Anchor): Seating
Do not install a child restraint in the positions with two lower anchors.
center front seat position. See For crew and extended cab models,
Securing Child Restraints (Center the rear outboard seating positions
Front Seat Position) on page 358 have exposed metal lower anchors
or Securing Child Restraints (Right located in the crease between the
Front Seat Position) on page 358 seatback and the seat cushion.
or Securing Child Restraints (Rear Regular Cab
Seat Position) on page 355 for
more information.
Do not install a child restraint in the Be sure to read the instructions

center seat position. See Securing following to properly install a child
Child Restraints (Center Front Seat restraint using these loops.
Position) on page 358 or Securing Do not secure a child restraint in a
Child Restraints (Right Front Seat position without a top tether anchor
Position) on page 358 or Securing if a national or local law requires
Child Restraints (Rear Seat that the top tether be attached, or if
Position) on page 355 for more the instructions that come with the
information. child restraint say that the top tether
For regular cab models, the top must be attached.
tether anchors are located under According to accident statistics,
covers on the back panel behind the children and infants are safer when
passenger seat. Remove the trim Crew Cab Shown, Extended Cab
properly restrained in a child
plug to access the anchor. Be sure Similar restraint system or infant restraint
to use an anchor located on the system secured in a rear seating
For crew and extended cab models,
same side of the vehicle as the position. See Where to Put the
the top tether anchors are the loops
seating position where the child Restraint on page 345 for
located near the top of the seatback
restraint will be placed. additional information.
for each rear seating position.
These loops will be used to route
the top tether through, as well as, to
secure the top tether in the vehicle.
Be sure to use an anchor (loop)
located on the same side of the
vehicle as the seating position
where the child restraint will be
placed.
Securing a Child Restraint

Designed for the LATCH WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued)
System anchors in the crew and extended of the retractor to set the lock,
cabs. Attaching more than one if the vehicle has one, after the
{ WARNING child restraint to a single anchor child restraint has been installed.
could cause the anchor or
If a LATCH-type child restraint is attachment to come loose or even
not attached to anchors, the child Notice: Do not let the LATCH
break during a crash. A child or attachments rub against the
restraint will not be able to protect others could be injured. To reduce
the child correctly. In a crash, the vehicles safety belts. This may
the risk of serious or fatal injuries damage these parts. If necessary,
child could be seriously injured or during a crash, attach only one
killed. Install a LATCH-type child move buckled safety belts to
child restraint per anchor. avoid rubbing the LATCH
restraint properly using the
attachments.
anchors, or use the vehicle safety
belts to secure the restraint, Do not fold the empty rear seat
following the instructions that { WARNING with a safety belt buckled. This
could damage the safety belt or
came with the child restraint and
the instructions in this manual. Children can be seriously injured the seat. Unbuckle and return the
or strangled if a shoulder belt is safety belt to its stowed position,
wrapped around their neck and before folding the seat.
the safety belt continues to If you need to secure more than one
{ WARNING tighten. Buckle any unused safety child restraint in the rear seat, see
belts behind the child restraint so Where to Put the Restraint on
Do not attach more than one child children cannot reach them. Pull page 345.
restraint to a single anchor, the shoulder belt all the way out
except for the center top tether This system is designed to make
(Continued) installation of child restraints easier.
(Continued)
When using lower anchors, do not
use the vehicle's safety belts. 1.4. Route, attach, and tighten
Instead use the vehicle's anchors the top tether according to
and child restraint attachments to your child restraint
secure the restraints. Some instructions and the
restraints also use another vehicle following instructions:
anchor to secure a top tether.
Regular Cab Models
1. If the child restraint manufacturer
recommends that the top tether If the position you are using
be attached, attach and tighten has an adjustable headrest
the top tether to the top tether or head restraint and you
anchor, if your vehicle has one. are using a single tether,
Refer to the child restraint raise the headrest or head
instructions and the following restraint and route the
steps: If the position you are using tether under the headrest or
1.1. Pull the passenger has an adjustable headrest head restraint and in
seatback forward by pulling or head restraint and you between the headrest or
the recliner handle upward are using a dual tether, head restraint posts.
to access the top tether route the tether around the
anchor. See Reclining headrest or head restraint.
Seatbacks on page 36 for
additional information.
1.2. Find the top tether anchor.
1.3. Remove the cover to
expose the anchor.
2. See Securing Child Restraints Crew and Extended Cab Models 2. If the child restraint manufacturer
(Center Front Seat Position) on 1. Attach and tighten the lower recommends that the top tether
page 358 or Securing Child attachments to the lower be attached, attach and tighten
Restraints (Right Front Seat anchors. If the child restraint the top tether to the top tether
Position) on page 358 or does not have lower anchor (loop), if your vehicle has
Securing Child Restraints (Rear attachments or the desired one. Refer to the child restraint
Seat Position) on page 355 for seating position does not have instructions and the following
instructions on installing the lower anchors, secure the child steps:
child restraint using the safety restraint with the top tether and
belts. the safety belts. Refer to your
3. Before placing a child in the child restraint manufacturer
child restraint, make sure it is instructions and the instructions
securely held in place. To check, in this manual.
grasp the child restraint at the 1.1. Find the lower anchors for
LATCH path and attempt to the desired seating
move it side-to-side and position.
back-and-forth. There should be
no more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of 1.2. Put the child restraint on
movement for proper installation. the seat.
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower
attachments on the child Example Rear Driver Side
restraint to the lower Position
anchors.
restraint post, and 2.3. When using a child restraint

under the center with a top tether in the rear
shoulder belt (C). passenger position:
C. Attach the top A. Raise the headrest
tether (B) to the top or head restraint.
tether B. Route the top
anchor (loop) (D) at tether (B) between
the center rear the headrest or head
seating position. restraint posts,
2.2. When using a child restraint through the loop on
with a top tether in the rear the passenger side
center position: and behind the
Example Rear Driver Side
A. Route the top inboard headrest or
Position head restraint post.
tether (B) through
2.1. When using a child restraint the center loop (D), C. Attach the top
with a top tether in the rear and behind the tether (B) to the top
driver side position: inboard passenger tether
A. Raise the headrest side headrest or anchor (loop) (D) at
or head restraint. head restraint post. the center rear
B. Attach the top seating position.
B. Route the top
tether (B) between tether (B) to the top
the headrest or head tether anchor (loop)
restraint posts, at the rear
through the loop (A), passenger side
behind the inboard seating position.
headrest or head
2.4. Tighten the top tether when Replacing LATCH System Securing Child Restraints
and as the child restraint
manufacturer's
Parts After a Crash (Rear Seat Position)
instructions say. When securing a child restraint in a
When the top tether is
{ WARNING rear seating position, study the
tightened, the anchor (loop) instructions that came with the child
A crash can damage the LATCH restraint to make sure it is
may bend. This is normal system in the vehicle. A damaged
and will not damage the compatible with this vehicle.
LATCH system may not properly
vehicle. If the child restraint has the LATCH
secure the child restraint,
3. Before placing a child in the resulting in serious injury or even system, see Lower Anchors and
child restraint, make sure it is Tethers for Children (LATCH
death in a crash. To help make
securely held in place. To check, System) on page 347 for how and
sure the LATCH system is
grasp the child restraint at the where to install the child restraint
working properly after a crash, using LATCH. If a child restraint is
LATCH path and attempt to see your dealer to have the
move it side-to-side and secured in the vehicle using a
system inspected and any safety belt and it uses a top tether,
back-and-forth. There should be necessary replacements made as
no more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of see Lower Anchors and Tethers for
soon as possible. Children (LATCH System) on
movement for proper installation.
page 347 for top tether anchor
If the vehicle has the LATCH system locations.
and it was being used during a Do not secure a child seat in a
crash, new LATCH system parts position without a top tether anchor
may be needed. if a national or local law requires
New parts and repairs may be that the top tether be anchored, or if
necessary even if the LATCH the instructions that come with the
system was not being used at the child restraint say that the top strap
time of the crash. must be anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that 2. Pick up the latch plate, and run
forward-facing child restraints have the lap and shoulder portions of
a top tether, and that the tether be the vehicle's safety belt through
attached. or around the restraint. The child
If the child restraint does not have restraint instructions will show
the LATCH system, you will be you how.
using the safety belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Be
sure to follow the instructions that
came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when
and as the instructions say.
If more than one child restraint 3. Push the latch plate into the
needs to be installed in the rear buckle until it clicks.
seat, be sure to read Where to Put Position the release button on
the Restraint on page 345. the buckle so that the safety belt
1. Put the child restraint on could be quickly unbuckled if
the seat. necessary.
For crew cab second row
seatings positions, tilt the latch
plate to adjust the belt if needed.
6. If the child restraint has a top

tether, follow the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions
regarding the use of the top
tether. See Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH
System) on page 347 for more
information.
7. Before placing a child in the
child restraint, make sure it is
securely held in place. To check,
grasp the child restraint at the
4. Pull the shoulder belt all the way 5. To tighten the belt, push down safety belt path and attempt to
out of the retractor to set the on the child restraint, pull the move it sidetoside and back
lock. When the retractor lock is shoulder portion of the belt to andforth. When the child
set, the belt can be tightened but tighten the lap portion of the belt, restraint is properly installed,
not pulled out of the retractor. and feed the shoulder belt back there should be no more than
into the retractor. When installing 2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
a forward-facing child restraint, it To remove the child restraint,
may be helpful to use your knee unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
to push down on the child let it return to the stowed position.
restraint as you tighten the belt. If the top tether is attached to a top
Try to pull the belt out of the tether anchor, disconnect it.
retractor to make sure the
retractor is locked. If the
retractor is not locked, repeat
Steps 4 and 5.
Securing Child Restraints Securing Child Restraints

(Center Front Seat (Right Front Seat
{ WARNING
Position) Position) A child in a rear-facing child
restraint can be seriously injured
With Passenger Sensing or killed if the right front
{ WARNING System passenger airbag inflates. This is
A child in a child restraint in the This vehicle has airbags. A rear because the back of the
center front seat can be badly seat is a safer place to secure a rear-facing child restraint would
injured or killed by the frontal forward-facing child restraint. See be very close to the inflating
airbags if they inflate. Never Where to Put the Restraint on airbag. A child in a forward-facing
secure a child restraint in the page 345. child restraint can be seriously
center front seat. It is always injured or killed if the right front
In addition, the vehicle may have a
better to secure a child restraint in passenger airbag inflates and the
passenger sensing system which is
a rear seat. designed to turn off the right front passenger seat is in a forward
passenger frontal airbag under position.
Do not use child restraints in the certain conditions. See Passenger The vehicle may have a
center front seat position. Sensing System on page 332 and passenger sensing system which
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator is designed to turn off the right
on page 520 for more information front passenger frontal airbag
on this, including important safety under certain conditions.
information.
Even if the passenger sensing
A label on the sun visor says, system, if equipped, has turned
Never put a rear-facing child seat in
off the right front passenger
the front. This is because the risk to
frontal airbag, no system is
the rear-facing child is so great,
if the airbag deploys. (Continued)
If the child restraint has the LATCH You will be using the lap-shoulder
WARNING (Continued) system, see Lower Anchors and belt to secure the child restraint in
Tethers for Children (LATCH this position. Follow the instructions
fail-safe. No one can guarantee System) on page 347 for how and that came with the child restraint.
that an airbag will not deploy where to install the child restraint
under some unusual 1. Move the seat as far back as it
using LATCH. If you secure a child will go before securing the
circumstance, even though it is restraint using a safety belt and it
turned off. forward-facing child restraint.
uses a top tether, see Lower
Secure rear-facing child restraints Anchors and Tethers for Children When the passenger sensing
(LATCH System) on page 347 for system, if equipped, has turned
in a rear seat, even if the airbag
top tether anchor locations. off the right front passenger
is off. If you secure a
frontal airbag, the off indicator in
forward-facing child restraint in Do not secure a child seat in a the passenger airbag status
the right front seat, always move position without a top tether anchor indicator should light and stay lit
the front passenger seat as far if a national or local law requires when you start the vehicle. See
back as it will go. It is better to that the top tether be anchored, or if Passenger Airbag Status
secure the child restraint in a the instructions that come with the Indicator on page 520.
rear seat. child restraint say that the top strap
must be anchored. 2. Put the child restraint on
See Passenger Sensing System the seat.
on page 332 for additional In Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have 3. Pick up the latch plate, and run
information. the lap and shoulder portions of
a top tether, and that the tether be
attached. the vehicle's safety belt through
If the vehicle does not have a rear or around the restraint. The child
seat that will accommodate a restraint instructions will show
rear-facing child restraint, a you how.
rear-facing child restraint should not
be installed in the vehicle, even if
the airbag is off.
4. Push the latch plate into the 5. Pull the shoulder belt all the way 6. To tighten the belt, push down
buckle until it clicks. out of the retractor to set the on the child restraint, pull the
Position the release button so lock. When the retractor lock is shoulder portion of the belt to
that the safety belt could be set, the belt can be tightened but tighten the lap portion of the belt,
quickly unbuckled if necessary. not pulled out of the retractor. and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. When installing
a forward-facing child restraint, it
may be helpful to use your knee
to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
Try to pull the belt out of the
Steps 5 and 6.
7. If the vehicle does not have a If a child restraint has been installed A label on the sun visor says,
rear seat and the child restraint and the on indicator is lit, see If the Never put a rear-facing child seat in
has a top tether, follow the child On Indicator is Lit for a Child the front unless airbag is off. This is
restraint manufacturer's Restraint under Passenger Sensing because the risk to the rear-facing
instructions regarding the use of System on page 332 for more child is so great, if the airbag
the top tether. See Lower information. deploys.
Anchors and Tethers for To remove the child restraint,
Children (LATCH System) on
unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and { WARNING
let it return to the stowed position.
8. Before placing a child in the If the top tether is attached to a top A child in a rear-facing child
child restraint, make sure it is tether anchor, disconnect it. restraint can be seriously injured
securely held in place. To check, or killed if the right front
grasp the child restraint at the With Airbag Off Switch passenger airbag inflates. This is
safety belt path and attempt to This vehicle has airbags. A rear because the back of the
move it side to side and back seat is a safer place to secure a rear-facing child restraint would
and forth. When the child forward-facing child restraint. See be very close to the inflating
restraint is properly installed, Where to Put the Restraint on airbag. A child in a forward-facing
there should be no more than page 345. child restraint can be seriously
2.5 cm (1 in) of movement. injured or killed if the right front
There may be a switch in the glove
If the vehicle is equipped with a box that you can use to turn off the passenger airbag inflates and the
passenger sensing system, and right front passenger frontal airbag. passenger seat is in a forward
when the passenger sensing system See Airbag On-Off Switch on position.
has turned off the right front page 329 for more information, Even if the airbag switch has
passenger frontal airbag, the off including important safety turned off the right front
indicator in the passenger airbag information. passenger frontal airbag, no
status indicator should light and stay
system is fail-safe. No one can
lit when you start the vehicle.
(Continued)
If the child restraint has the LATCH

WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued) system, see Lower Anchors and
guarantee that an airbag will not passenger airbag could inflate System) on page 347 for how and
deploy under some unusual even though the airbag on-off where to install the child restraint
circumstance, even though it is switch is turned off. using LATCH. If a child restraint is
turned off. To help avoid injury to yourself or secured using a safety belt and it
Secure rear-facing child restraints others, have the vehicle serviced uses a top tether, see Lower
in a rear seat, even if the airbag right away. See Airbag Readiness Anchors and Tethers for Children
is off. If you secure a Light on page 517 for more (LATCH System) on page 347 for
forward-facing child restraint in information, including important top tether anchor locations.
the right front seat, always move safety information. Do not secure a child restraint in a
the front passenger seat as far position without a top tether anchor
back as it will go. It is better to if a national or local law requires
If the vehicle does not have a rear
secure the child restraint in a that the top tether be anchored, or if
seat that will accommodate a
rear seat. the instructions that come with the
rear-facing child restraint, a
child restraint say that the top strap
rear-facing child restraint should not
must be anchored.
be installed in the vehicle, even if
the airbag is off. In Canada, the law requires that
{ WARNING forward-facing child restraints have
If the airbag readiness light ever a top tether, and that the tether be
comes on and stays on, it means attached.
that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. For
example, the right front
(Continued)
You will be using the lap-shoulder 3. Pick up the latch plate, and run
belt to secure the child restraint in the lap and shoulder portions of
this position. Follow the instructions the vehicle's safety belt through
that came with the child restraint. or around the restraint. The child
1. Move the seat as far back as it restraint instructions will show
will go before securing the you how.
forward-facing child restraint.
If you have no other choice but
to install a rear-facing child
restraint in this seat, make sure
the airbag is off once the child
restraint has been installed.
5. Pull the shoulder belt all the way
When the airbag off switch has out of the retractor to set the
turned off the right front lock. When the retractor lock is
passenger frontal airbag, the off set, the belt can be tightened but
indicator in the airbag off light not pulled out of the retractor.
should light and stay lit when
you start the vehicle. See Airbag
On-Off Light on page 518. 4. Push the latch plate into the
2. Put the child restraint on buckle until it clicks.
the seat. Position the release button so
that the safety belt could be
quickly unbuckled if necessary.
7. If your vehicle does not have a the child restraint from the vehicle
rear seat and your child restraint unless the person who will be sitting
has a top tether, follow the child there is a member of a passenger
restraint manufacturer's airbag risk group. See Airbag
instructions regarding the use of On-Off Switch on page 329 for
the top tether. See Lower more information, including
Anchors and Tethers for important safety information.
Children (LATCH System) on
page 347. Heavy Duty Crew Cab Only
8. Before placing a child in the This vehicle has airbags. A rear
child restraint, make sure it is seat is a safer place to secure a
securely held in place. To check, forward-facing child restraint. See
grasp the child restraint at the Where to Put the Restraint on
6. To tighten the belt, push down
safety belt path and attempt to page 345.
on the child restraint, pull the
shoulder portion of the belt to move it side to side and back A label on the sun visor says,
tighten the lap portion of the belt, and forth. When the child Never put a rear-facing child seat in
and feed the shoulder belt back restraint is properly installed, the front. This is because the risk to
into the retractor. When installing there should be no more than the rear-facing child is so great,
a forward-facing child restraint, it 2.5 cm (1 in) of movement. if the airbag deploys.
may be helpful to use your knee To remove the child restraint,
to push down on the child unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
restraint as you tighten the belt. let it return to the stowed position.
Try to pull the belt out of the If the top tether is attached to a top
retractor to make sure the tether anchor, disconnect it.
retractor is locked. If the If you turned the airbag off with the
retractor is not locked, repeat switch, turn on the right front
Steps 5 and 6. passenger airbag when you remove
Never put a rear-facing child where to install the child restraint 2. Put the child restraint on
restraint in the right front passenger using LATCH. If you secure a child the seat.
seat. Here is why: restraint using a safety belt and it 3. Pick up the latch plate, and run
uses a top tether, see Lower the lap and shoulder portions of
{ WARNING Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH System) on page 347 for
the vehicle's safety belt through
or around the restraint. The child
A child in a rear-facing child top tether anchor locations. restraint instructions will show
restraint can be seriously injured Do not secure a child seat in a you how.
or killed if the right front position without a top tether anchor
passenger's airbag inflates. This if a national or local law requires
is because the back of the that the top tether be anchored, or if
rear-facing child restraint would the instructions that come with the
be very close to the inflating child restraint say that the top strap
airbag. Always secure a must be anchored.
rear-facing child restraint in a In Canada, the law requires that
rear seat. forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether be
If the vehicle does not have a rear attached.
seat that will accommodate a You will be using the lap-shoulder
rear-facing child restraint, a belt to secure the child restraint in
rear-facing child restraint should not this position. Follow the instructions
be installed in the vehicle, even if that came with the child restraint. 4. Push the latch plate into the
the airbag is off. buckle until it clicks.
1. Move the seat as far back as it
If the child restraint has the LATCH will go before securing the Make sure the release button is
system, see Lower Anchors and forward-facing child restraint. positioned so you would be able
Tethers for Children (LATCH to unbuckle the safety belt
System) on page 347 for how and quickly if necessary.
7. If your child restraint has a top

tether, follow the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions
regarding the use of the top
tether. See Lower Anchors and
System) on page 347 for more
information.
8. Before placing a child in the
child restraint, make sure it is
securely held in place. To check,
grasp the child restraint at the
5. Pull the shoulder belt all the way 6. To tighten the belt, push down safety belt path and attempt to
out of the retractor to set the on the child restraint, pull the move it side to side and back
lock. When the retractor lock is shoulder portion of the belt to and forth. When the child
set, the belt can be tightened but tighten the lap portion of the belt, restraint is properly installed,
not pulled out of the retractor. and feed the shoulder belt back there should be no more than
into the retractor. When installing 2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
a forward-facing child restraint, it To remove the child restraint,
may be helpful to use your knee unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
to push down on the child let it return to the stowed position.
restraint as you tighten the belt. If the top tether is attached to a top
Try to pull the belt out of the tether anchor, disconnect it.
Steps 5 and 6.
Storage 4-1
Storage Storage Glove Box

Compartments Lift up on the glove box lever to
open it.
Storage Compartments
Instrument Panel Storage . . . . . 4-1 Instrument Panel Storage
Cupholders
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 For vehicles equipped with an
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 instrument panel storage area, it is If equipped, there are cupholders on
Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 located above the glove box. the center console and the rear of
Center Console Storage . . . . . . 4-2 the center console, also in the rear
seat armrest.
Pull the cover down on the rear of
the center console to access the
cupholders in the rear of the center
console.
Pull the rear seat armrest down to
access the cupholders.
Access the storage area by

pressing and holding in the driver
side of the handle and pull out on
the exposed portion of the handle.
4-2 Storage
Armrest Storage
Vehicles with a rear seat armrest
have two cupholders. Pull the
armrest down from the rear
seatback to access the cupholders.
Center Console Storage

Vehicles with an upper and lower
center console storage area have
cupholders included.
Pull the lever (A) up to access the

upper storage area. Raise the upper
storage bin, then pull the lever (B)
up to access the lower storage area.
Use the key to lock and unlock the
lower storage area.
Instruments and Controls 5-1
Instruments and Engine Coolant Temperature

Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Information Displays
Driver Information
Controls Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-16
Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-17 Vehicle Messages

Airbag On-Off Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Controls Battery Voltage and Charging
Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2 Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-2 Brake System Messages . . . . 5-38
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-21
Malfunction Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-39
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-4 Engine Cooling System
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Brake System Warning Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-40
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Antilock Brake System (ABS) Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-41
Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-41
Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Four-Wheel-Drive Light . . . . . . 5-25 Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-41
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . 5-25 Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
Indicators StabiliTrak OFF Light . . . . . . . 5-25 Object Detection System
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Traction Control System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 (TCS)/StabiliTrak Light . . . . 5-26 Ride Control System
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-26 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-27 Airbag System Messages . . . . 5-43
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . 5-27 Security Messages . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28 Starting the Vehicle
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-28 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Front Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . 5-28 Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
Engine Oil Pressure Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
5-2 Instruments and Controls
Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-44 Controls Do not adjust the steering wheel

Vehicle Reminder while driving.
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . 5-46 Steering Wheel Steering Wheel Controls
Adjustment
Vehicle Personalization
Vehicle Personalization (With
DIC Buttons) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
Universal Remote System
Universal Remote System . . . 5-54
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58
If equipped, some audio controls

To adjust the steering wheel: can be adjusted at the steering
1. Hold the steering wheel and pull wheel.
the lever. w (Next): Press to go to the next
2. Move the steering wheel up favorite radio station, track on a CD,
or down. or folder on an iPod or USB
device.
3. Release the lever to lock the
wheel in place. c / x (Previous/End): Press to
go to the previous favorite radio
station, track on a CD, or folder on
an iPod or USB device. Press to 2. Press and release w or c / x Navigating an iPod or USB Device
reject an incoming call, or end a to scroll up or down the list, then on the Main Audio Screen
current call. (Vehicles with a Navigation
press and hold w , or press to System)
Radio play the highlighted track.
To select preset or favorite radio 1. Press and release w or c / x
Navigating Folders on an iPod or
stations: to select the next or previous
USB Device (Vehicles without a
Navigation System): track within the selected
Press and release w or c / x to category.
go to the next or previous radio 1. Press and hold w or c / x
station stored as a preset or 2. Press and hold w or c / x to
while listening to a song until the
favorite. contents of the current folder move quickly through the tracks.
CD/DVD display on the radio display. 3. Press and release to move up

2. Press and hold c / x to go one track within the selected
To select tracks on a CD/DVD: category.
back to the previous folder list.
Press and release w or c / x to Navigating an iPod or USB Device
go to the next or previous track. 3. Press and release w or c / x on the Music Navigator Screen
to scroll up or down the list. (Vehicles with a Navigation
Selecting Tracks on an iPod or
USB Device (Vehicles without a
. To select a folder, press System)
Navigation System) and hold w , or press 1. Press and release w or c / x
when the folder is
1. Press and hold w or c / x highlighted.
to select the next or previous
while listening to a song until the track within the selected
contents of the current folder
. To go back further in the category.
display on the radio display. folder list, press and hold
c / x. 2. Press and hold w or c / x to
move quickly through the tracks
within the selected category.
3. Press and release to move up (Seek): Press to go to the next +e: Press to increase volume.
one track within the selected radio station while in AM, FM,
category. or SiriusXM. e: Press to decrease volume.
b / g (Mute/Push to Talk): Press For vehicles with or without a
Horn
to silence the vehicle speakers only. navigation system:
Press again to turn the sound on. To sound the horn, press the center
Press to go to the next track or pad on the steering wheel.
For vehicles with Bluetooth or chapter while sourced to the CD or
OnStar systems, press and hold for DVD slot.
longer than two seconds to interact Windshield Wiper/Washer
with those systems. See Bluetooth Press to select a track or a folder
on page 750 and OnStar Overview when navigating folders on an iPod
on page 141 for more information. or USB device.
SRCE (Source/Voice For vehicles with a navigation
Recognition): Press to switch system:
between the radio and CD, and for
equipped vehicles, the DVD, front 1. Press and hold until a beep is
auxiliary, and rear auxiliary. heard, to place the radio into The front wiper control is located on
SCAN mode. A station will play the turn and lane-change lever.
For vehicles with the navigation for five seconds before moving
system, press and hold this button to the next station. The windshield wipers are controlled
for longer than one second to by turning the band with z on it.
initiate voice recognition. See Voice 2. To stop the SCAN function,
Recognition in the Navigation press again. 8 (Mist): For a single wipe, turn
System manual for more to 8 , then release. For several
While listening to a CD/DVD, press
information.
and hold to quickly move forward wipes, hold the band on 8 longer.
through the tracks. Release to stop 9 (Off): Turns the windshield
on the desired track. wipers off.
6 (Adjustable Interval Wipes): L (Washer Fluid): Push the Compass variance is the difference
Turn the band up for more frequent paddle marked with the windshield between the earth's magnetic north
wipes or down for less frequent washer symbol at the top of the and true geographic north. If the
wipes. multifunction lever, to spray washer compass is not set to the zone
fluid on the windshield. The wipers where you live, the compass may
w (Low Speed): Slow wipes.
clear the window and then either give false readings. The compass
1 (High Speed): Fast wipes. stop or return to the preset speed. must be set to the variance zone in
which the vehicle is traveling.
Clear ice and snow from the wiper
blades before using them. If frozen Compass To adjust for compass variance, use
to the windshield, carefully loosen or The vehicle may have a compass in the following procedure:
thaw them. Damaged wiper blades the Driver Information Center (DIC). Compass Variance (Zone)
should be replaced. See Wiper
Compass Zone Procedure
Blade Replacement on page 1035.
The zone is set to zone eight upon 1. Do not set the compass zone
Heavy snow or ice can overload the
leaving the factory. Your dealer will when the vehicle is moving. Only
wiper motor. A circuit breaker will
set it when the vehicle is in
stop the motor until it cools down. set the correct zone for your
location. P (Park).
Windshield Washer Press the vehicle information
Under certain circumstances, such
as during a long-distance, button until PRESS V TO
{ WARNING cross-country trip or moving to a CHANGE COMPASS ZONE
new state or province, it will be displays. Or, if the vehicle does
In freezing weather, do not use not have DIC buttons, press the
necessary to compensate for
the washer until the windshield is trip odometer reset stem until
compass variance by resetting the
warmed. Otherwise the washer CHANGE COMPASS ZONE
zone through the DIC if the zone is
fluid can form ice on the not set correctly. displays.
windshield, blocking your vision.
two seconds to select the next strong magnetic field interfering with
available variance zone. Repeat the compass. Such interference
this step until the appropriate may be caused by a magnetic CB or
variance zone is displayed. cell phone antenna mount, a
5. If calibration is necessary, magnetic emergency light, magnetic
calibrate the compass. See note pad holder, or any other
Compass Calibration magnetic item. Turn off the vehicle,
Procedure following. move the magnetic item, then turn
on the vehicle and calibrate the
Compass Calibration compass.
The compass can be manually To calibrate the compass, use the
calibrated. Only calibrate the following procedure:
2. Find the vehicle's current compass in a magnetically clean
and safe location, such as an open Compass Calibration Procedure
location and variance zone
number on the map. parking lot, where driving the 1. Before calibrating the compass,
vehicle in circles is not a danger. make sure the compass zone is
Zones 1 through 15 are It is suggested to calibrate away set to the variance zone in which
available. from tall buildings, utility wires, the vehicle is located. See
3. Press the set/reset button to manhole covers, or other industrial Compass Variance (Zone)
scroll through and select the structures, if possible. Procedure earlier in this
appropriate variance zone. If CAL should ever appear in the section.
4. Press the trip/fuel button until DIC display, the compass should be Do not operate any switches
the vehicle heading, for calibrated. such as window, sunroof,
example, N for North, is If the DIC display does not show a climate controls, or seats during
displayed in the DIC. Or, if the heading, for example, N for North, the calibration procedure.
vehicle does not have DIC or the heading does not change
buttons, press and hold the trip after making turns, there may be a
odometer reset stem for
2. Press the vehicle information Clock 5. Press the H button again until
button until PRESS V TO the clock display stops flashing
CALIBRATE COMPASS AM-FM Radio and AMFM to set the currently displayed
displays. Or, if the vehicle does Radio with CD Player time, or wait until the flashing
not have DIC buttons, press the To set the clock: stops after five seconds and the
trip odometer reset stem until current time displayed
CALIBRATE COMPASS 1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ automatically sets.
displays. ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, then
press the O button to turn the MP3 Radios with a Single CD
3. Press the set/reset button to or a Single CD and DVD Player
radio on.
start the compass calibration. Or,
if the vehicle does not have DIC 2. Press the H button until the hour To adjust the time and date:
buttons, press and hold the trip numbers begin to flash, then 1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/
odometer reset stem for ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, then
turn the f knob to increase or
two seconds to start the press the O button to turn the
decrease the hour.
compass calibration.
radio on.
4. The DIC will display 3. Press the H button until the
CALIBRATING: DRIVE IN minute numbers begin to flash, 2. Press the H button to display
CIRCLES. Drive the vehicle in then turn the f knob to increase HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY (hour,
tight circles at less than 8 km/h or decrease the minutes. minute, month, day, and year).
(5 mph) to complete the 3. Press the softkey located under
calibration. The DIC will display 4. Press the H button until the any one of the tabs to change
CALIBRATION COMPLETE for a 12HR or 24HR time format that setting.
few seconds when the begins to flash, then turn the f
calibration is complete. The DIC 4. To increase the time or date, do
knob to change the time format.
display will then return to the one of the following:
previous menu. . Press the softkey below the
selected tab.
. Press the SEEK button. 3. Press the H button again to

. Press the \ FWD button.
. Press the \ FWD button. apply the desired option, or let . Turn the f knob clockwise.
the screen time out.
. Turn the f knob clockwise. 5. To decrease the time or date, do
MP3 Radio with a Six-Disc CD one of the following:
5. To decrease the time or date, do Player
one of the following: . Press the SEEK button.
To set the time and date:
. Press the SEEK button. 1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/
. Press the s REV button.
. Press the s REV button. ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, then . Turn the f knob
press the O button to turn the counterclockwise.
. Turn the f knob radio on.
counterclockwise. To change the time default setting
2. Press the MENU button and from 12 hour to 24 hour or to change
To change the time default setting then the softkey under the H tab the date default setting from month/
from 12 hour to 24 hour or to change to display HR, MIN, MM, DD, day to day/month:
the date default setting from month/ YYYY (hour, minute, month, day,
day/year to day/month/year: 1. Press the MENU button and
and year). then the softkey under the
1. Press the H button and then the 3. Press the softkey located under H tab.
softkey located below the any one of the tabs to change 2. Press the softkey located below
forward arrow tab. 12H, 24H, the that setting. the forward arrow tab. 12H, 24H,
date MM/DD (month and day), the date MM/DD (month and
4. To increase the time or date, do
and DD/MM (day and month) day), and DD/MM (day and
one of the following:
displays. month) displays.
. Press the softkey below the
2. Press the softkey located below 3. Press the softkey located below
selected tab.
the desired option. the desired option.
. Press the SEEK button.
4. Press the MENU button again to The accessory power outlets are Certain power accessory plugs may
apply the desired option, or let powered, even when the ignition is not be compatible to the accessory
the screen time out. in LOCK/OFF. Continuing to use power outlet and could overload
power outlets while the ignition is in vehicle or adapter fuses. If a
Power Outlets LOCK/OFF may cause the vehicle's problem is experienced, see your
battery to run down. dealer.
Accessory power outlets can be
used to plug in electrical equipment, When adding electrical equipment,
such as a cell phone, MP3 { WARNING be sure to follow the proper
player, etc. installation instructions included with
Power is always supplied to the the equipment. See Add-On
The vehicle may have two outlets. Do not leave electrical Electrical Equipment on page 9105.
accessory power outlets located equipment plugged in when the
below the climate control system, vehicle is not in use because the Notice: Hanging heavy
or may have one accessory power equipment from the power outlet
vehicle could catch fire and cause
outlet and one cigarette lighter. The can cause damage not covered
injury or death.
cigarette lighter is designed to fit by the vehicle warranty. The
only in the receptacle closest to the power outlets are designed for
driver. Notice: Leaving electrical accessory power plugs only, such
equipment plugged in for an as cell phone charge cords.
There may be another accessory extended period of time while the
power outlet in the rear cargo area.
If the vehicle has a floor console,
vehicle is off will drain the Cigarette Lighter
battery. Always unplug electrical
there is an accessory power outlet equipment when not in use and To use the cigarette lighter, push it
inside the storage bin and one on do not plug in equipment that in all the way, and let go. When it is
the rear of the floor console. exceeds the maximum 20 ampere ready for use, the lighter pops
Remove the cover to access and rating. back out.
replace when not in use. Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter
in while it is heating does not let
the lighter back away from the
heating element when it is hot. Warning Lights, Gauges can indicate when there
Damage from overheating can could be a problem with a vehicle
occur to the lighter or heating Gauges, and function. Often gauges and warning
element, or a fuse could be lights work together to indicate a
blown. Do not hold a cigarette
Indicators problem with the vehicle.
lighter in while it is heating. Warning lights and gauges can When one of the warning lights
signal that something is wrong comes on and stays on while
Ashtrays before it becomes serious enough driving, or when one of the gauges
to cause an expensive repair or shows there may be a problem,
The vehicle may have a front replacement. Paying attention to the
ashtray located near the center of check the section that explains what
warning lights and gauges could to do. Follow this manual's advice.
the instrument panel. Pull on the prevent injury.
door to open it. The ashtray may Waiting to do repairs can be costly
have a cigarette lighter. Warning lights come on when there and even dangerous.
could be a problem with a vehicle
Notice: If papers, pins, or other function. Some warning lights come
flammable items are put in the on briefly when the engine is started
ashtray, hot cigarettes or other to indicate they are working.
smoking materials could ignite
them and possibly damage the
vehicle. Never put flammable
items in the ashtray.
To remove the ashtray, open the
door and pull the ashtray bin toward
you. To replace the ashtray, insert
the ashtray bin inside the ashtray
door and press down until it
engages.
Instrument Cluster
English Light Duty Premium Shown. Metric, Uplevel, Base and Heavy Duty Similar.
For vehicles with a DURAMAX 30 seconds, or until the ignition is Tachometer

Diesel engine, see the DURAMAX turned on. See Driver Information
Diesel Supplement for more Center (DIC) on page 529 for more The tachometer displays the engine
information. information. speed in revolutions per minute
(rpm). For a description of how
For vehicles with a Hybrid, see the Grade Braking affects vehicle speed
Hybrid Supplement for more Trip Odometer while the Tow/Haul Mode is
information. The trip odometer shows how far activated, see Tow/Haul Mode on
the vehicle has been driven since page 938 for more information.
Speedometer the trip odometer was last set
If the vehicle is a hybrid, see the
The speedometer shows the to zero.
hybrid supplement for more
vehicle's speed in either kilometers Press the reset button, located on information.
per hour (km/h) or miles per the instrument panel cluster next to
hour (mph). the voltmeter, to toggle between the
trip odometer and the regular
Odometer odometer. Holding the reset button
for approximately one second while
The odometer shows how far the the trip odometer is displayed will
vehicle has been driven, in either reset it.
kilometers or miles.
To display the odometer reading
Engine Hour Meter Display with the ignition off, press the reset
The Driver Information Center (DIC) button.
can also display the number of See Driver Information Center (DIC)
hours the engine has run. To display on page 529 for more information.
the engine hours, turn the ignition
off, then press and hold the reset
button for at least four seconds. The
hour meter displays for up to

. It takes a little more or less fuel
Fuel Gauge When the ignition is on, the fuel
to fill up than the fuel gauge
gauge shows about how much fuel
is left in the fuel tank. indicated. For example, the
gauge may have indicated the
An arrow on the fuel gauge tank was half full, but it actually
indicates the side of the vehicle the took a little more or less than
fuel door is on. half the fuel tank's capacity to
The gauge will first indicate empty fill it.
before the vehicle is out of fuel, but . The gauge goes back to empty
the vehicle's fuel tank should be when the ignition is turned off.
filled soon.
If the vehicle has a diesel engine,
When the fuel tank is low the FUEL see the Duramax diesel supplement
LEVEL LOW message appears. for more information.
See Fuel System Messages on
Metric page 541 for more information. If the vehicle is a hybrid, see the
Here are some situations owners information.
can experience with the fuel gauge.
None of these indicate a problem
with the fuel gauge.
. At the gas station, the fuel pump
shuts off before the gauge
reads full.
English
Engine Oil Pressure Oil pressure can vary with engine

speed, outside temperature and oil
Gauge viscosity, but if readings are outside
the normal operating range, the oil
pressure light comes on. See
Engine Oil Pressure Light on
A reading outside the normal
operating range can be caused by a
dangerously low oil level or some
other problem causing low oil
pressure. Check the vehicle's oil as
English soon as possible. See OIL
The engine oil pressure gauge PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE
shows the engine oil pressure under Engine Oil Messages on
Metric page 540 and Engine Oil on
in kPa (kilopascals) or psi (pounds
per square inch) when the engine is page 106.
running.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil Engine Coolant

maintenance can damage the
engine. Driving with the engine
Temperature Gauge
oil low can also damage the
engine. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Check the oil level as soon as
possible. Add oil if required, but
if the oil level is within the
operating range and the oil
pressure is still low, have the
vehicle serviced. Always follow
the maintenance schedule for English
changing engine oil.
This gauge shows the engine
If the vehicle has a diesel engine, coolant temperature.
see the Duramax diesel supplement Metric
for more information. It also provides an indicator of how
hard the vehicle is working. During a
If the vehicle is a hybrid, see the majority of the operation, the gauge
hybrid supplement for more reads 100C (210F) or less.
information. If pulling a load or going up hills, it
is normal for the temperature to
fluctuate and go over the 113C
(235F) mark. If the gauge reaches
the 125C (260F) mark, it indicates
that the cooling system is working
beyond its capacity.
See Engine Overheating on When the engine is running, this The vehicle can only be driven for a
page 1021. gauge shows the condition of the short time with the readings outside
If the vehicle is a hybrid, see the charging system. The gauge can the normal operating range. If the
hybrid supplement for more transition from a higher to lower or a vehicle must be driven, turn off all
information. lower to higher reading. This is accessories, such as the radio and
normal. If the vehicle is operating air conditioner.
outside the normal operating range,
Voltmeter Gauge the charging system light comes on.
Readings outside the normal
operating range indicate a possible
See Charging System Light on problem in the electrical system.
page 521 for more information. The Have the vehicle serviced as soon
voltmeter gauge may also read as possible.
lower when in fuel economy mode.
This is normal.
Safety Belt Reminders
Readings outside the normal
operating range can also occur Driver Safety Belt Reminder
when a large number of electrical Light
accessories are operating in the There is a driver safety belt
vehicle and the engine is left idling reminder light on the instrument
for an extended period. This cluster.
condition is normal since the
charging system is not able to
This gauge indicates the battery provide full power at engine idle. As
voltage when the ignition is engine speeds are increased, this
turned on. condition should correct itself as
When the ignition is on, this gauge higher engine speeds allow the
indicates the battery voltage. charging system to create maximum
power.
When the vehicle is started this light For vehicles equipped with the Airbag Readiness Light
flashes and a chime may come on passenger safety belt warning light,
to remind the driver to fasten their when the vehicle is started this light This light shows if there is an
safety belt. Then the light stays on flashes and a chime may come on electrical problem with the airbag
solid until the belt is buckled. This to remind passengers to fasten their system. The system check includes
cycle may continue several times if safety belt. Then the light stays on the airbag sensor(s), passenger
the driver remains or becomes solid until the belt is buckled. This sensing system (if equipped), the
unbuckled while the vehicle is cycle continues several times if the pretensioners, the airbag modules,
moving. passenger remains or becomes the wiring, and the crash sensing
unbuckled while the vehicle is and diagnostic module. For more
If the driver safety belt is buckled, information on the airbag system,
neither the light nor the chime moving.
see Airbag System on page 322.
comes on. If the passenger safety belt is
buckled, neither the chime nor the
Passenger Safety Belt light comes on.
Reminder Light
The front passenger safety belt
There may be a passenger safety warning light and chime may turn on
belt reminder light near the if an object is put on the seat such
passenger airbag status indicator. as a briefcase, handbag, grocery
See Passenger Sensing System on bag, laptop, or other electronic The airbag readiness light comes on
page 332. device. To turn off the warning light for several seconds when the
and/or chime, remove the object vehicle is started. If the light does
from the seat or buckle the not come on then, have it fixed
safety belt. immediately.
Airbag On-Off Light the on or off symbol, will light to let

{ WARNING you know the status of the right front
If the vehicle has an airbag on-off passenger frontal airbag.
If the airbag readiness light stays switch, it also has a passenger
on after the vehicle is started or airbag status indicator located in the When the right front passenger
comes on while driving, it means overhead console. airbag is manually turned off using
the airbag system might not be the airbag on-off switch in the glove
working properly. The airbags in box, the indicator light OFF or the
the vehicle might not inflate in a off symbol will come on and stay on
as a reminder that the airbag has
crash, or they could even inflate
been turned off. This light will go off
without a crash. To help avoid
when the airbag has been turned
injury, have the vehicle serviced on. See Airbag On-Off Switch on
right away. United States page 329 for more information,
including important safety
If there is a problem with the airbag information.
system, a Driver Information Center
(DIC) message may also come on.
See Airbag System Messages on
page 543.
Canada and Mexico
When the vehicle is started, the
passenger airbag status indicator
will light ON and OFF, or the symbol
for on and off, will light for several
seconds as a system check. Then,
after several more seconds, the
status indicator ON or OFF, or either
{ WARNING { WARNING
If the right front passenger airbag If the airbag readiness light ever
is turned off for a person who is comes on and stays on, it means
not in a risk group identified by that something may be wrong
the national government, that with the airbag system. For
person will not have the extra example, the right front
protection of an airbag. In a passenger airbag could inflate
crash, the airbag will not be able even though the airbag on-off
to inflate and help protect the switch is turned off.
person sitting there. To help avoid injury to yourself or
United States Do not turn off the passenger others, have the vehicle serviced
airbag unless the person sitting right away. See Airbag Readiness
there is in a risk group identified Light on page 517 for more
by the national government. See information, including important
Airbag On-Off Switch on safety information.
page 329 for more on this,
including important safety If the word ON or the on symbol is
information. lit, it means that the right front
passenger frontal airbag is enabled
(may inflate). See Airbag On-Off
Switch on page 329 for more
information, including important
safety information.
Canada and Mexico
If, after several seconds, both status In addition, if the vehicle has a or either the on or off symbol to let
indicator lights remain on, or if there passenger sensing system for the you know the status of the right front
are no lights at all, there may be a right front passenger position, the passenger frontal airbag.
problem with the lights or the airbag label on the vehicle's sun visor If the word ON or the on symbol is
on-off switch. See your dealer for refers to ADVANCED AIRBAGS. lit on the passenger airbag status
service. indicator, it means that the right
front passenger frontal airbag is
Passenger Airbag Status enabled (may inflate).
Indicator If the word OFF or the off symbol is
If the vehicle has one of the lit on the airbag status indicator, it
indicators pictured in the following means that the passenger sensing
illustrations, then the vehicle has a United States system has turned off the right front
passenger sensing system for the passenger frontal airbag.
right front passenger position unless If, after several seconds, both status
there is an airbag off switch located indicator lights remain on, or if there
in the glove box. If there is an are no lights at all, there may be a
airbag off switch, the vehicle does problem with the lights or the
not have a passenger sensing passenger sensing system. See
system. See Airbag On-Off Switch your dealer for service.
Canada and Mexico
on page 329.
When the vehicle is started, the
The passenger airbag status
passenger airbag status indicator
indicator is on the overhead
will light ON and OFF, or the symbol
console. See Passenger Sensing
for on and off, for several seconds
System on page 332 for important
as a system check. Then, after
safety information.
several more seconds, the status
indicator will light either ON or OFF,
If it does not, have the vehicle Malfunction

{ WARNING serviced by your dealer.
Indicator Lamp
If the airbag readiness light ever The light should go out once the
engine starts. If it stays on, A computer system called OBD II
comes on and stays on, it means (On-Board Diagnostics-Second
that something may be wrong or comes on while driving, there
could be a problem with the Generation) monitors the operation
with the airbag system. To help of the vehicle to ensure emissions
avoid injury to yourself or others, charging system. A charging system
message in the Driver Information are at acceptable levels, helping to
have the vehicle serviced right maintain a clean environment. The
Center (DIC) can also appear. See
away. See Airbag Readiness malfunction indicator lamp comes
Battery Voltage and Charging
Light on page 517 for more on when the vehicle is placed in
Messages on page 538 for more
information, including important information. This light could indicate ON/RUN, as a check to show it is
safety information. that there are problems with a working. If it does not, have the
generator drive belt, or that there is vehicle serviced by your dealer. See
an electrical problem. Have it Ignition Positions on page 924.
Charging System Light
checked right away. If the vehicle
must be driven a short distance with
the light on, turn off accessories,
such as the radio and air
conditioner.
information. If the malfunction indicator lamp
This light comes on briefly when the comes on while the engine is
ignition key is turned to START, but running, this indicates that the OBD
the engine is not running, as a II system has detected a problem
check to show it is working. and diagnosis and service might be
required.
Malfunctions often are indicated by costly repairs not covered by the If the light continues to flash, find a
the system before any problem is vehicle warranty. This could also safe place to stop and park the
apparent. Being aware of the light result in a failure to pass a vehicle. Turn the vehicle off, wait at
can prevent more serious damage required Emission Inspection/ least 10 seconds, and restart the
to the vehicle. This system also Maintenance test. See engine. If the light is still flashing,
assists the service technician in Accessories and Modifications on follow the previous steps and see
correctly diagnosing any page 103. your dealer for service as soon as
malfunction. This light comes on during a possible.
Notice: If the vehicle is malfunction in one of two ways: Light On Steady: An emission
continually driven with this light Light Flashing: A misfire condition control system malfunction has
on, the emission controls might has been detected. A misfire been detected on the vehicle.
not work as well, the vehicle fuel increases vehicle emissions and Diagnosis and service might be
economy might not be as good, could damage the emission control required.
and the engine might not run as system on the vehicle. Diagnosis The following may correct an
smoothly. This could lead to and service might be required. emission control system
costly repairs that might not be malfunction:
covered by the vehicle warranty. To prevent more serious damage to
the vehicle: . Check that the fuel cap is fully
Notice: Modifications made to the installed. See Filling the Tank on
engine, transmission, exhaust, . Reduce vehicle speed.
page 972. The diagnostic
intake, or fuel system of the . Avoid hard accelerations. system can determine if the fuel
vehicle or the replacement of the cap has been left off or
original tires with other than
. Avoid steep uphill grades.
improperly installed. A loose or
those of the same Tire . If towing a trailer, reduce the missing fuel cap allows fuel to
Performance Criteria (TPC) can amount of cargo being hauled as evaporate into the atmosphere.
affect the vehicle's emission soon as it is possible. A few driving trips with the cap
controls and can cause this light properly installed should turn the
to come on. Modifications to light off.
these systems could lead to

. Check that good quality fuel is Emissions Inspection and the ignition is turned to ON/RUN
used. Poor fuel quality causes Maintenance Programs while the engine is off. See your
the engine not to run as dealer for assistance in verifying
efficiently as designed and may Depending on where you live, your proper operation of the
cause stalling after start-up, vehicle may be required to malfunction indicator lamp.
stalling when the vehicle is participate in an emission control
changed into gear, misfiring, system inspection and maintenance . The OBD II (On-Board
hesitation on acceleration, program. For the inspection, the Diagnostics) system determines
or stumbling on acceleration. emission system test equipment will that critical emission control
These conditions might go away likely connect to the vehicle's Data systems have not been
once the engine is warmed up. Link Connector (DLC). completely diagnosed. The
vehicle would be considered not
If one or more of these conditions ready for inspection. This can
occurs, change the fuel brand used. happen if the 12-volt battery has
It may require at least one full tank recently been replaced or run
of the proper fuel to turn the light off. down. The diagnostic system is
See Recommended Fuel on designed to evaluate critical
page 969. emission control systems during
normal driving. This can take
If none of the above have made the The DLC is under the instrument several days of routine driving.
light turn off, your dealer can check panel to the left of the steering If this has been done and the
the vehicle. The dealer has the wheel. See your dealer if assistance vehicle still does not pass the
proper test equipment and is needed. inspection for lack of OBD II
diagnostic tools to fix any system readiness, your dealer
mechanical or electrical problems The vehicle may not pass
inspection if: can prepare the vehicle for
that might have developed. inspection.
. The malfunction indicator lamp is
on with the engine running, or if
the light does not come on when
Brake System Warning If the light comes on while driving,

pull off the road and stop carefully.
Light The pedal might be harder to push
With the ignition on, the brake or might go closer to the floor. It can
system warning light comes on take longer to stop. If the light is still
when the parking brake is set. If the on, have the vehicle towed for
vehicle is driven with the parking Metric English service. See Towing the Vehicle on
brake engaged, a chime sounds page 1089.
when the vehicle speed is greater This light comes on briefly when the
than 8 km/h (5 mph). ignition key is turned to ON/RUN.
If it does not come on then, have it
The vehicle brake system consists information.
fixed so it is ready to warn if there is
of two hydraulic circuits. If one
a problem.
circuit is not working, the remaining Antilock Brake System
circuit can still work to stop the (ABS) Warning Light
vehicle. For normal braking { WARNING
performance, both circuits need to
be working. The brake system might not be
working properly if the brake
If the warning light comes on and a system warning light is on.
chime sounds there could be a Driving with the brake system
brake problem. Have the brake warning light on can lead to a
system inspected right away. crash. If the light is still on after
This light can also come on due to the vehicle has been pulled off For vehicles with the Antilock Brake
low brake fluid. See Brake Fluid on the road and carefully stopped, System (ABS), this light comes on
page 1026 for more information. have the vehicle towed for briefly when the engine is started.
service.
If it does not, have the vehicle If the vehicle is a hybrid, see the Tow/Haul Mode Light
serviced by your dealer. If the hybrid supplement for more
system is working normally the information.
indicator light then goes off.
If the ABS light stays on, turn the Four-Wheel-Drive Light
ignition off. If the light comes on
while driving, stop as soon as it is
safely possible and turn the ignition
off. Then start the engine again to For vehicles with the Tow/Haul
reset the system. If the ABS light Mode feature, this light comes on
stays on, or comes on again while when the Tow/Haul Mode has been
driving, the vehicle needs service. activated.
If the regular brake system warning For vehicles equipped with the
light is not on, the vehicle still has For more information, see Tow/Haul
four-wheel-drive light, it comes on
brakes, but not antilock brakes. Mode on page 938.
when a vehicle with a manual
If the regular brake system warning transfer case is shifted into
light is also on, the vehicle does not four-wheel drive and the front axle StabiliTrak OFF Light
have antilock brakes and there is a engages.
problem with the regular brakes.
See Brake System Warning Light on Some delay between the shifting
page 524. and the light coming on is normal.
For vehicles with a Driver See Four-Wheel Drive on page 941

Information Center (DIC), see Brake for more information.
System Messages on page 538 for
all brakerelated DIC messages. This light comes on briefly while
starting the engine.
If it does not, have the vehicle Traction Control System If the light flashes while driving, this
serviced by your dealer. If the means that StabiliTrak or TCS is
system is working normally, the
(TCS)/StabiliTrak Light assisting in controlling the vehicle.
indicator light then goes off. See StabiliTrak System on
Press and release the Traction page 956 for more information.
Control System (TCS)/StabiliTrak
button to turn off TCS, and a Tire Pressure Light
message displays in the DIC.
Press and briefly hold the TCS/
StabiliTrak button to turn off the The TCS/StabiliTrak light comes on
StabiliTrak system; the StabiliTrak briefly when the engine is started.
Off light comes on and a message
appears in the Driver Information If the light does not come on or
Center (DIC). stays on, have the vehicle serviced
by the dealer. If the system is For vehicles with the Tire Pressure
If the StabiliTrak/TCS system is off, working normally, the indicator light Monitor System (TPMS), this light
the system does not assist in turns off. comes on briefly when the engine is
controlling the vehicle. Turn on the started. It provides information
StabiliTrak/TCS system and the If the light comes on and stays on
while driving, and a message about tire pressures and the TPMS.
indicator light turns off.
displays in the Driver Information When the Light Is On Steady
See StabiliTrak System on Center (DIC), have the vehicle
page 956, and Ride Control System serviced by the dealer. See Ride This indicates that one or more of
Messages on page 542 for more Control System Messages on the tires are significantly
information. page 542 for more information. underinflated.
A Driver Information Center (DIC)
tire pressure message may also
display. See Tire Messages on
page 544. Stop as soon as
possible, and inflate the tires to the covered by the vehicle warranty. Low Fuel Warning Light
pressure value shown on the Tire Check the oil level as soon as
and Loading Information label. See possible. Add oil if required, but
Tire Pressure on page 1056. if the oil level is within the
operating range and the oil
When the Light Flashes First and pressure is still low, have the
Then Is On Steady
vehicle serviced. Always follow
If the light flashes for about a minute the maintenance schedule for
and then stays on, there may be a changing engine oil.
problem with the TPMS. If the This light, under the fuel gauge,
This light comes on briefly while comes on briefly while the engine is
problem is not corrected, the light starting the engine. If it does not,
will come on at every ignition cycle. being started.
have the vehicle serviced by your
See Tire Pressure Monitor dealer. If the system is working This light and a chime, if the vehicle
Operation on page 1059. normally the indicator light then is equipped with a radio, comes on
goes off. when the fuel tank is low on fuel.
Engine Oil Pressure Light The Driver Information Center also
If the light comes on and stays on, it displays a FUEL LEVEL LOW
means that oil is not flowing through message. See Fuel System
the engine properly. The vehicle Messages on page 541 for more
could be low on oil and it might information. When fuel is added this
have some other system problem. light and message should go off. If it
If the vehicle is a hybrid, see the does not, have the vehicle serviced
hybrid supplement for more by your dealer.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil information.
maintenance can damage the
engine. Driving with the engine
oil low can also damage the
engine. The repairs would not be
Security Light For information regarding this light For vehicles with fog lamps, this
and the vehicle's security system, light comes on when the fog lamps
see Vehicle Alarm System on are on.
page 210. The light goes out when the fog
lamps are turned off. See Fog
High-Beam On Light Lamps on page 66 for more
information.
The security light should come on Cruise Control Light

briefly as the engine is started. If the
system is working normally, the
indicator light turns off. If it does not
come on, have the vehicle serviced
by your dealer. This light comes on when the
high-beam headlamps are in use.
If the light stays on and the engine
does not start, there could be a See Headlamp High/Low-Beam
problem with the theft-deterrent Changer on page 62. For vehicles equipped with cruise
system. control, this light comes on
This light is also used to indicate the Front Fog Lamp Light whenever the cruise control is set.
status of the anti-theft alarm system The light goes out when the cruise
when the ignition is turned off. The control is turned off. See Cruise
light will flash rapidly if the alarm Control on page 959 for more
system is arming and one or more information.
of the monitored entry points is not
closed. The light will stay on if the
alarm is arming and all entry points
are closed.
Information Displays The DIC has different displays DIC Buttons

which can be accessed by pressing
the DIC buttons located on the
Driver Information instrument panel, next to the
Center (DIC) steering wheel. If the vehicle does
not have DIC buttons, the trip
The vehicle has a Driver Information
odometer reset stem can be used to
Center (DIC).
access some of the menu items.
The DIC displays information about
The DIC displays trip, fuel, and
this vehicle. It also displays warning
vehicle system information, and
messages if a system problem is
warning messages if a system
detected.
problem is detected.
All messages will appear in the DIC
The DIC also allows some features
display located below the
to be customized. See Vehicle
tachometer in the instrument panel The buttons are the trip/fuel, vehicle
Personalization (With DIC Buttons)
cluster. information, customization, and set/
The DIC comes on when the ignition reset buttons. The button functions
If the vehicle has a diesel engine, are detailed in the following pages.
is on. After a short delay, the DIC
see the Duramax diesel
will display the information that was 3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button
supplement for more information.
last displayed before the engine to display the odometer, trip
was turned off. odometer, fuel range, average
economy, fuel used, timer,
transmission temperature, and
instantaneous economy and Active
Fuel Management indicator. The
compass and outside temperature
will also be shown in the display.
The temperature will be shown in C Trip/Fuel Menu Items (with DIC The trip odometer can be reset to
or F depending on the units Buttons) zero by pressing the set/reset
selected. button while the trip odometer is
3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button displayed. You can also reset the
T (Vehicle Information): Press to scroll through the following menu trip odometer while it is displayed by
this button to display the oil life, items:
units, tire pressure readings for pressing and holding the trip
vehicles with the Tire Pressure Odometer odometer reset stem.
Monitor System (TPMS), trailer Press the trip/fuel button until The trip odometer has a feature
brake gain and output information ODOMETER displays. This display called the retro-active reset. This
for vehicles with the Integrated shows the distance the vehicle has can be used to set the trip odometer
Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system, been driven in either kilometers (km) to the number of miles (kilometers)
engine hours, compass zone or miles. Pressing the trip odometer driven since the ignition was last
setting, and compass recalibration. reset stem will also display the turned on. This can be used if the
U (Customization): Press this odometer. trip odometer is not reset at the
button to customize the feature beginning of the trip.
To switch between metric and
settings on the vehicle. See Vehicle English measurements, see Units To use the retro-active reset feature,
Personalization (With DIC Buttons) later in this section. press and hold the set/reset button
on page 546 for more information. for at least four seconds. The trip
Trip Odometer odometer will display the number of
V (Set/Reset): Press this button to
kilometers (km) or miles driven since
set or reset certain functions and to Press the trip/fuel button until TRIP
turn off or acknowledge messages displays. This display shows the the ignition was last turned on and
on the DIC. current distance traveled in either the vehicle was moving. Once the
kilometers (km) or miles since the vehicle begins moving, the trip
last reset for the trip odometer. odometer will accumulate mileage.
Pressing the trip odometer reset For example, if the vehicle was
stem will also display the trip driven 8 km (5 miles) before it is
odometer. started again, and then the
retro-active reset feature is
activated, the display will show 8 km fuel economies. Generally, freeway Speedometer
(5 miles). As the vehicle begins driving produces better fuel The speedometer shows how fast
moving, the display will then economy than city driving. Fuel the vehicle is moving in either
increase to 8.2 km (5.1 miles), range cannot be reset. kilometers per hour (km/h) or miles
8.4 km (5.2 miles), etc. per hour (mph). The speedometer
Average Economy
Fuel Range cannot be reset.
Press the trip/fuel button until AVG
Press the trip/fuel button until FUEL ECONOMY displays. This display Timer
RANGE displays. This display shows the approximate average Press the trip/fuel button until
shows the approximate number of liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km) TIMER displays. This display can be
remaining kilometers (km) or miles or miles per gallon (mpg). This used as a timer.
the vehicle can be driven without number is calculated based on the
refueling. The display will show number of L/100 km (mpg) recorded To start the timer, press the set/
LOW if the fuel level is low. since the last time this menu item reset button while TIMER is
was reset. To reset AVG displayed. The display will show the
The fuel range estimate is based on amount of time that has passed
an average of the vehicle's fuel ECONOMY, press and hold the set/
reset button. since the timer was last reset, not
economy over recent driving history including time the ignition is off.
and the amount of fuel remaining in Fuel Used Time will continue to be counted as
the fuel tank. This estimate will long as the ignition is on, even if
change if driving conditions change. Press the trip/fuel button until FUEL
USED displays. This display shows another display is being shown on
For example, if driving in traffic and the DIC. The timer will record up to
making frequent stops, this display the number of liters (L) or
gallons (gal) of fuel used since the 99 hours, 59 minutes, and
may read one number, but if the 59 seconds (99:59:59) after which
vehicle is driven on a freeway, the last reset of this menu item. To reset
the fuel used information, press and the display will return to zero.
number may change even though
the same amount of fuel is in the hold the set/reset button while FUEL To stop the timer, press the set/reset
fuel tank. This is because different USED is displayed. button briefly while TIMER is
driving conditions produce different displayed.
To reset the timer to zero, press and An Active Fuel Management estimate of the oil's remaining useful
hold the set/reset button while indicator displays on the right side life. If you see 99% OIL LIFE
TIMER is displayed. of the DIC, while INST ECON REMAINING on the display, that
displays on the left side. Active Fuel means 99% of the current oil life
Transmission Temperature Management allows the engine to remains. The engine oil life system
Press the trip/fuel button until operate on either four or eight will alert you to change the oil on a
TRANS TEMP displays. This cylinders, depending on driving schedule consistent with your
display shows the temperature of demands. When Active Fuel driving conditions.
the automatic transmission fluid in Management is active, V4 will When the remaining oil life is low,
either degrees Celsius (C) or display on the DIC. When Active the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
degrees Fahrenheit (F). Fuel Management is inactive, V8 message will appear on the display.
will display. See Active Fuel See CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
Instantaneous Economy and Management on page 932 for
Active Fuel Management under Engine Oil Messages on
more information. page 540. You should change the
Indicator
Blank Display oil as soon as you can. See Engine
If the vehicle has this display, press
Oil on page 106. In addition to the
the trip/fuel button until INST ECON This display shows no information. engine oil life system monitoring the
V8 displays. This display shows the
Vehicle Information Menu oil life, additional maintenance is
current fuel economy at a particular
Items (with DIC Buttons) recommended in the Maintenance
moment and will change frequently
Schedule in this manual. See
as driving conditions change. This T (Vehicle Information): Press Maintenance Schedule on
display shows the instantaneous this button to scroll through the page 113 for more information.
fuel economy in liters per following menu items:
100 kilometers (L/100 km) or miles Remember, you must reset the OIL
per gallon (mpg). Unlike average Oil Life LIFE display after each oil change.
economy, this screen cannot be Press the vehicle information button It will not reset itself. Also, be
reset. until OIL LIFE REMAINING careful not to reset the OIL LIFE
displays. This display shows an display accidentally at any time
other than when the oil has just
been changed. It cannot be reset information button again until the TRAILER GAIN shows the trailer
accurately until the next oil change. DIC displays REAR TIRES kPa gain setting. This setting can be
To reset the engine oil life system, (PSI) LEFT ## RIGHT ##. adjusted from 0.0 to 10.0 with either
see Engine Oil Life System on If a low tire pressure condition is a trailer connected or disconnected.
page 109. detected by the system while OUTPUT shows the power output to
Units driving, a message advising you to the trailer any time a trailer with
add pressure in a specific tire will electric brakes is connected. Output
Press the vehicle information button appear in the display. See Tire is displayed in 0 to 10 bars. Dashes
until UNITS displays. This display Pressure on page 1056 and Tire may appear in the OUTPUT display.
allows you to select between metric Messages on page 544 for more
or English units of measurement. To adjust trailer gain see Integrated
information. Trailer Brake Control System under
Once in this display, press the set/
reset button to select between If the tire pressure display shows Towing Equipment on page 993 for
METRIC or ENGLISH units. All of dashes instead of a value, there more information.
the vehicle information will then be may be a problem with the vehicle.
If this consistently occurs, see your Battery
displayed in the unit of
measurement selected. dealer for service. This display shows the current
battery voltage. If the voltage is in
Tire Pressure Trailer Gain and Output the normal range, the value will
If the vehicle has the Tire Pressure On vehicles with the Integrated display. For example, the display
Monitor System (TPMS), the Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system, may read BATTERY 13 VOLTS.
pressure for each tire can be viewed the trailer brake display appears in Your vehicle's charging system
in the DIC. The tire pressure will be the DIC. Press the vehicle regulates voltage based on the state
shown in either kilopascals (kPa) or information button until TRAILER of the battery. The battery voltage
pounds per square inch (psi). Press GAIN and OUTPUT display. may fluctuate when viewing this
the vehicle information button until information on the DIC. This is
the DIC displays FRONT normal.
TIRES kPa (PSI) LEFT ##
RIGHT ##. Press the vehicle
Oil Pressure Trip Odometer Reset Stem The trip odometer has a feature
This display shows the oil pressure Menu Items (with DIC Buttons) called the retro-active reset. This
in either kilopascals (kPa) or pounds can be used to set the trip odometer
Use the trip odometer reset stem to to the number of miles (kilometers)
per square inch (psi). view the odometer and trip driven since the ignition was last
Engine Hours odometer. The Language selection turned on. This can be used if the
and Engine Hours display can also trip odometer is not reset at the
Press the vehicle information button be accessed with the trip odometer
until ENGINE HOURS displays. This beginning of the trip.
reset stem.
display shows the total number of To use the retro-active reset feature,
hours the engine has run. Odometer press and hold the trip odometer
Press the trip odometer reset stem reset stem for at least four seconds.
Compass Zone Setting
until ODOMETER displays. This The trip odometer will display the
This display allows for setting the display shows the distance the number of kilometers (km) or
compass zone. See Compass on vehicle has been driven in either miles (mi) driven since the ignition
page 55 for more information. kilometers (km) or miles (mi). was last turned on and the vehicle
was moving. Once the vehicle
Compass Recalibration Trip Odometer begins moving, the trip odometer
This display allows for calibrating Press the trip odometer reset stem will accumulate mileage. For
the compass. See Compass on until TRIP displays. This display example, if the vehicle was driven
page 55 for more information. shows the current distance traveled 8 km (5 miles) before it is started
in either kilometers (km) or again, and then the retro-active
Blank Display
miles (mi) since the last reset for the reset feature is activated, the
This display shows no information. trip odometer. display will show 8 km (5 miles). As
the vehicle begins moving, the
The trip odometer can be reset to display will then increase to 8.2 km
zero by pressing and holding the trip (5.1 miles), 8.4 km (5.2 miles), etc.
odometer reset stem while the trip
odometer is displayed.
Language Engine Hours 3. Continue to press and hold the

This display allows you to select the To display the ENGINE HOURS, trip odometer reset stem to scroll
language in which the DIC place the ignition in LOCK/OFF or through all of the available
messages will appear. To select a ACC/ACCESSORY, then press and languages.
language: hold the trip odometer reset stem for The available languages are
1. Press the trip odometer reset four seconds while viewing the ENGLISH (default),
stem until ODOMETER displays. ODOMETER. This display shows FRANCAIS (French),
the total number of hours the engine ESPANOL (Spanish), and NO
2. While in the ODOMETER has run. CHANGE.
display, press and hold the trip
odometer reset stem for Trip Odometer Reset Stem 4. Once the desired language is
three seconds until the currently Menu Items (without DIC displayed, release the trip
set language displays. Buttons) odometer reset stem to set the
choice.
3. Continue to press and hold the Language
trip odometer reset stem to scroll Trip Odometer
through all of the available This display allows you to select the
language in which the DIC Press the trip odometer reset stem
languages. until TRIP displays. This display
messages will appear. To select a
The available selections are language: shows the current distance traveled
ENGLISH (default), in either kilometers (km) or
FRANCAIS (French), 1. Press the trip odometer reset miles (mi) since the last reset for the
ESPANOL (Spanish), and NO stem until ODOMETER displays. trip odometer.
CHANGE. 2. While in the ODOMETER The trip odometer can be reset to
4. Once the desired language is display, press and hold the trip zero by pressing and holding the trip
displayed, release the trip odometer reset stem for odometer reset stem while the trip
odometer reset stem to set the three seconds until the currently odometer is displayed.
choice. set language displays.
The trip odometer has a feature Transmission Temperature To adjust trailer gain see Integrated
called the retro-active reset. This Press the trip odometer reset stem Trailer Brake Control System under
can be used to set the trip odometer until TRANS TEMP displays. This Towing Equipment on page 993 for
to the number of miles (kilometers) display shows the temperature of more information.
driven since the ignition was last the automatic transmission fluid in
turned on. This can be used if the Speedometer
either degrees Celsius (C) or
trip odometer is not reset at the degrees Fahrenheit (F). The speedometer shows how fast
beginning of the trip. the vehicle is moving in either
To use the retro-active reset feature, Trailer Gain and Output kilometers per hour (km/h) or miles
press and hold the trip odometer On vehicles with the Integrated per hour (mph). The speedometer
reset stem for at least four seconds. Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system, cannot be reset.
The trip odometer will display the the trailer brake display appears in Battery
number of kilometers (km) or the DIC. Press the trip odometer
reset stem until TRAILER GAIN and This display shows the current
miles (mi) driven since the ignition
OUTPUT display. battery voltage. If the voltage is in
was last turned on and the vehicle
the normal range, the value will
was moving. Once the vehicle TRAILER GAIN shows the trailer display. For example, the display
begins moving, the trip odometer gain setting. This setting can be may read BATTERY 13 VOLTS.
will accumulate mileage. For adjusted from 0.0 to 10.0 with either Your vehicle's charging system
example, if the vehicle was driven a trailer connected or disconnected. regulates voltage based on the state
8 km (5 miles) before it is started
OUTPUT shows the power output to of the battery. The battery voltage
again, and then the retro-active
the trailer any time a trailer with may fluctuate when viewing this
reset feature is activated, the
electric brakes is connected. Output information on the DIC. This is
display will show 8 km (5 miles). As
is displayed in 0 to 10 bars. Dashes normal.
the vehicle begins moving, the
display will then increase to 8.2 km may appear in the OUTPUT display. Oil Pressure
(5.1 miles), 8.4 km (5.2 miles), etc.
This display shows the oil pressure
in either kilopascals (kPa) or pounds
per square inch (psi).
Compass Zone Setting under Engine Oil Messages on Vehicle Messages

This display allows for setting the page 540. You should change the
oil as soon as you can. See Engine Messages displayed on the DIC
compass zone. See Compass on
Oil on page 106. In addition to the indicate the status of the vehicle or
engine oil life system monitoring the some action may be needed to
Compass Recalibration oil life, additional maintenance is correct a condition. Multiple
recommended in the Maintenance messages may appear one after
This display allows for calibrating
Schedule in this manual. See another.
the compass. See Compass on
page 55 for more information. Maintenance Schedule on The messages that do not require
page 113 for more information. immediate action can be
Oil Life acknowledged and cleared by
Remember, you must reset the OIL
To access this display, the vehicle LIFE display after each oil change. pressing V (Set/Reset) or the trip
must be in P (Park). Press the trip It will not reset itself. Also, be odometer reset stem.
odometer reset stem until OIL LIFE careful not to reset the OIL LIFE
REMAINING displays. This display display accidentally at any time The messages that require
shows an estimate of the oil's other than when the oil has just immediate action cannot be cleared
remaining useful life. If you see been changed. It cannot be reset until that action is performed.
99% OIL LIFE REMAINING on the accurately until the next oil change. All messages should be taken
display, that means 99% of the To reset the engine oil life system, seriously and clearing the message
current oil life remains. The engine see Engine Oil Life System on does not correct the problem.
oil life system will alert you to page 109.
The following are the possible
change the oil on a schedule
messages and some information
consistent with your driving
about them.
conditions.
If the vehicle has a diesel engine,
When the remaining oil life is low,
the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON see the Duramax diesel
message will appear on the display. supplement for more information.
See CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
Battery Voltage and could drain the battery. Turn off all vehicle and check for the message
unnecessary accessories. Have the on the DIC display. If the message
Charging Messages electrical system checked as soon is still displayed or appears again
BATTERY LOW START as possible. See your dealer. when you begin driving, the brake
VEHICLE system needs service. See your
Brake System Messages dealer.
When the vehicles battery is
severely discharged, this message SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM SERVICE TRAILER BRAKE
will display and four chimes will SYSTEM
This message displays along with
sound. Start the vehicle On vehicles with the Integrated
the brake system warning light if
immediately. If the vehicle is not Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system,
there is a problem with the brake
started and the battery continues to this message displays and a chime
system. See Brake System Warning
discharge, the climate controls, may sound when there is a problem
Light on page 524. If this message
heated seats, and audio systems with the ITBC system.
appears, stop as soon as possible
will shut off and the vehicle may
and turn off the vehicle. Restart the When this message displays, power
require a jump start. These systems
vehicle and check for the message is no longer available to the trailer
will function again after the vehicle
on the DIC display. If the message brakes.
is started.
is still displayed or appears again
SERVICE BATTERY when you begin driving, the brake As soon as it is safe to do so,
system needs service as soon as carefully pull your vehicle over to
CHARGING SYSTEM the side of the road and turn the
possible. See your dealer.
On some vehicles, this message ignition off. Check the wiring
displays if there is a problem with SERVICE BRAKES SOON connection to the trailer and turn the
the battery charging system. Under On some vehicles, this message ignition back on. If this message still
certain conditions, the charging displays if there is a problem with displays, either your vehicle or the
system light may also turn on in the the brake system. If this message trailer needs service. See your
instrument panel cluster. See appears, stop as soon as possible dealer.
Charging System Light on and turn off the vehicle. Restart the
page 521. Driving with this problem
See Integrated Trailer Brake LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN the door for obstructions, and close
Control System under Towing (Crew Cab) the door again. Check to see if the
Equipment on page 993 for more message still appears on the DIC.
information. This message displays and a chime
may sound if the driver side rear
door is not fully closed and the
Engine Cooling System
Door Ajar Messages vehicle is shifted out of P (Park). Messages
DRIVER DOOR OPEN Stop and turn off the vehicle, check Notice: If you drive the vehicle
the door for obstructions, and close while the engine is overheating,
This message displays and a chime the door again. Check to see if the
may sound if the driver door is not severe engine damage may
message still appears on the DIC. occur. If an overheat warning
fully closed and the vehicle is
shifted out of P (Park). Stop and turn PASSENGER DOOR OPEN appears on the instrument cluster
off the vehicle, check the door for and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as
This message displays and a chime soon as possible. See Engine
obstructions, and close the door may sound if the front passenger
again. Check to see if the message Overheating on page 1021.
door is not fully closed and the
still appears on the DIC. vehicle is shifted out of P (Park). ENGINE HOT A/C (Air
HOOD OPEN Stop and turn off the vehicle, check Conditioning) TURNED OFF
the door for obstructions, and close This message displays when the
This message displays and a chime the door again. Check to see if the
may sound if the hood is not fully engine coolant becomes hotter than
message still appears on the DIC. the normal operating temperature.
closed. Stop and turn off the
vehicle, check the hood for RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN See Engine Coolant Temperature
obstructions, and close the hood (Crew Cab) Gauge on page 515. To avoid
again. Check to see if the message added strain on a hot engine, the air
This message displays and a chime conditioning compressor
still appears on the DIC.
may sound if the passenger side automatically turns off. When the
rear door is not fully closed and the coolant temperature returns to
vehicle is shifted out of P (Park).
Stop and turn off the vehicle, check
normal, the air conditioning and turn off the vehicle as soon as it and allow the vehicle to idle until it
compressor turns back on. You can is safe to do so to avoid severe cools down. See Engine Coolant
continue to drive your vehicle. damage. This message clears when Temperature Gauge on page 515.
If this message continues to appear, the engine has cooled to a safe
operating temperature. OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP
have the system repaired by your ENGINE
dealer as soon as possible to avoid
damage to the engine. Engine Oil Messages Notice: If you drive the vehicle
while the engine oil pressure is
ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON low, severe engine damage may
ENGINE This message displays when the occur. If a low oil pressure
This message displays when the engine oil needs to be changed. warning appears on the Driver
engine coolant temperature is too When you change the engine oil, be Information Center (DIC), stop the
hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to sure to reset the CHANGE ENGINE vehicle as soon as possible. Do
idle until it cools down. See Engine OIL SOON message. See Engine not drive the vehicle until the
Coolant Temperature Gauge on Oil Life System on page 109 for cause of the low oil pressure is
page 515. information on how to reset the corrected. See Engine Oil on
message. See Engine Oil on page 106 for more information.
See Overheated Engine Protection page 106 and Maintenance
Operating Mode on page 1023 for This message displays if low oil
Schedule on page 113 for more pressure levels occur. Stop the
information on driving to a safe information.
place in an emergency. vehicle as soon as safely possible
ENGINE OIL HOT IDLE and do not operate it until the cause
ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE of the low oil pressure has been
ENGINE corrected. Check the oil as soon as
This message displays when the possible and have the vehicle
This message displays and a chime engine oil becomes hotter than the serviced by your dealer. See Engine
may sound if the engine cooling normal operating temperature. Stop Oil on page 106.
system reaches unsafe
temperatures for operation. Stop
Engine Power Messages Fuel System Messages Key and Lock Messages
ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED FUEL LEVEL LOW REPLACE BATTERY IN
This message displays and a chime This message displays and a chime REMOTE KEY
may sound when the cooling system may sound if the fuel level is low. This message displays if a Remote
temperature gets too hot and the Refuel as soon as possible. See Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
engine further enters the engine Fuel Gauge on page 513 and Fuel battery is low. The battery needs to
coolant protection mode. See on page 968 for more information. be replaced in the transmitter. See
Engine Overheating on page 1021 Battery Replacement under
for more information. TIGHTEN GAS CAP Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
This message also displays when This message may display along System Operation on page 22.
the vehicle's engine power is with the check engine light on the
reduced. Reduced engine power instrument panel cluster if the Lamp Messages
can affect the vehicle's ability to vehicle's fuel cap is not tightened
accelerate. If this message is on, properly. See Malfunction Indicator TURN SIGNAL ON
but there is no reduction in Lamp on page 521. Reinstall the This message displays and a chime
performance, proceed to your fuel cap fully. See Filling the Tank sounds if a turn signal is left on for
destination. The performance may on page 972. The diagnostic 1.2 km (0.75 mi). Move the turn
be reduced the next time the vehicle system can determine if the fuel cap signal/multifunction lever to the off
is driven. The vehicle may be driven has been left off or improperly position.
at a reduced speed while this installed. A loose or missing fuel
message is on, but acceleration and cap allows fuel to evaporate into the
speed may be reduced. Anytime atmosphere. A few driving trips with
this message stays on, the vehicle the cap properly installed should
should be taken to your dealer for turn this light and message off.
service as soon as possible.
Object Detection System park. See Ultrasonic Parking Assist System (TCS). When this message
on page 962 for more information. displays, the system will not limit
Messages See your dealer for service. wheel spin. Adjust your driving
PARK ASST BLOCKED SEE accordingly. See your dealer for
OWNERS MANUAL Ride Control System service. See StabiliTrak System on
This message displays if there is Messages
something interfering with the park STABILITRAK INITIALIZING
SERVICE STABILITRAK
assist system. See Ultrasonic If the vehicle has StabiliTrak, this
Parking Assist on page 962 for If the vehicle has StabiliTrak and
message may come on if the
more information. this message displays, it means
StabiliTrak system has not fully
there may be a problem with the
PARK ASSIST OFF initialized because of road
StabiliTrak system. If you see this
conditions or the incorrect tire size.
After the vehicle has been started, message, try to reset the system.
When the StabiliTrak system is fully
this message displays to remind the Stop; turn off the engine for at least
initialized, the message will turn off.
driver that the URPA system has 15 seconds; then start the engine
See StabiliTrak System on
been turned off. Press the set/reset again. If this message still comes
button or the trip odometer reset on, it means there is a problem. You
If this message continues to be
stem to acknowledge this message should see your dealer for service.
displayed for multiple ignition cycles
and clear it from the DIC display. To The vehicle is safe to drive;
and on different road surfaces, see
turn the URPA system back on, see however, you do not have the
your dealer for service.
Ultrasonic Parking Assist on benefit of StabiliTrak, so reduce
page 962. your speed and drive accordingly. TRACTION XX
SERVICE TRACTION STABILITRAK XX
SERVICE PARK ASSIST
CONTROL This message displays when the
This message displays if there is a traction control and/or StabiliTrak
problem with the Ultrasonic Rear If the vehicle has StabiliTrak, this
systems have been turned on or off.
Parking Assist (URPA) system. Do message displays when there is a
Adjust your driving accordingly. To
not use this system to help you problem with the Traction Control
limit wheel spin and realize the full

. The message also displays if the See Airbag Readiness Light on
benefits of the stability brake system warning light is on. page 517 and Airbag System on
enhancement system, you should See Brake System Warning page 322 for more information.
normally leave StabiliTrak on. Light on page 524.
However, you should turn . The message could display if the Security Messages
StabiliTrak off if the vehicle gets stability system takes longer
stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow than usual to complete its SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT
and you want to rock the vehicle to diagnostic checks due to driving SYSTEM
attempt to free it, or if you are conditions. This message displays when there
driving in extreme off-road is a problem with the theft-deterrent
conditions and require more wheel
. The message displays if an
engine or vehicle related system. The vehicle may or may not
spin. See If the Vehicle Is Stuck on restart so you may want to take the
page 914. To turn the StabiliTrak problem has been detected and
the vehicle needs service. See vehicle to your dealer before turning
system on or off, see StabiliTrak off the engine. See Immobilizer
System on page 956. your dealer.
Operation on page 212 for more
STABILITRAK OFF may also The message turns off as soon as information.
display when the stability control the conditions that caused the
message to be displayed are no
has been automatically disabled.
longer present.
Starting the Vehicle
There are several conditions that Messages
can cause this message to appear.
Airbag System Messages FAST IDLE ON
. One condition is overheating,
which could occur if StabiliTrak SERVICE AIR BAG If your vehicle has this feature, this
activates continuously for an message displays when the fast idle
This message displays if there is a
extended period of time. feature is on. See Fast Idle System
problem with the airbag system.
Have your dealer inspect the on page 928 for more information.
system for problems.
Tire Messages See Tire Inspection on page 1062, to those shown on the Tire Loading
Tire Rotation on page 1063, Tire Information label. See Tires on
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR Pressure Monitor System on page 1047, Vehicle Load Limits on
SYSTEM page 1058, and Tire Pressure on page 915, and Tire Pressure on
page 1056 for more information. page 1056. The DIC also shows
If the vehicle has the Tire Pressure
the tire pressure values. See Driver
Monitor System (TPMS), this TIRE LOW ADD AIR TO TIRE Information Center (DIC) on
message displays if a part on the
If the vehicle has the Tire Pressure page 529.
system is not working properly. The
tire pressure light also flashes and Monitor System (TPMS), this
then remains on during the same message displays when the Transmission Messages
ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure pressure in one or more of the
vehicle's tires is low. This message GRADE BRAKING DISABLED
Light on page 526. Several
conditions may cause this message also displays LEFT FRT (left front), This message displays when the
to appear. See Tire Pressure RIGHT FRT (right front), LEFT RR grade braking has been disabled
Monitor Operation on page 1059 for (left rear), or RIGHT RR (right rear) with the tow/haul mode button on
more information. If the warning to indicate the location of the low the end of the shift lever. See Tow/
comes on and stays on, there may tire. The low tire pressure warning Haul Mode on page 938, Automatic
be a problem with the TPMS. See light will also come on. See Tire Transmission on page 933, and
your dealer. Pressure Light on page 526. You Cruise Control on page 959.
can receive more than one tire
TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE pressure message at a time. To GRADE BRAKING ENABLED
read the other messages that may This message displays when the
If the vehicle has the Tire Pressure
have been sent at the same time, grade braking has been enabled
Monitor System (TPMS), this
press the set/reset button or the trip with the tow/haul mode button on
message displays when the system
odometer reset stem. If a tire the end of the shift lever. See Tow/
is re-learning the tire positions on
pressure message appears on the Haul Mode on page 938, Automatic
your vehicle. The tire positions must
DIC, stop as soon as you can. Have Transmission on page 933, and
be re-learned after rotating the tires
the tire pressures checked and set Cruise Control on page 959.
or after replacing a tire or sensor.
GRADE BRAKING ON TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE Vehicle Reminder

This message displays when the ENGINE Messages
grade braking has been activated Notice: Do not drive the vehicle
while driving on downhill grades. while the transmission fluid is CHECK TRAILER WIRING
This message will only appear the overheating and the transmission On vehicles with the Integrated
first time the feature is activated in temperature warning is displayed Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system,
an ignition cycle. See Tow/Haul on the instrument cluster and/or this message may display and a
Mode on page 938, Automatic DIC, or the transmission can be chime may sound when one of the
Transmission on page 933, and damaged. This could lead to following conditions exists:
Cruise Control on page 959. costly repairs that would not be . A trailer with electric brakes
covered by the warranty.
SERVICE 4 WHEEL DRIVE becomes disconnected from the
This message displays and a chime vehicle.
If the vehicle has four-wheel drive, may sound if the transmission fluid
this message may display if a If the disconnect occurs while
in the vehicle gets hot. Driving with
problem occurs with the the vehicle is stopped, this
the transmission fluid temperature
four-wheel-drive system. If this message clears itself after a
high can cause damage to the
message appears, stop as soon as short time.
vehicle. Stop the vehicle and let it
possible and turn off the vehicle. idle to allow the transmission to If the disconnect occurs while
Make sure the key is in the LOCK/ cool. This message clears and the the vehicle is moving, this
OFF position for at least one minute chime stops when the fluid message stays on until the
and then restart the vehicle and temperature reaches a safe level. ignition is turned off.
check for the message on the DIC
display. If the message is still . There is a short in the wiring to
displayed or appears again when the electric trailer brakes.
you begin driving, the When this message displays, power
four-wheel-drive system needs is no longer available to the trailer
service. See your dealer. brakes.
As soon as it is safe to do so, This message clears itself after Vehicle

carefully pull the vehicle over to the several seconds. This message also
side of the road and turn the ignition clears if you acknowledge it. After Personalization
off. Check the wiring connection to this message clears, the TRAILER
the trailer and turn the ignition back GAIN/OUTPUT display appears in Vehicle Personalization
on. This message clears if the trailer the DIC.
is reconnected. This message also
(With DIC Buttons)
See TRAILER GAIN/OUTPUT
clears if you acknowledge it. If this under Driver Information Center The vehicle may have customization
message still displays, either the (DIC) on page 529 and Integrated capabilities that allow you to
vehicle or the trailer needs service. Trailer Brake Control System under program certain features to one
See your dealer. Towing Equipment on page 993 for preferred setting. Customization
See Integrated Trailer Brake more information. features can only be programmed to
Control System under Towing one setting on the vehicle and
cannot be programmed to a
Equipment on page 993 for more Washer Fluid Messages preferred setting for two different
information.
WASHER FLUID LOW ADD drivers.
ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE FLUID All of the customization options may
WITH CARE not be available on the vehicle. Only
This message displays when the
This message displays when ice windshield washer fluid is low. Fill the options available will be
conditions are possible. the windshield washer fluid reservoir displayed on the DIC.
TRAILER CONNECTED as soon as possible. See Engine The default settings for the
Compartment Overview on customization features were set
On vehicles with the Integrated page 105 for the location of the when the vehicle left the factory, but
Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system, windshield washer fluid reservoir. may have been changed from their
this message displays briefly when Also, see Washer Fluid on default state since then.
a trailer with electric brakes is first page 1024 for more information.
connected to the vehicle. The customization preferences are
automatically recalled.
To change customization Press the customization button until NO CHANGE: No change will be
preferences, use the following the PRESS V TO DISPLAY IN made to this feature. The current
procedure. ENGLISH screen appears on the setting will remain.
Entering the Feature DIC display. Press the set/reset To select a setting, press the set/
Settings Menu button once to display all DIC reset button while the desired
messages in English. setting is displayed on the DIC.
1. Turn the ignition on and place
the vehicle in P (Park). DISPLAY LANGUAGE You can also change the language
This feature allows you to select the by pressing the trip odometer reset
To avoid excessive drain on the stem. See Language under Driver
battery, turn the headlamps off. language in which the DIC
messages will appear. Information Center (DIC) on
2. Press the customization button page 529 for more information.
to scroll through the available Press the customization button until
the DISPLAY LANGUAGE screen AUTO DOOR LOCK
customizable options.
appears on the DIC display. Press This feature allows you to select
Feature Settings Menu Items the set/reset button once to access when the vehicle's doors will
The following customization features the settings for this feature. Then automatically lock. See Automatic
allow you to program settings to the press the customization button to Door Locks on page 28 for more
vehicle: scroll through the following settings: information.
ENGLISH (default): All messages
DISPLAY IN ENGLISH will appear in English.
This feature will only display if a FRANCAIS: All messages will
language other than English has appear in French.
been set. This feature allows you to
change the language in which the ESPANOL: All messages will
DIC messages appear to English. appear in Spanish.
Press the customization button until automatically unlock. See Automatic NO CHANGE: No change will be
AUTO DOOR LOCK appears on the Door Locks on page 28 for more made to this feature. The current
DIC display. Press the set/reset information. setting will remain.
button once to access the settings Press the customization button until To select a setting, press the set/
for this feature. Then press the AUTO DOOR UNLOCK appears on reset button while the desired
customization button to scroll the DIC display. Press the set/reset setting is displayed on the DIC.
through the following settings: button once to access the settings
SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default): for this feature. Then press the REMOTE DOOR LOCK
The doors will automatically lock customization button to scroll This feature allows you to select the
when the vehicle is shifted out of through the following settings: type of feedback received when
P (Park). OFF: None of the doors will locking the vehicle with the Remote
AT VEHICLE SPEED: The doors automatically unlock. Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
will automatically lock when the You will not receive feedback when
DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only the locking the vehicle with the RKE
vehicle speed is above 13 km/h driver door will unlock when the key
(8 mph) for three seconds. transmitter if the doors are open.
is taken out of the ignition. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
NO CHANGE: No change will be DRIVER IN PARK: Only the driver System Operation on page 22 for
made to this feature. The current door will unlock when the vehicle is more information.
setting will remain. shifted into P (Park).
To select a setting, press the set/ ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doors
reset button while the desired will unlock when the key is taken
setting is displayed on the DIC. out of the ignition.
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK ALL IN PARK (default): All of the
This feature allows you to turn off doors will unlock when the vehicle is
the automatic door unlocking shifted into P (Park).
feature. It also allows you to select
which doors and when the doors will
Press the customization button until To select a setting, press the set/ LIGHTS ON (default): The exterior
REMOTE DOOR LOCK appears on reset button while the desired lamps will flash when you press the
the DIC display. Press the set/reset setting is displayed on the DIC. unlock button on the RKE
button once to access the settings transmitter.
for this feature. Then press the REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK
NO CHANGE: No change will be
customization button to scroll This feature allows you to select the made to this feature. The current
through the following settings: type of feedback received when setting will remain.
OFF: There will be no feedback unlocking the vehicle with the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) To select a setting, press the set/
when you press the lock button on reset button while the desired
the RKE transmitter. transmitter. You will not receive
feedback when unlocking the setting is displayed on the DIC.
LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lamps vehicle with the RKE transmitter if
will flash when you press the lock DELAY DOOR LOCK
the doors are open. See Remote
button on the RKE transmitter. Keyless Entry (RKE) System On vehicles with a crew cab, this
HORN ONLY: The horn will sound Operation on page 22 for more feature turns the delayed door locks
on the second press of the lock information. on or off. When locking the doors
button on the RKE transmitter. with the power door lock switch and
Press the customization button until a door is open, this feature will
HORN & LIGHTS (default): The REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK appears delay locking the doors until
exterior lamps will flash when you on the DIC display. Press the set/ five seconds after the last door is
press the lock button on the RKE reset button once to access the closed. You will hear three chimes
transmitter, and the horn will sound settings for this feature. Then press to signal that the delayed locking
when the lock button is pressed the customization button to scroll feature is in use. The key must be
again within five seconds of the through the following settings: out of the ignition for this feature to
previous command. LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lamps work. You can temporarily override
NO CHANGE: No change will be will not flash when you press the delayed locking by pressing the
made to this feature. The current unlock button on the RKE power door lock switch twice. See
setting will remain. transmitter. Delayed Locking on page 27 for
more information.
Press the customization button until Press the customization button until APPROACH LIGHTING
DELAY DOOR LOCK appears on EXIT LIGHTING appears on the DIC This feature allows you to select if
the DIC display. Press the set/reset display. Press the set/reset button the exterior lights turn on briefly
button once to access the settings once to access the settings for this during low light periods after
for this feature. Then press the feature. Then press the unlocking the vehicle using the
customization button to scroll customization button to scroll Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
through the following settings: through the following settings: transmitter.
OFF: There will be no delayed OFF: The exterior lamps will not Press the customization button until
locking of the vehicle's doors. turn on. APPROACH LIGHTING appears on
ON (default): The doors will not 30 SECONDS (default): The the DIC display. Press the set/reset
lock until five seconds after the last exterior lamps will stay on for button once to access the settings
door is closed. 30 seconds. for this feature. Then press the
NO CHANGE: No change will be 1 MINUTE: The exterior lamps will customization button to scroll
made to this feature. The current stay on for one minute. through the following settings:
setting will remain. 2 MINUTES: The exterior lamps will OFF: The exterior lights will not
To select a setting, press the set/ stay on for two minutes. turn on when you unlock the vehicle
reset button while the desired with the RKE transmitter.
NO CHANGE: No change will be
setting is displayed on the DIC. made to this feature. The current ON (default): If it is dark enough
setting will remain. outside, the exterior lights will turn
EXIT LIGHTING on briefly when you unlock the
This feature allows you to select the To select a setting, press the set/ vehicle with the RKE transmitter.
amount of time you want the reset button while the desired
setting is displayed on the DIC. The lights will remain on for
exterior lamps to remain on when it 20 seconds, until the lock button on
is dark enough outside. This the RKE transmitter is pressed,
happens after the key is turned from or until the vehicle is no longer off.
ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF.
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) NO CHANGE: No change will be DRIVER MIRROR: The driver
System Operation on page 22 for made to this feature. The current outside mirror will be tilted down
more information. setting will remain. when the vehicle is shifted into
NO CHANGE: No change will be There is no default for chime R (Reverse).
made to this feature. The current volume. The volume will stay at the PASSENGER MIRROR: The
setting will remain. last known setting. passenger outside mirror will be
To select a setting, press the set/ To select a setting, press the set/ tilted down when the vehicle is
reset button while the desired reset button while the desired shifted into R (Reverse).
setting is displayed on the DIC. setting is displayed on the DIC. BOTH MIRRORS: The driver and
passenger outside mirrors will be
CHIME VOLUME PARK TILT MIRRORS tilted down when the vehicle is
If available, this feature allows you If the vehicle has this feature, it shifted into R (Reverse).
to select the volume level of the allows you to select if the outside NO CHANGE: No change will be
chime. mirror(s) will automatically tilt down made to this feature. The current
Press the customization button until when the vehicle is shifted into setting will remain.
CHIME VOLUME appears on the R (Reverse). See Park Tilt Mirrors
on page 217 for more information. To select a setting, press the set/
DIC display. Press the set/reset reset button while the desired
button once to access the settings Press the customization button until setting is displayed on the DIC.
for this feature. Then press the PARK TILT MIRRORS appears on
customization button to scroll the DIC display. Press the set/reset EASY EXIT RECALL
through the following settings: button once to access the settings If the vehicle has this feature, it
NORMAL: The chime volume will for this feature. Then press the allows you to select your preference
be set to a normal level. customization button to scroll for the automatic easy exit seat
through the following settings: feature. See Memory Seats on
LOUD: The chime volume will be
set to a loud level. OFF (default): Neither outside page 38 for more information.
mirror will be tilted down when the
vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).
Press the customization button until NO CHANGE: No change will be NO CHANGE: No change will be
EASY EXIT RECALL appears on made to this feature. The current made to this feature. The current
the DIC display. Press the set/reset setting will remain. setting will remain.
button once to access the settings To select a setting, press the set/ To select a setting, press the set/
for this feature. Then press the reset button while the desired reset button while the desired
customization button to scroll setting is displayed on the DIC. setting is displayed on the DIC.
through the following settings:
DOOR BUTTON ONLY: No EASY EXIT SETUP MEMORY SEAT RECALL
automatic seat exit recall will occur. If the vehicle has this feature, it If the vehicle has this feature, it
The recall will only occur after allows you to select which areas will allows you to select your preference
pressing the easy exit seat button. recall with the automatic easy exit for the remote memory seat recall
BUTTON & KEY OUT (default): If seat feature. It also allows you to feature. See Memory Seats on
the features are enabled through the turn off the automatic easy exit page 38 for more information.
EASY EXIT SETUP menu, the feature. See Memory Seats on Press the customization button until
driver seat will move back when the page 38 and EASY EXIT RECALL MEMORY SEAT RECALL appears
key is removed from the ignition or earlier for more information. on the DIC display. Press the set/
the easy exit seat button is pressed. Press the customization button until reset button once to access the
The automatic easy exit seat EASY EXIT SETUP appears on the settings for this feature. Then press
movement will only occur one time DIC display. Press the set/reset the customization button to scroll
after the key is removed from the button once to access the settings through the following settings:
ignition. If the automatic movement for this feature. Then press the OFF (default): No remote memory
has already occurred, and you put menu up/down button to scroll seat recall will occur.
the key back in the ignition and through the following settings:
ON: The driver seat and, on some
remove it again, the seat will stay in OFF: No automatic seat exit will vehicles, the outside mirrors will
the original exit position, unless a recall. automatically move to the stored
memory recall took place prior to SEAT ONLY (default): The driver driving position when the unlock
removing the key again. seat will recall. button on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter is pressed. Press the customization button until Press the customization button until
On some vehicles with the REMOTE START appears on the FACTORY SETTINGS appears on
adjustable throttle and brake pedal DIC display. Press the set/reset the DIC display. Press the set/reset
feature, the pedals will also button once to access the settings button once to access the settings
automatically move. for this feature. Then press the for this feature. Then press the
NO CHANGE: No change will be customization button to scroll customization button to scroll
made to this feature. The current through the following settings: through the following settings:
setting will remain. OFF: The remote start feature will RESTORE ALL (default): The
To select a setting, press the set/ be disabled. customization features will be set to
reset button while the desired ON (default): The remote start their factory default settings.
setting is displayed on the DIC. feature will be enabled. DO NOT RESTORE: The
NO CHANGE: No change will be customization features will not be
REMOTE START set to their factory default settings.
made to this feature. The current
If your vehicle has this feature, it setting will remain. To select a setting, press the set/
allows you to turn the remote start reset button while the desired
off or on. The remote start feature To select a setting, press the set/
reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
allows you to start the engine from
outside of the vehicle using the setting is displayed on the DIC. EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) FACTORY SETTINGS This feature allows you to exit the
transmitter. See Remote Vehicle feature settings menu.
Start on page 24 for more This feature allows you to set all of
information. the customization features back to Press the customization button until
their factory default settings. PRESS V TO EXIT FEATURE
SETTINGS appears in the DIC
display. Press the set/reset button
once to exit the menu.
If you do not exit, pressing the Universal Remote devices such as garage door
customization button again will openers, security systems, and
return you to the beginning of the System home automation devices.
feature settings menu. Do not use this system with any
See Radio Frequency Statement on
Exiting the Feature page 1320 for information garage door opener that does not
Settings Menu regarding Part 15 of the Federal have the stop and reverse feature.
Communications Commission (FCC) This includes any garage door
The feature settings menu will be rules and Industry Canada opener model manufactured before
exited when any of the following Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310. April 1, 1982.
occurs:
Read the instructions completely
. The vehicle is no longer in Universal Remote System before attempting to program the
ON/RUN. Programming transmitter. Because of the steps
. The trip/fuel or vehicle involved, it may be helpful to have
information DIC buttons are another person assist with
pressed. programming the transmitter.
. The end of the feature settings Be sure to keep the original remote
menu is reached and exited. control transmitter for use in other
vehicles, as well as for future
. A 40-second time period has programming. Only the original
elapsed with no selection made. remote control transmitter is needed
Vehicles with the Universal Remote
System will have these buttons for Fixed Code programming. The
located in the headliner. programmed buttons should be
erased when the vehicle is sold or
This system provides a way to the lease ends. See Erasing
replace up to three remote control Universal Home Remote Buttons in
transmitters used to activate this section.
Park the vehicle outside of the To program up to three devices: 3. Immediately return to the
garage when programming a garage 1. From inside the vehicle, press vehicle. Press and hold the
door. Be sure that people and the two outside buttons at the Universal Home Remote button
objects are clear of the garage door same time for one to that will be used to control the
or gate that is being programmed. two seconds, and immediately garage door until the garage
release them. door moves. The indicator light,
Programming Universal Home above the selected button,
Remote Rolling Code should slowly blink. This button
For questions or help programming may need to be held for up to
the Universal Home Remote 20 seconds.
System, call 1-866-572-2728 or go 4. Immediately, within one second,
to www.learcar2u.com. release the button when the
Most garage door openers sold garage door moves. The
after 1996 are Rolling Code units. indicator light will blink rapidly
until programming is complete.
Programming a garage door opener
involves time-sensitive actions, so 5. Press and release the same
read the entire procedure before 2. In the garage, locate the garage button again. The garage door
starting. Otherwise, the device will door opener receiver should move, confirming that
time out and the procedure will have (motor-head unit). Find the programming is successful and
to be repeated. Learn or Smart button. It can complete.
usually be found where the
hanging antenna wire is To program another Rolling Code
attached to the motor-head unit device such as an additional garage
and may be a colored button. door opener, a security device,
Press this button. After pressing or home automation device, repeat
this button, complete the Steps 1 through 5, choosing a
following steps in less than
30 seconds.
different function button in Step 3 Your hand-held transmitter can

than what was used for the garage have between 8 to 12 dip
door opener. switches depending on the
If these instructions do not work, the brand of transmitter.
garage door opener is probably a The garage door opener receiver
Fixed Code unit. Follow the (motor head unit) could also
programming instructions that follow have a row of dip switches that
for a Fixed Code garage door can be used when programming
opener. the Universal Home Remote.
If the total number of switches
Programming Universal Home on the motor head and
Remote Fixed Code hand-held transmitter are
For questions or help programming To program up to three devices: different, or if the dip switch
the Universal Home Remote settings are different, use the dip
1. To verify that the garage door switch settings on the motor
System, call 1-866-572-2728 or go opener is a Fixed Code unit,
to www.learcar2u.com. head unit to program the
remove the battery cover on the Universal Home Remote. The
Most garage door openers sold hand-held transmitter supplied motor head dip switch settings
before 1996 are Fixed Code units. by the manufacturer of the can also be used when the
garage door opener motor. original hand-held transmitter is
Programming a garage door opener
If there is a row of dip switches not available.
involves time-sensitive actions, so
similar to the graphic above, the
read the entire procedure before
garage door opener is a Fixed
starting. Otherwise, the device will
Code unit. If you do not see a
time out and the procedure will have
row of dip switches, return to the
to be repeated.
previous section for
Programming Universal Home
Remote Rolling Code.

. A switch in the down to right, into the Universal
position could be labeled as Home Remote, when
Down, , or Off. completing Step 4.
. A switch in the middle 3. From inside your vehicle, first
position could be labeled as firmly press all three buttons at
Middle, 0, or Neutral. the same time for about
Example of Eight Dip Switches 2. Write down the 8 to 12 switch three seconds. Release the
with Two Positions settings from left to right as buttons to put the Universal
follows: Home Remote into
programming mode.
. When a switch is in the up
position, write Left.
. When a switch is in the
down position, write Right.
. If a switch is set between
Example of Eight Dip Switches
with Three Positions the up and down position,
write Middle.
The panel of switches might not
appear exactly as they do in the The switch settings written
examples above, but they down in Step 2 now
should be similar. become the button strokes
to be entered into the
The switch positions on the Universal Home Remote in
hand-held transmitter could be Step 4. Be sure to enter the
labeled as follows: A. Left Button (Up, +, or On)
switch settings written down
. A switch in the up position in Step 2, in order from left B. Middle Button (Middle, 0,
could be labeled as Up, or Neutral)
+, or On.
C. Right Button (Down, , 6. Press and hold the button that Universal Remote System
or Off) will be used to control the
garage door until the garage
Operation
4. The indicator lights will blink
slowly. Enter each switch setting door moves. The indicator light Press and hold the appropriate
from Step 2 into your vehicle's above the selected button button for at least half of a second.
Universal Home Remote. You should slowly blink. This button The indicator light will come on
will have two and one-half may need to be held for up to while the signal is being transmitted.
minutes to complete Step 4. Now 55 seconds.
Reprogramming Universal
press one button on the 7. Immediately release the button Home Remote Buttons
Universal Home Remote for when the garage door moves.
each switch setting as follows: The indicator light will blink Any of the three buttons can be
rapidly until programming is reprogrammed by repeating the
. If you wrote Left, press instructions.
the left button (A) in the complete.
vehicle. 8. Press and release the same Erasing Universal Home
. If you wrote Right, press button again. The garage door Remote Buttons
the right button (C) in the should move, confirming that
programming is successful and The programmed buttons should be
vehicle. erased when the vehicle is sold or
complete.
. If you wrote Middle, press the lease ends.
the middle button (B) in the To program another Fixed Code
vehicle. device such as an additional garage
door opener, a security device,
5. After entering all of the switch or home automation device, repeat
positions, once again firmly Steps 1-8, choosing a different
press and release all three button in Step 6 than what was used
buttons at the same time. The for the garage door opener.
indicator lights will turn on.
To erase either Rolling Code or

Fixed Code settings on the
Universal Home Remote device:
1. Press and hold the two outside
buttons at the same time for
approximately 20 seconds, until
the indicator lights, located
directly above the buttons, begin
to blink rapidly.
2. Once the indicator lights begin to
blink, release both buttons. The
codes from all buttons will be
erased.
For help or information on the
Universal Home Remote System,
call the customer assistance phone
number under Customer Assistance
Offices (U.S. and Canada) on
page 135 or Customer Assistance
Offices (Mexico) on page 135.
2 NOTES
Lighting 6-1
Lighting Interior Lighting

Instrument Panel Illumination
Exterior Lighting
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Cargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Exterior Lamp Controls
Exterior Lighting
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Exterior Lamps Off
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Lighting Features
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Battery Load Management . . . . 6-9
Daytime Running Battery Power Protection . . . . . . 6-9
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Automatic Headlamp
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
The exterior lamp control is located
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-5
on the instrument panel to the left of
Turn and Lane-Change
the steering wheel.
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 There are four positions:
Auxiliary O (Off): Turns off the automatic
Roof-Mounted Lamp . . . . . . . . . 6-6 headlamps and Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL). Turn the headlamp
control to the off position again to
turn the automatic headlamps or
DRL back on.
For vehicles first sold in Canada,
the off position will only work when
the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
6-2 Lighting
AUTO (Automatic): Automatically

. Roof Marker Lamps Push the turn signal lever toward
turns on the headlamps at normal (If Equipped) the instrument panel to change the
brightness, together with the 2 (Headlamps): Turns on the headlamps from low beam to
following: headlamps together with the high beam.
. Parking Lamps following:
. Parking Lamps
Exterior Lamps Off
. Instrument Panel Lights
. Instrument Panel Lights
Reminder
. Taillamps
For vehicles with a radio, a reminder
. License Plate Lamps
. Taillamps
chime sounds when the headlamps
. Roof Marker Lamps
. License Plate Lamps or parking lamps are manually
(If Equipped) . Roof Marker Lamps turned on, the ignition is off, and a
(If Equipped) door is open. To disable the chime,
When the vehicle is turned off and turn the lamp off.
the headlamps are in AUTO, the When the headlamps are turned on
headlamps may automatically while the vehicle is on, the
remain on for a set time. The time of
Headlamp High/
headlamps turn off automatically
the delay can be changed using the 10 minutes after the ignition is Low-Beam Changer
DIC. See Driver Information Center turned off. When the headlamps are 5 3 (Headlamp High/Low-Beam
(DIC) on page 529. turned on while the vehicle is off, Changer): Push the turn signal
; (Parking Lamps): Turns on the the headlamps will stay on for lever toward the instrument panel to
parking lamps together with the 10 minutes before automatically change the headlamps from low to
following: turning off to prevent the battery high beam.
from being drained. Turn the
. Instrument Panel Lights headlamp control to off and then Pull the lever toward you and
back to the headlamp on position to release it to return to low-beam
. Taillamps
make the headlamps stay on for an headlamps.
. License Plate Lamps
additional 10 minutes.
Lighting 6-3
instrument cluster will come on. When it begins to get dark, the
Release the lever to return to automatic headlamp system
normal operation. switches from DRL to the
headlamps.
Daytime Running To turn off the DRL lamps, turn the
Lamps (DRL) exterior lamp control to the OFF
When the high beams are on, this position and then release. For
indicator light on the instrument Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can
vehicles first sold in Canada, the
cluster will also be on. make it easier for others to see the
transmission must be in the P (Park)
front of your vehicle during the day.
position before the DRL lamps can
Fully functional daytime running
Flash-to-Pass lamps are required on all vehicles
be turned off.
This feature lets you use the first sold in Canada.
high-beam headlamps to signal a Automatic Headlamp
The DRL system comes on when
driver in front of you that you want the following conditions are met:
System
to pass. It works even if the When it is dark enough outside, the
headlamps are in the automatic . The ignition is on.
automatic headlamp system turns
position. . The exterior lamp control is on the headlamps at the normal
To use it, pull the turn signal lever in AUTO. brightness, along with the taillamps,
toward you, then release it. . The transmission is not in Park. sidemarker, parking lamps, and the
If the headlamps are in the instrument panel lights. The radio
. The light sensor determines it is lights will also be dim.
automatic position or on low beam, daytime.
the high-beam headlamps will turn To turn off the automatic headlamp
on. They will stay on as long as you When the DRL system is on, only system, turn the exterior lamps
hold the lever toward you. The the DRL lamps are on. The switch to the off position and then
high-beam indicator on the taillamps, sidemarker, instrument release it. For vehicles first sold in
panel lights, and other lamps will not Canada, the transmission must be
be on.
6-4 Lighting
in the P (Park) position before the headlamp systems so that driving The headlamps will also stay on
automatic headlamp system can be under bridges or bright overhead after you exit the vehicle. This
turned off. street lights does not affect the feature can be programmed using
system. The DRL and automatic the Driver Information Center (DIC).
headlamp system are only affected See Vehicle Personalization (With
when the light sensor detects a DIC Buttons) on page 546.
change in lighting lasting longer If the vehicle is not equipped with
than the delay. DIC buttons, exit lighting is
If the vehicle is started in a dark automatic. When it is dark enough
garage, the automatic headlamp outside, the exterior lamps remain
system comes on immediately. on for 30 seconds after the ignition
Once the vehicle leaves the garage, is moved from ON/RUN to
it takes approximately one minute LOCK/OFF.
The vehicle has a light sensor for the automatic headlamp system
located on the top of the instrument For vehicles without a radio, the
to change to DRL if it is bright instrument panel light remains on for
panel which regulates when the enough outside. During that delay,
automatic headlamps turn on. Do 30 seconds with the driver door
the instrument cluster may not be as closed. For vehicles with a radio,
not cover the sensor, otherwise the bright as usual. Make sure the
headlamps will come on whenever the instrument panel light remains
instrument panel brightness control on for 10 minutes with the driver
the ignition is on. is in the full bright position. See door closed. See Retained
The system may also turn on the Instrument Panel Illumination Accessory Power (RAP) on
headlamps when driving through a Control on page 67. page 928.
parking garage or heavy overcast To idle the vehicle with the
weather. This is normal. The regular headlamp system can
automatic headlamp system off, turn be turned on when needed.
There is a delay in the transition the control to the off position.
between the daytime and nighttime
operation of the Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) and the automatic
Lighting 6-5
Lights On with Wipers | (Hazard Warning Flashers): Raise or lower the lever for less
Press this button to make the front than one second until the arrow
If the windshield wipers are
and rear turn signal lamps flash on starts to flash to signal a lane
activated in daylight with the engine
and off. Press again to turn the change. This causes the turn
on, and the exterior lamp control is
flashers off. signals to automatically flash three
in AUTO, the headlamps, parking
times. It will flash six times if Tow/
lamps, and other exterior lamps When the hazard warning flashers Haul Mode is active. Holding the
come on. The transition time for the are on, the vehicle's turn signals will turn signal lever for more than
lamps coming on varies based on not work. one second will cause the turn
wiper speed. When the wipers are
signals to flash until you release the
not operating, these lamps turn off. Turn and Lane-Change lever.
Move the exterior lamp control to P Signals The lever returns to its starting
or ; to disable this feature. position whenever it is released.
Hazard Warning Flashers If after signaling a turn or a lane

change the arrows flash rapidly or
do not come on, a signal bulb could
be burned out.
Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb
is not burned out, check the fuse.
See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on
page 1040.
An arrow on the instrument panel Turn Signal On Chime
cluster flashes in the direction of the
turn or lane change. If the turn signal is left on for more
than 1.2 km (0.75 mi), a chime
Move the lever all the way up or sounds at each flash of the turn
down to signal a turn. signal, if the vehicle has a radio.
6-6 Lighting
The message TURN SIGNAL ON # (Fog Lamps): Press to turn the

will also appear in the Driver fog lamps on or off. A light will come
Information Center (DIC). To turn on in the instrument cluster.
the chime and message off, move
the turn signal lever to the off When the fog lamps are turned on,
position. the parking lamps automatically
turn on.
Fog Lamps When the headlamps are changed
to high beam, the fog lamps also go
off. When the high-beam headlamps This button is on the overhead
are turned off, the fog lamps will console.
come on again.
When the wiring is connected to an
Some localities have laws that auxiliary roof-mounted lamp,
require the headlamps to be on with pressing the bottom of the button
the fog lamps. will activate the lamp and illuminate
an indicator light at the bottom of
Auxiliary this button. Pressing the top of the
Roof-Mounted Lamp button will turn off the roof-mounted
For vehicles with fog lamps, the lamp and indicator.
control is located next to the exterior If the vehicle has this feature, this
lamp control on the instrument button includes wiring provisions for
panel, to the left of the steering a dealer or a qualified service center
column. to install an auxiliary roof lamp.
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN
position for the fog lamps to
come on.
Lighting 6-7
The emergency roof lamp circuit is Interior Lighting Cargo Lamp

fused at 30 amps, so the total
current draw of the attached lamps The cargo lamps come on by
should be less than this value. The Instrument Panel turning the instrument panel
attachment points for the roof lamp Illumination Control brightness control knob to the
circuits are two blunt cut wires farthest clockwise position. This
located above the overhead knob is located on the instrument
console, a dark green switched panel and also turns on the dome
power wire and a black ground wire. lamps.
For more information on roof mount The cargo lamps can be used if
emergency lamp installation, please more light is needed in the cargo
visit the GM Upfitter website at area of the vehicle.
www.gmupfitter.com or contact your
dealer. Dome Lamps
If the vehicle has this button, the The dome lamps are located in the
vehicle may have the snow plow D (Instrument Panel overhead console.
prep package. See Adding a Snow Brightness): This feature controls They come on when any door is
Plow or Similar Equipment on the brightness of the instrument opened and turn off after all the
page 9105. panel lights and is located next to doors are closed.
the exterior lamps control.
Turn the instrument panel
Push the knob to extend out and brightness knob located below the
then it can be turned. dome lamp override button,
Turn the knob clockwise or clockwise to the farthest position to
counterclockwise to brighten or dim manually turn on the dome lamps.
the instrument panel lights. Turning The dome lamps remain on until the
the knob to the farthest clockwise knob is turned counterclockwise.
position turns on the dome lamps.
6-8 Lighting
Dome Lamp Override Reading Lamps Lighting Features

The dome lamp override button is For vehicles with reading lamps,
located next to the exterior lamps they are located on the overhead Entry Lighting
control. console. The vehicle has an illuminated entry
To turn on the reading lamps, press feature.
the button located next to each When the doors are opened, the
lamp. To turn them off, press the dome lamps will come on if the
button again. dome override button is in the
The vehicle may also have reading extended position. If the dome
lamps in other locations. To turn the override button is pressed in, the
lamps on or off, press the button lamps will not come on.
located next to the lamp.
If the vehicle has a DVD Rear Seat Exit Lighting
k (Dome Off): Press the button Entertainment (RSE) system, press The interior lamps come on when
in and the dome lamps remain off the lamp lenses to turn the lamps on the key is removed from the ignition.
when a door is opened. Press the or off. They turn off automatically in
button again to return it to the The lamps are fixed and cannot be 20 seconds. The lights do not come
extended position so that the dome adjusted. on if the dome override button is
lamps come on when a door is pressed in.
opened.
Lighting 6-9
Battery Load The battery can be discharged at Normally, these actions occur in
idle if the electrical loads are very steps or levels, without being
Management high. This is true for all vehicles. noticeable. In rare cases at the
The vehicle has Electric Power This is because the generator highest levels of corrective action,
Management (EPM) that estimates (alternator) may not be spinning fast this action may be noticeable to the
the battery's temperature and state enough at idle to produce all the driver. If so, a Driver Information
of charge. It then adjusts the voltage power that is needed for very high Center (DIC) message might be
for best performance and extended electrical loads. displayed and it is recommended
life of the battery. A high electrical load occurs when that the driver reduce the electrical
several of the following are on, such loads as much as possible. See
When the battery's state of charge
as: headlamps, high beams, fog Vehicle Messages on page 537.
is low, the voltage is raised slightly
to quickly bring the charge back up. lamps, rear window defogger,
When the state of charge is high, climate control fan at high speed, Battery Power Protection
the voltage is lowered slightly to heated seats, engine cooling fans, This feature shuts off the dome and
prevent overcharging. If the vehicle trailer loads, and loads plugged into reading lamps, if they are left on for
has a voltmeter gauge or a voltage accessory power outlets. more than 10 minutes after the
display on the Driver Information EPM works to prevent excessive ignition is turned off. The cargo
Center (DIC), you may see the discharge of the battery. It does this lamp shuts off after 20 minutes. This
voltage move up or down. This is by balancing the generator's output prevents the battery from
normal. If there is a problem, an and the vehicle's electrical needs. running down.
alert will be displayed. It can increase engine idle speed to
generate more power, whenever
needed. It can temporarily reduce
the power demands of some
accessories.
6-10 Lighting
2 NOTES
Infotainment System 7-1
Infotainment Rear Seat Infotainment

Rear Seat Entertainment
Introduction
System (RSE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) Infotainment
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48 Determine which radio the vehicle
Introduction has and read the following pages to
Phone become familiar with its features.
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-2
Overview (AM-FM Radio) . . . . . 7-3
Overview (Radio with
Trademarks and License { WARNING
Agreements
CD (MP3)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 Trademarks and License Taking your eyes off the road for
Overview (Radio with USB, CD, Agreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57 extended periods could cause a
and DVD (MP3)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 crash resulting in injury or death
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 to you or others. Do not give
Radio extended attention to infotainment
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 tasks while driving.
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16 This system provides access to
Fixed Mast Antenna . . . . . . . . . 7-16 many audio and non-audio listings.
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . 7-17
Audio Players
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
7-2 Infotainment System
To minimize taking your eyes off the The vehicle has Retained
road while driving, do the following Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP,
while the vehicle is parked: the audio system can be played
. Become familiar with the even after the ignition is turned off.
operation and controls of the See Retained Accessory Power
audio system. (RAP) on page 928 for more
information.
. Set up the tone, speaker
adjustments, and preset radio Navigation/Radio System
stations. For vehicles with a navigation radio
For more information, see Defensive system, see the navigation manual.
Driving on page 93.
Notice: Contact your dealer
Theft-Deterrent Feature
before adding any equipment. TheftLock is designed to
Adding audio or communication discourage theft of the vehicle's
equipment could interfere with radio by learning a portion of the
the operation of the engine, radio, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
or other systems, and could The radio does not operate if it is
damage them. Follow federal stolen or moved to a different
rules covering mobile radio and vehicle.
telephone equipment.
Overview (AM-FM Radio) C. f (Tone/Tune)

. Press to set the bass or
treble.
. Turn to manually select
radio stations.
D. BAND
. Press to scroll through the
available bands AM, FM,
or XM if equipped.
E. SEEK
. Seeks the previous station.
F. SEEK
. Seeks the next station.
G. P (Power/Volume)
Overview (AM-FM Radio) . Press to turn the
infotainment system on
A. 4 (Information) B. Buttons 1 - 6 or off.
. Saves and selects favorite . Turn to adjust the volume.
. Press to show information
on the current station or stations.
track.
H. H (Clock) Overview (Radio with CD (MP3))

. Press to set the clock.
I. EQ (Equalizer)
. Press to adjust the
equalizer settings.
J. x w (Fade/Balance)
. Press to set the fade and
balance.
Overview (Radio with CD (MP3))
A. 4 (Information) B. FAV (Favorites Pages)

. Press to scroll through the
on the current station or favorite pages.
track.
C. MENU H. H (Clock) M. s REV (Reverse)

. Press to open the tone . Press to set the clock. . Press to and hold to go
menu to adjust the bass, backward fast through a
midrange, treble, fade, and I. BAND
track.
balance. . Press to scroll through the
D. Buttons 1 - 6 available bands AM, FM, N. \ FWD (Forward)
or XM if equipped. . Press to and hold to fast
. Saves and selects favorite
stations. J. SEEK forward through a track.
E. EQ (Equalizer) . Seeks the previous station. O. CD/AUX

. Press to scroll through
K. SEEK selecting the CD or a
equalizer.
. Seeks the next station. auxiliary device.
F. f (Tone/Tune)
L. P (Power/Volume) P. Z Eject
. Press to set the bass or .
treble.
. Press to turn the Press to eject the
infotainment system on loaded CD.
. Turn to manually select or off.
radio stations.
. Turn to adjust the volume.
G. CAT (Category)
. Press to display a list of
XM categories.
Overview (Radio with USB, CD, and DVD (MP3)) C. MENU

. Press to open the tone
menu to adjust the bass,
midrange, treble, fade, and
balance.
D. DVD Slot
E. Buttons 1 - 6
. Saves and selects favorite
stations.
F. EQ (Equalizer)
equalizer settings.
G. f (Tone/Tune)
. Press to set the bass or
treble.
Overview (Radio with USB, CD, and DVD (MP3))

. Turn to manually select
radio stations.
A. 4 (Information) B. FAV (Favorites Pages) H. Z DVD
. Press to scroll through the . Press to eject the
on the current station or favorite pages. loaded DVD.
track.
I. CAT (Category) P. s REV (Reverse) Vehicles with a USB, CD, and DVD
. Press to display a list of radio may have a Rear Seat
. Press to and hold to go Entertainment (RSE) system. See
XM categories. backward fast through a Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
J. H (Clock) track. System on page 738 for more
Q. \ FWD (Forward) information on the vehicle's RSE
. Press to set the clock. system.
K. BAND . Press to and hold to fast
forward through a track. The DVD player is the top slot on
. Press to scroll through the the radio faceplate. The player is
available bands AM, FM, R. Z CD capable of reading the
or XM if equipped. .
DTS-programmed DVD Audio or
Press to eject the DVD Video media. (DTS and DTS
L. SEEK loaded CD. Digital Surround are registered
. Seeks the previous station. S. DVD/CD/AUX trademarks of Digital Theater
Systems, Inc.)
M. SEEK . Press to scroll through
selecting the DVD, CD, Dolby and the double-D symbol are
. Seeks the next station. or an auxiliary device. trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Manufactured under license from
N. P (Power/Volume)
Operation Dolby Laboratories.
. Press to turn the
infotainment system on Radios with CD and DVD Using the Radio
or off. Vehicles with a USB, CD, and DVD O (Power/Volume): Press to turn
. Turn to adjust the volume. radio have a Bose Surround the system on and off.
Sound System. Some of its features Turn clockwise or counterclockwise
O. CD Slot are explained later in this section, to increase or decrease the volume.
Adjusting the Speakers
(Balance/Fade).
4 (Information) (AM-FM Radio and To activate SCV: 2. To adjust the setting, do one of
AM-FM Radio with CD): Press to 1. Set the radio volume to the the following:
switch the display between the radio desired level. . Turn the f knob.
station frequency and the time.
2. Press the MENU button to
While the ignition is off, press this . Press either SEEK,
button to display the time. Press to display the radio setup menu.
or SEEK.
display additional text information 3. Press the softkey under the
related to the current FM-RDS or AUTO VOLUM (automatic . Press either \ FWD,
XM station; or CD, MP3, or WMA volume) tab on the radio display. or s REV.
song. If information is available
4. Press the softkey under the
during XM, CD, MP3, or WMA EQ (Equalization): Press this
desired Speed Compensated
playback, the song title information button to choose bass and treble
Volume setting (OFF, Low, Med,
displays on the top line of the equalization settings designed for
or High) to select the level of
display and artist information different types of music. Selecting
radio volume compensation. The
displays on the bottom line. When MANUAL, or changing bass or
display times out after
information is not available, NO treble, returns the EQ to the manual
approximately 10 seconds. Each
INFO displays. bass and treble settings.
higher setting allows for more
Speed Compensated Volume radio volume compensation at Unique EQ settings can be saved
(SCV): Radios with Speed faster vehicle speeds. for each source.
Compensated Volume (SCV)
automatically adjust the radio Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
volume to compensate for road and (AM-FM Radio and AM-FM
wind noise as the vehicle's speed Radio with CD)
changes while driving, so that the To adjust the bass or treble:
volume level stays consistent.
1. Press the f knob until Bass or
Treble displays.
Setting the Tone (Bass/ . Press the \ FWD, If the radio has a Bose audio
Midrange/Treble) (All Except or s REV. system, the EQ settings are either
AM-FM Radio and Radio MANUAL or TALK.
If a station's frequency is weak or if
with CD) there is static, decrease the treble. Adjusting the Speakers
BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, To quickly adjust bass, midrange,
(Balance/Fade) (AM-FM Radio
or Treble): To adjust the bass, or treble to the middle position, and AM-FM Radio with CD)
midrange, or treble: press the softkey positioned under To adjust the balance or fade:
1. Press the f knob until the tone the BASS, MID, or TREB tab for
more than two seconds. A beep 1. Press ` or press the f knob
control tabs display.
sounds and the level adjusts to the until the speaker control label
2. Highlight the desired tone middle position. displays.
control tab by doing one of the
To quickly adjust all tone and 2. To adjust the setting, do one of
following:
speaker controls to the middle the following:
. Press the f knob. position, press the f knob for more . Turn the f knob.
. Press the softkey under the than two seconds until a beep
desired tab. sounds. . Press either SEEK,
3. Adjust the setting by doing one EQ (Equalization): Press this or SEEK.
of the following: button to choose bass and treble . Press either \ FWD,
equalization settings designed for
. Turn the f knob clockwise different types of music. Selecting or s REV.
or counterclockwise. MANUAL, or changing bass or
treble, returns the EQ to the manual
. Press the SEEK, bass and treble settings.
or SEEK.
Unique EQ settings can be saved
for each source.
Adjusting the Speakers To quickly adjust all speaker and Radio

(Balance/Fade) (All Except tone controls to the middle position,
AM-FM Radio and Radio press the f knob for more than AM-FM Radio
with CD) two seconds.
BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To If the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) is Radio Data System (RDS)
adjust the balance or fade: turned on, the radio disables FADE For radios with the Radio Data
and mutes the rear speakers. System (RDS) feature, it only works
1. Press the f knob until the with FM stations that broadcast
speaker control tabs display. Radio Messages RDS information. This system relies
2. Highlight the desired speaker Calibration Error: The audio upon receiving specific information
control tab by doing one of the system has been calibrated for the from these stations and only works
following: vehicle from the factory. when the information is available.
If Calibration Error displays, it While the radio is tuned to an
. Press the f knob. means that the radio has not been FM-RDS station, the station name
. Press the softkey under the configured properly for the vehicle or call letters will display. In rare
desired tab. and it must be returned to your cases, a radio station could
dealer for service. broadcast incorrect information that
3. Adjust the setting by doing one causes the radio features to work
of the following: Locked or Loc: One of these
messages will display when the improperly. If this happens, contact
. Turn the f knob clockwise THEFTLOCK system has locked the radio station.
or counterclockwise. up the radio. Take the vehicle to 4 (Information) (RDS Features):
your dealer for service. For vehicles with RDS features,
. Press the SEEK,
If any error occurs repeatedly or if press 4 to display additional text
or SEEK. an error cannot be corrected, information related to the current
. Press the \ FWD, contact your dealer. FM-RDS station. If information is
available, the song title information
or s REV. displays on the top line of the
display and artist information SEEK: Press to seek the next Storing Radio Stations
displays on the bottom line. When radio station. Press and hold for a Drivers are encouraged to store the
information is not available, NO few seconds until a beep sounds to radio station while the vehicle is
INFO displays. scan for radio stations in ascending parked; see Defensive Driving on
Finding a Station order; press the SEEK button page 93. Tune to stored radio
again to stop scanning radio stations using the presets, favorites
BAND: Press to switch between stations. The radio only seeks and button, and steering wheel controls,
AM, FM, or SiriusXM, if equipped. scans stations with a strong signal if the vehicle has this feature.
f (Tune): Turn to manually select that are in the selected band. Radios that have a FAV button store
radio stations. For the AM-FM Radio, press and radio stations as favorites. Up to
SEEK: Press to seek the hold the SEEK for four seconds 36 stations can be programmed as
previous radio station. Press and until a double beep sounds to scan favorites using the six softkeys
hold for a few seconds until a beep the preset stations. The station below the radio station frequency
sounds to scan for radio stations in frequency flashes while the radio is tabs and by using the FAV button.
descending order; press the in the scan mode. Press the FAV button to go through
SEEK button again to stop scanning up to six pages of favorites, each
radio stations. The radio only seeks
s REV: Press to manually tune to having six favorite stations available
a radio station in descending order. per page. Each page of favorites
and scans stations with a strong
signal that are in the selected band. \ FWD: Press to manually tune to can contain any combination of AM,
a radio station in ascending order. FM, or SiriusXM, if equipped,
For the AM-FM Radio, press and stations.
hold the SEEK for four seconds FAV (Favorites): Press to select
different favorites pages for stored Radios that do not have a FAV
until a double beep sounds to scan button store radio stations as
the preset stations. The station radio stations.
presets. Up to 18 stations (6 FM1,
frequency flashes while the radio is 6 FM2, and 6 AM), can be
in the scan mode. programmed on the six numbered
pushbuttons.
Setting Preset Stations The number of favorites pages can provinces. SiriusXM Satellite Radio
To store presets: be set up using the MENU button. has a wide variety of programming
To set up the number of favorites and commercial-free music,
1. Tune to a radio station. pages: coast-to-coast, and in digital-quality
2. Press and hold one of the six 1. Press the MENU button. sound. A service fee is required to
numbered pushbuttons for receive the SiriusXM service. If the
three seconds until a beep 2. Press the softkey located below service needs to be reactivated, the
sounds. the FAV 1-6 tab. radio will display No Subscription
3. Select the number of favorites Please Renew on channel XM1.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to store For more information, contact
additional radio stations. pages by pressing the softkey
located below the displayed SiriusXM at www.siriusxm.com or
Storing a Radio Station as a page numbers. call 1-866-635-2349 (U.S) and
Favorite www.xmradio.ca or call
4. Press the FAV button, or let the 1-877-209-0079 (Canada).
To store a station as a favorite: menu time out, to return to the
original main radio screen 4 (Information) (SiriusXM Satellite
1. Tune to a radio station. Radio Service): For vehicles with
showing the radio station
2. Press the FAV button to display frequency tabs and to begin the SiriusXM, press 4 to display
the page where the station will process of programming additional text information related to
be stored. favorites. the current SiriusXM channel.
3. Press and hold one of the six If information is available, the song
softkeys until a beep sounds. Satellite Radio title information displays on the top
line of the display and artist
4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 to SiriusXM Satellite Radio information displays on the bottom
store additional radio stations. Service line. When information is not
SiriusXM is a satellite radio service available, NO INFO displays.
that is based in the 48 contiguous
United States and 10 Canadian
Finding a Channel Finding a Category (CAT) . Press SEEK or SEEK.

BAND: Press to switch between Station 3. To exit the category search
AM, FM, or SiriusXM, if equipped. To find XM channels in a category: mode, press the FAV button or
BAND button to display the
f (Tune): Turn to manually select 1. Press the CAT button to display favorites again.
an SiriusXM channel. the category tabs. Continue
SEEK: Press to go to the pressing the CAT button until the Adding and Removing Categories
previous SiriusXM channel. desired category name displays. Categories cannot be added or
SEEK: Press to go to the next
. Radios with CD and DVD removed while the vehicle is moving
SiriusXM channel. can also navigate the faster than 8 km/h (5 mph).
category list by pressing the To add or remove a category:
s REV: Press to go to the \ FWD or the s REV
previous SiriusXM category. buttons. 1. Press the MENU button.
\ FWD: Press to go to the next 2. Press either of the two softkeys 2. Press the softkey located below
SiriusXM category. below the desired category tab the XM CAT tab.
FAV (Favorites): Press to select to immediately tune to the first
3. Turn the f knob to display the
different favorites pages for stored SiriusXM station in that category.
category to add or remove.
radio stations. To go to the previous or next
SiriusXM station in the selected 4. Press the softkey located under
CAT (Category): The CAT button is the Add or Remove tab.
used to find SiriusXM channels category, do one of the
when the radio is in the XM mode. following: To restore all removed
categories, press the softkey
. Turn the f knob. under the Restore All tab.
. Press the softkey below the 5. Repeat the steps to remove
right or left arrows in the more categories.
category tab.
Storing SiriusXM Channels 3. Press and hold one of the six SiriusXM Radio Messages
softkeys until a beep sounds.
Drivers are encouraged to store XL (Explicit Language
SiriusXM channels while the vehicle 4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 to Channels): These channels, or any
is parked; see Defensive Driving on store additional radio stations. others, can be blocked at a
page 93. Tune to stored radio The number of favorites pages can customer's request, by calling
stations using the presets, favorites be set up using the MENU button. 1-866-635-2349 (US) or
button, and steering wheel controls, To set up the number of favorites 1-877-209-0079 (Canada).
if the vehicle has this feature. pages: XM Updating: The encryption code
Up to 36 stations can be 1. Press the MENU button. in the receiver is being updated, and
programmed as favorites using the no action is required. This process
six softkeys below the radio station 2. Press the softkey located below should take no longer than
frequency tabs and by using the the FAV 1-6 tab. 30 seconds.
FAV button. Press the FAV button to 3. Select the number of favorites No XM Signal: The system is
go through up to six pages of pages by pressing the softkey functioning correctly, but the vehicle
favorites, each having six favorite located below the displayed is in a location that is blocking the
stations available per page. Each page numbers. SiriusXM signal. When the vehicle is
page of favorites can contain any moved into an open area, the signal
combination of AM, FM, 4. Press the FAV button, or let the
menu time out, to return to the should return.
or SiriusXM, if equipped, stations.
original main radio screen Loading XM: The audio system is
Storing an SiriusXM Channel as a showing the radio station acquiring and processing audio and
Favorite frequency tabs and to begin the text data. No action is needed. This
To store a station as a favorite: process of programming message should disappear shortly.
favorites.
1. Tune to an SiriusXM channel. Channel Off Air: This channel is
not currently in service. Tune in to
2. Press the FAV button to display
another channel.
the page where the station will
be stored.
Channel Unauth: This channel is No Subscription Please Renew: Unknown: If this message is
blocked or cannot be received with The SiriusXM subscription needs to received when tuned to channel 0,
your SiriusXM subscription package. be reactivated. Contact SiriusXM at there could be a receiver fault.
Channel Unavail: This previously www.siriusxm.com or call Consult with your dealer.
assigned channel is no longer 1-866-635-2349 (U.S) and Check Antenna: If this message
assigned. Tune to another station. www.xmradio.ca or call does not clear within a short period
If this station was one of the 1-877-209-0079 (Canada). of time, the receiver or antenna
presets, choose another station for CAT Not Found: There are no could have a fault. Consult with your
that preset button. channels available for the selected dealer.
No Artist Info: No artist category. The system is working Check XM Receiver: If this
information is available at this time properly. message does not clear within a
on this channel. The system is XM Theftlocked: The SiriusXM short period of time, the receiver
working properly. receiver in the vehicle could have could have a fault. Consult with your
No Title Info: No song title previously been in another vehicle. dealer.
information is available at this time For security purposes, SiriusXM XM Not Available: If this message
on this channel. The system is receivers cannot be swapped does not clear within a short period
working properly. between vehicles. If this message is of time, the receiver could have a
received after having the vehicle fault. Consult with your dealer.
No CAT Info: No category serviced, check with your dealer.
information is available at this time
on this channel. The system is XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0,
working properly. this message alternates with the
SiriusXM Radio eight-digit radio ID
No Information: No text or label. This label is needed to
informational messages are activate the service.
available at this time on this
channel. The system is working
properly.
Radio Reception FM Stereo Cellular Phone Usage

Frequency interference and static FM signals only reach about Cellular phone usage may cause
can occur during normal radio 16 to 65 km (10 to 40 mi). Although interference with the vehicle's radio.
reception if items such as cell phone the radio has a built-in electronic This interference may occur when
chargers, vehicle convenience circuit that automatically works to making or receiving phone calls,
accessories, and external electronic reduce interference, some static can charging the phone's battery,
devices are plugged into the occur, especially around tall or simply having the phone on. This
accessory power outlet. If there is buildings or hills, causing the sound interference causes an increased
interference or static, unplug the to fade in and out. level of static while listening to the
item from the accessory power radio. If static is received while
SiriusXM Satellite Radio listening to the radio, unplug the
outlet.
Service cellular phone and turn it off.
AM SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service
The range for most AM stations is gives digital radio reception from Fixed Mast Antenna
greater than for FM, especially at coast to coast in the 48 contiguous The fixed mast antenna can
night. The longer range can cause United States, and in Canada. Just withstand most car washes without
station frequencies to interfere with as with FM, tall buildings or hills can being damaged as long as it is
each other. For better radio interfere with satellite radio signals, securely attached to the base. If the
reception, most AM radio stations causing the sound to fade in and mast becomes slightly bent,
boost the power levels during the out. In addition, traveling or standing straighten it out by hand. If the mast
day, and then reduce these levels under heavy foliage, bridges, is badly bent, replace it.
during the night. Static can also garages, or tunnels may cause loss
occur when things like storms and of the SiriusXM signal for a period Occasionally check to make sure
power lines interfere with radio of time. the antenna is tightened to its base.
reception. When this happens, try If tightening is required, tighten by
reducing the treble on the radio. hand until fully seated plus
one quarter turn.
Satellite Radio Antenna Audio Players the CD player and the loading slot
free of foreign materials, liquids,
The XM Satellite Radio antenna is and debris.
located on the roof of the vehicle. CD Player
Keep the antenna clear of If an error displays, see CD Player
obstructions for clear radio Care of the CD Player Messages later in this section.
reception. Do not add any label to a CD. Care of CDs
If the vehicle has a sunroof, the It could get caught in the CD. If a
CD is recorded on a personal If playing a CD-R, the sound quality
performance of the XM system (if can be reduced due to CD-R or
equipped) may be affected if the computer and a description label is
needed, try labeling the top of the CD-RW quality, the method of
sunroof is open. recording, the quality of the music
recorded CD with a marking pen.
that has been recorded, and the
The use of CD lens cleaners is not way the CD-R or CD-RW has been
advised, due to the risk of handled. Handle them carefully.
contaminating the lens of the CD Store CD-Rs or CD-RWs in their
optics with lubricants internal to the original cases or other protective
CD player mechanism. cases and away from direct sunlight
Notice: If a label is added to a and dust. The CD player scans the
CD, more than one CD is inserted bottom surface of the disc. If the
into the slot at a time, or an surface of a CD is damaged, such
attempt is made to play scratched as cracked, broken, or scratched,
or damaged CDs, the CD player the CD does not play properly or not
could be damaged. While using at all. Do not touch the bottom side
the CD player, use only CDs in of a CD while handling it; this could
good condition without any label, damage the surface. Pick up CDs
load one CD at a time, and keep by grasping the outer edges or the
edge of the hole and the outer edge.
If the surface of a CD is soiled, 3. Load a CD. Insert the CD Ejecting a CD (Six-Disc CD

clean it with a soft, lintfree cloth or partway into the slot, label side Player)
dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, up. The player pulls the CD in.
neutral detergent solution mixed Z EJECT: Press and release to
To insert multiple CDs: eject the disc that is currently
with water. Make sure the wiping
process starts from the center to 1. Press and hold the LOAD button playing. Remove the CD when
the edge. for two seconds. A beep sounds Remove Disc displays. If the disc is
and Load All Discs displays. not removed, after several seconds
Inserting a CD (Single CD the disc is automatically pulled back
2. Wait for the message on when to into the player.
Player)
insert the discs. The CD player
Insert a CD partway into the slot, takes up to six CDs. To eject all CDs, press and hold the
label side up. The player pulls it in Z EJECT button for two seconds.
3. Press the LOAD button again to
and the CD should begin playing.
cancel loading more CDs. Playing a CD
Inserting a CD(s) (Six-Disc CD If the ignition or radio is turned off
Ejecting a CD (Single CD
Player) with a CD in the player, it stays in
Player)
the player. When the ignition or
LOAD ^ : Press to load CDs into Z EJECT: Press and release to radio is turned on, the CD starts
the CD player. This CD player holds eject the disc. Remove the CD playing where it stopped, if it was
up to six CDs. when Remove Disc displays. If the the last selected audio source. The
To insert one CD: disc is not removed, after several CD is controlled by the buttons on
seconds the disc is automatically the radio faceplate or by the RSA
1. Press and release the LOAD pulled back into the player.
button. unit. See Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
System on page 748 for more
2. Wait for the message to insert information.
the disc.
When a CD is inserted, the CD displays on the top line of the \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press
symbol displays on the left side of display and artist information and hold to advance playback
the radio display. As each new track displays on the bottom line. When quickly within a track.
starts to play, the track number information is not available, NO
displays. INFO displays. RPT (Repeat): For the AM-FM
Radio with CD, press and release
The CD player can play the smaller f (Tune): Turn to select tracks on the RPT button to repeat the current
8 cm (3 in) single CDs with an the CD that is currently playing. track. Press RPT again to turn off
adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the SEEK: Press to go to the start of repeat play.
smaller CDs are loaded in the same the current track if more than
manner. RDM (Random): Press to listen to
10 seconds on the CD have played. tracks in random, rather than
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to Press to go to the previous track if sequential order. To use random, do
cycle between CD or Auxiliary when less than 10 seconds on the CD one of the following:
listening to the radio. The CD icon have played.
and a message showing the disc For the AM-FM Radio with CD:
and/or track number will display Press and hold, or press multiple 1. Press the RDM button until the
when a CD is in the player. Press times, to continue moving backward random icon displays.
again and the system automatically through the tracks on the CD.
2. Press the RDM button again
searches for an auxiliary input SEEK: Press to go to the next until the random icon disappears
device; see Auxiliary Devices on track. from the display.
page 734 for more information. If a
portable audio player is not Press and hold, or press multiple For the Radio with CD (MP3) and
connected, No Input Device Found times, to continue moving forward Radio with USB and CD (MP3):
displays. through the tracks on the CD.
1. Press the softkey positioned
4 (Information): Press to display s REV (Fast Reverse): Press under the RDM tab until Random
additional text information related to and hold to reverse playback quickly Current Disc displays.
the current song. If information is within a track.
2. Press the softkey again to turn
available, the song title information off random play.
For the Radio with USB and be recorded with the following fixed
. Files with an .mp3, .wma, or .cda
Six-Disc CD (MP3): bit rates: 32 kbps, 40 kbps, 56 kbps, file extension.
1. Press the softkey positioned 64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps, 112 kbps, Root Directory
under the RDM tab until 128 kbps, 160 kbps, 192 kbps,
224 kbps, 256 kbps, and 320 kbps or The root directory is treated as a
Randomize All Discs displays to folder. Files are stored in the root
play tracks from all CDs loaded a variable bit rate.
directory when the disc or storage
in random order. Compressed Audio or Mixed Mode device does not contain folders.
2. Press the softkey positioned Discs Files accessed from the root
under the RDM tab until Random The radio can play discs that directory of a CD display as
Current Disc displays to play contain both uncompressed CD F1 ROOT.
tracks from a single CD in audio and MP3 files. If both formats Empty Folder
random order. are on the disc, the radio reads all
MP3 files first, then the Folders that do not contain files are
3. Press the same softkey again to
uncompressed CD audio files. skipped, and the player advances to
turn off random play.
the next folder that contains files.
MP3Supported Files CDR or CDRWSupported File
and Folder Structure Order of Play
The Radio with CD (MP3), Radio Compressed audio files are
with USB and CD (MP3), and Radio The radio supports:
accessed in the following order:
with USB and Six-Disc CD (MP3) . Up to 50 folders.
have the capability of playing an
. Playlists (Px).
. Up to 8 folders in depth.
MP3 CD-R or CD-RW disc. . Files stored in the root directory.
. Up to 50 playlists.
Format . Files stored in folders in the root
. Up to 255 files. directory.
Radios that have the capability of
playing MP3s can play .mp3 or .wma
. Playlists with an .m3u or .wpl
files that were recorded onto a extension.
CD-R or CD-RW disc. The files can
Tracks are played in the following Track names longer than 32 contains more than the maximum of
order: characters or 4 pages are 50 folders, 15 playlists, and
. Play begins from the first track in shortened. The display does not 512 folders and files, the player
the first playlist and continues show parts of words on the last allows access and navigates up to
sequentially through all tracks in page of text and the extension of the maximum, but all items over the
each playlist. When the last the file name is not displayed. maximum are not accessible.
track of the last playlist has Preprogrammed Playlists Playing an MP3
played, play continues from the
first track of the first playlist. CDs that have preprogrammed 4 (Information): Press to display
playlists reated using WinAmp, additional text information related to
. Play begins from the first track in MusicMatch, or Real Jukebox the current song. If information is
the first folder and continues software can be accessed; however, available, the song title information
sequentially through all tracks in there is no playlistediting capability displays on the top line of the
each folder. When the last track using the radio. These playlists are display and artist information
of the last folder has played, treated as special folders containing displays on the bottom line. When
play continues from the first compressed audio song files. information is not available, NO
track of the first folder. INFO displays.
Playlists that have an .m3u or .pls
File System and Naming file extension and are stored on a f (Tune): Turn to select MP3s on
The song name that displays is the USB device may be supported by the CD currently playing.
the radio with a USB port.
song name that is contained in the SEEK: Press to go to the start of
ID3 tag. If the song name is not Playlists can be changed by using the track, if more than 10 seconds
present in the ID3 tag, then the the softkeys below the S c and have played. Press and hold or
radio displays the file name without c T tabs, the f knob, the SEEK press multiple times to continue
the extension (such as .mp3) as the moving backward through tracks.
button, or the SEEK button. An
track name.
MP3 CD-R or CD-RW that has been
recorded without using file folders
can be played. If a CD-R or CD-RW
SEEK: Press to go to the next RDM (Random): Press to listen to h (Music Navigator): Press the
track. Press and hold or press tracks in random, rather than softkey below the h tab to play
multiple times to continue moving sequential order. To use random, do
the files in order by artist or album.
forward through tracks. one of the following:
The player scans the disc to sort the
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold For the Radio with CD (MP3) and
files by artist and album ID3 tag
to reverse playback quickly. Sound Radio with USB and CD (MP3):
information. It can take several
is heard at a reduced volume and 1. Press the softkey positioned minutes to scan the disc depending
the elapsed time of the file displays. under the RDM tab until Random on the number of files on the disc.
Release s REV to resume playing. Current Disc displays. The radio may begin playing while it
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press 2. Press the softkey again to turn is scanning in the background.
and hold to advance playback off random play. When the scan is finished, the disc
quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced For the Radio with USB and begins playing files in order by
volume and the elapsed time of the Six-Disc CD (MP3): artist. The current artist playing is
file displays. Release \ FWD to shown on the second line of the
1. Press the softkey positioned display. Once all songs by that artist
resume playing. The elapsed time of
under the RDM tab until are played, the player moves to the
the file displays.
Randomize All Discs displays to next artist in alphabetical order and
S c (Previous Folder): Press play tracks from all CDs loaded begins playing files by that artist.
the softkey below the S c tab to in random order.
To listen to files by another artist,
go to the first track in the previous 2. Press the softkey positioned press the softkey located below
folder. under the RDM tab until Random either arrow tab. The disc goes to
c T (Next Folder): Press the Current Disc displays to play the next or previous artist in
tracks from a single CD in alphabetical order. Continue
softkey below the c T tab to go to
random order. pressing either softkey below the
the first track in the next folder.
3. Press the same softkey again to arrow tab until the desired artist
turn off random play. displays.
To change from playback by artist to CD Player Messages displays an error message, write it
playback by album: down and provide it to your dealer
CHECK DISC: If this message
1. Press the softkey located below when reporting the problem.
displays and/or the CD ejects, it
the Sort By tab. could be for one of the following
reasons: CD/DVD Player
2. Press one of the softkeys below
the Album tab from the sort . It is very hot. When the Care of the CD and DVD Player
screen. temperature returns to normal, Do not add any label to a disc.
3. Press the softkey below the the CD should play. It could get caught in the CD or
Back tab to return to the main . The road is very rough. When DVD player. If a disc is recorded on
music navigator screen. the road becomes smoother, the a personal computer and a
The album name displays on the CD should play. description label is needed, try
second line between the arrows, labeling the top of the recorded disc
. The CD is dirty, scratched, wet,
and songs from the current album with a marking pen.
or upside down.
begin to play. Once all songs from The use of CD/DVD lens cleaners is
. The air is very humid. If so, wait
that album have played, the player not advised, due to the risk of
about an hour and try again.
moves to the next album in contaminating the lens of the optics
alphabetical order on the CD and . There was a problem while with lubricants internal to the CD
begins playing MP3s from that burning the CD. and DVD player mechanism.
album. . The label is caught in the CD Notice: If a label is added to a
To exit music navigator mode, press player. CD, more than one CD is inserted
the softkey below the Back tab to If the CD is not playing correctly, for into the slot at a time, or an
return to normal MP3 playback. any other reason, try a known attempt is made to play scratched
good CD. or damaged CDs, the CD player
could be damaged. While using
If any error occurs repeatedly or if the CD player, use only CDs in
an error cannot be corrected, good condition without any label,
contact your dealer. If the radio
load one CD at a time, and keep surface. Pick up discs by grasping select CD slot, DVD slot, front
the CD player and the loading slot the outer edges or the edge of the auxiliary input, USB port, or rear
free of foreign materials, liquids, hole and the outer edge. auxiliary input (if available).
and debris. If the surface of a disc is soiled, If a playback device is plugged into
If an error displays, see CD clean it with a soft, lintfree cloth or the radios front auxiliary input jack,
Messages later in this section. dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, USB port, or the rear auxiliary jack,
neutral detergent solution mixed the front seat passengers are able
Care of CDs and DVDs with water. Make sure the wiping to listen to playback from this
If playing a CD-R or CD-RW, the process starts from the center to source through the vehicle
sound quality can be reduced due to the edge. speakers. See Using the Auxiliary
CD-R or CD-RW quality, the method Input Jack in Auxiliary Devices on
of recording, the quality of the music Audio Output page 734, or Audio/Video (A/V)
that has been recorded, and the Only one audio source can be heard Jacks under Rear Seat
way the CD-R or CD-RW has been through the speakers at one time. Entertainment (RSE) System on
handled. Handle them carefully. An audio source is defined as DVD page 738 for more information.
Store CD-Rs or CD-RWs in their slot, CD slot, XM, FMAM, front In some vehicles, depending on
original cases or other protective auxiliary jack, USB port, or rear audio options, the rear speakers
cases and away from direct sunlight auxiliary jack. can be muted when the RSA power
and dust. The CD or DVD player is turned on. See Rear Seat Audio
scans the bottom surface of the Press the O button to turn the radio
on. The radio can be heard through (RSA) System on page 748 for
disc. If the surface of a disc is more information.
damaged, such as cracked, broken, all of the vehicle speakers.
or scratched, the disc does not play Front seat passengers can listen to
properly or not at all. Do not touch the radio (AM, FM, or XM if
the bottom side of a disc while equipped) by pressing the BAND
handling it; this could damage the button or the DVD/CD AUX button to
Inserting a Disc If loading and reading of a disc When a CD is inserted, the text tab
cannot be completed, due to DVD or CD symbol displays on the
Insert a disc partway into either slot,
unknown format, etc., and the disc left side of the radio display. As
label side up. The player pulls it in
fails to eject, press and hold for each new track starts to play, the
and the disc should begin playing.
more than five seconds to force the track number displays.
(Loading a disc into the system,
disc to eject. The CD player can play the smaller
depending on media type and
format, ranges from 5 to 20 seconds Playing a CD (in Either the 8 cm (3 in) single CDs with an
for a CD, and up to 30 seconds for a DVD or CD Slot) adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
DVD to begin playing.) smaller CDs are loaded in the same
If the ignition or radio is turned off manner.
Ejecting a Disc with a CD in the player, it stays in
the player. When the ignition or DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press to
Z CD (Eject): Press and release
radio is turned on, the CD starts cycle through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary
to eject the disc that is currently when listening to the radio. The
playing. The CD ejects from the playing where it stopped, if it was
the last selected audio source. The DVD/CD text tab and a message
bottom slot. A beep sounds and showing the track or chapter
Ejecting Disc displays. Once the CD is controlled by the buttons on
the radio faceplate or by the RSA number will display when a disc is in
disc is ejected, Remove Disc either slot. Press the DVD/CD AUX
displays. The disc can be removed. unit. See Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
System on page 748 for more button again and the system
If the disc is not removed, after automatically searches for an
several seconds the disc information. The DVD/CD decks
(the upper slot is the DVD deck and auxiliary input device; see Auxiliary
automatically pulls back into the Devices on page 734 for more
player. the lower slot is the CD deck) of the
radio are compatible with most information. If a portable audio
Z DVD (Eject): Press and audio CDs, CD-Rs, CD-RWs, player is not connected, No Aux
release to eject the disc that is and MP3s. Input Device displays. If a disc is in
currently playing in the top slot. both the DVD slot and the CD slot,
A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc the DVD/CD AUX button cycles
displays. between the two sources and does
not indicate No Aux Input Device.
If a front auxiliary device is f (Tune): Turn to select tracks on RDM (Random): Press to listen to
connected, the DVD/CD AUX button the disc that is currently playing. tracks in random, rather than
cycles through all available options, sequential order. To use random:
such as: DVD slot, CD slot, Front SEEK: Press to go to the start of
the current track, if more than 1. Press the softkey under the
Auxiliary, and Rear Auxiliary (if RDM tab until Random Current
available). See Using the Auxiliary five seconds on the CD have
played. Disc displays.
Input Jack in Auxiliary Devices on
page 734 or Audio/Video (A/V) Press to go to the previous track if 2. Press the softkey again to turn
Jacks under Rear Seat less than five seconds on the CD off random play.
Entertainment (RSE) System on have played. MP3 and WMA Supported Files
Press and hold, or press multiple
If a disc is inserted into the top DVD times, to continue moving backward Format
slot, the rear seat operator can turn through the tracks on the CD. The radio can play .mp3 or .wma
on the video screen and use the files that were recorded onto a
remote control to navigate the CD
CD-R or CD-RW disc.
track.
(tracks only) through the remote
control. Press and hold, or press multiple Compressed Audio or Mixed Mode
times, to continue moving forward Discs
4 (Information): Press to display
through the tracks on the CD.
additional text information related to The radio plays discs that contain
the current song. If information is s REV (Fast Reverse): Press both uncompressed CD audio and
available, the song title information and hold to reverse playback quickly MP3/WMA files depending on which
displays on the top line of the within a track. slot the disc is loaded into.
display and artist information \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press The DVD player only reads
displays on the bottom line. When and hold to advance playback uncompressed audio and ignores
information is not available, NO quickly within a track. MP3/WMA files on a mixed
INFO displays. mode disc.
The CD player reads both

. Playlists with an .m3u or .wpl recorded without folders or playlists.
uncompressed audio and MP3/ extension. When displaying the name of the
WMA files on a mixed mode disc. . Files with an .mp3, .wma, or .cda folder, the radio displays ROOT.
Uncompressd audio is played file extension. When the disc contains only
before MP3/WMA files. Press the playlists and compressed audio
CAT (category) button to toggle Root Directory
files, but no folders, all files are
between uncompressed audio and The root directory of the disc is located under the root folder. The
MP3/WMA files. treated as a folder. If the root folder down and the folder up
CDR or CDRW Supported File directory has compressed audio buttons search playlists first and
and Folder Structure files, the directory displays as F1 then go to the root folder. When the
ROOT on the radio. radio displays the name of the
The DVD player supports:
If a disc contains both folder, the radio displays ROOT.
. Up to 255 folders. uncompressed CD audio and MP3/ Order of Play
. Up to eight folders in depth. WMA files, a folder under the root
directory called CD accesses all of Compressed audio files are
. Up to 15 playlists. the CD audio tracks on the disc. accessed in the following order:
. Up to 40 sessions. . Playlists (Px).
Empty Folder
. Playlists with an .m3u or .wpl . Files stored in the root directory.
Folders that do not contain files are
extension.
skipped, and the player advances to . Files stored in folders in the root
. Files with an .mp3, .wma, or .cda the next folder that contains files. directory.
file extension.
No Folder
The CD player supports:
When the disc contains only
. Up to 512 files and folders. compressed files, the files are
. Up to 8 folders in depth. located under the root folder. The
next and previous folder function
does not function on a disc that was
Tracks are played in the following present in the ID3 tag, then the Playing an MP3 or WMA (in
order: radio displays the file name without Either the DVD or CD Slot)
. Play begins from the first track in the extension (such as .mp3) as the
track name. If a disc is inserted into the top DVD
the first playlist and continues slot, the rear seat operator can turn
sequentially through all tracks in Track names longer than on the video screen and use the
each playlist. When the last 32 characters or 4 pages are remote control to navigate the CD
track of the last playlist has shortened. Parts of words on the (tracks only).
played, play continues from the last page of text and the extension
first track of the first playlist. of the file name do not display. f (Tune): Turn to select MP3/WMA
files.
. Play begins from the first track in Preprogrammed Playlists
the first folder and continues SEEK: Press to go to the start of
sequentially through all tracks in Preprogrammed playlists that were the track, if more than five seconds
each folder. When the last track created using WinAmp, have played. Press and hold or
of the last folder has played, MusicMatch, or Real Jukebox press multiple times, if less than
play continues from the first software can be accessed; however, five seconds have played, to
track of the first folder. they cannot be edited using the continue moving backward through
radio. These playlists are treated as tracks.
When play enters a new folder, the special folders containing
display does not automatically show compressed audio song files.
the new folder name unless the track.
folder mode has been chosen as Playlists that have an .m3u or .pls
Press and hold, or press multiple
the default display. The new track file extension and are stored on a
times, to continue moving forward
name displays. USB device may be supported by
through tracks.
the radio with a USB port.
File System and Naming s REV (Reverse): Press and hold
to reverse playback quickly.
The song name that displays is the
song name that is contained in the
ID3 tag. If the song name is not
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press The player scans the disc to sort the To change from playback by artist to
and hold to advance playback files by artist and album ID3 tag playback by album:
quickly. information. It can take several 1. Press the softkey below the Sort
minutes to scan the disc depending
S c (Previous Folder): Press on the number of files on the disc.
By tab.
the softkey below the S c tab to The radio may begin playing while it 2. Press one of the softkeys below
go to the first track in the previous is scanning in the background. the Album tab from the sort
folder. screen.
When the scan is finished, the disc
c T (Next Folder): Press the begins playing files in order by 3. Press the softkey below the
softkey below the c T tab to go to artist. The current artist playing is Back tab to return to the main
the first track in the next folder. shown on the second line of the music navigator screen.
display. Once all songs by that artist The album name displays on the
RDM (Random): Press to listen to are played, the player moves to the
tracks in random, rather than second line between the arrows,
next artist in alphabetical order and and songs from the current album
sequential order. begins playing files by that artist. begin to play. Once all songs from
To use random: To listen to files by another artist, that album have played, the player
1. Press the softkey under the press the softkey located below moves to the next album in
RDM tab until Random Current either arrow tab. The disc goes to alphabetical order on the CD and
Disc displays the next or previous artist in begins playing MP3 files from that
alphabetical order. Continue album.
2. Press the same softkey again to
pressing either softkey below the To exit music navigator mode, press
turn off random play.
arrow tab until the artist displays. the softkey below the Back tab to
h (Music Navigator): Press the return to normal MP3 playback.
softkey below the h tab to play
files in order by artist or album.
Using the DVD Player Inserting a Disc If loading and reading of a disc
cannot be completed, due to
The DVD player can be controlled Insert a disc partway into the top
unknown format, etc., and the disc
by the buttons on the remote slot, label side up. The player pulls
fails to eject, press and hold for
control, the RSA system, or by the it in and the disc should begin
more than five seconds to force the
buttons on the radio faceplate. See playing. Loading Disc shows on
disc to eject.
Remote Control under Rear Seat the radio display. At the same time,
Entertainment (RSE) System on the radio displays a softkey menu of Playing a DVD
page 738 and Rear Seat Audio option(s). Some discs automatically
(RSA) System on page 748 for play the movie while others default DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press to
more information. to the softkey menu display, which cycle through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary
requires the Play, Enter, when listening to the radio. The
The DVD player is only compatible DVD/CD text tab and a message
with DVDs of the appropriate region or Navigation softkeys to be
pressed, either by softkey or by the showing the track or chapter
code printed on the jacket of number will display when a disc is in
most DVDs. rear seat passenger using the
remote control. either slot. Press the DVD/CD AUX
The DVD slot of the radio is button again and the system
compatible with most audio CDs Loading a disc into the system, automatically searches for an
and CD-R/RW, DVD-Video, depending on media type and auxiliary input device; see Auxiliary
DVD-Audio, DVD-R/RW, and DVD format, ranges from 5 to 20 seconds Devices on page 734 for more
+R/RW media, along with MP3 and for a CD, and up to 30 seconds for information. If a portable audio
WMA formats. a DVD. player is not connected, No Aux
Input Device displays. If a disc is in
If an error message displays on the Ejecting a Disc
both the DVD slot and the CD slot,
video screen or the radio, see DVD Z DVD (Eject): Press and the DVD/CD AUX button cycles
Display Error Messages under release to eject the disc currently between the two sources and does
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) playing in the top slot. A beep not indicate No Aux Input Device.
System on page 738, and CD/DVD sounds and Ejecting Disc displays. If a front auxiliary device is
Player Messages later in this connected, the DVD/CD AUX button
section for more information.
cycles through all available options, A lock symbol displays next to the button might not work when the
such as: DVD slot, CD slot, front clock display. The Parental Control DVD is playing the copyright
auxiliary, and rear auxiliary (if feature remains on until the knob is information or the previews.
available). See Using the Auxiliary pressed and held for more than \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press to
Input Jack in Auxiliary Devices on two seconds again, or until the fast forward the CD or DVD at
page 734 or Audio/Video (A/V) driver turns the ignition off and exits five times the normal speed. To stop
Jacks under Rear Seat the vehicle. fast forwarding, press again. This
Entertainment (RSE) System on f (Tune): Turn to select tracks on button might not work when the
page 738 for more information. a CD or DVD. DVD is playing the copyright
If a disc is inserted into the top DVD SEEK: Press to return to the start information or the previews.
slot, the rear seat operator can turn of the current track or chapter.
on the video screen and use the Using Softkeys to Play a DVD-V
Press again to go to the previous (Video)
remote control to navigate the CD track or chapter. This button might
(tracks only) through the remote not work when the DVD is playing Once a DVD-V is inserted, the radio
control. the copyright information or the display menu shows several tab
options for playback. Press the
O (Power): Press to turn the radio previews.
softkey located under any tab option
on or off. Turn clockwise or SEEK: Press to go to the next
counterclockwise to increase or during DVD-V playback.
track or chapter. This button might
decrease the volume. Press and not work when the DVD is playing r / j (Play/Pause): Press either
hold for more than two seconds to the copyright information or the the Play or Pause tab displayed on
turn off the entire radio and Rear previews. the radio, to toggle between pausing
Seat Entertainment (RSE) system or restarting playback of a DVD.
and to start the Parental Control s REV (Fast Reverse): Press to If the forward arrow is showing on
feature. Parental Control prevents quickly reverse the CD or DVD at the display, the system is in pause
the rear seat occupant from five times the normal speed. To stop mode. If the Pause tab is showing
operating the Rear Seat Audio fast reversing, press again. This on the display, the system is in
(RSA) system or remote control.
playback mode. If the DVD screen making a selection press this Using Softkeys to Play a DVD-A
is off, press the play button to turn button. This button only operates (Audio)
the screen on. when using a DVD. Once a DVD-A is inserted, the radio
Some DVDs begin playing after the Nav (Navigate): Press to display display menu shows several tab
previews have finished, although directional arrows for navigating options for playback. Press the
there could be a delay of up to through the menus. softkey located under any tab option
30 seconds. If the DVD does not q (Return): Press to exit the during DVD-A playback.
begin playing the movie current active menu and return to r / j (Play/Pause): Press either
automatically, press the softkey the previous menu. This button the play or pause icon displayed on
located under the play/pause operates only when a DVD is the radio, to toggle between pausing
symbol tag displayed on the radio. playing and a menu is active. or restarting playback of a DVD.
If the DVD still does not play, refer If the forward arrow is showing on
to the on-screen instructions, The rear seat passenger can
navigate the DVD-V and DVD-A the display, the system is in pause
if available. mode. If the pause tab is showing
menus and controls through the
c (Stop): Press to stop playing, remote control. See Remote on the display, the system is in
rewinding, or fast forwarding a DVD. Control under Rear Seat playback mode.
r (Enter): Press to select the Entertainment (RSE) System on q Group r : Press to cycle
choices that are highlighted in page 738 for more information. The through musical groupings on the
any menu. video screen automatically turns on DVD-A disc.
y (Menu): Press to access the when the DVD-V is inserted into the Nav (Navigate): Press to display
DVD menu. The DVD menu is DVD slot, and does not directional arrows for navigating
different on every DVD. Use the automatically power on when the through the menus.
softkeys located under the DVD-A is inserted into the DVD slot.
navigation arrows to navigate the It must be manually turned on by
cursor through the DVD menu. After the rear seat occupant through the
remote control power button.
e (Audio Stream): Press to cycle the c or the r / j tabs displayed No Disc Inserted: This message
through audio stream formats on the radio. If the radio is sourced displays if no disc is present when
located on the DVD-A disc. The to something other than DVD-V, the Z or DVD/CD AUX button is
video screen shows the audio press the DVD/CD AUX button to pressed on the radio.
stream changing. make DVD-V the active source. Optical Error: This message
The rear seat passenger can To resume DVD playback, press the displays if the disc was inserted
navigate the DVD-V and DVD-A r / j button on the remote control, upside down.
menus and controls through the or press the softkey located under Disk Read Error: This message
remote control. See Remote the r / j tab on the radio. The DVD displays if a disc was inserted with
Control under Rear Seat should resume play from where it an invalid or unknown format.
Entertainment (RSE) System on last stopped if the disc has not been
page 738 for more information. The ejected and the stop button has not Player Error: This message
video screen automatically turns on been pressed twice on the remote displays if there are disc load or
when the DVD-V is inserted into the control. If the disc has been ejected disc eject problems.
DVD slot, and does not or the stop button has been pressed . It is very hot. When the
automatically power on when the twice on the remote control, the disc temperature returns to normal,
DVD-A is inserted into the DVD slot. resumes playing at the beginning of the disc should play.
It must be manually turned on by the disc.
the rear seat occupant through the . The road is very rough. When
remote control power button. CD/DVD Player Messages the road becomes smoother, the
disc should play.
Stopping and Resuming Disc Format Error: This message
displays if the disc is inserted with
. The disc is dirty, scratched, wet,
Playback or upside down.
the disc label wrong side up, or if
To stop playing a DVD without the disc is damaged. . The air is very humid. If so, wait
turning off the system, press the c about an hour and try again.
Disc Region Error: This message
button on the remote control, displays if the disc is not from a
or press the softkey located under
. There was a problem while
correct region. burning the disc.

. The label is caught in the CD/ Defensive Driving on page 93 for BAND: Press to listen to the radio
DVD player. more information on driver when a portable audio device is
If the disc is not playing correctly, for distraction. playing. The portable audio device
any other reason, try a known To use a portable audio player, continues playing.
good disc. connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable to CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to
If any error occurs repeatedly or if the radio's front auxiliary input jack. play a CD when a portable audio
an error cannot be corrected, When a device is connected, press device is playing. Press again and
contact your dealer. If the radio the radio CD/AUX button to begin the system begins playing audio
displays an error message, write it playing audio from the device over from the connected portable audio
down and provide it to your dealer the vehicle speakers. player. If a portable audio player is
when reporting the problem. For optimal sound quality, increase not connected, No Input Device
the portable audio device's volume Found displays.
Auxiliary Devices to the loudest level. DVD/CD AUX (DVD/CD/
It is always best to power the Auxiliary): Press to cycle through
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack DVD, CD, or Auxiliary when
portable audio device through its
Radios with an auxiliary input jack own battery while playing. listening to the radio. The DVD/CD
located on the lower right side of the text tab and a message showing
faceplate can connect to an external O (Power/Volume): Turn clockwise track or chapter number will display
audio device such as an iPod, or counterclockwise to increase or when a disc is in either slot. Press
MP3 player, or CD player, for use as decrease the volume of the portable again and the system automatically
another source for audio listening. player. Additional volume searches for an auxiliary input
This input jack is not an audio adjustments might have to be made device, such as a portable audio
output; do not plug headphones into from the portable device if the player. If a portable audio player is
the front auxiliary input jack. volume is not loud or soft enough. not connected, No Aux Input
Device displays. If a disc is in both
Drivers are encouraged to set up
the DVD slot and the CD slot, the
any auxiliary device while the
DVD/CD AUX button cycles
vehicle is in P (Park). See
between the two sources and does
not indicate No Aux Input Device. USB-Supported Devices USB-Supported File and Folder
If a front auxiliary device is . USB flash drive Structure
connected, the DVD/CD AUX button The radio supports:
cycles through all available options, . Portable USB hard drive
. Up to 700 folders
such as: DVD slot, CD slot, front . Fifth generation or later iPod
auxiliary, and rear auxiliary (if . Up to eight folders in depth
available). See Using the Auxiliary
. iPod nano
Input Jack in this section, or Audio/ . iPod touch . Up to 65,535 files.
Video (A/V) Jacks under Rear Seat . Folder and file names up to
Entertainment (RSE) System on
. iPod classic
64 bytes
page 738 for more information. Not all iPods and USB drives are
compatible with the USB port.
. Files with an .mp3 or .wma file
Using the USB Port extension
Make sure the iPod has the latest
Radios with a USB port can control firmware from Apple for proper
. AAC files stored on an iPod
a USB storage device or an iPod operation. iPod firmware can be . FAT16
using the radio buttons and knobs. updated using the latest iTunes
See Playing an MP3 in CD Player
. FAT32
application. See www.apple.com/
on page 717 or CD/DVD Player on itunes. Connecting a USB Storage
page 723 for information about how
For help with identifying the iPod, go Device or iPod
to connect and control a USB
storage device or an iPod. to www.apple.com/support. The USB port can be used to
Radios that have a USB port can control an iPod or a USB storage
USB Support device.
play .mp3 and .wma files that are
The USB connector is located on stored on a USB storage device as To connect a USB storage device,
the instrument panel or in the center well as AAC files that are stored on connect the device to the USB port
console, and uses the USB 2.0 an iPod. located in the center console or on
standard. the instrument panel.
To connect an iPod, connect one Using the Radio to Control a volume. Release \ FWD to
end of the USB cable that came USB Storage Device or iPod resume playing. The elapsed time of
with the iPod to the iPods dock the file displays.
connector and connect the other The radio can control a USB
end to the USB port located in the storage device or an iPod using the 4 (Information): Press to display
center console or on the instrument radio buttons and knobs, and additional information about the
panel. If the vehicle is on and the display song information on the selected track.
USB connection works, OK to radios display.
Using Softkeys to Control a
disconnect and a GM logo may f (Tune): Turn to select files. USB Storage Device or iPod
appear on the iPod, and iPod
appears on the radio display. The
SEEK: Press to go to the start of The five softkeys below the radio
the track, if more than 10 seconds display are used to control the
iPod music appears on the radios
have played. Press and hold or functions listed below.
display and begins playing.
press multiple times to continue
The iPod charges while it is moving backward through tracks. To use the softkeys:
connected to the vehicle if the
vehicle is in the ACC/ACCESSORY
SEEK: Press to go to the next 1. Press the first or fifth softkey
track. Press and hold or press below the radio display to
or ON/RUN position. When the display the functions listed
multiple times to continue moving
vehicle is turned off, the iPod below, or press the softkey
forward through tracks.
automatically powers off and will not below the function if it is
charge or draw power from the s REV (Reverse): Press and hold currently displayed.
vehicle's battery. to reverse playback quickly. Sound
is heard at a reduced volume. 2. Press the softkey below the tab
If you have an older iPod model that with the function on it to use that
is not supported, it can still be used Release s REV to resume playing.
The elapsed time of the file function.
by connecting it to the auxiliary
input jack using a standard 3.5 mm displays.
(1/8 in) stereo cable. See Using the \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press
Auxiliary Input Jack earlier for more and hold to advance playback
information. quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced

. Genres
j (Pause): Press the softkey below 5. Press f to select the desired file
j to pause the track. The tab to be played. . Songs
appears raised when pause is being . Composers
To skip through large lists, the five
used. Press the softkey below j softkeys can be used to navigate in To select files:
again to resume playback. the following order:
Back: Press the softkey below the . First softkey, first item in the list.
1. Press the softkey below h.
back tab to go back to the main . Second softkey, 1% through the 2. Turn f to scroll through the list
display screen on an iPod, or the
list each time the softkey is of menus.
root directory on a USB storage
pressed.
device. 3. Press f to select the
c (Folder View): Press the
. Third softkey, 5% through the list desired menu.
each time the softkey is pressed.
softkey below c to view the 4. Turn f to scroll through the
contents of the current folder on the
. Fourth softkey, 10% through the
folders or files in the
USB drive. To browse and select list each time the softkey is
selected menu.
files: pressed.
. Fifth softkey, end of the list. 5. Press f to select the desired file
1. Press the softkey below c. to be played.
h (Music Navigator): Press the
2. Turn f to scroll through the list To skip through large lists, the five
softkey below h to view and
of folders. softkeys can be used to navigate in
select a file on an iPod, using the
the following order:
3. Press f to select the desired iPod's menu system. Files are
folder. If there is more then one sorted by: . First softkey, first item in the list.
folder, repeat Steps 1 and 2 until . Playlists . Second softkey, 1% through the
the desired folder is reached. list each time the softkey is
. Artists
pressed.
4. Turn f to scroll through the files . Albums
in the selected folder.

. Third softkey, 5% through the list Shuffle Functionality
each time the softkey is pressed. Rear Seat
To use Shuffle:
. Fourth softkey, 10% through the Infotainment
list each time the softkey is Press the softkey below >, 2,
pressed. C , or = to select between Rear Seat Entertainment
Shuffle Off, Shuffle All Songs/ (RSE) System
. Fifth softkey, end of the list.
Shuffle Songs, Shuffle Album,
Repeat Functionality or Shuffle Folder. The vehicle may have a DVD Rear
Seat Entertainment (RSE) system.
To use Repeat: > (Shuffle Off): Press the The RSE system works with the
softkey below 2 to turn shuffle vehicle's audio system. The DVD
Press the softkey below " or '
off. This is the default mode when a player is part of the front radio. The
to select between Repeat All and
Repeat Track. USB storage device or iPod is first RSE system includes a radio with a
connected. DVD player, a video display screen,
" (Repeat All): Press the softkey 2 (Shuffle All Songs/Shuffle audio/video jacks, two wireless
below " to repeat all tracks. The Songs): Press the softkey below headphones, and a remote control.
tab appears lowered when Repeat = or C to shuffle all songs on See CD/DVD Player on page 723
All is being used. This is the default the USB storage device or iPod. for more information on the vehicle's
mode when a USB storage device CD/DVD player.
or iPod is first connected. C (Shuffle Album): Press the
softkey below > to shuffle all
' (Repeat Track): Press the songs in the current album on
softkey below ' to repeat one an iPod.
track. The tab appears raised when
Repeat Track is being used. = (Shuffle Folder): Press the
softkey below > to shuffle all
songs in the current folder on a USB
storage device.
Before Driving DVD, and/or CD. While Parental Headphones

Control is on, a padlock icon
The RSE is designed for rear seat
displays.
passengers only. The driver cannot
safely view the video screen while The radio can be turned back on
driving and should not try to do so. with a single press of the power
button, but the RSE system will
In severe or extreme weather
remain under Parental Control.
conditions, the RSE system might
not work until the temperature is To turn Parental Control off, press
within the operating range. The and hold the radio power button for
operating range for the RSE system more than two seconds. The RSE
is above 20C (4F) or below returns from where it was previously
60C (140F). If the temperature of left and the padlock icon disappears
the vehicle is outside this range, from the radio display.
heat or cool the vehicle until the Parental Control can also be turned A. Battery cover
temperature is within the operating off by inserting or ejecting any disc,
range of the RSE system. pressing the play icon on the radio B. Channel 1 or 2 switch
Parental Control DVD display menu, or changing an C. Power button
ignition position. D. Volume control
The RSE system may have a
Parental Control feature, depending E. Power indicator light
on which radio the vehicle has. To
The RSE includes two 2-channel
start Parental Control, press and
wireless headphones that are
hold the radio power button for more
dedicated to this system. Channel 1
than two seconds to stop all system
is dedicated to the video screen,
features such as: radio, video
while Channel 2 is dedicated to
screen, Rear Seat Audio (RSA),
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) selections.
These headphones can be used to
listen to the radio, CDs, DVDs, move too far forward or step out of If the foam ear pads attached to the
MP3s, DVD-As, or any auxiliary the vehicle, the headphones lose headphones become worn or
source connected to A/V jacks or the audio signal. damaged, the pads can be replaced
the auxiliary input jack, if the vehicle To adjust the volume on the separately from the headphone set.
has this feature. The wireless headphones, use the volume control To purchase replacement ear pads,
headphones have a power button, located on the right side. call 1-888-293-3332, then prompt
channel 1 or 2 switch, and a volume zero (0), or contact your dealer.
control. For optimal audio performance, the
headphones must be worn correctly. Battery Replacement
Push the power button to turn on Headphones should be worn with
the headphones. An indicator light To change the batteries on the
the headband over the top of the headphones:
located on the headphones comes head for best audio reception. The
on. If the light comes on, but there symbol L (Left) appears on the 1. Turn the screw to loosen the
is intermittent sound and/or static on outside bottom edge of the ear cup battery door located on the left
the headphones, or if the indicator and should be positioned on the left side of the headphones. Slide
light does not come on, the batteries ear. The symbol R (Right) appears the battery door open.
might need to be replaced. See on the outside bottom edge of the 2. Replace the two batteries in the
Battery Replacement later in this ear cup and should be positioned on compartment. Make sure that
section for more information. Switch the right ear. they are installed correctly, using
the headphones to Off when not the diagram on the inside of the
in use. Notice: Do not store the
headphones in heat or direct battery compartment.
Infrared transmitters are located at sunlight. This could damage the 3. Replace the battery door and
the rear of the overhead console. headphones and repairs will not tighten the door screw.
The headphones shut off be covered by the warranty.
automatically to save the battery If the headphones are to be stored
Storage in extreme cold can for a long period of time, remove the
power if the RSE system and RSA weaken the batteries. Keep the
are shut off, or if the headphones batteries and keep them in a cool,
headphones stored in a cool, dry dry place.
are out of range of the transmitters place.
for more than three minutes. If you
Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks the RSE system. Adapter Auxiliary Devices on page 734 for
connectors or cables (not included) more information about changing
may be required to connect the the source.
auxiliary device to the A/V jacks.
Refer to the manufacturers Changing the RSE Video Screen
Settings
instructions for proper usage.
The screen display mode (normal,
Power for auxiliary devices is not
full, and zoom), screen brightness,
supplied by the radio system.
and setup menu language can be
To use the auxiliary inputs of the changed from the on screen setup
RSE system, connect an external menu. To change any feature:
auxiliary device to the color-coded
A/V jacks and turn both the auxiliary 1. Press the z (display menu)
device and the video screen power button on the remote control.
on. If the video screen is in the DVD
2. Use the remote control n, q,
player mode, pressing the AUX
Yellow: Video Input (auxiliary) button on the remote p, o (navigation) arrows and
White: Left Audio Input control switches the video screen the r (enter) button to use the
from the DVD player mode to the setup menu.
Red: Right Audio Input
auxiliary device. The audio of the
The A/V jacks are color coded to 3. Press the z button again to
connected source can be listened to
match typical home entertainment over the speakers by sourcing the remove the setup menu from the
system equipment. radio to the auxiliary device or by screen.
The A/V jacks, located on the rear sourcing the RSA to the Rear Aux
of the floor console, allow audio or and listening with the wireless
video signals to be connected from headphones on Channel 2 or with
an auxiliary device such as a the wired headphones. See Using
camcorder or a video game unit to the Auxiliary Input Jack under
Audio Output When a device is connected to the If a DVD is playing and the screen
A/V jacks, or the radio's auxiliary is raised to its locked position, the
Audio from the DVD player or
input jack if the vehicle has this screen remains on. This is normal,
auxiliary inputs can be heard
feature, the rear seat passengers and the DVD continues to play
through the following possible
are able to hear audio from the through the previous audio source.
sources:
auxiliary device through the wireless Use the remote control power button
. Wireless headphones or wired headphones. The front seat or eject the disc to turn off the
. Vehicle speakers passengers are able to listen to screen.
playback from this device through The overhead console contains the
. Vehicle-wired headphone jacks the vehicle speakers by selecting
on the RSA system, if the infrared transmitters for the wireless
AUX as the source on the radio. headphones and the infrared
vehicle has this feature.
Video Screen receivers for the remote control.
The RSE system always transmits They are located at the rear of the
the audio signal to the wireless The video screen is located in the console.
headphones, if there is audio overhead console.
available. See Headphones earlier Notice: Avoid directly touching
To use the video screen: the video screen, as damage may
in this section for more information.
1. Push the release button located occur. See Cleaning the Video
The DVD player is capable of on the overhead console. Screens later in this section for
outputting audio to the wired more information.
headphone jacks on the RSA 2. Move the screen to the desired
system, if the vehicle has this position.
feature. The DVD player can be When the video screen is not in
selected as an audio source on the use, push it up into its locked
RSA system. See Rear Seat Audio position.
(RSA) System on page 748 for
more information.
Remote Control Objects blocking the line of sight Remote Control Buttons
could also affect the function of the O (Power): Press this button to
remote control. turn the video screen on and off.
If a CD or DVD is in the Radio DVD P (Illumination): Press this button
slot, the remote control O (power) to turn the remote control backlight
button can be used to turn on the on. The backlight automatically
video screen display and start the times out after 7 to 10 seconds if no
disc. The radio can also turn on the other button is pressed while the
video screen display. See Operation backlight is on.
v (Title): Press this button to
Notice: Storing the remote return the DVD to the main menu of
control in a hot area or in direct the DVD. This function could vary
sunlight can damage it, and the for each disc.
repairs will not be covered by the
To use the remote control, aim it at warranty. Storage in extreme cold y (Main Menu): Press this button
the transmitter window at the rear of can weaken the batteries. Keep to access the DVD menu. The DVD
the RSE overhead console and the remote control stored in a menu is different on every DVD.
press the desired button. Direct cool, dry place. Use the navigation arrows to move
sunlight or very bright light could the cursor around the DVD menu.
affect the ability of the RSE If the remote control becomes lost After making a selection press the
transmitter to receive signals from or damaged, a new universal enter button. This button only
the remote control. If the remote remote control can be purchased. operates when using a DVD.
control does not seem to be If this happens, make sure the
working, the batteries might need to universal remote control uses a n, q, p, o (Menu Navigation
Arrows): Use the arrow buttons to
be replaced. See Battery code set of Toshiba.
navigate through a menu.
Replacement later in this section.
r (Enter): Press this button to While the DVD is playing, the DVD video, press the play/pause button.
select the choice that is highlighted can be played slowly by pressing To stop fast reversing a DVD audio
in any menu. the play/pause button then pressing or CD, release the fast reverse
the fast forward button. The DVD button. This button might not work
z (Display Menu): Press this continues playing in a slow play when the DVD is playing the
button to adjust the brightness, mode. Also, reverse can be played copyright information or the
screen display mode (normal, full, slowly by pressing the play/pause previews.
or zoom), and display the button and then pressing the fast
language menu. reverse button. To cancel slow play
[ (Fast Forward): Press this
button to fast forward the DVD or
q (Return): Press this button to mode, press the play/pause button. CD. To stop fast forwarding a DVD
exit the current active menu and t (Previous Track/Chapter): video, press the play/pause button.
return to the previous menu. This Press this button to return to the To stop fast forwarding a DVD audio
button operates only when the start of the current track or chapter. or CD, release the fast forward
display menu or a DVD menu is Press this button again to go to the button. This button might not work
active. previous track or chapter. This while the DVD is playing the
c (Stop): Press this button to stop button might not work when the copyright information or the
playing, fast reversing, or fast DVD is playing the copyright previews.
forwarding a DVD. Press this button information or the previews. e (Audio): Press this button to
twice to return to the beginning of u (Next Track/Chapter): Press change audio tracks on DVDs that
the DVD. this button to go to the beginning of have this feature when the DVD is
s (Play/Pause): Press this the next chapter or track. This playing. The format and content of
button to start playing a DVD. Press button might not work while the this function vary for each disc.
this button while a DVD is playing to DVD is playing the copyright { (Subtitles): Press this button to
pause it. Press it again to continue information or the previews. turn on or off subtitles and to move
playing the DVD. r (Fast Reverse): Press this through subtitle options when a
button to quickly reverse the DVD or
CD. To stop fast reversing a DVD
DVD is playing. The format and Battery Replacement

content of this function vary for To change the remote control
each disc. batteries, do the following:
AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button 1. Slide the rear cover back on the
to switch the system between the remote control.
DVD player and an auxiliary source.
2. Replace the two batteries in the
2 (Camera): Press this button to compartment. Make sure they
change camera angles on DVDs are installed correctly using the
that have this feature while a DVD is diagram on the inside of the
playing. The format and content of remote control.
this function vary for each disc.
3. Replace the battery cover.
1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad):
The numeric keypad provides the If the remote control is to be stored
capability of direct chapter or track for a long period of time, remove the
number selection. batteries and keep them in a cool,
dry place.
\ (Clear): Press this button within
three seconds after entering a
numeric selection, to clear all
numerical inputs.
} 10 (Double Digit Entries): Press
this button to select chapter or track
numbers greater than nine. Press
this button before entering the
number.
Tips and Troubleshooting Chart

Problem Recommended Action
There is no power. The ignition might not be turned to ON/RUN or ACC/
ACCESSORY.
The picture does not fill the screen. There are black Check the display mode settings in the setup menu by
borders on the top and bottom or on both sides, or the pressing the display menu button on the remote control.
picture looks stretched out.
In auxiliary mode, the picture moves or scrolls. Check the auxiliary input connections at both devices.
The remote control does not work. Check to make sure there is no obstruction between the
remote control and the transmitter window.
Check the batteries to make sure they are not dead or
installed incorrectly.
After stopping the player, and pushing Play, sometimes If the stop button was pressed one time, the DVD player
the DVD starts where it left off and sometimes at the resumes playing where the DVD was stopped. If the
beginning. stop button was pressed two times, the DVD player
begins to play from the beginning of the DVD.
The auxiliary source is running, but there is no picture or Check that the RSE video screen is in the auxiliary
sound. source mode.
Check the auxiliary input connections at both devices.
Tips and Troubleshooting Chart (cont'd)

Problem Recommended Action
Sometimes the wireless headphone audio cuts out or Check for obstructions, low batteries, reception range,
buzzes. and interference from cellular telephone towers, or use a
cellular telephone in the vehicle.
Check that the headphones are on correctly using the L
(left) and R (right) on the headphones.
The remote and/or the headphones are lost. See your dealer for assistance.
The DVD is playing, but there is no picture or sound. Check that the RSE video screen is sourced to the DVD
player.
DVD Display Error Messages Disc Region Error: This message It might be necessary to turn off the
displays if the disc is not from a DVD player when operating one of
The DVD display error message
correct region. these devices in or near the vehicle.
depends on the radio that is in the
vehicle. The video screen can No Disc Inserted: This message *Excludes the OnStar System.
display one of the following: displays if no disc is present when
EJECT or DVD AUX is pressed on Cleaning the RSE Overhead
Disc Load/Eject Error: This Console
the radio.
message displays when there are
disc load or eject problems. DVD Distortion When cleaning the RSE overhead
console surface, use only a clean
Disc Format Error: This message Video distortion can occur when cloth dampened with clean water.
displays if the disc is inserted with operating cellular phones, scanners,
the disc label wrong side up, or if CB radios, Global Position Systems
the disc is damaged. (GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile fax
machines, or walkie talkies.
Cleaning the Video Screen The radio functionality is controlled To listen to an iPod or portable
by both the RSA and the front radio. audio device through the RSA,
When cleaning the video screen,
Only one band can be tuned to at attach the iPod or portable audio
use only a clean cloth dampened
one time. Changing the band on the device to the front auxiliary input (if
with clean water. Use care when
RSA or the front radio will change available), located on the front audio
directly touching or cleaning the
the band on the other system, system. Turn the iPod on, then
screen, as damage could result.
if they are both sourced to the radio. choose the front auxiliary input with
The RSA functions can be used the RSA SRCE button.
Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
even while the main radio is off. The
System front audio system will display the
Vehicles with this feature allow the headphone icon when the RSA is
rear seat passengers to listen to on, and it will disappear from the
and control any of the music display when the RSA is off.
sources: radio, CDs, DVDs, or other Audio can be heard through wired
auxiliary sources. However, the rear headphones (not included) plugged
seat passengers can only control into the jacks on the RSA. If the
the music sources the front seat vehicle has this feature, audio can
P (Power): Press this button to
passengers are not listening to turn the RSA on or off.
also be heard on Channel 2 of the
(except on some radios where dual wireless headphones. Volume: To increase or decrease
control is allowed). For example, headphone volume, turn the knobs
rear seat passengers can control Depending on the audio system, the
located next to the SRCE or PROG
and listen to a CD through the rear speakers may continue to play
buttons. The left knob controls the
headphones, while the driver listens when the RSA audio is active
left headphones and the right knob
to the radio through the front through the headphones.
controls the right headphones.
speakers. The rear seat passengers
have control of the volume for each
set of headphones.
SRCE (Source): Press this button While listening to a disc, press the While a CD or DVDA disc is
to switch between the radio (AM left seek arrow to go back to the playing, press this button to go to
FM), XM (if equipped), CD, and if start of the current track or chapter the beginning of the CD or DVDA.
the vehicle has these features, (if more than 10 seconds have This function is inactive, with some
DVD, front auxiliary, and rear played). Press the right seek arrow radios, if the front seat passengers
auxiliary. to go the next track or chapter on are listening to the CD or DVDA.
(Seek): When listening to FM, the disc. This function is inactive, While a disc is playing in the CD or
AM, or XM (if equipped), press with some radios, if the front seat DVD changer, press this button to
the seek arrows to go to the passengers are listening to the disc. select the next disc, if multiple discs
previous or to the next station or While a DVD video menu is being are loaded. This function is inactive,
channels and stay there. This displayed, press either seek arrow with some radios, if the front seat
function is inactive, with some to perform a cursor up or down on passengers are listening to the disc.
radios, if the front seat passengers the menu. Hold either seek arrow to While a DVD video menu is being
are listening to the radio. perform a cursor left or right on displayed, press the PROG button
Press and hold either seek arrow the menu. to perform the menu function, Enter.
until the display flashes, to tune to PROG (Program): Press this
an individual station. The display button to go to the next preset radio
stops flashing after the buttons have station or channel set on the main
not been pushed for more than radio. This function is inactive, with
two seconds. This function is some radios, if the front seat
inactive, with some radios, if the passengers are listening to the
front seat passengers are listening radio.
to the radio.

. Pair cell phone(s) to the vehicle.
Phone The system may not work with
A Bluetooth system can use a
Bluetooth-capable cell phone with a
all cell phones. See Pairing in Hands-Free Profile to make and
Bluetooth this section for more information. receive phone calls. The system
For vehicles equipped with . If the cell phone has voice can be used while the key is in the
Bluetooth capability, the system can dialing capability, learn to use ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY
interact with many cell phones, that feature to access the position. The range of the Bluetooth
allowing: address book or contact list. See system can be up to 9.1 m (30 ft).
Voice Pass-Thru in this section Not all phones support all functions,
. Placement and receipt of calls in and not all phones work with the
a hands-free mode. for more information.
in-vehicle Bluetooth system. See
. Sharing of the cell phones
. See Storing and Deleting Phone www.gm.com/bluetooth for more
address book or contact list with Numbers in this section for information on compatible phones.
the vehicle. more information.
Voice Recognition
To minimize driver distraction,
before driving, and with the vehicle
{ WARNING The Bluetooth system uses voice
parked: recognition to interpret voice
When using a cell phone, it can commands to dial phone numbers
. Become familiar with the be distracting to look too long or and name tags.
features of the cell phone. too often at the screen of the
Organize the phone book and phone or the infotainment For additional information, say
contact lists clearly and delete (navigation) system. Taking your Help while you are in a voice
duplicate or rarely used entries. eyes off the road too long or too recognition menu.
If possible, program speed dial often could cause a crash Noise: Keep interior noise levels to
or other shortcuts. resulting in injury or death. Focus a minimum. The system may not
. Review the controls and your attention on driving. recognize voice commands if there
operation of the infotainment is too much background noise.
system.

. The pairing process is disabled
When to Speak: A short tone b / g (Push to Talk): Press to
when the vehicle is moving.
sounds after the system responds answer incoming calls, confirm
indicating when it is waiting for a system information, and start . Pairing only needs to be
voice command. Wait until the tone speech recognition. completed once, unless the
and then speak. pairing information on the cell
c / x (End): Press to end a call,
phone changes or the cell phone
How to Speak: Speak clearly in a reject a call, or cancel an operation.
calm and natural voice. is deleted from the system.
Pairing . Only one paired cell phone can
Audio System
A Bluetooth-enabled cell phone be connected to the Bluetooth
When using the in-vehicle Bluetooth must be paired to the Bluetooth system at a time.
system, sound comes through the system and then connected to the . If multiple paired cell phones are
vehicle's front audio system vehicle before it can be used. See within range of the system, the
speakers and overrides the audio the cell phone manufacturer's user system connects to the first
system. Use the audio system guide for Bluetooth functions before available paired cell phone in the
volume knob, during a call, to pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth order that they were first paired
change the volume level. The phone is not connected, calls will be to the system. To connect to a
adjusted volume level remains in made using OnStar Hands-Free different paired phone, see
memory for later calls. To prevent Calling, if equipped. See OnStar Connecting to a Different
missed calls, a minimum volume Overview on page 141. Phone later in this section.
level is used if the volume is turned
down too low. Pairing Information Pairing a Phone
. A Bluetooth phone with MP3
Bluetooth Controls
capability cannot be paired to
1. Press and hold b / g for
Use the buttons on the steering the vehicle as a phone and an two seconds.
wheel to operate the in-vehicle MP3 player at the same time. 2. Say Bluetooth. This command
Bluetooth system. See Steering can be skipped.
. Up to five cell phones can be
Wheel Controls on page 52.
paired to the Bluetooth system.
3. Say Pair. The system responds Listing All Paired and Connected Connecting to a Different Phone
with instructions and a four-digit Phones To connect to a different cell phone,
Personal Identification Number The system can list all cell phones the Bluetooth system looks for the
(PIN). The PIN is used in Step 5. paired to it. If a paired cell phone is next available cell phone in the
4. Start the pairing process on the also connected to the vehicle, the order in which all the available cell
cell phone that you want to pair. system responds with is connected phones were paired. Depending on
For help with this process, see after that phone name. which cell phone you want to
the cell phone manufacturer's connect to, you may have to use
user guide. 1. Press and hold b / g for this command several times.
two seconds.
5. Locate the device named Your
2. Say Bluetooth.
Vehicle in the list on the cell two seconds.
phone. Follow the instructions 3. Say List.
on the cell phone to enter the 2. Say Bluetooth.
PIN provided in Step 3. After the Deleting a Paired Phone 3. Say Change phone.
PIN is successfully entered, the If the phone name you want to
system prompts you to provide a
. If another cell phone is
delete is unknown, see Listing All found, the response will be
name for the paired cell phone. Paired and Connected Phones.
This name will be used to <Phone name> is now
indicate which phones are 1. Press and hold b / g for connected.
paired and connected to the two seconds. . If another cell phone is not
vehicle. The system responds 2. Say Bluetooth. found, the original phone
with <phone name> has been remains connected.
successfully paired after the 3. Say Delete. The system asks
pairing process is complete. which phone to delete.
6. Repeat Steps 15 to pair 4. Say the name of the phone you
additional phones. want to delete.
Storing and Deleting Phone Using the Store Command repeats back the digit it heard
Numbers followed by a tone. After the last
1. Press and hold b / g for digit has been entered, say
The system can store up to 30 two seconds. Store, and then follow the
phone numbers as name tags in the directions given by the system to
2. Say Store.
Hands-Free Directory that is shared save a name tag for this number.
between the Bluetooth and OnStar 3. Say the phone number or group
systems, if equipped. of numbers you want to store all Using the Delete Command
at once with no pauses, then
The following commands are used
follow the directions given by the 1. Press and hold b / g for
to delete and store phone numbers. two seconds.
system to save a name tag for
Store: This command will store a this number. 2. Say Delete.
phone number, or a group of
numbers as a name tag. Using the Digit Store Command 3. Say the name tag you want to
If an unwanted number is delete.
Digit Store: This command allows
a phone number to be stored as a recognized by the system, say Using the Delete All Name Tags
name tag by entering the digits one Clear at any time to clear the last Command
at a time. number.
This command deletes all stored
Delete: This command is used to To hear all of the numbers name tags in the Hands-Free
delete individual name tags. recognized by the system, say Calling Directory and the OnStar
Verify at any time. Turn-by-Turn Destinations Directory,
Delete All Name Tags: This if equipped.
command deletes all stored name 1. Press and hold b / g for
tags in the Hands-Free Calling two seconds. To delete all name tags:
Directory and the OnStar 2. Say Digit Store. 1. Press and hold b / g for
Turn-by-Turn Destinations Directory,
3. Say each digit, one at a time, two seconds.
if equipped.
that you want to store. After 2. Say Delete all name tags.
each digit is entered, the system
Listing Stored Numbers Using the Dial or Call After each digit is entered, the
Command system repeats back the digit it
The list command will list all stored
heard followed by a tone.
numbers and name tags. 1. Press and hold b / g for
two seconds. If an unwanted number is
Using the List Command recognized by the system, say
2. Say Dial or Call. Clear at any time to clear the last
two seconds. 3. Say the entire number without number.
pausing, or say the name tag. To hear all of the numbers
2. Say Directory.
Once connected, the person called recognized by the system, say
3. Say Hands-Free Calling. will be heard through the audio Verify at any time.
4. Say List. speakers.
Making a Call Calling 911 Emergency two seconds.
Calls can be made using the 1. Press and hold b / g for 2. Say Digit Dial.
following commands. two seconds. 3. Say each digit, one at a time,
Dial or Call: The dial or call 2. Say Dial or Call. that you want to dial. After each
command can be used digit is entered, the system
3. Say 911. repeats back the digit it heard
interchangeably to dial a phone
number or a stored name tag. 4. Say Dial or Call. followed by a tone. After the last
digit has been entered,
Digit Dial: This command allows a Once connected, the person called say Dial.
phone number to be dialed by will be heard through the audio
entering the digits one at a time. speakers. Once connected, the person called
will be heard through the audio
Re-dial: This command is used to Using the Digit Dial Command speakers.
dial the last number used on the cell
The digit dial command allows a
phone.
phone number to be dialed by
entering the digits one at a time.
Using the Re-dial Command . Press b / g again to return to Muting a Call

the original call.
1. Press and hold b / g for During a call, all sounds from inside
two seconds.
. To ignore the incoming call, no the vehicle can be muted so that the
action is required. person on the other end of the call
2. After the tone, say Re-dial. cannot hear them.
Once connected, the person called
. Press c / x to disconnect the
will be heard through the audio current call and switch to the call . To mute a call, press b / g , and
speakers. on hold. then say Mute call.
Receiving a Call Three-Way Calling . To cancel mute, press b / g ,

Three-way calling must be and then say Un-mute call.
When an incoming call is received,
the audio system mutes and a ring supported on the cell phone and Transferring a Call
tone is heard in the vehicle. enabled by the wireless service
carrier. Audio can be transferred between
. Press b / g to answer the call. the Bluetooth system and the cell
1. While on a call, press b / g. phone.
. Press c / x to ignore a call. 2. Say Three-way call. The cell phone must be paired and
Call Waiting 3. Use the dial or call command to connected with the Bluetooth
dial the number of the third party system before a call can be
Call waiting must be supported on transferred. The connection process
the cell phone and enabled by the to be called.
can take up to two minutes after the
wireless service carrier. 4. Once the call is connected, ignition is turned to ON/RUN.
. Press b / g to answer an press b / g to link all callers
incoming call when another call together.
is active. The original call is Ending a Call
placed on hold.
Press c / x to end a call.
Transferring Audio from the To access contacts stored in the cell Sending a Number or Name Tag
Bluetooth System to a Cell Phone phone: During a Call
During a call with the audio in the 1. Press and hold b / g for 1. Press b / g. The system
vehicle: two seconds. responds Ready, followed by
1. Press b / g. 2. Say Bluetooth. This command a tone.
2. Say Transfer Call. can be skipped. 2. Say Dial.

3. Say Voice. The system 3. Say the number or name tag
Transferring Audio to the to send.
responds OK, accessing
Bluetooth System from a Cell
<phone name>.
Phone Clearing the System
The cell phone's normal prompt
During a call with the audio on the Unless information is deleted out of
messages will go through their cycle
cell phone, press b / g. The audio according to the phone's operating the in-vehicle Bluetooth system, it
transfers to the vehicle. If the audio instructions. will be retained indefinitely. This
does not transfer to the vehicle, use includes all saved name tags in the
the audio transfer feature on the cell Dual Tone Multi-Frequency phone book and phone pairing
phone. See your cell phone (DTMF) Tones information. For information on how
manufacturer's user guide for more to delete this information, see the
The Bluetooth system can send
information. previous section Deleting a Paired
numbers and the numbers stored as
Phone and the previous sections
Voice Pass-Thru name tags during a call. You can
on deleting name tags.
use this feature when calling a
Voice pass-thru allows access to the menu-driven phone system.
voice recognition commands on the Account numbers can also be
cell phone. See your cell phone stored for use.
manufacturer's user guide to see if
the cell phone supports this feature.
Other Information Trademarks and

The Bluetooth word mark and License Agreements
logos are owned by the Bluetooth
SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks
by General Motors is under license.
Other trademarks and trade names
are those of their respective owners. Manufactured under license from
See Radio Frequency Statement on Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the
page 1320 for information double-D symbol are trademarks of
regarding Part 15 of the Federal Dolby Laboratories.
Manufactured under license under
Communications Commission (FCC)
U.S. Patent #'s: 5,451,942;
rules and Industry Canada
5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762;
Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.
6,487,535 & other U.S. and
worldwide patents issued &
pending. DTS and the Symbol are
registered trademarks and DTS
Digital Surround and the DTS logos
are trademarks of DTS Inc. All
Rights Reserved.
2 NOTES
Climate Controls 8-1
Climate Controls Climate Control Systems
Climate Control Systems Climate Control Systems (with Air Conditioning)

Climate Control Systems (with With this system the heating, cooling, and ventilation can be controlled.
Air Conditioning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Heater Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Dual Automatic Climate Control
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Air Vents
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
A. Fan Control G. Rear Window Defogger

B. Temperature Control Temperature Control: Turn
C. Air Delivery Mode Control clockwise or counterclockwise to
increase or decrease the
D. Air Conditioning temperature inside the vehicle.
E. Outside Air
F. Recirculation
8-2 Climate Controls
9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwise - (Defog): This mode clears the be used with all modes, but it
or counterclockwise to increase or windows of fog or moisture. Air is cannot be used with the
decrease the fan speed. Turn the directed to the windshield, floor recirculation mode.
knob all the way counterclockwise outlets, and side window vents. ? (Recirculation): Press to turn
to turn the front system off. 0 (Defrost): This mode removes the recirculation mode on. An
Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn fog or frost from the windshield indicator light comes on to show
clockwise or counterclockwise to more quickly. Air is directed to the that recirculation is on.
change the direction of the airflow windshield and the side window This mode recirculates and helps to
inside the vehicle. The knob can be vents, with some air directed to the quickly cool the air inside the
positioned between two modes to floor vents. The system vehicle. It can be used to help
select a combination of those automatically forces outside air into prevent outside air and odors from
modes. the vehicle. entering the vehicle.
Select from the following: The recirculation mode cannot be The recirculation mode cannot be
H (Vent): Air is directed to the selected in the defog or defrost used with floor, defog or defrost
instrument panel outlets. mode. When either mode is modes. If recirculation is selected
selected, the system runs the air with one of these modes, the
) (Bi-Level): Air is divided conditioning compressor, unless the indicator light flashes three times
between the instrument panel and outside temperature is close to and then turns off. While in
floor outlets. freezing. recirculation mode the windows may
6 (Floor): Air is directed to the Do not drive the vehicle until all the fog when the weather is cold and
floor outlets, with some air directed windows are clear. damp. To clear the fog, select either
to the windshield and side window the defog or defrost mode and
outlets. In this mode, the system : (Outside Air): Press to turn increase the fan speed.
automatically selects outside air. the outside air mode on. An
indicator light comes on to show The recirculation mode can be
Recirculation cannot be selected in turned off by pressing the outside
floor mode. that outside air is on. In this mode
outside air circulates throughout the air button, or by turning off the
vehicle. The outside air mode can ignition.
# (Air Conditioning): Press to The rear window defogger only

turn the air conditioning system on works when the ignition is in ON/
or off. An indicator light comes on to RUN. The rear window defogger
show that the air conditioning is on. stays on for approximately
The air conditioning can be selected 10 minutes after the button is
in any mode as long as the fan pressed, unless the ignition is
switch is on. turned to ACC/ACCESSORY or
LOCK/OFF. The defogger can also
The air conditioning system be turned off by turning off the
removes moisture from the air, so a engine.
small amount of water might drip
under the vehicle while idling or Notice: Do not use anything
after turning off the engine. This is sharp on the inside of the rear
normal. window. If you do, you could cut
or damage the warming grid, and
Rear Window Defogger the repairs would not be covered
For vehicles with a rear window by the vehicle warranty. Do not
defogger, a warming grid is used to attach a temporary vehicle
remove fog from the rear window. license, tape, a decal, or anything
similar to the defogger grid.
1 (Rear): Press to turn the rear
window defogger on or off. An
indicator light on the button comes
on to show that the rear window
defogger is on.
Climate Control Systems (with Heater Only) knob can be positioned between
two modes to select a combination
With this system the heating and ventilation can be controlled. of those modes.
Select from the following:
H (Vent): Air is directed to the
instrument panel outlets.
) (Bi-Level): Air is divided
between the instrument panel and
floor outlets.
6 (Floor): Air is directed to the
floor outlets, with some air directed
to the windshield, side window, and
second row floor outlets. In this
mode, the system automatically
selects outside air.
A. Fan Control 9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwise - (Defog): This mode clears the
B. Temperature Control or counterclockwise to increase or windows of fog or moisture. Air is
decrease the fan speed. Turn the directed to the windshield, floor
C. Air Delivery Mode Control knob all the way counterclockwise outlets, and side window vents.
Temperature Control: Turn to turn the front system off.
clockwise or counterclockwise to Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn
increase or decrease the clockwise or counterclockwise to
temperature inside the vehicle. increase or decrease the
temperature inside the vehicle. The
0 (Defrost): This mode removes Dual Automatic Climate Control System

fog or frost from the windshield
more quickly. Air is directed to the The heating, cooling, and ventilation in the vehicle can be controlled with
windshield and the side window this system.
vents, with some air directed to the
floor vents. The system
automatically forces outside air into
the vehicle.
Do not drive the vehicle until all the
windows are clear.
A. Driver and Passenger H. Display

Temperature Controls I. On/Off
B. Fan Control J. Rear Window Defogger
C. AUTO K. Air Conditioning
D. Defrost L. PASS (Passenger)
E. Recirculation O (On/Off): Press to turn the
F. Outside Air climate control system on or off.
G. Air Delivery Mode Control Outside air still enters the vehicle,
and is directed to the floor. This
direction can be changed by forward unless it is set to Automatic Operation

pressing the mode button. recirculation mode. See
AUTO (Automatic): When
Recirculation can be selected once Recirculation later in this section.
automatic operation is active, the
you have selected vent or bi-level Press the + or buttons to increase system controls the inside
mode. The temperature can also be or decrease the cabin temperature. temperature, the air delivery, and
adjusted using either temperature The driver side or passenger side the fan speed.
button. If the air delivery mode or temperature display shows the
temperature settings are adjusted Use the steps below to place the
temperature setting increasing or
with the system off, the display entire system in automatic mode:
decreasing.
illuminates briefly to show the 1. Press the AUTO button.
settings and then returns to off. The The passenger temperature setting
system can be turned back on by can be set to match the driver When AUTO is selected, the
pressing either O, D, C, # , the temperature setting by pressing the display changes to show the
PASS button and turning off the current temperature(s) and
defrost or the AUTO button.
PASS indicator. When the AUTO is lit on the display. The
Driver and Passenger Side passenger temperature setting is set current air delivery mode and
Temperature Controls different than the driver setting, the fan speed are also displayed for
indicator on the PASS button about five seconds.
The driver and passenger side illuminates and both the driver side
temperature buttons are used to When AUTO is selected, the air
and passenger side temperature conditioning operation and air
adjust the temperature of the air displays are shown.
coming through the system on the inlet are automatically controlled.
driver or passenger side of the When in defrost mode the The air conditioning compressor
vehicle. The temperature can be passenger temperature setting may run when the outside
adjusted even if the system is cannot be changed. temperature is above freezing.
turned off. This is possible since The air inlet will normally be set
outside air always flows through the to outside air. If it is hot outside,
system as the vehicle is moving the air inlet may automatically
switch to the recirculate mode to
help quickly cool down the air sensor regulates air temperature H G (Air Delivery Mode Control):
inside the vehicle. The light on based on sun load. For more Press these buttons to change the
the button comes on in information on the solar sensor, see direction of the airflow in the vehicle.
recirculation. Sensors later in this section. Repeatedly press either button until
2. Set the driver and passenger To avoid blowing cold air in cold the desired mode appears on the
temperature. weather, the system delays turning display.
To find your comfort setting, start the fan on until warm air is Pressing either mode button while
with a 23C (74F) temperature available. The length of delay the system is off changes the air
setting and allow about depends on the engine coolant delivery mode without turning the
20 minutes for the system to temperature. Pressing the fan system on.
regulate. Use the driver or switch overrides this delay and
changes the fan to a selected Pressing either mode button while in
passenger temperature buttons automatic control places the mode
to adjust the temperature setting speed.
under manual control. The air
as necessary. If a temperature Manual Operation delivery mode setting displays and
setting of 15C (60F) is chosen, the AUTO light turns off. The fan
the system remains at the D C (Fan Control): Press these
remains under automatic control.
maximum cooling setting. If a buttons to increase or decrease the
temperature setting of 32C fan speed. H (Vent): Air is directed to the
(90F) is chosen, the system Pressing either fan button while in instrument panel outlets.
remains at the maximum heat automatic control places the fan ) (Bi-Level): Air is divided
setting. Choosing either under manual control. The fan between the instrument panel and
maximum setting will not cause setting remains displayed and the floor outlets. Some air is directed
the vehicle to heat or cool any AUTO light turns off. The air toward the windshield and side
faster. delivery mode remains under window outlets.
Do not cover the solar sensor automatic control. 6 (Floor): Air is directed to the
located on the top of the instrument floor outlets, with some to the
panel near the windshield. This windshield, side window outlets, and
second row floor outlets. In this The passenger temperature control temperature which is too cool for air
mode, the system automatically cannot be activated while in defrost conditioning to be effective, the air
selects outside air. mode. If the PASS button is conditioning light turns off to show
- (Defog): This mode clears the pressed, the button indicator flashes that the air conditioning mode has
windows of fog or moisture. Air is three times and will not work. If the been canceled.
directed to the windshield, floor passenger temperature buttons are On hot days, open the windows long
outlets, and side window vents. In adjusted, the driver temperature enough to let hot inside air escape.
this mode, the system turns off indicator changes. The passenger This helps to reduce the time it
recirculation and runs the air temperature will not be displayed. takes for the vehicle to cool down.
conditioning compressor unless the If vent, bi-level, or floor mode is It also helps the system to operate
outside temperature is close to selected again, the climate control more efficiently.
freezing. The recirculation mode system displays the previous The air conditioning system
cannot be selected while in the temperature settings. removes moisture from the air, so a
defrost mode. Do not drive the vehicle until all small amount of water might drip
0 (Defrost): This mode removes windows are clear. under the vehicle while idling or
fog or frost from the windshield # (Air Conditioning): Press to after turning off the engine. This is
more quickly. Air is directed to the turn the air conditioning (A/C) normal.
windshield and side window vents, compressor on and off. An indicator @ (Recirculation): Press to turn
with some directed to the floor light comes on to show that the air the recirculation mode on. An
vents. In this mode, the system conditioning is on. indicator light comes on to show
automatically forces outside air into that recirculation is on.
the vehicle and runs the air If this button is pressed when the air
conditioning compressor unless the conditioning compressor is This mode recirculates and helps to
outside temperature is close to unavailable due to outside quickly cool the air inside the
freezing. The recirculation mode conditions, the indicator flashes vehicle. It can be used to help
cannot be selected while in the three times and then turns off. If the prevent outside air and odors from
defrost mode. air conditioning is on and the entering the vehicle.
outside temperature drops below a
The recirculation mode cannot be Rear Window Defogger the rear window defog button is
used with floor, defog, or defrost pressed. See Power Mirrors on
The rear window defogger uses a
modes. If recirculation is selected page 214.
warming grid to remove fog from the
with one of those modes, the
rear window. Sensors
indicator light flashes three times
and then turns off. The air 1 (Rear Window Defogger): For
conditioning compressor also comes vehicles with this feature, press to
on when this mode is activated. turn the defogger on or off.
While in recirculation mode, the It automatically turns off several
windows may fog when the weather minutes after it has been activated.
is cold and damp. To clear the fog, The defogger can also be turned off
select either the defog or defrost by turning the engine off. Do not
mode and increase the fan speed. drive the vehicle until all windows
are clear.
The recirculation mode can be
turned off by pressing the outside Notice: Do not use a razor blade
air button, or by turning off the or sharp object to clear the inside
ignition. rear window. Do not adhere
anything to the defogger grid
; (Outside Air): Press to turn the
lines in the rear glass. These The solar sensor, located in the
outside air mode on. An indicator defrost grille in the middle of the
actions may damage the rear
light on the button comes on to instrument panel, monitors the solar
defogger. Repairs would not be
show that outside is on. When heat. Do not cover the solar sensor
covered by your warranty.
selected, air from outside the or the system will not work properly.
vehicle circulates throughout the Heated Mirror: For vehicles with
vehicle. The recirculation mode heated outside rearview mirrors, the
cannot be used with the outside mirrors heat to help clear fog or frost
air mode. from the surface of the mirror when
There is also an exterior Air Vents

temperature sensor located behind
the front grille. This sensor reads Use the air outlets located in the
the outside air temperature and center and on the side of the
helps maintain the temperature instrument panel to direct the
inside the vehicle. Any cover on the airflow. Use the thumbwheels near
front of the vehicle could cause a the air outlets to open or close off
false reading in the displayed the airflow.
temperature.
Operation Tips
The climate control system uses the . Clear away any ice, snow,
information from these sensors to
or leaves from air inlets at the
maintain comfort settings by
The interior temperature sensor, base of the windshield that could
adjusting the outlet temperature, fan
located in the headliner, measures block the flow of air into the
speed, and the air delivery mode.
the temperature of the air inside the vehicle.
The system may also supply cooler
vehicle. air to the side of the vehicle facing . Keep the path under the front
the sun. The recirculation mode will seats clear of objects to help
also be used as needed to maintain circulate the air inside of the
cool outlet temperatures. vehicle more effectively.
. Use of nonGM approved hood
deflectors can adversely affect
the performance of the system.
Check with your dealer before
adding equipment to the outside
of the vehicle.
Driving and Operating 9-1
Driving and Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . .

Fast Idle System . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-26
9-28
Brakes
Antilock Brake
Operating Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-53
9-54
Engine Coolant Heater . . . . . . . 9-29 Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55
Driving Information Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29 Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . 9-55
Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Shifting out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 9-31
Parking (Manual Ride Control Systems
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 StabiliTrak System . . . . . . . . . 9-56
Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31
Parking over Things Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-59
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32 Cruise Control
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Active Fuel Management . . . 9-32
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-59
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Engine Exhaust
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Object Detection Systems
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Off-Road Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 9-62
Running the Vehicle While
Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . 9-10 Rear Vision
Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11 Camera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-64
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . 9-11 Automatic Transmission Fuel
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12 Automatic Transmission . . . . . 9-33
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-68
If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . 9-14 Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37
Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-69
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-15 Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38
Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . 9-69
Truck-Camper Loading
Manual Transmission California Fuel
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . 9-39 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-69
Starting and Operating Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-70
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-23 Drive Systems Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-70
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
9-2 Driving and Operating
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . 9-71

. Designate a front seat
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-72
Driving Information passenger to handle potential
Filling a Portable Fuel distractions.
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-74 Distracted Driving . Become familiar with vehicle
Distraction comes in many forms features before driving, such as
Towing
and can take your focus from the programming favorite radio
General Towing
task of driving. Exercise good stations and adjusting climate
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-74
judgment and do not let other control and seat settings.
Driving Characteristics and
Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-75 activities divert your attention away Program all trip information into
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-77 from the road. Many local any navigation device prior to
Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 9-93 governments have enacted laws driving.
Trailer Sway regarding driver distraction. Become . Wait until the vehicle is parked
Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-104 familiar with the local laws in
to retrieve items that have fallen
your area.
to the floor.
Conversions and Add-Ons To avoid distracted driving, always
Add-On Electrical . Stop or park the vehicle to tend
keep your eyes on the road, hands
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-105 to children.
on the wheel, and mind on the drive.
Adding a Snow Plow or . Keep pets in an appropriate
Similar Equipment . . . . . . . . 9-105 . Do not use a phone in
carrier or restraint.
Pickup Conversion to demanding driving situations.
Chassis Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-108 Use a hands-free method to . Avoid stressful conversations
place or receive necessary while driving, whether with a
phone calls. passenger or on a cell phone.
. Watch the road. Do not read,
take notes, or look up
information on phones or other
electronic devices.
careless and make mistakes.

{ WARNING Anticipate what they might do WARNING (Continued)
and be ready.
Taking your eyes off the road too Do not drink and drive or ride with
long or too often could cause a
. Allow enough following distance a driver who has been drinking.
crash resulting in injury or death. between you and the driver in Ride home in a cab; or if you are
Focus your attention on driving. front of you. with a group, designate a driver
. Focus on the task of driving. who will not drink.
Refer to the infotainment section for
more information on using that Drunk Driving Control of a Vehicle
system, including pairing and using Death and injury associated with
a cell phone. drinking and driving is a global Braking, steering, and accelerating
are important factors in helping to
If equipped, refer to the navigation tragedy.
control a vehicle while driving.
manual for information on that
system, including pairing and using { WARNING Braking
a cell phone.
Drinking and then driving is very Braking action involves perception
Defensive Driving dangerous. Your reflexes, time and reaction time. Deciding to
perceptions, attentiveness, and push the brake pedal is perception
Defensive driving means always judgment can be affected by even time. Actually doing it is
expect the unexpected. The first reaction time.
a small amount of alcohol. You
step in driving defensively is to wear
can have a serious or even Average driver reaction time is
the safety belt. See Safety Belts on
page 312. fatal collision if you drive after about three-quarters of a second. In
drinking. that time, a vehicle moving at
. Assume that other road users 100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m
(Continued)
(pedestrians, bicyclists, and (66 ft), which could be a lot of
other drivers) are going to be distance in an emergency.
Helpful braking tips to keep in mind If power steering assist is lost

. Holding both sides of the
include: because the engine stops or steering wheel allows you to turn
because of a system malfunction, 180 degrees without removing
. Keep enough distance between a hand.
you and the vehicle in front the vehicle can be steered but may
of you. required increased effort. See your . Antilock Brake System (ABS)
dealer if there is a problem. allows steering while braking.
. Avoid needless heavy braking.
. Keep pace with traffic. hybrid supplement for more Off-Road Recovery
If the engine ever stops while the information.
vehicle is being driven, brake Curve Tips
normally but do not pump the
brakes. Doing so could make the . Take curves at a reasonable
pedal harder to push down. If the speed.
engine stops, there will be some . Reduce speed before entering a
power brake assist but it will be curve.
used when the brake is applied.
Once the power assist is used up, it
. Maintain a reasonable steady
can take longer to stop and the speed through the curve
brake pedal will be harder to push. . Wait until the vehicle is out of
the curve before accelerating
Steering gently into the straightaway.
Hydraulic Power Steering Steering in Emergencies
Your vehicle has hydraulic power . There are some situations when
steering. It may require steering around a problem may
maintenance. See Power Steering be more effective than braking.
Fluid on page 1024.
The vehicle's right wheels can drop

. Steering or Cornering Skid material on the road. Learn to
off the edge of a road onto the too much speed or steering in a recognize warning clues such
shoulder while driving. Follow curve causes tires to slip and as enough water, ice, or packed
these tips: lose cornering force. snow on the road to make a
1. Ease off the accelerator and
. Acceleration Skid too much mirrored surface and slow
then, if there is nothing in the throttle causes the driving down when you have any doubt.
way, steer the vehicle so that it wheels to spin. . Try to avoid sudden steering,
straddles the edge of the Defensive drivers avoid most skids acceleration, or braking,
pavement. by taking reasonable care suited to including reducing vehicle speed
2. Turn the steering wheel about existing conditions, and by not by shifting to a lower gear. Any
one-eighth of a turn, until the overdriving those conditions. But sudden changes could cause
right front tire contacts the skids are always possible. the tires to slide.
pavement edge. If the vehicle starts to slide, follow Remember: Antilock brakes help
3. Turn the steering wheel to go these suggestions: avoid only the braking skid.
straight down the roadway. . Ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and steer the
Off-Road Driving
Loss of Control way you want the vehicle to go. Four-wheel-drive vehicles can be
The vehicle may straighten out. used for off-road driving. Vehicles
Skidding Be ready for a second skid if it without four-wheel drive and
There are three types of skids that occurs. vehicles not equipped with All
correspond to the vehicle's three . Slow down and adjust your Terrain (AT) or On-Off Road (OOR)
control systems: driving according to weather tires must not be driven off-road
. conditions. Stopping distance except on a level, solid surface. To
Braking Skid wheels are not
can be longer and vehicle contact the tire manufacturer for
rolling.
control can be affected when more information about the original
traction is reduced by water,
snow, ice, gravel, or other
equipment tires, see the Limited

. Read all the information about Loading the Vehicle for
Warranty and Owner Assistance four-wheel-drive vehicles in this Off-Road Driving
Information manual. manual.
Controlling the vehicle is the key to
. Make sure all underbody
shields, if equipped, are properly
{ WARNING
successful off-road driving. One of
the best ways to control the vehicle attached. . Unsecured cargo on the load
is to control the speed. . Know the local laws that apply to floor can be tossed about
off-road driving. when driving over rough
{ WARNING To gain more ground clearance if
terrain. You or your
passengers can be struck by
needed, it may be necessary to flying objects. Secure the
When driving off-road, bouncing
remove the front fascia lower cargo properly.
and quick changes in direction
air dam.
can easily throw you out of . Keep cargo in the cargo area
position. This could cause you to Notice: Operating the vehicle for as far forward and as low as
lose control and crash. You and extended periods without the possible. The heaviest things
your passengers should always front fascia lower air dam should be on the floor,
wear safety belts. installed can cause improper air forward of the rear axle.
flow to the engine. Reattach the
front fascia air dam after off-road
. Heavy loads on the roof raise
Before Driving Off-Road driving. the vehicle's center of gravity,
making it more likely to roll
. Have all necessary maintenance over. You can be seriously or
and service work completed. fatally injured if the vehicle
. Fuel the vehicle, fill fluid levels, rolls over. Put heavy loads
and check inflation pressure in inside the cargo area, not on
all tires, including the spare, the roof.
if equipped.
For more information about loading

. Use headlamps even during the
the vehicle, see Vehicle Load Limits { WARNING day to make the vehicle more
and Tires. visible.
Many hills are simply too steep
Environmental Concerns for any vehicle. Driving up hills { WARNING
. Always use established trails, can cause the vehicle to stall.
roads, and areas that have been Driving down hills can cause loss Driving to the top of a hill at high
set aside for public off-road of control. Driving across hills can speed can cause an accident.
recreational driving and obey all cause a rollover. You could be There could be a drop-off,
posted regulations. injured or killed. Do not drive on embankment, cliff, or even
steep hills. another vehicle. You could be
. Do not damage shrubs, flowers,
trees, or grasses or disturb seriously injured or killed. As you
wildlife. Before driving on a hill, assess the near the top of a hill, slow down
steepness, traction, and and stay alert.
. Do not park over things that
obstructions. If the terrain ahead
burn. See Parking over Things
cannot be seen, get out of the . Never go downhill forward or
That Burn on page 932.
vehicle and walk the hill before backward with either the
Driving on Hills driving further. transmission or transfer case in
Driving safely on hills requires good When driving on hills: N (Neutral). The brakes could
judgment and an understanding of overheat and you could lose
. Use a low gear and keep a firm control.
what the vehicle can and cannot do. grip on the steering wheel.
. Maintain a slow speed.
. When possible, drive straight up
or down the hill.
. Slow down when approaching
the top of the hill.

. Never try to turn the vehicle
{ WARNING { WARNING around. If the hill is steep
enough to stall the vehicle,
If the vehicle has the twospeed Heavy braking when going down it is steep enough to cause
automatic transfer case, shifting a hill can cause your brakes to it to roll over.
the transfer case to N (Neutral) overheat and fade. This could . If you cannot make it up the
can cause your vehicle to roll cause loss of control and you or hill, back straight down
even if the transmission is in others could be injured or killed. the hill.
P (Park). This is because the Apply the brakes lightly when
N (Neutral) position on the descending a hill and use a low
. Never back down a hill in
transfer case overrides the gear to keep vehicle speed under N (Neutral) using only the
transmission. You or someone control. brake.
else could be injured. If leaving . The vehicle can roll
the vehicle, set the parking brake backward quickly and you
If the vehicle stalls on a hill:
and shift the transmission to could lose control.
P (Park). Shift the transfer case to 1. Apply the brakes to stop the . If driving downhill when the
any position but N (Neutral). vehicle, and then apply the
vehicle stalls, shift to a
parking brake.
lower gear, release the
. When driving down a hill, keep 2. Shift into P (Park) and then parking brake, and drive
the vehicle headed straight restart the engine. straight down the hill.
down. Use a low gear because . If driving uphill when the 3. If the vehicle cannot be restarted
the engine will work with the vehicle stalls, shift to after stalling, set the parking
brakes to slow the vehicle and R (Reverse), release the brake, shift an automatic
help keep the vehicle under parking brake, and back transmission into P (Park), and
control. straight down. turn the vehicle off.
3.1. Leave the vehicle and
seek help.
3.2. Stay clear of the path the

. If an incline must be driven affects steering, accelerating, and
vehicle would take if it across, and the vehicle starts to braking. Drive at a reduced speed
rolled downhill. slide, turn downhill. This should and avoid sharp turns or abrupt
help straighten out the vehicle maneuvers.
. Avoid turns that take the vehicle and prevent the side slipping.
across the incline of the hill. Traction is reduced on hard packed
A hill that can be driven straight snow and ice and it is easy to lose
up or down might be too steep to { WARNING control. Reduce vehicle speed when
drive across. Driving across an Getting out of the vehicle on the driving on hard packed snow
incline puts more weight on the and ice.
downhill side when stopped
downhill wheels which could
across an incline is dangerous.
cause a downhill slide or a
rollover. If the vehicle rolls over, you could { WARNING
be crushed or killed. Always get
. Surface conditions can be a Driving on frozen lakes, ponds,
out on the uphill side of the
problem. Loose gravel, muddy or rivers can be dangerous. Ice
vehicle and stay well clear of the
spots, or even wet grass can conditions vary greatly and the
rollover path.
cause the tires to slip sideways, vehicle could fall through the ice;
downhill. If the vehicle slips you and your passengers could
sideways, it can hit something Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow, drown. Drive your vehicle on safe
that will trip it a rock, a rut, etc. or Ice surfaces only.
and roll over.
Use a low gear when driving in mud
. Hidden obstacles can make the the deeper the mud, the lower the
steepness of the incline more gear. Keep the vehicle moving to
severe. If a rock is driven across avoid getting stuck.
with the uphill wheels, or if the
Traction changes when driving on
downhill wheels drop into a rut
sand. On loose sand, such as on
or depression, the vehicle can tilt
beaches or sand dunes, the tires
even more.
tend to sink into the sand. This
Driving in Water the tailpipe is under water, you will Driving on Wet Roads
not be able to start the engine.
Rain and wet roads can reduce
{ WARNING When going through water, the
brakes get wet, and it might take vehicle traction and affect your
longer to stop. See Driving on Wet ability to stop and accelerate.
Driving through rushing water can
Roads. Always drive slower in these types
be dangerous. Deep water can
of driving conditions and avoid
sweep your vehicle downstream After Off-Road Driving driving through large puddles and
and you and your passengers deepstanding or flowing water.
could drown. If it is only shallow Remove any brush or debris that
water, it can still wash away the has collected on the underbody,
ground from under your tires. or chassis, or under the hood. { WARNING
These accumulations can be a fire
Traction could be lost, and the Wet brakes can cause crashes.
hazard.
vehicle could roll over. Do not They might not work as well in a
drive through rushing water. After operation in mud or sand, quick stop and could cause
have the brake linings cleaned and
pulling to one side. You could
checked. These substances can
Notice: Do not drive through lose control of the vehicle.
cause glazing and uneven braking.
standing water if it is deep Check the body structure, steering, After driving through a large
enough to cover the wheel hubs, suspension, wheels, tires, and puddle of water or a car/vehicle
axles or exhaust pipe. Deep water exhaust system for damage and wash, lightly apply the brake
can damage the axle and other check the fuel lines and cooling pedal until the brakes work
vehicle parts. system for any leakage. normally.
If the standing water is not too deep, More frequent maintenance service
drive slowly through it. At faster Flowing or rushing water creates
is required. Refer to the strong forces. Driving through
speeds, water splashes on the Maintenance Schedule for more
ignition system and the vehicle can flowing water could cause the
information. vehicle to be carried away. If this
stall. Stalling can also occur if you
get the tailpipe under water. While (Continued)

. Pass with caution.
WARNING (Continued)
Hill and Mountain Roads
. Keep windshield wiping
Driving on steep hills or through
happens, you and other vehicle equipment in good shape.
mountains is different than driving
occupants could drown. Do not . Keep the windshield washer fluid on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for
ignore police warnings and be reservoir filled. driving in these conditions include:
very cautious about trying to drive . Have good tires with proper . Keep the vehicle serviced and in
through flowing water. tread depth. See Tires on good shape.
page 1047. . Check all fluid levels and brakes,
Hydroplaning . Turn off cruise control. tires, cooling system, and
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water transmission.
can build up under the vehicle's Highway Hypnosis . Shift to a lower gear when going
tires so they actually ride on the Always be alert and pay attention to down steep or long hills.
water. This can happen if the road is your surroundings while driving.
wet enough and you are going fast
enough. When the vehicle is
If you become tired or sleepy, find a
safe place to park the vehicle
{ WARNING
hydroplaning, it has little or no and rest. If you do not shift down, the
contact with the road. brakes could get so hot that they
Other driving tips include:
There is no hard and fast rule about would not work well. You would
. Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
hydroplaning. The best advice is to then have poor braking or even
slow down when the road is wet. . Keep the interior none going down a hill. You could
temperature cool. crash. Shift down to let the engine
Other Rainy Weather Tips
. Keep your eyes moving scan assist the brakes on a steep
Besides slowing down, other wet downhill slope.
the road ahead and to the sides.
weather driving tips include:
. Check the rearview mirror and
. Allow extra following distance.
vehicle instruments often.

. Pay attention to special road Try not to break the fragile traction.
{ WARNING signs (falling rocks area, winding If you accelerate too fast, the drive
roads, long grades, passing or wheels will spin and polish the
Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) no-passing zones) and take surface under the tires even more.
or with the ignition off is appropriate action.
dangerous. The brakes will have The Antilock Brake System (ABS)
improves vehicle stability during
to do all the work of slowing down Winter Driving hard stops on slippery roads, but
and they could get so hot that
they would not work well. You Driving on Snow or Ice apply the brakes sooner than when
on dry pavement. See Antilock
would then have poor braking or Drive carefully when there is snow Brake System (ABS) on page 953.
even none going down a hill. or ice between the tires and the
Steering may also be affected road, creating less traction or grip. Allow greater following distance on
when ignition is off. You could Wet ice can occur at about 0C any slippery road and watch for
crash. Always have the engine (32F) when freezing rain begins to slippery spots. Icy patches can
running and the vehicle in gear fall, resulting in even less traction. occur on otherwise clear roads in
when going downhill. Avoid driving on wet ice or in shaded areas. The surface of a
freezing rain until roads can be curve or an overpass can remain icy
treated with salt or sand. when the surrounding roads are
. Stay in your own lane. Do not clear. Avoid sudden steering
swing wide or cut across the Drive with caution, whatever the maneuvers and braking while
center of the road. Drive at condition. Accelerate gently so on ice.
speeds that let you stay in your traction is not lost. Accelerating too
own lane. quickly causes the wheels to spin Turn off cruise control on slippery
and makes the surface under the surfaces.
. Be alert on top of hills; tires slick, so there is even less
something could be in your lane traction.
(stalled car, accident).
Blizzard Conditions
WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued)
Being stuck in snow can be a
serious situation. Stay with the cannot be seen or smelled. It can to the highest setting. See
vehicle unless there is help nearby. cause unconsciousness and even Climate Control Systems in
If possible, use Roadside death. the Index.
Assistance. See Roadside
If the vehicle is stuck in the snow: For more information about
Assistance Program (Mexico) on
page 137 or Roadside Assistance carbon monoxide, see Engine
. Clear away snow from around
Program (U.S. and Canada) on Exhaust on page 932.
the base of your vehicle,
page 1311. To get help and keep especially any that is blocking
everyone in the vehicle safe: the exhaust pipe. To save fuel, run the engine for only
. Turn on the hazard warning . Check again from time to short periods as needed to warm
flashers. time to be sure snow does the vehicle and then shut the engine
not collect there. off and close the window most of
. Tie a red cloth to an outside the way to save heat. Repeat this
mirror. . Open a window about 5 cm until help arrives but only when you
(2 in) on the side of the feel really uncomfortable from the
{ WARNING vehicle that is away from the
wind to bring in fresh air.
cold. Moving about to keep warm
also helps.
Snow can trap engine exhaust . Fully open the air outlets on If it takes some time for help to
under the vehicle. This may or under the instrument arrive, now and then when you run
cause exhaust gases to get panel. the engine, push the accelerator
inside. Engine exhaust contains pedal slightly so the engine runs
carbon monoxide (CO) which
. Adjust the climate control
system to a setting that faster than the idle speed. This
(Continued) circulates the air inside the keeps the battery charged to restart
vehicle and set the fan speed the vehicle and to signal for help
with the headlamps. Do this as little
(Continued) as possible to save fuel.
If the Vehicle Is Stuck For information about using tire hooks can be used, if the vehicle
chains on the vehicle, see Tire has them. If the vehicle does need
Slowly and cautiously spin the Chains on page 1071. to be towed out, see Towing the
wheels to free the vehicle when Vehicle on page 1089.
stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. Rocking Your Vehicle to Get
SeeRocking Your Vehicle to Get It It Out Recovery Hooks
Out later in this section.
Turn the steering wheel left and
If the vehicle has a traction system, right to clear the area around the { WARNING
it can often help to free a stuck front wheels. For four-wheel-drive
vehicle. Refer to the vehicle's vehicles, shift into Four-Wheel High. Never pull on recovery hooks
traction system in the Index. If stuck For vehicles with StabiliTrak, turn from the side. The hooks could
too severely for the traction system the traction control part of the break and you and others could
to free the vehicle, turn the traction system off. Shift back and forth be injured. When using recovery
system off and use the rocking between R (Reverse) and a forward hooks, always pull the vehicle
method. gear, spinning the wheels as little as from the front.
possible. To prevent transmission
{ WARNING wear, wait until the wheels stop
spinning before shifting gears.
If the vehicle's tires spin at high Release the accelerator pedal while
speed, they can explode, and you shifting, and press lightly on the
or others could be injured. The accelerator pedal when the
vehicle can overheat, causing an transmission is in gear. Slowly
engine compartment fire or other spinning the wheels in the forward
damage. Spin the wheels as little and reverse directions causes a
as possible and avoid going rocking motion that could free the
above 56 km/h (35 mph). vehicle. If that does not get the
vehicle out after a few tries, it might
need to be towed out. Recovery
Vehicle Load Limits

{ WARNING
It is very important to know how
much weight your vehicle can Do not load the vehicle any
carry. This weight is called the heavier than the Gross
vehicle capacity weight and Vehicle Weight Rating
includes the weight of all (GVWR), or either the
occupants, cargo, and all maximum front or rear Gross
nonfactory-installed options. Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
Two labels on your vehicle show This can cause systems to
how much weight it was break and change the way the
designed to carry, the Tire and vehicle handles. This could
Notice: Never use recovery cause loss of control and a
Loading Information label and
hooks to tow the vehicle. Your crash. Overloading can also
vehicle could be damaged and it the Certification/Tire label.
shorten the life of the vehicle.
would not be covered by
warranty.
For vehicles with recovery hooks at
the front of the vehicle, you can use
them if you are stuck off-road and
need to be pulled to some place
where you can continue driving.
Tire and Loading Information positions (A), and the maximum Steps for Determining Correct
Label vehicle capacity weight (B) in Load Limit
kilograms and pounds. 1. Locate the statement The
The Tire and Loading combined weight of
Information label also shows the occupants and cargo should
size of the original equipment never exceed XXX kg or
tires (C) and the recommended XXX lbs on your vehicle's
cold tire inflation pressures (D). placard.
For more information on tires 2. Determine the combined
and inflation see Tires on weight of the driver and
page 1047 and Tire Pressure passengers that will be riding
on page 1056. in your vehicle.
There is also important loading 3. Subtract the combined
Label Example
information on the vehicle weight of the driver and
A vehicle specific Tire and Certification/Tire label. It tells passengers from XXX kg or
Loading Information label is you the Gross Vehicle Weight XXX lbs.
attached to the center pillar Rating (GVWR) and the Gross
(B-pillar). With the driver door Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for 4. The resulting figure equals
open, you will find the label the front and rear axles. See the available amount of cargo
attached below the door lock Certification/Tire Label later in and luggage load capacity.
post (striker). The tire and this section. For example, if the XXX
loading information label shows amount equals 1400 lbs and
the number of occupant seating there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle,
the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is

650 lbs (1400750 (5x150) =
650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined
weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing Example 1 Example 2
a trailer, the load from your
trailer will be transferred to A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
Example 1 = (453 kg) (1,000 lbs) Example 2 = 453 kg (1,000 lbs)
your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this B. Subtract Occupant Weight @ B. Subtract Occupant Weight @
reduces the available cargo 68 kg (150 lbs) 2 = 136 kg 68 kg (150 lbs) 5 = 340 kg
and luggage load capacity of (300 lbs) (750 lbs)
your vehicle. See Trailer C. Available Occupant and Cargo C. Available Cargo Weight =
Towing on page 977 for Weight = 317 kg (700 lbs) 113 kg (250 lbs)
important information on
towing a trailer, towing safety
rules and trailering tips.
weight of the driver, passengers, Rating (GVWR). The GVWR

and cargo should never exceed includes the weight of the
your vehicle's capacity weight. vehicle, all occupants, fuel, and
Certification/Tire Label
cargo.
The Certification/Tire label also
tells you the maximum weights
for the front and rear axles,
called Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). To find out the
actual loads on your front and
rear axles, you need to go to a
Example 3 weigh station and weigh your
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for vehicle. Your dealer can help
Example 3 = 453 kg (1,000 lbs) you with this. Be sure to spread
B. Subtract Occupant Weight @ out your load equally on both
91 kg (200 lbs) 5 = 453 kg sides of the centerline.
(1,000 lbs) A vehicle specific Certification/ Never exceed the GVWR for
C. Available Cargo Weight = Tire label is found on the rear your vehicle, or the GAWR for
0 kg (0 lbs) edge of the driver door. The either the front or rear axle.
label shows the size of your
Refer to your vehicle's tire and The Certification/Tire label also
vehicle's original tires and the
loading information label for contains important information
inflation pressures needed to
specific information about your about your Front Axle Reserve
obtain the gross weight capacity
vehicle's capacity weight and Capacity. See What is front axle
of your vehicle. This is called
seating positions. The combined reserve capacity, and how do I
Gross Vehicle Weight
calculate it? under Adding a If you put things inside your

Snow Plow or Similar Equipment WARNING (Continued) vehicle like suitcases, tools,
on page 9105. Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). packages, or anything
This can cause systems to else they go as fast as the
{ WARNING break and change the way the vehicle goes. If you have to stop
vehicle handles. This could or turn quickly, or if there is a
In the case of a sudden stop crash, they will keep going.
or collision, things carried in cause loss of control and a
crash. Overloading can also
the bed of your truck could
shift forward and come into shorten the life of the vehicle. { WARNING
the passenger area, injuring Things you put inside the
you and others. If you put Notice: Overloading the vehicle can strike and injure
things in the bed of your truck, vehicle may cause damage. people in a sudden stop or
you should make sure they Repairs would not be covered turn, or in a crash.
are properly secured. by the vehicle warranty. Do . Put things in the cargo
not overload the vehicle.
area of the vehicle. Try to
Using heavier suspension spread the weight evenly.
{ WARNING components to get added . Never stack heavier
durability might not change your
Do not load the vehicle any things, like suitcases,
weight ratings. Ask your dealer
heavier than the Gross inside the vehicle so that
to help you load your vehicle the
Vehicle Weight Rating some of them are above
right way.
(GVWR), or either the the tops of the seats.
maximum front or rear Gross (Continued)
(Continued)
box. The planks must be Add-On Equipment

WARNING (Continued) inserted in the pickup box When you carry removable
. Do not leave an depressions. items, you may need to put a
unsecured child restraint When using this upper load limit on how many people you
in the vehicle. platform, be sure the load is carry inside your vehicle. Be
. When you carry something securely tied down to prevent it sure to weigh your vehicle
inside the vehicle, secure from shifting. The load's center before you buy and install the
it whenever you can. of gravity should be positioned new equipment.
in a zone over the rear axle. The Notice: Overloading the
. Do not leave a seat folded zone is located in the area
down unless you need to. vehicle may cause damage.
between the front of each wheel Repairs would not be covered
well and the rear of each wheel by the vehicle warranty. Do
There is also important loading well. The center of gravity height not overload the vehicle.
information for off-road driving in must not extend above the top
this manual. See Loading Your of the pickup box flareboard.
Vehicle for Off-Road Any load that extends beyond
Drivingunder Off-Road Driving the vehicle's taillamp area must
on page 95. be properly marked according to
Two-Tiered Loading local laws and regulations.
Depending on the model of your Remember not to exceed the
pickup, an upper load platform Gross Axle Weight
can be created by positioning Rating (GAWR) of the front or
three or four 5 cm (2 inches) by rear axle.
15 cm (6 inches) wooden planks
across the width of the pickup
Remember not to exceed the Loading Points aftermarket equipment. See

Gross Axle Weight www.gmupfitter.com for additional
Rating (GAWR) of the front or pick-up box load bearing structural
rear axle. information.
Maximum Truck-Camper Loading

* Equipment Weight
Information
Ladder Rack 340 kg
A vehicle-specific TruckCamper
and Cargo (750 lbs)
Loading Information label is
Cross Toolbox 181 kg attached to the inside of the
and Cargo (400 lbs) vehicle's glove box. This label
Side Boxes 113 kg per indicates if a slide-in camper
and Cargo side (250 lbs can be carried, how much of a
A. Primary Load Points load the vehicle can carry, and
per side)
B. Secondary Load Areas how to correctly spread out the
* The combined weight for all load. It will help to match the
C. Cargo Management Option
railmounted equipment should Holes right slide in camper to the
not exceed 454 kg (1,000 lbs). vehicle.
Structural members (A) and (B) are
included in the pick-up box design. Your dealer can help make a
Additional accessories should use good vehicle-camper match and
these load points. Depending on the help determine the Cargo
accessory design, use a spacer Weight Rating (CWR).
under the accessory at the load
points to remove gap. The holes for When installing and loading a
the Cargo Management System (C) slide-in camper, check the
are not intended for attachment of manufacturer's instructions.
When carrying a slide-in Here is an example of proper

camper, the total cargo load of truck and camper match:
the vehicle is the weight of the
camper, plus the following:
. Everything added to the
camper after it left the factory
. Everything in the camper
. All the people inside Use the rear edge of the load
The CWR is the maximum floor for measurement purposes.
weight of the load the vehicle The recommended location for
can carry. It does not include the the cargo center of gravity is at
weight of the people inside. But, point C for the CWR. It is the
use about 68 kg (150 lbs) for point where the mass of a body
is concentrated and, A. Camper Center of Gravity
each seat.
if suspended at that point, would B. Recommended Center of
The total cargo load must not be balance the front and rear.
more than the vehicle's CWR. Gravity Location Zone
Refer to the Truck-Camper When the truck is used to carry
Loading Information label in the a slidein camper, the total cargo
glove box for dimensions A and load of the truck consists of the
B as shown in the following manufacturer's camper weight
illustration. figure, the weight of installed
additional camper equipment not
included in the manufacturer's
camper weight figure, the weight
of camper cargo, and the weight and on the rear wheels Starting and
of passengers in the camper. separately to determine axle
The total cargo load should not loads. Individual axle loads Operating
exceed the truck's cargo weight should not exceed either of the
rating, and the camper's center gross axle weight ratings New Vehicle Break-In
of gravity (A) should fall within (GAWR). The total axle loads Notice: The vehicle does not
the truck's recommended center should not exceed your vehicle's need an elaborate break-in. But it
of gravity zone (B) when gross vehicle weight rating will perform better in the long run
installed. (GVWR). These ratings are if you follow these guidelines:
Any accessories or other given on the vehicle certification . Keep the vehicle speed at
equipment that are added to the label attached to the rear edge 88 km/h (55 mph) or less for
vehicle must be weighed. Then, of the driver door. See the first 805 km (500 miles).
subtract this extra weight from Certification/Tire Label under . Do not drive at any one
the CWR. This extra weight may Vehicle Load Limits on constant speed, fast or slow,
shorten the center of gravity page 915. If weight ratings are for the first 805 km
zone of the vehicle. exceeded, move or remove (500 miles). Do not make
items to bring all weights below full-throttle starts. Avoid
If the slide-in camper and its the ratings. downshifting to brake or
load weighs less than the CWR, slow the vehicle.
the center of gravity zone for See your dealer for more
information on curb weights,
. Avoid making hard stops for
your vehicle may be larger. the first 322 km (200 miles) or
cargo weights, Cargo Weight so. During this time the new
Secure loose items to prevent Rating and the correct center of brake linings are not yet
weight shifts that could affect the gravity zone. broken in. Hard stops with
balance of the vehicle. When the new linings can mean
truckcamper is loaded, drive to premature wear and earlier
a scale and weigh on the front replacement. Follow this
breaking-in guideline every Ignition Positions

time you get new brake
linings.
. Do not tow a trailer during
break-in. See Trailer Towing
on page 977 for the trailer
towing capabilities of the The control used to adjust the
vehicle and more pedals is located on the instrument
information. panel below the climate control
system.
Following breakin, engine speed
and load can be gradually Press the bottom of the control to
increased. move the pedals closer. Press the
top of the control to move the
Adjustable Throttle and pedals away.
Brake Pedal Before you start driving, fully press The ignition switch has four different
the brake pedal to confirm the positions.
On vehicles with this feature, you adjustment is right for you. While To shift out of P (Park), the ignition
can change the position of the driving, make only small must be in ON/RUN or ACC/
throttle and brake pedals. adjustments. ACCESSORY and the regular brake
No adjustment to the pedals can be The vehicle may have a memory pedal must be applied.
made when the vehicle is in function which lets pedal settings be A (STOPPING THE ENGINE/
R (Reverse) or while using cruise saved and recalled. See Memory LOCK/OFF): When the vehicle is
control. Seats on page 38. stopped, turn the ignition switch to
LOCK/OFF to turn the engine off.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
will remain active. See Retained If the vehicle must be shut off in an
Accessory Power (RAP) on emergency: { WARNING
page 928 for more information. 1. Brake using a firm and steady Turning off the vehicle while
This position locks the ignition. pressure. Do not pump the moving may cause loss of power
It also locks the transmission on brakes repeatedly. This may assist in the brake and steering
automatic transmission vehicles. deplete power assist, requiring systems and disable the airbags.
The key can be removed in increased brake pedal force. While driving, only shut the
LOCK/OFF. 2. Shift the vehicle to neutral. This vehicle off in an emergency.
The steering can bind with the can be done while the vehicle is
wheels turned off center. If this moving. After shifting to neutral,
If the vehicle cannot be pulled over,
happens, move the steering wheel continue to firmly apply the
and must be shut off while driving,
from right to left while turning the brakes and steer the vehicle to a
turn the ignition to ACC/
key to ACC/ACCESSORY. If this safe location.
ACCESSORY.
doesn't work, then the vehicle needs 3. Come to a complete stop. Shift
service. On vehicles with an automatic
to P (Park) with an automatic
transmission, the shift lever must be
Do not turn the engine off when the transmission, or Neutral with a
in P (Park) to turn the ignition switch
vehicle is moving. This will cause a manual transmission. Turn the
to LOCK/OFF.
loss of power assist in the brake ignition to LOCK/OFF.
and steering systems and disable Notice: Using a tool to force the
4. Set the parking brake. See
the airbags. key to turn in the ignition could
Parking Brake on page 954.
cause damage to the switch or
break the key. Use the correct
key, make sure it is all the way in,
and turn it only with your hand.
If the key cannot be turned by
hand, see your dealer.
B (ACC/ACCESSORY): This D (START): This is the position that Place the transmission in the
position lets things like the radio starts the engine. When the engine proper gear.
and the windshield wipers operate starts, release the key. The ignition
while the engine is off. Use this switch returns to ON/RUN for Automatic Transmission
position if the vehicle must be driving. Move the shift lever to P (Park) or
pushed or towed. If the vehicle is equipped with a N (Neutral). The engine will not start
C (ON/RUN): This position can be radio, a warning tone will sound in any other position. To restart the
used to operate the electrical when the driver door is opened, the engine when the vehicle is already
accessories and to display some ignition is in ACC/ACCESSORY or moving, use N (Neutral) only.
instrument panel cluster warning LOCK/OFF and the key is in the Notice: Do not try to shift to
and indicator lights. This position ignition. P (Park) if the vehicle is moving.
can also be used for service and If you do, you could damage the
diagnostics, and to verify the proper Starting the Engine transmission. Shift to P (Park)
operation of the malfunction only when the vehicle is stopped.
indicator lamp as may be required If the vehicle has a diesel engine,
for emission inspection purposes. see the Duramax diesel Manual Transmission
The switch stays in this position supplement for more information.
The shift lever should be in
when the engine is running. The If the vehicle is a hybrid, see the N (Neutral) and the parking brake
transmission is also unlocked in this hybrid supplement for more engaged. Hold the clutch pedal
position on automatic transmission information. down to the floor and start the
vehicles. engine. The vehicle will not start if
Notice: If you add electrical parts
If you leave the key in the ACC/ or accessories, you could change the clutch pedal is not all the
ACCESSORY or ON/RUN position the way the engine operates. Any way down.
with the engine off, the battery could resulting damage would not be
be drained. You may not be able to covered by the vehicle warranty.
start the vehicle if the battery is See Add-On Electrical Equipment
allowed to drain for an extended on page 9105.
period of time.
Starting Procedure damage, this system also 2. If the engine does not start after
prevents cranking if the engine 5-10 seconds, especially in very
1. With your foot off the accelerator
is already running. Engine cold weather (below 18C or
pedal, turn the ignition key to
cranking can be stopped by 0F), it could be flooded with too
START. When the engine starts,
turning the ignition switch to the much gasoline. Try pushing the
let go of the key. The idle speed
ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/ accelerator pedal all the way to
will go down as your engine gets
OFF position. the floor and holding it there as
warm. Do not race the engine
When the Low Fuel warning you hold the key in START for
immediately after starting it.
lamp is on and the FUEL LEVEL up to 15 seconds. Wait at least
Operate the engine and
LOW message is displayed in 15 seconds between each try, to
transmission gently to allow the
the Driver Information Center allow the cranking motor to cool
oil to warm up and lubricate all
(DIC), the Computer-Controlled down. When the engine starts,
moving parts.
Cranking System is disabled to let go of the key and accelerator.
The vehicle has a If the vehicle starts briefly but
prevent possible vehicle
Computer-Controlled Cranking then stops again, do the same
component damage. When this
System. This feature assists in thing. This clears the extra
happens, hold the ignition switch
starting the engine and protects gasoline from the engine. Do not
in the START position to
components. If the ignition key is race the engine immediately
continue engine cranking.
turned to the START position, after starting it. Operate the
and then released when the Notice: Cranking the engine for engine and transmission gently
engine begins cranking, the long periods of time, by returning until the oil warms up and
engine will continue cranking for the key to the START position lubricates all moving parts.
a few seconds or until the immediately after cranking has
vehicle starts. If the engine does ended, can overheat and damage
not start and the key is held in the cranking motor, and drain the
START for many seconds, battery. Wait at least 15 seconds
cranking will be stopped after between each try, to let the
15 seconds to prevent cranking cranking motor cool down.
motor damage. To prevent gear

. Press and release the cruise
Fast Idle System control SET-button. Engine
Retained Accessory
If the vehicle has this feature it is speed will be held at Power (RAP)
available only with cruise control. approximately 1200 RPM. The following vehicle accessories
The manual fast idle switch is can be used for up to 10 minutes
When the fast idle is active the
operated using the cruise control after the engine is turned off:
Driver Information Center (DIC) will
buttons located on the left hand side
display FAST IDLE ON. . Audio System
of the steering wheel.
One of the following actions will turn . Power Windows
This system can be used to
off the fast idle:
increase engine idle speed . OnStar System (if equipped)
whenever the following conditions . Pressing the brake.
are met:
. Sunroof (if equipped)
. Selecting the cruise control
. The parking brake is set. cancel button. These features work when the key
is in ON/RUN or ACC/
. The brake pedal is not pressed. . Releasing the parking brake. ACCESSORY. Once the key is
. The vehicle must not be moving . The transmission shift lever is turned from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF,
and the accelerator must not be moved out of P (Park) or the windows and sunroof continue
pressed. N (Neutral). to work up to 10 minutes until any
door is opened. The radio continues
To control the fast idle: . Selecting the cruise control on/ to work for up to 10 minutes or until
off button when it was the driver door is opened.
. To enable the Fast Idle System,
previously on.
press and release the cruise
control on/off button and ensure . Pressing the cruise control
that the switch indicator light SET-button a second time.
is lit. . Pressing the accelerator greater
than a quarter of the way down.
. Turning the ignition switch to the
LOCK/OFF position.
Engine Coolant Heater tie which bundles the electrical The length of time the heater should
plug. Do not cut the remain plugged in depends on
The engine heater can provide electrical cord. several factors. Ask a dealer in the
easier starting and better fuel area where you will be parking the
economy during engine warm-up in 3. Plug the cord into a normal,
grounded 110-volt AC outlet. vehicle for the best advice on this.
cold weather conditions at or below
18C (0F). Vehicles with an Shifting Into Park
engine heater should be plugged in { WARNING
at least four hours before starting.
An internal thermostat in the Plugging the cord into an { WARNING
plug-end of the cord may exist ungrounded outlet could cause an
which will prevent engine coolant electrical shock. Also, the wrong It can be dangerous to get out of
heater operation at temperatures kind of extension cord could the vehicle if the shift lever is not
above 18C (0F). overheat and cause a fire. You fully in P (Park) with the parking
could be seriously injured. Plug brake firmly set. The vehicle can
If the vehicle has a diesel engine, roll. If you have left the engine
see the Duramax Diesel supplement the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. running, the vehicle can move
for more information.
If the cord will not reach, use a suddenly. You or others could be
To Use the Engine Coolant heavy-duty three-prong extension injured. To be sure the vehicle will
Heater cord rated for at least 15 amps. not move, even when you are on
fairly level ground, use the steps
1. Turn off the engine.
that follow. With four-wheel drive,
2. Open the hood and unwrap the 4. Before starting the engine, be if the transfer case is in
electrical cord. The cord is sure to unplug and store the N (Neutral), the vehicle will be
secured to the Engine cord as it was before to keep it free to roll, even if the shift lever
Compartment Fuse Block with a away from moving engine parts.
is in P (Park). Be sure the transfer
clip. Carefully remove the wire If you do not, it could be
damaged. (Continued)
Leaving the Vehicle With the If you have to leave the vehicle with
WARNING (Continued) Engine Running the engine running, be sure your
vehicle is in P (Park) and the
case is in a drive gear. If towing a parking brake is firmly set before
trailer, see Driving Characteristics { WARNING you leave it. After you move the shift
and Towing Tips on page 975. lever into P (Park), hold the regular
It can be dangerous to leave the
vehicle with the engine running. brake pedal down. Then, see if you
1. Hold the brake pedal down, then The vehicle could move suddenly can move the shift lever away from
set the parking brake. if the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) without first pulling it toward
you. If you can, it means that the
See Parking Brake on page 954 P (Park) with the parking brake
shift lever was not fully locked into
for more information. firmly set.
P (Park).
2. Move the shift lever into the If you have four-wheel drive and
P (Park) position by pulling the the transfer case is in N (Neutral), Torque Lock
shift lever toward you and the vehicle will be free to roll, If you are parking on a hill and you
moving it up as far as it will go. even if the shift lever is in do not shift your transmission into
3. Be sure the transfer case is in a P (Park). So be sure the transfer P (Park) properly, the weight of the
drive gear not in N (Neutral). case is in a drive gear not in vehicle may put too much force on
N (Neutral). the parking pawl in the
4. Turn the ignition key to transmission. You may find it difficult
LOCK/OFF. And, if you leave the vehicle with to pull the shift lever out of P (Park).
the engine running, it could This is called torque lock. To
5. Remove the key and take it with
you. If you can leave the vehicle overheat and even catch fire. You prevent torque lock, set the parking
with the ignition key in your or others could be injured. Do not brake and then shift into P (Park)
hand, the vehicle is in P (Park). leave the vehicle with the engine properly before you leave the driver
running unless you have to. seat. To find out how, Shifting Into
Park on page 929.
When you are ready to drive, move The shift lock release is always If you are still having a problem
the shift lever out of P (Park) before functional except in the case of an shifting, then have the vehicle
you release the parking brake. uncharged or low voltage (less than serviced soon.
If torque lock does occur, you may 9 volt) battery.
need to have another vehicle push If the vehicle has an uncharged Parking (Manual
yours a little uphill to take some of battery or a battery with low voltage, Transmission)
the pressure from the parking pawl try charging or jump starting the
If the vehicle has a manual
in the transmission, then you will be battery. See Jump Starting on
transmission, before you get out of
able to pull the shift lever out of page 1084 for more information.
the vehicle, move the shift lever into
P (Park). To shift out of P (Park) use the R (Reverse), and firmly apply the
following: parking brake. Once the shift lever
Shifting out of Park has been placed into R (Reverse)
1. Apply the brake pedal.
This vehicle is equipped with an with the clutch pedal pressed in,
electronic shift lock release system. 2. Move the shift lever to the turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF,
The shift lock release is desired position. remove the key and release the
designed to: If you still are unable to shift out of clutch.
. Prevent ignition key removal P (Park): If you are parking on a hill, or if the
unless the shift lever is in 1. Ease the pressure on the shift vehicle is pulling a trailer, see
P (Park) with the shift lever lever. Driving Characteristics and Towing
button fully released. Tips on page 975.
2. While holding down the brake
. Prevent movement of the shift pedal, press the shift lever all
lever out of P (Park), unless the the way into P (Park).
ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/
3. Move the shift lever to the
ACCESSORY and the regular
desired position.
brake pedal is applied.
Parking over Things When less power is required, such Engine Exhaust
as cruising at a constant vehicle
That Burn speed, the system will operate in
the half cylinder mode, allowing the { WARNING
{ WARNING vehicle to achieve better fuel
Engine exhaust contains carbon
economy. When greater power
Things that can burn could touch demands are required, such as monoxide (CO) which cannot be
hot exhaust parts under the accelerating from a stop, passing, seen or smelled. Exposure to CO
vehicle and ignite. Do not park or merging onto a freeway, the can cause unconsciousness and
over papers, leaves, dry grass, system will maintain full-cylinder even death.
or other things that can burn. operation. Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:
If the vehicle has an Active Fuel . The vehicle idles in areas
Active Fuel Management Management indicator, see Driver with poor ventilation (parking
Information Center (DIC) on garages, tunnels, deep snow
Vehicles with V8 engines may have page 529 for more information on
Active Fuel Management. This that may block underbody
using this display. airflow or tail pipes).
system allows the engine to operate
on either all or half of its cylinders, . The exhaust smells or
depending on the driving conditions. sounds strange or different.
. The exhaust system leaks
due to corrosion or damage.
. The vehicle exhaust system
has been modified, damaged,
or improperly repaired.
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
Running the Vehicle Automatic
While Parked Transmission
. There are holes or openings
It is better not to park with the If the vehicle is a hybrid, see the
in the vehicle body from
engine running. hybrid supplement for more
damage or aftermarket
modifications that are not If the vehicle is left with the engine information.
completely sealed. running, follow the proper steps to Vehicles with an automatic
be sure the vehicle will not move. transmission have an electronic shift
If unusual fumes are detected or
See Shifting Into Park on page 929 position indicator within the
if it is suspected that exhaust is and Engine Exhaust on page 932.
coming into the vehicle: instrument panel cluster. This
If the vehicle has a manual display comes on when the ignition
. Drive it only with the windows transmission, see Parking (Manual key is turned to the ON/RUN
completely down. Transmission) on page 931. position.
. Have the vehicle repaired If parking on a hill and pulling a There are several different positions
immediately. trailer, see Driving Characteristics for the shift lever.
and Towing Tips on page 975.
Never park the vehicle with the
engine running in an enclosed
area such as a garage or a
building that has no fresh air
ventilation.
increase in the effort to shift out of

P (Park). See Torque Lock under { WARNING
Shifting Into Park on page 929 for
more information. If you have Four-Wheel Drive, the
vehicle will be free to roll even
if the shift lever is in P (Park) if
{ WARNING the transfer case is in Neutral. So,
Hydra-Matic 4-Speed Automatic be sure the transfer case is in a
Transmission It is dangerous to get out of the
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully drive gear, Two-Wheel Drive High
in P (Park) with the parking brake or Four-Wheel Drive High or
firmly set. The vehicle can roll. Four-Wheel Drive Low not in
Neutral. See Shifting Into Park on
Do not leave the vehicle when the page 929.
engine is running. If you have left
the engine running, the vehicle
can move suddenly. You or others R (Reverse): Use this gear to
Heavy Duty 6-Speed Automatic back up.
Transmission Shown (Light Duty could be injured. To be sure the
6-Speed Similar) vehicle will not move, even when Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)
you are on fairly level ground, while the vehicle is moving
See Range Selection Mode under always set the parking brake and forward could damage the
Manual Mode on page 937. move the shift lever to P (Park). transmission. The repairs would
P (Park): This position locks the See Shifting Into Park on not be covered by the vehicle
rear wheels. It is the best position to page 929 and Driving warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only
use when starting the engine Characteristics and Towing Tips after the vehicle is stopped.
because the vehicle cannot move on page 975. To rock the vehicle back and forth to
easily. When parked on a hill, get out of snow, ice, or sand without
especially when the vehicle has a damaging the transmission, see If
heavy load, you might notice an the Vehicle Is Stuck on page 914.
N (Neutral): In this position, the D (Drive): This position is for The vehicle has a shift stabilization
engine does not connect with the normal driving. It provides the best feature that adjusts the transmission
wheels. To restart when you are fuel economy. If you need more shifting to the current driving
already moving, use N (Neutral) power for passing, and you are: conditions in order to reduce rapid
only. Also, use N (Neutral) when the . Going less than about 55 km/h upshifts and downshifts. This shift
vehicle is being towed. (35 mph), push the accelerator stabilization feature is designed to
pedal about halfway down. determine, before making an
{ WARNING . Going about 55 km/h (35 mph) or
upshift, if the engine is able to
maintain vehicle speed by analyzing
Shifting into a drive gear while the more, push the accelerator all things such as vehicle speed,
engine is running at high speed is the way down. throttle position, and vehicle load.
dangerous. Unless your foot is By doing this, the vehicle shifts If the shift stabilization feature
firmly on the brake pedal, the down to the next gear and has determines that a current vehicle
vehicle could move very rapidly. more power. speed cannot be maintained, the
You could lose control and hit transmission does not upshift and
D (Drive) can be used when towing instead holds the current gear.
people or objects. Do not shift a trailer, carrying a heavy load, In some cases, this could appear to
into a drive gear while the engine driving on steep hills, or for off-road be a delayed shift, however the
is running at high speed. driving. You might want to shift the transmission is operating normally.
transmission to a lower gear
selection if the transmission shifts The transmission uses adaptive
Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or shift controls. Adaptive shift controls
N (Neutral) with the engine too often.
continually compares key shift
running at high speed may Downshifting the transmission in parameters to pre-programmed
damage the transmission. The slippery road conditions could result ideal shifts stored in the
repairs would not be covered by in skidding. See Skidding under transmissions computer. The
the vehicle warranty. Be sure the Loss of Control on page 95. transmission constantly makes
engine is not running at high adjustments to improve vehicle
speed when shifting the vehicle. performance according to how the
vehicle is being used, such as with 3 (Third): This position is also used 1 (First): For the Hydra-Matic
a heavy load or when temperature for normal driving. It reduces vehicle 4-Speed transmission this position
changes. During this adaptive shift speed more than D (Drive) without reduces vehicle speed even more
control process, shifting might feel using the brakes. You might choose than 2 (Second) without using the
different as the transmission 3 (Third) instead of D (Drive) when brakes. You can use it on very steep
determines the best settings. driving on hilly, winding roads, when hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the
When temperatures are very cold, towing a trailer, so there is less shift lever is put in 1 (First) while the
the Allison Transmission and shifting between gears and when vehicle is moving forward, the
Hydra-Matic 6-Speed transmission's going down a steep hill. transmission does not shift into first
gear shifting could be delayed 2 (Second): This position reduces gear until the vehicle is going slowly
providing more stable shifts until the vehicle speed even more than enough.
engine warms up. Shifts could be 3 (Third) without using the brakes. For an Allison Transmission or
more noticeable with a cold You can use 2 (Second) on hills. Hydra-Matic 6-Speed transmission,
transmission. This difference in It can help control vehicle speed as this position reduces vehicle speed
shifting is normal. you go down steep mountain roads, without using the brakes. You can
M (Manual Mode): This position is but then you would also want to use use it for major/severe downgrades
available on vehicles with the the brakes off and on. and off-road driving where the
Allison Transmission or Hydra-Matic If you manually select 2 (Second) in vehicle would otherwise accelerate
6-Speed transmission. It lets drivers an automatic transmission, the due to steepness of grade. When
select the range of gears transmission will start in second you shift to 1 (First) it provides the
appropriate for current driving gear. You can use this feature for lowest gear appropriate to current
conditions. If the vehicle has this reducing the speed of the rear road speed and continues to
feature, see Range Selection wheels when you are trying to start downshift as the vehicle slows,
Mode under Manual Mode on the vehicle from a stop on slippery eventually downshifting to
page 937. road surfaces. 1 (First) gear.
Notice: Spinning the tires or
holding the vehicle in one place
on a hill using only the
accelerator pedal may damage three seconds. A DIC message To use this feature, do the following:
the transmission. The repair will displays. See Transmission 1. Move the shift lever to
not be covered by the vehicle Messages on page 544. M (Manual Mode).
warranty. If you are stuck, do not For iother forms of grade braking,
spin the tires. When stopping on 2. Press the plus/minus buttons,
see Tow/Haul Mode on page 938 located on the steering column
a hill, use the brakes to hold the and Cruise Control on page 959.
vehicle in place. shift lever, to select the desired
range of gears for current driving
Normal Mode Grade Braking Manual Mode conditions.
Vehicles with a gasoline engine and Range Selection Mode When M (Manual Mode) is selected
6-Speed automatic transmission (Allison Transmission or a number displays next to the M,
have Normal Mode Grade Braking Hydra-Matic 6-Speed indicating the current gear.
that is enabled when the vehicle is
Transmission) This number is the highest gear that
started, but is not enabled in Range
Selection Mode. It assists in can be used. However, the vehicle
maintaining desired vehicle speeds can automatically shift to lower
when driving on downhill grades by gears as it adjusts to driving
using the engine and transmission conditions. This means that all
to slow the vehicle. The first time gears below that number are
the system engages for each available. When 5 (Fifth) is selected,
ignition key cycle, a DIC message 1 (First) through 5 (Fifth) gears are
will be displayed. See Transmission automatically shifted by the vehicle,
The vehicle may have a Range but 6 (Sixth) cannot be used until
Messages on page 544. Selection Mode. The Range the plus/minus button located on the
To disable or enable Normal Mode Selection Mode helps control the steering column lever is used to
Grade Braking within the current vehicle's transmission and vehicle change to the gear.
ignition key cycle, press and hold speed while driving down hill or
the Tow/Haul button for towing a trailer by letting you select
a desired range of gears.
Grade Braking is not available when Low Traction Mode Tow/Haul Mode
Range Selection Mode is active.
If the vehicle has the Allison
See Tow/Haul Mode on page 938.
Transmission, a 4-Speed automatic
While using Range Selection Mode, transmission, or the Hydra-Matic
Cruise Control and the Tow/Haul 6-Speed Automatic Transmission
Mode can be used. with the 6.0L engine, it has a Low
If the vehicle has an exhaust brake, Traction Mode that assists in vehicle
it can also be used, but will not acceleration when road conditions
4-Speed Automatic Transmission
automatically downshift the are slippery, such as with ice or
transmission. See Exhaust Brake in snow. While the vehicle is at a stop,
the Duramax Diesel supplement. select the second gear range using
Range Selection Mode. This will
Notice: Spinning the tires or limit torque to the wheels helping to
holding the vehicle in one place prevent the tires from spinning.
on a hill using only the
accelerator pedal may damage
6-Speed Automatic Transmission
the transmission. The repair will
not be covered by the vehicle Vehicles with an automatic
warranty. If you are stuck, do not transmission have a Tow/Haul
spin the tires. When stopping on Mode. The Tow/Haul Mode adjusts
a hill, use the brakes to hold the the transmission shift pattern to
vehicle in place. reduce shift cycling, providing
increased performance, vehicle
control, and transmission cooling
when driving down steep hills or
Mountain grades, towing, or hauling
heavy loads.
The selector button is located on the on downhill grades by using the Manual Transmission
end of the shift lever. Turn the Tow/ engine and transmission to slow the
Haul Mode on and off by pressing vehicle.
the button. When the Tow/Haul On vehicles with a gasoline engine,
Mode is enabled, a light on the to disable or enable Tow/Haul
instrument panel cluster will Grade Braking within the current
come on. ignition key cycle, press and hold
See Tow/Haul Mode Light on the Tow/Haul button for
page 525 and Hill and Mountain three seconds. A DIC message will
Roads on page 911 for more be displayed. See Transmission
information. Messages on page 544.
Also see Tow/Haul Mode under On vehicles with a diesel engine.
Towing Equipment on page 993 for Tow/Haul Mode Grade Braking can
more information. be enabled or disabled by pressing
the Tow/Haul Mode button. Use the If the vehicle is equipped with a
Tow/Haul Mode Grade Braking exhaust brake and Tow/Haul Mode manual transmission, this is the shift
(6-Speed Automatic for maximum grade braking. pattern.
Transmission)
See Towing Equipment on Here is how to operate the manual
Tow/Haul Mode Grade Braking is page 993 for more information. transmission:
only enabled while the Tow/Haul
Mode is selected and the vehicle is For other forms of grade braking, 1 (First): Press the clutch pedal
not in the Range Selection Mode. see Automatic Transmission on and shift into 1 (First). Then, slowly
See Tow/Haul Mode listed page 933 and Cruise Control on let up on the clutch pedal as you
previously and Manual Mode on page 959. slowly press down on the
page 937. Tow/Haul Mode Grade accelerator pedal.
Braking assists in maintaining
desired vehicle speeds when driving
You can shift into 1 (First) when you R (Reverse): To back up, press the Shift Speeds
are going less than 30 km/h clutch pedal. After the vehicle stops,
(20 mph). If you have come to a
complete stop and it is hard to shift
shift into R (Reverse). Slowly let up
on the clutch pedal as you press the
{ WARNING
into 1 (First), put the shift lever in accelerator pedal. If it is hard to If you skip a gear when you
Neutral and let up on the clutch. shift, let the shift lever return to downshift, you could lose control
Then press the clutch pedal back Neutral and release the clutch of the vehicle. You could injure
down and shift into 1 (First). pedal. Then press the clutch again yourself or others. Do not shift
2 (Second): Press the clutch pedal and shift into R (Reverse). Do not down more than one gear at a
as you let up on the accelerator attempt to shift into 5 (Fifth) prior to
time when you downshift.
pedal and shift into 2 (Second). shifting into R (Reverse). The
Then, slowly let up on the clutch transmission has a lock out feature
pedal as you press the accelerator which prevents a 5 (Fifth) gear to
pedal. R (Reverse) gear shift.
3 (Third), 4 (Fourth) and 5 (Fifth): Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)

Shift into 3 (Third), 4 (Fourth) and while the vehicle is moving
5 (Fifth) the same way you do for forward could damage the
2 (Second). Slowly let up on the transmission. The repairs would
clutch pedal as you press the not be covered by the vehicle
accelerator pedal. warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only
after the vehicle is stopped.
To stop, let up on the accelerator
pedal and press the brake pedal. Use R (Reverse), along with the
Just before the vehicle stops, press parking brake, for parking the
the clutch pedal and the brake vehicle.
pedal, and shift to Neutral.
Neutral: Use this position when
you start or idle the engine.
Drive Systems If the vehicle has StabiliTrak, The transfer case shift lever is on
shifting into Four-Wheel Drive Low the floor to the right of the driver.
will turn Traction Control and Use this lever to shift into and out of
Four-Wheel Drive StabiliTrak off. See StabiliTrak Four-Wheel Drive.
If the vehicle has Four-Wheel Drive, System on page 956.
you can send the engine's driving
Front Axle
power to all four wheels for extra
traction. To get the most satisfaction The front axle engages and
out of Four-Wheel Drive, you must disengages automatically when you
be familiar with its operation. Read shift the transfer case. Some delay
the following before using for the axle to engage or disengage
Four-Wheel Drive. See the is normal. A Four-Wheel Drive indicator light
appropriate text for the transfer case comes on when you shift into
in the vehicle. Manual Transfer Case
four-wheel drive and the front axle
Notice: Driving on clean, dry engages. See Four-Wheel-Drive
pavement in Four-Wheel Drive Light on page 525.
High or Four-Wheel Drive Low for Some delay between shifting and
an extended period of time may when the indicator light comes on is
cause premature wear on the normal.
vehicle's powertrain. Do not drive
on clean, dry pavement in
Four-Wheel Drive High or
Four-Wheel Drive Low for
extended periods of time.
While driving on clean dry pavement
and during tight turns, you may
experience vibration in the steering
system.
Recommended Transfer Case Settings If the vehicle has StabiliTrak,

shifting into Four-Wheel Drive Low
Transfer Case Settings will turn Traction Control and
Driving Conditions
2m 4m 4n N StabiliTrak off. See StabiliTrak
System on page 956.
Normal YES
Severe YES
Extreme YES
Vehicle in Tow* YES
*See Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 1089 or Towing the Vehicle on
page 1089.
A parking brake symbol is located
next to the N (Neutral) symbol as a
reminder to set the parking brake
Notice: Driving on clean, dry 4 n (Four-Wheel Drive Low): This before shifting the transfer case into
pavement in four-wheel drive for setting also engages the front axle N (Neutral).
an extended period of time can and delivers extra torque. You may
cause premature wear on the
vehicle's powertrain. Do not drive
never need Four-Wheel Drive Low.
It sends maximum power to all
{ WARNING
on clean, dry pavement in four wheels. You might choose Shifting the transfer case to
Four-Wheel Drive for extended Four-Wheel Drive Low if you are N (Neutral) can cause the vehicle
periods of time. driving off-road in deep sand, deep to roll even if the transmission is
mud, deep snow, and while climbing in P (Park). You or someone else
or descending steep hills. could be seriously injured. Be
sure to set the parking brake
(Continued)
You can shift from Two-Wheel Drive

. Avoid driving in Four-Wheel
WARNING (Continued) High to Four-Wheel Drive High or Drive on clean, dry pavement.
Four-Wheel Drive High to It may cause your tires to wear
before placing the transfer case in Two-Wheel Drive High while the faster, make the transfer case
N (Neutral). See Parking Brake on vehicle is moving. In extremely cold harder to shift, and run noisier.
page 954. weather, it may be necessary to . If the transfer case shifter is in
stop or slow the vehicle to shift into the N (Neutral) position and you
N (Neutral): Shift to this setting Four-Wheel Drive High. have difficulty reaching the
only when the vehicle needs to be When Using the Manual selected transfer case mode,
towed. See Recreational Vehicle Transfer Case with the engine running, shift the
Towing on page 1089 or Towing the transmission momentarily to
Vehicle on page 1089.
. Shifts into or out of Four-Wheel D (Drive) and then back to
Drive Low or N (Neutral) should N (Neutral). This will realign the
2 m (Two-Wheel Drive High): This be made using quick motions to gear teeth in the transfer case
setting is used for driving in most avoid excessive gear grinding. and allow you to complete the
street and highway situations. Shifting slowly may make it more shift.
The front axle is not engaged in difficult to shift.
two-wheel drive. This setting also Shifting from Two-Wheel Drive
. You may notice that it is harder High to Four-Wheel Drive High
provides the best fuel economy.
to shift when the vehicle is cold.
4 m (Four-Wheel Drive High): Use After the vehicle warms up the
. Shifts between Two-Wheel Drive
shifting will return to normal. High and Four-Wheel Drive High
this setting when you need extra
can be made at any vehicle
traction, such as on snowy or icy . While in Four-Wheel High or speed.
roads or in most off-road situations. Four-Wheel Drive Low you
This setting also engages the front may experience reduced fuel
. Shift the transfer case lever in
axle to help drive your vehicle. This economy. one continuous motion into
is the best setting to use when either the Four-Wheel Drive High
plowing snow. or Two-Wheel Drive High
position.

. Shifting from Two-Wheel Drive case into Four-Wheel-Drive Low the transfer case will end up in
High to Four-Wheel Drive High while the vehicle is moving faster N (Neutral). This is normal, and
while the vehicle is in motion than 5 km/h (3 mph). is a function of the gear teeth
may require that moderate force aligning in the transfer case.
be applied to the shift lever for a
. Shifting into Four-Wheel Drive
Low should be done, if possible, When this happens, make sure
few seconds before Four-Wheel the engine is on, shift the
Drive High can be engaged, with the vehicle at a slight roll,
5 km/h (3 mph) or less. transmission momentarily to
especially in cold weather. D (Drive) and back to
. In extremely cold weather, it may
. Shift the transmission into N (Neutral), and then complete
be necessary to slow or stop the N (Neutral). the transfer case shift.
vehicle to shift into Four-Wheel . Shift the transfer case shift lever
Drive High. { WARNING in one continuous motion into
. While in Four-Wheel Drive High, the Four-Wheel Drive Low
Shifting the transfer case to
the vehicle can be driven at any position.
N (Neutral) can cause the vehicle
posted legal speed limit. to roll even if the transmission is . When in Four-Wheel Drive Low
Shifting In or Out of Four-Wheel in P (Park). You or someone else do not drive faster than
Drive Low could be seriously injured. Be 72 km/h (45 mph). This will
sure to set the parking brake reduce wear and extend the life
Notice: Shifting the transfer case of your transfer case.
into Four-Wheel-Drive Low while before placing the transfer case in
moving at speeds faster than N (Neutral). See Parking Brake on Shifting In or Out of Neutral
5 km/h (3 mph) may cause page 954.
1. With the vehicle running and the
premature wear to the transfer engine at an idle, set the parking
case, and may cause the gears to . Shifting into Four-Wheel Drive brake.
grind. To avoid causing Low with the vehicle at a stop
premature wear, and grinding the may be more difficult. You may
gears, do not shift the transfer be unable to complete the shift
to Four-Wheel Drive Low, and
2. Place the transmission into Recommended Transfer Case Settings

N (Neutral).
Transfer Case Settings
Shift the transfer case in one Driving Conditions
continuous motion into or out of the 2m 4m 4n N
N (Neutral) position. Normal YES
Electronic Transfer Case Severe YES
Extreme YES
Vehicle in Tow* YES
*See Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 1089 or Towing the Vehicle on
page 1089.
You can choose among four driving transfer case cannot make a
settings: requested shift, it will return to the
Indicator lights in the dial show last chosen setting.
which setting you are in. The 2 m (Two-Wheel Drive High): This
indicator lights will come on briefly setting is used for driving in most
when you turn on the ignition and street and highway situations. The
The transfer case knob is located
one will stay on. If the lights do not front axle is not engaged in
next to the steering column.
come on, you should take the Two-Wheel Drive. This setting also
Use the dial to shift into and out of vehicle to your dealer for service. provides the best fuel economy.
four-wheel drive. An indicator light flashes while
shifting the transfer case and 4 m (Four-Wheel Drive High): Use
remains illuminated when the shift is the Four-Wheel Drive High position
complete. If for some reason the when extra traction is needed, such
as on snowy or icy roads or in most shifting from Four-Wheel Drive Low.

off-road situations. This setting also WARNING (Continued) See Shifting Out of Four-Wheel
engages the front axle to help drive Drive Low for more information.
the vehicle. This is the best setting in P (Park). You or someone else
to use when plowing snow. could be seriously injured. Be Shifting Into Four-Wheel
sure to set the parking brake Drive Low
4 n (Four-Wheel Drive Low): This before placing the transfer case in When Four-Wheel Drive Low is
setting also engages the front axle N (Neutral). See Parking Brake on engaged, vehicle speed should be
and delivers extra torque. You may page 954. kept below 72 km/h (45 mph).
never need this setting. It sends Extended high-speed operation in
maximum power to all four wheels. Four-Wheel Drive Low may damage
You might choose Four-Wheel Drive N (Neutral): Shift the vehicle's
transfer case to N (Neutral) only or shorten the life of the drivetrain.
Low while driving off-road in deep
sand, deep mud, deep snow, and when towing the vehicle. See To shift to the Four-Wheel Drive
while climbing or descending steep Recreational Vehicle Towing on Low position, the ignition must be in
hills. page 1089 or Towing the Vehicle ON/RUN and the vehicle must be
on page 1089 for more information. stopped or moving less than 5 km/h
If the vehicle has StabiliTrak, (3 mph) with the transmission in
shifting into Four-Wheel Drive Low If the SERVICE 4 WHEEL DRIVE
message stays on, you should take N (Neutral). The preferred method
will turn Traction Control and for shifting into Four-Wheel Drive
StabiliTrak off. See StabiliTrak the vehicle to your dealer for
service. See SERVICE 4 WHEEL Low is to have the vehicle moving
System on page 956. 1.6 to 3.2 km/h (1 to 2 mph). Turn the
DRIVE under Transmission
Messages on page 544. knob to the Four-Wheel Drive Low
{ WARNING position. You must wait for the
Shifting Into Two-Wheel Four-Wheel Drive Low indicator light
Shifting the transfer case to Drive High to stop flashing and remain on
N (Neutral) can cause the vehicle before shifting the transmission
Turn the knob to the Two-Wheel
to roll even if the transmission is Drive High position. This can be in gear.
(Continued) done at any speed, except when
Notice: Shifting the transmission less than 5 km/h (3 mph), and the transfer case. To help avoid
into gear before the requested transmission in N (Neutral), attempt damaging the vehicle, always wait
mode indicator light has stopped the shift again. for the mode indicator lights to
flashing could damage the stop flashing before shifting the
transfer case. To help avoid Shifting Out of Four-Wheel transmission into gear.
Drive Low
damaging the vehicle, always wait It is typical for the vehicle to exhibit
for the mode indicator lights to To shift from Four-Wheel Drive Low significant engagement noise and
stop flashing before shifting the to Four-Wheel Drive High,
bump when shifting between
transmission into gear. or Two-Wheel Drive High, the Four-Wheel Drive Low and
vehicle must be stopped or moving
It is typical for the vehicle to exhibit Four-Wheel Drive High ranges or
significant engagement noise and less than 5 km/h (3 mph) with the from transfer case N (Neutral) with
transmission in N (Neutral) and the
bump when shifting between the engine running.
ignition in ON/RUN. The preferred
Four-Wheel Drive Low and If the knob is turned to the
Four-Wheel Drive High ranges or method for shifting out of
Four-Wheel Drive Low is to have Four-Wheel Drive High,
from transfer case N (Neutral) with or Two-Wheel Drive High switch
the vehicle moving 1.6 to 3.2 km/h
the engine running. position when the vehicle is in gear
(1 to 2 mph). Turn the knob to the
If the knob is turned to the Four-Wheel Drive High or and/or moving more than
Four-Wheel Drive Low position Two-Wheel Drive High position. You 5 km/h (3 mph), the Four-Wheel
when the vehicle is in gear and/or must wait for the Four-Wheel Drive Drive High, AUTO, or Two-Wheel
moving more than 5 km/h (3 mph), High or Two-Wheel Drive High Drive High indicator light will flash
the Four-Wheel Drive Low indicator indicator light to stop flashing and for 30 seconds but will not complete
light will flash for 30 seconds and remain on before shifting the the shift. With the vehicle moving
not complete the shift. After transmission into gear. less than 5 km/h (3 mph), and the
30 seconds the transfer case will transmission in N (Neutral), attempt
Notice: Shifting the transmission
shift to Four-Wheel Drive the shift again.
into gear before the requested
High mode. With the vehicle moving
mode indicator light has stopped
flashing could damage the
Shifting into Neutral 7. If the engine is running, verify 3. Turn the transfer case dial to
To shift the transfer case to that the transfer case is in Two-Wheel Drive High.
N (Neutral) do the following: N (Neutral) by shifting the After the transfer case has
transmission to R (Reverse) for shifted out of N (Neutral), the
1. Make sure the vehicle is parked one second, then shift the
so that it will not roll. N (Neutral) light will go out.
transmission to D (Drive) for
2. Set the parking brake and press one second. 4. Release the parking brake prior
and hold the regular brake to moving the vehicle.
8. Turn the ignition to ACC/
pedal. See Parking Brake on ACCESSORY, which will turn the Notice: Shifting the transmission
page 954 for more information. engine off. into gear before the requested
3. Start the vehicle or turn the mode indicator light has stopped
9. Place the transmission shift flashing could damage the
ignition to ON/RUN. lever in P (Park). transfer case. To help avoid
4. Shift the transmission to 10. Release the parking brake prior damaging the vehicle, always wait
N (Neutral). to moving the vehicle. for the mode indicator lights to
5. Shift the transfer case to 11. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF. stop flashing before shifting the
Two-Wheel Drive High. transmission into gear.
Shifting Out of Neutral 5. Start the engine and shift the
6. Turn the transfer case dial
clockwise to N (Neutral) until it To shift the transfer case out of transmission to the desired
stops and hold it there until the N (Neutral) do the following: position.
Neutral light starts blinking. This 1. Set the parking brake and apply Excessively shifting the transfer
will take at least 10 seconds. the regular brake pedal. case into or out of the different
Then slowly release the dial to modes may cause the transfer case
the four low position. The 2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with
the engine off, and shift the to enter the shift protection mode.
N (Neutral) light will come on This will protect the transfer case
when the transfer case shift to transmission to N (Neutral).
from possible damage and will only
N (Neutral) is complete. allow the transfer case to respond to
one shift per 10 seconds. The when you turn on the ignition and in this mode results in slightly lower
transfer case may stay in this mode one will stay on. If the lights do not fuel economy than Two-Wheel
for up to three minutes. come on, you should take the Drive High.
vehicle to your dealer for service.
Automatic Transfer Case An indicator light will flash while 4 m (Four-Wheel Drive High): Use
shifting the transfer case. It will the Four-Wheel Drive High position
remain illuminated when the shift is when extra traction is needed, such
complete. If for some reason the as on snowy or icy roads or in most
transfer case cannot make a off-road situations. This setting also
requested shift, it will return to the engages the front axle to help drive
last chosen setting. the vehicle. This is the best setting
to use when plowing snow.
2 m (Two-Wheel Drive High): This
setting is used for driving in most 4 n (Four-Wheel Drive Low): This
street and highway situations. The setting also engages the front axle
front axle is not engaged in and delivers extra torque. You may
Two-Wheel Drive. This setting also never need this setting. It sends
provides the best fuel economy. maximum power to all four wheels.
You might choose Four-Wheel Drive
The transfer case knob is located AUTO (Automatic Four-Wheel Low if you are driving off-road in
next to the steering column. Drive): This setting is ideal for use deep sand, deep mud, deep snow,
when road surface traction and while climbing or descending
Use the dial to shift into and out of conditions are variable. When
Four-Wheel Drive. steep hills.
driving the vehicle in AUTO, the
You can choose among five driving front axle is engaged, but the If the vehicle has StabiliTrak,
settings: vehicle's power is sent only to the shifting into Four-Wheel Drive Low
front and rear wheels automatically will turn Traction Control and
Indicator lights in the dial show StabiliTrak off. See StabiliTrak
which setting you are in. The based on driving conditions. Driving
System on page 956.
indicator lights will come on briefly
Shifting Into Four-Wheel Drive Extended high-speed operation in

{ WARNING High or AUTO (Automatic Four-Wheel Drive Low may damage
Four-Wheel Drive) or shorten the life of the drivetrain.
Shifting the transfer case to
N (Neutral) can cause the vehicle Turn the knob to the Four-Wheel To shift to the Four-Wheel Drive
to roll even if the transmission is Drive High or AUTO position. This Low position, the ignition must be in
in P (Park). You or someone else can be done at any speed, except ON/RUN and the vehicle must be
could be seriously injured. Be when shifting from Four-Wheel stopped or moving less than 5 km/h
Drive Low. The indicator light will (3 mph) with the transmission in
sure to set the parking brake
flash while shifting. It will remain on N (Neutral). The preferred method
before placing the transfer case in
when the shift is completed. for shifting into Four-Wheel Drive
N (Neutral). See Parking Brake on
Low is to have the vehicle moving
page 954. Shifting Into Two-Wheel
1.6 to 3.2 km/h (1 to 2 mph). Turn the
Drive High
knob to the Four-Wheel Drive Low
N (Neutral): Shift the vehicle's Turn the knob to the Two-Wheel position. You must wait for the
transfer case to N (Neutral) only Drive High position. This can be Four-Wheel Drive Low indicator light
when towing the vehicle. See done at any speed, except when to stop flashing and remain on
Recreational Vehicle Towing on shifting from Four-Wheel Drive Low. before shifting the transmission
page 1089 or Towing the Vehicle The indicator light will flash while into gear.
on page 1089 for more information. shifting. It will remain on when the
Notice: Shifting the transmission
shift is completed.
If the SERVICE 4 WHEEL DRIVE into gear before the requested
message stays on, you should take Shifting Into Four-Wheel mode indicator light has stopped
the vehicle to your dealer for Drive Low flashing could damage the
service. See SERVICE 4 WHEEL transfer case. To help avoid
When Four-Wheel Drive Low is
DRIVE under Transmission damaging the vehicle, always wait
engaged, vehicle speed should be
Messages on page 544. for the mode indicator lights to
kept below 72 km/h (45 mph).
stop flashing before shifting the
transmission into gear.
It is typical for the vehicle to exhibit transmission in N (Neutral) and the Four-Wheel Drive High ranges or
significant engagement noise and ignition in ON/RUN. The preferred from N (Neutral) with the engine
bump when shifting between method for shifting out of running.
Four-Wheel Drive Low and Four-Wheel Drive Low is to have If the knob is turned to the
Four-Wheel Drive High ranges or the vehicle moving Four-Wheel Drive High, AUTO,
from N (Neutral) with the engine 1.6 to 3.2 km/h (1 to 2 mph). Turn the or Two-Wheel Drive High switch
running. knob to the Four-Wheel Drive High, position when the vehicle is in gear
If the knob is turned to the AUTO or Two-Wheel Drive High and/or moving more than
Four-Wheel Drive Low position position. You must wait for the 5 km/h (3 mph), the Four-Wheel
when the vehicle is in gear and/or Four-Wheel Drive High, AUTO or Drive High, AUTO or Two-Wheel
moving more than 5 km/h (3 mph), Two-Wheel Drive High indicator light Drive High indicator light will flash
the Four-Wheel Drive Low indicator to stop flashing and remain on for 30 seconds but will not complete
light will flash for 30 seconds and before shifting the transmission the shift. With the vehicle moving
not complete the shift. After into gear. less than 5 km/h (3 mph), and the
30 seconds the transfer case will Notice: Shifting the transmission transmission in N (Neutral), attempt
shift to Four-Wheel Drive into gear before the requested the shift again.
High mode. With the vehicle moving mode indicator light has stopped
less than 5 km/h (3 mph), and the flashing could damage the Shifting into Neutral
transmission in N (Neutral), attempt transfer case. To help avoid To shift the transfer case to
the shift again. damaging the vehicle, always wait N (Neutral) do the following:
for the mode indicator lights to 1. Make sure the vehicle is parked
Shifting Out of Four-Wheel stop flashing before shifting the
Drive Low so that it will not roll.
transmission into gear.
To shift from Four-Wheel Drive Low 2. Set the parking brake and apply
It is typical for the vehicle to exhibit the regular brake pedal. See
to Four-Wheel Drive High, AUTO or significant engagement noise and
Two-Wheel Drive High, the vehicle Parking Brake on page 954 for
bump when shifting between more information.
must be stopped or moving less
Four-Wheel Drive Low and
than 5 km/h (3 mph) with the
3. Start the vehicle or turn the 9. Place the transmission shift Notice: Shifting the transmission
ignition in ON/RUN. lever in P (Park). into gear before the requested
4. Put the transmission in 10. Release the parking brake prior mode indicator light has stopped
N (Neutral). to moving the vehicle. flashing could damage the
transfer case. To help avoid
5. Shift the transfer case to 11. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF. damaging the vehicle, always wait
Two-Wheel Drive High. for the mode indicator lights to
Shifting Out of Neutral
6. Turn the transfer case dial stop flashing before shifting the
clockwise to N (Neutral) until it To shift out of N (Neutral) do the transmission into gear.
stops and hold it there until the following:
5. Start the engine and shift the
N (Neutral) light starts blinking. 1. Set the parking brake and apply transmission to the desired
This will take at least the regular brake pedal. position.
10 seconds. Then slowly release 2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with
the dial to the four low position. the engine off, and shift the
The N (Neutral) light will come transmission to N (Neutral).
on when the transfer case shift
to N (Neutral) is complete. 3. Turn the transfer case dial to
Two-Wheel Drive High,
7. If the engine is running, make Four-Wheel Drive High,
sure that the transfer case is in or AUTO.
N (Neutral) by shifting the
transmission to R (Reverse) for After the transfer case has
one second, then shift the shifted out of N (Neutral), the
transmission to D (Drive) for N (Neutral) light will go out.
one second. 4. Release the parking brake prior
8. Turn the ignition to ACC/ to moving the vehicle.
ACCESSORY, which will turn the
engine off.
Brakes Along with ABS, the vehicle has a

Dynamic Rear Proportioning (DRP)
As the brakes are applied, the
computer keeps receiving updates
system. If there is a DRP problem, on wheel speed and controls
Antilock Brake both the brake and ABS warning braking pressure accordingly.
System (ABS) lights come on accompanied by a Remember: ABS does not change
10second chime. The lights and the time needed to get a foot up to
This vehicle might have the Antilock
chime will come on each time the the brake pedal or always decrease
Brake System (ABS), an advanced
ignition is turned on until the stopping distance. If you get too
electronic braking system that helps
problem is repaired. See your dealer close to the vehicle in front of you,
prevent a braking skid.
for service. there will not be enough time to
When the engine is started and the
Let us say the road is wet and you apply the brakes if that vehicle
vehicle begins to drive away, ABS
are driving safely. Suddenly, an suddenly slows or stops. Always
checks itself. A momentary motor or
animal jumps out in front of you. leave enough room up ahead to
clicking noise might be heard while
You slam on the brakes and stop, even with ABS.
this test is going on. This is normal.
continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS: Using ABS
A computer senses that the wheels Do not pump the brakes. Just hold
are slowing down. If one of the the brake pedal down firmly and let
wheels is about to stop rolling, the antilock work. You might feel the
computer will separately work the brakes vibrate or hear some noise,
brakes at each front wheel and at but this is normal.
If there is a problem with ABS, this both rear wheels. Braking in Emergencies
warning light stays on. See Antilock ABS can change the brake pressure If the vehicle has ABS, it allows the
Brake System (ABS) Warning Light to each wheel, as required, faster driver to steer and brake at the
on page 524. than any driver could. This can help same time. However, if the vehicle
the driver steer around the obstacle does not have ABS, the first
while braking hard. reaction, to hit the brake pedal hard
and hold it down, might be the Parking Brake To release the parking brake, hold
wrong thing to do. The wheels can the regular brake pedal down. Then
stop rolling. Once they do, the pull the bottom edge of the lever
vehicle cannot respond to the with the parking brake symbol,
driver's steering. Momentum will located above the parking brake
carry it in whatever direction it was pedal.
headed when the wheels stopped If the ignition is on when the parking
rolling. That could be off the road, brake is released, the brake system
into the very thing the driver was warning light goes off.
trying to avoid, or into traffic.
Notice: Driving with the parking
If the vehicle does not have ABS, brake on can overheat the brake
use a squeeze braking technique. system and cause premature
This gives maximum braking while wear or damage to brake system
maintaining steering control. Do this parts. Make sure that the parking
by pushing on the brake pedal with brake is fully released and the
For vehicles with a release handle,
steadily increasing pressure. brake warning light is off before
set the parking brake by holding the
In an emergency, you will probably regular brake pedal down, then driving.
want to squeeze the brakes hard pushing down the parking brake If you are towing a trailer and are
without locking the wheels. If you pedal. parking on any hill, see Driving
hear or feel the wheels sliding, ease Characteristics and Towing Tips on
If the ignition is on, the brake
off the brake pedal. This helps page 975.
system warning light will come on.
retain steering control. With ABS, it
See Brake System Warning Light on
is different.
page 524.
In many emergencies, steering can
A chime sounds and the warning
help more than even the very best
light flashes when the parking brake
braking.
is applied and the vehicle is moving
at least 8 km/h (5 mph).
brake is fully released and the control module to supplement the

brake warning light is off before power brake system under
driving. conditions where the driver has
To release the parking brake, hold quickly and forcefully applied the
the regular brake pedal down, then brake pedal in an attempt to quickly
push down momentarily on the stop or slow down the vehicle. The
parking brake pedal until you feel stability system hydraulic brake
the pedal release. Slowly pull your control module increases brake
foot up off the park brake pedal. pressure at each corner of the
If the parking brake is not released vehicle until the ABS activates.
when you begin to drive, the brake Minor brake pedal pulsation or
system warning light will flash and a pedal movement during this time is
chime will sound warning you that normal and the driver should
For vehicles without a release continue to apply the brake pedal as
handle, set the parking brake by the parking brake is still on.
the driving situation dictates The
holding the regular brake pedal If you are towing a trailer and are Brake Assist feature will
down, then pushing down the parking on a hill, see Driving automatically disengage when the
parking brake pedal. Characteristics and Towing Tips on brake pedal is released or brake
If the ignition is on, the brake page 975. pedal pressure is quickly
system warning light will come on. decreased.
See Brake System Warning Light on Brake Assist
page 524.
If this vehicle has StabiliTrak, it Hill Start Assist (HSA)
Notice: Driving with the parking also has a Brake Assist feature Nonhybrid vehicles with StabiliTrak
brake on can overheat the brake designed to assist the driver in have a Hill Start Assist (HSA)
system and cause premature stopping or decreasing vehicle feature, which may be useful when
wear or damage to brake system speed in emergency driving the vehicle is stopped on a grade.
parts. Make sure that the parking conditions. This feature uses the This feature is designed to prevent
stability system hydraulic brake the vehicle from rolling, either
forward or rearward, during vehicle Ride Control Systems When the vehicle is started and
drive off. After the driver completely begins to move, the system
stops and holds the vehicle in a performs several diagnostic checks
complete standstill on a grade, HSA StabiliTrak System to insure there are no problems.
will be automatically activated. The vehicle has a vehicle stability The system may be heard or felt
During the transition period between enhancement system called while it is working. This is normal
when the driver releases the brake StabiliTrak. It is an advanced and does not mean there is a
pedal and starts to accelerate to computer-controlled system that problem with the vehicle.
drive off on a grade, HSA holds the assists the driver with directional If cruise control is being used when
braking pressure for a maximum of control of the vehicle in difficult StabiliTrak activates, the cruise
two seconds to ensure that there is driving conditions. control automatically disengages.
no rolling. The brakes will The cruise control can be
automatically release when the StabiliTrak activates when the
computer senses a discrepancy re-engaged when road conditions
accelerator pedal is applied within allow. See Cruise Control on
the twosecond window. If the between the intended path and the
direction the vehicle is actually page 959.
vehicle is equipped with the
Integrated Trailer Brake Control traveling. StabiliTrak selectively If the system fails to turn on or
(ITBC) system, HSA may also apply applies braking pressure at any one activate, the StabiliTrak light along
the trailer brakes. It will not activate of the vehicle's brakes to assist the with a message will be displayed on
if the vehicle is in a drive gear and driver with keeping the vehicle on the Driver Information Center (DIC).
facing downhill or if the vehicle is the intended path. If a DIC message appears, make
facing uphill and in R (Reverse). StabiliTrak is on automatically sure the StabiliTrak system has not
There may be situations on minor whenever the vehicle is started. To been turned off using the Traction
hills (less than 5% grade) with a assist with directional control of the Control System (TCS)/StabiliTrak
loaded vehicle or while pulling a vehicle, the system should always button. Then turn the vehicle off,
trailer where HSA will not activate. be left on. Trailer Sway Control wait 15 seconds, and then turn it
(TSC) is also on automatically when back on again to reset the system.
the vehicle is started. See Trailer If any of the messages still appear
Sway Control (TSC) on page 9104. on the DIC, the vehicle should be
taken in for service. For more The traction control part of When the TCS or StabiliTrak system
information on the DIC messages, StabiliTrak can be turned off by is turned off, the StabiliTrak light
see Ride Control System Messages pressing and releasing the TCS/ and the appropriate message will be
on page 542. StabiliTrak button if both systems displayed on the DIC to warn the
(traction control and StabiliTrak) driver. The vehicle will still have
were previously on. brake-traction control when traction
control is off, but will not be able to
use the engine speed management
system. See Traction Control
Operation next for more
information.
The StabiliTrak light will flash on the When the TCS has been turned off,
instrument panel cluster when the system noises may still be heard as
system or the TSC feature is both To disable both TCS and a result of the brake-traction control
on and activated. StabiliTrak, press and hold the TCS/ coming on.
The system may be heard or felt StabiliTrak button until the
It is recommended to leave the
while it is working; this is normal. StabiliTrak OFF light illuminates and
system on for normal driving
the appropriate DIC message
conditions, but it may be necessary
displays. This will also disable the
to turn the system off if the vehicle
TSC feature.
is stuck in sand, mud, ice or snow,
Traction control and StabiliTrak can and you want to rock the vehicle to
be turned on by pressing and attempt to free it. It may also be
releasing the TCS/StabiliTrak button necessary to turn off the system
if they are not automatically shut off when driving in extreme off-road
The TCS/StabiliTrak button is for any other reason. This will also conditions where high wheel spin is
located on the instrument panel. enable the TSC feature. required. See If the Vehicle Is Stuck
on page 914.
When the transfer case is in 4LO, disabled. In this mode, engine If cruise control is being used when
the stability system is automatically power is not reduced automatically the system activates, the StabiliTrak
disabled, the StabiliTrak light comes and the driven wheels can spin light will flash and cruise control will
on, and the appropriate message more freely. This can cause the automatically disengage. Cruise
will appear on the DIC. Both traction brake-traction control to activate control may be reengaged when
control and StabiliTrak are constantly. road conditions allow. See Cruise
automatically disabled in this Notice: If the wheel(s) of one axle Control on page 959.
condition. is allowed to spin excessively StabiliTrak may also turn off
Traction Control Operation while the StabiliTrak, ABS, brake automatically if it determines that a
warning lights, and any relevant problem exists with the system.
The TCS is part of the StabiliTrak DIC messages are displayed, the If the problem does not clear itself
system. Traction control limits wheel transfer case could be damaged. after restarting the vehicle, see your
spin by reducing engine power to The repairs would not be covered dealer for service.
the wheels (engine speed by the vehicle warranty. Reduce
management) and by applying Vehicles with StabiliTrak have a
engine power and do not spin the Trailer Sway Control (TSC) feature.
brakes to each individual wheel wheel(s) excessively while these
(brake-traction control) as See Trailer Sway Control (TSC) on
lights and messages are page 9104.
necessary. displayed.
The TCS is enabled automatically Vehicles with StabiliTrak have a Hill
The TCS may activate on dry or Start Assist (HSA) feature. See Hill
when the vehicle is started. It will rough roads or under conditions
activate and the StabiliTrak light will Start Assist (HSA) on page 955.
such as heavy acceleration while
flash if it senses that any of the turning or abrupt upshifts/downshifts Adding non-dealer accessories can
wheels are spinning or beginning to of the transmission. When this affect the vehicle's performance.
lose traction while driving. If traction happens, a reduction in acceleration See Accessories and Modifications
control is turned off, only the may be noticed, or a noise or on page 103.
brake-traction control portion of vibration may be heard. This is
traction control will work. The normal.
engine speed management will be
Locking Rear Axle Cruise Control For vehicles with an Allison or

Hydra-Matic 6-speed automatic
Vehicles with a locking rear axle can transmission, see Grade Braking
give more traction on snow, mud, { WARNING under Tow/Haul Mode on page 938
ice, sand, or gravel. It works like a for an explanation of how cruise
standard axle most of the time, but Cruise control can be dangerous control interacts with the Range
when traction is low, this feature will where you cannot drive safely at Selection Mode, tow/haul and grade
allow the rear wheel with the most a steady speed. So, do not use braking systems.
traction to move the vehicle. the cruise control on winding
roads or in heavy traffic. For vehicles with the StabiliTrak
system that begins to limit wheel
Cruise control can be dangerous spin while you are using cruise
on slippery roads. On such roads, control, the cruise control will
fast changes in tire traction can automatically disengage. See
cause excessive wheel slip, and StabiliTrak System on page 956.
you could lose control. Do not use When road conditions allow the
cruise control on slippery roads. cruise control to be safely used
again, it can be turned back on.
For vehicles with cruise control, a
speed of about 40 km/h (25 mph) or
more can be maintained without
keeping your foot on the
accelerator. Cruise control does not
work at speeds below about 40 km/h
(25 mph).
When the brakes are applied, cruise
control is turned off.
[ (Cancel): Press to disengage Resuming a Set Speed

cruise control without erasing the If the cruise control is set at a
set speed from memory. desired speed and then the brakes
Setting Cruise Control are applied, the cruise control is
disengaged without erasing the set
If the cruise button is on when not in speed from memory.
use, it could get bumped and go into
cruise when not desired. Keep the Once the vehicle speed reaches
cruise control switch off when cruise about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more,
is not being used. press the +RES button on the
steering wheel. The vehicle returns
The cruise control light on the to the previous set speed and stays
instrument panel cluster will come there.
on after the cruise control has been
I (On/Off): Press to turn the set to the desired speed. Increasing Speed While Using
system on or off. The indicator light Cruise Control
is on when cruise control is on and 1. Press I. If the cruise control system is
turns off when cruise control is off.
2. Get up to the desired speed. already activated,
+ RES (Resume/Accelerate):
3. Press the SET button located . Press and hold the +RES button
Press briefly to resume to a
on the steering wheel and on the steering wheel until the
previously set speed, or press and
release it. desired speed is reached, then
hold to accelerate.
4. Take your foot off the release it.
SET (Set/Coast): Press to set
accelerator. . To increase vehicle speed in
the speed and activate cruise
small amounts, press the +RES
control or make the vehicle
button. Each time this is done,
decelerate.
the vehicle goes about 1.6 km/h
(1 mph) faster.
Reducing Speed While Using hills, pressing the accelerator pedal To disable and enable Cruise
Cruise Control may be necessary to maintain Grade Braking for the current
If the cruise control system is vehicle speed. ignition key cycle, press and
already activated, While going downhill: hold the Tow/Haul button for
three seconds. A DIC message
. Press and hold the SET button . Vehicles with a four speed displays. See Transmission
on the steering wheel until the automatic transmission may Messages on page 544.
desired lower speed is reached, need to have the brakes applied
then release it. or the transmission shifted to a
. Vehicles with a diesel engine
lower gear to maintain driver have Cruise Grade Braking
. To slow down in small amounts, enabled when Tow/Haul Mode is
press the SET button on the selected speed.
on, the exhaust brake is on,
steering wheel briefly. Each time . Vehicles with a six speed or both are on.
this is done, the vehicle goes automatic transmission and a
about 1.6 km/h (1 mph) slower. gasoline engine have Cruise For other forms of Grade Braking,
Grade Braking to help maintain see Automatic Transmission on
Passing Another Vehicle While driver selected speed. page 933 andTow/Haul Mode on
Using Cruise Control page 938.
Cruise Grade Braking is enabled
Use the accelerator pedal to
when the vehicle is started and
increase the vehicle speed. When
Cruise Control is active. It is not
you take your foot off the pedal, the
enabled in Range Selection
vehicle will slow down to the
Mode. It assists in maintaining
previous set cruise speed.
driver selected speed when
Using Cruise Control on Hills driving on downhill grades by
using the engine and
How well the cruise control works
transmission to slow the vehicle.
on hills depends on the vehicle
speed, the load, and the steepness
of the hills. When going up steep
Ending Cruise Control Object Detection WARNING (Continued)

There are three ways to end cruise
control:
Systems damage, even with URPA, always
. To disengage cruise control; check the area around the vehicle
Ultrasonic Parking Assist and check all mirrors before
step lightly on the brake pedal.
If available, the Ultrasonic Rear backing.
. Press [ on the steering wheel. Parking Assist (URPA) system
. To turn off the cruise control, assists the driver with parking and
avoiding objects while in How the System Works
press I on the steering wheel.
R (Reverse). URPA operates at URPA comes on automatically when
Erasing Speed Memory speeds less than 8 km/h (5 mph). the shift lever is moved into
The sensors on the rear bumper R (Reverse). A single tone sounds
The cruise control set speed is detect objects up to 2.5 m (8 ft) to indicate the system is working.
erased from memory by pressing behind the vehicle, and at least
I or if the ignition is turned off. 25 cm (10 in) off the ground.
URPA operates only at speeds less
than 8 km/h (5 mph).
{ WARNING An obstacle is indicated by audible

beeps. The interval between the
The URPA system does not beeps becomes shorter as the
detect children, pedestrians, vehicle gets closer to the obstacle.
bicyclists, animals, or objects When the distance is less than
below the bumper or that are too 30 cm (12 in) the beeping is a
close or too far from the vehicle. continuous tone for five seconds.
It is not available at speeds To be detected, objects must be at
greater than 8 km/h (5 mph). To least 25 cm (10 in) off the ground
prevent injury, death, or vehicle and below tailgate level. Objects
(Continued) must also be within 2.5 m (8 ft) from
the rear bumper. This distance may Notice: If you use URPA while the
. The park assist sensors are
be less during warmer or humid tailgate is lowered, it may not covered by frost or ice. Frost or
weather. detect an object behind your ice can form around and behind
vehicle, and you might back into the sensors and may not always
Turning the System On and Off the object and damage your be seen; this can occur after
The URPA system can be turned on vehicle. Always verify the tailgate washing the vehicle in cold
and off using the rear park aid is closed when using URPA or weather. The message may not
disable button located next to the turn off URPA when driving with clear until the frost or ice has
radio. the tailgate lowered. melted.
When the System Does Not

. A trailer was attached to the
vehicle, or an object was
Seem to Work Properly hanging out of the tailgate during
The following messages may be the last drive cycle. Once the
displayed on the DIC: object is removed and the
SERVICE PARK ASSIST: If this tailgate is raised, URPA will
message occurs, take the vehicle to return to normal operation.
The indicator light comes on when your dealer to repair the system. . A tow bar is attached to the
the system is disabled and turns off vehicle.
when the system is on. PARK ASST BLOCKED SEE
OWNERS MANUAL: This . The bumper is damaged. Take
When the system is off, PARK message can occur under the the vehicle to your dealer to
ASSIST OFF displays on the Driver following conditions: repair the system.
Information Center (DIC). The
message disappears after a short
. The ultrasonic sensors are not . Other conditions, such as
period of time. clean. Keep the vehicle's rear vibrations from a jackhammer or
bumper free of mud, dirt, snow, the compression of air brakes on
URPA defaults to the on setting ice, and slush. For cleaning a very large truck, are affecting
each time the vehicle is started. instructions, see Exterior Care system performance.
on page 1093.
Rear Vision Vehicles without Navigation the vehicle. When the vehicle is
System shifted into R (Reverse), the video
Camera (RVC) image appears on the navigation
If available, the Rear Vision Camera The RVC system displays a view of screen. After a delay, the navigation
(RVC) system displays part of the the area behind the vehicle. When screen displays the last screen after
scene behind the vehicle. the vehicle is on and shifted into the vehicle is shifted out of
R (Reverse) the video image R (Reverse).
appears on the inside rearview
{ WARNING mirror. The video image disappears Turning the RVC System On or Off
after the vehicle is shifted out of To turn the RVC system on or off:
The RVC system does not display
R (Reverse).
children, pedestrians, bicyclists, 1. Shift into P (Park).
animals, or any other object Turning the RVC System On or Off
2. Press MENU to enter the
located outside the camera's field To turn off the RVC system, press configure menu options. Turn
of view, below the bumper,
and hold z , located on the inside the Multifunction knob until the
or under the vehicle. Perceived Display feature is highlighted
rearview mirror, until the left
distances may be different from and press the Multifunction
indicator light turns off. The RVC
actual distances. Do not back the display is now disabled. knob. Or press the Display
vehicle using only the RVC screen button
screen, during longer, higher To turn the RVC system on, press
speed backing maneuvers, and hold z until the left indicator 3. Select the Rear Camera Options
or where there could be cross light comes on. The RVC system screen button. The Rear Camera
display will appear in the mirror. Options screen displays.
traffic. Failure to use proper care
before backing may result in 4. Select the Video screen button.
Vehicles with Navigation When the Video screen button is
injury, death, or vehicle damage.
System highlighted the RVC
Always check behind and around
the vehicle before backing. The RVC system is designed to system is on.
help the driver when backing up by
displaying a view of the area behind
The delay after shifting out of The symbols appear near objects Guidelines
R (Reverse) is approximately detected by the URPA system. The The RVC system has a guideline
10 seconds. The delay can be symbol may cover the object when overlay that can help the driver align
canceled by performing one of the viewing the navigation screen. the vehicle when backing into a
following: To turn the symbols on or off: parking spot.
. Pressing a hard key on the 1. Make sure that URPA has not If the vehicle has dual rear wheels,
navigation system. been disabled. this feature will not be available.
. Shifting into P (Park). 2. Shift into P (Park). To turn the guidelines on or off:
. Reaching a vehicle speed of 3. Press MENU to enter the 1. Make sure that URPA has not
8 km/h (5 mph). configure menu options. Turn been disabled.
Symbols the Multifunction knob until the 2. Shift into P (Park).
Display feature is highlighted
The navigation system may have a and press the Multifunction 3. Press MENU to enter the
feature that allows for viewing knob. Or press the Display configure menu options. Turn
parking assist symbols on the screen button the Multifunction knob until the
navigation screen while using the Display feature is highlighted
RVC. The Ultrasonic Rear Park 4. Select the Rear Camera Options and press the Multifunction
Assist (URPA) system must not be screen button. The Rear Camera knob. Or press the Display
disabled to use the caution symbols. Options screen displays. screen button
If URPA has been disabled and the 5. Touch the Symbols screen
symbols have been turned on, the 4. Select the Rear Camera Options
button. The screen button will be screen button. The Rear Camera
Rear Parking Assist Symbols highlighted when on.
Unavailable error message may Options screen displays.
display. See Ultrasonic Parking 5. Touch the Guidelines screen
Assist on page 962. button. The screen button will be
highlighted when on.
RVC Location Displayed images may be further or

closer than they appear. The area
displayed is limited and objects
which are close to either corner of
the bumper or under the bumper do
not display.
Disconnecting the RVC
The rear vision camera must be
disconnected if the tailgate needs to
be removed.
To disconnect the camera:
A. View displayed by the camera
1. Remove the license plate.
2. Disconnect the camera
The camera is near the tailgate
connectors from the chassis
handle.
harness, located behind the
This shows the field of view that the license plate, by pressing on the
camera provides. release tab on each connector.
A. View displayed by the camera

B. Corners of the rear bumper
When the System Does Not

Seem To Work Properly
The RVC system might not work
properly or display a clear image if:
. The RVC is turned off. See
Turning the RVC System On or
Off earlier in this section.
. It is dark.
. The sun or the beam of
headlamps is shining directly
A. Chassis harness connector A. Chassis harness connector into the camera lens.
B. Release tab B. Release tab

. Ice, snow, mud, or anything else
builds up on the camera lens.
C. Camera connector 4. Feed the wiring harness through Clean the lens, rinse it with
3. Plug the two exposed chassis the pickup box, then plug the water, and wipe it with a soft
harness connectors together to camera connectors together to cloth.
prevent contamination. prevent contamination. . The back of the vehicle is in an
5. Remove the tailgate. See accident, the position and
Tailgate on page 29 for more mounting angle of the camera
information. can change or the camera can
6. Reinstall the license plate. be affected. Be sure to have the
camera and its position and
Reverse this procedure to reinstall mounting angle checked at your
the RVC and make sure the dealer.
grommet and connection are
secure.
The RVC system display in the The fast flash conditions are Fuel
rearview mirror may turn off or not used to protect the video device
appear as expected due to one of from high temperature For diesel engine vehicles, see
the following conditions. If this conditions. Once conditions Fuel for Diesel Engines in the
occurs the left indicator light on the return to normal the device will Duramax Diesel Supplement.
mirror will flash. reset and the green indicator will For Vehicles with gasoline engines,
. A slow flash may indicate a loss stop flashing. please read this.
of video signal, or no video During any of these fault conditions,
Gasoline
signal present during the reverse the display will be blank and the
cycle. indicator will flash while the vehicle Use of the recommended fuel is an
is in R (Reverse) or until the important part of the proper
. A fast flash may indicate that the
conditions return to normal. maintenance of this vehicle. To help
display has been on for the
keep the engine clean and maintain
maximum allowable time during Press and hold z when the left optimum vehicle performance, we
a reverse cycle, or the display indicator light is flashing to turn off recommend the use of gasoline
has reached an Over the video display along with the left advertised as TOP TIER Detergent
Temperature limit. indicator light. Gasoline.
Look for the TOP TIER label on the
fuel pump to ensure gasoline meets
enhanced detergency standards
developed by auto companies. A list
of marketers providing TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline can be found at
www.toptiergas.com. TOP TIER
gasoline is only available in the U.S.
and Canada.
Recommended Fuel heavy knocking noise when you

drive. If this occurs, use a gasoline
For all vehicles except those with rated at 87 octane or higher as soon
the 6.2L V8 engine (VIN Code 2), as possible. Otherwise, you could
use regular unleaded gasoline with damage the engine. If heavy
a posted octane rating of 87 or knocking is heard when using
higher. If the octane rating is less gasoline rated at 87 octane or
than 87, an audible knocking noise, higher, the engine needs service.
commonly referred to as spark
knock, might be heard when driving. Gasoline Specifications
If this occurs, use a gasoline rated
at 87 octane or higher as soon as At a minimum, gasoline should meet
possible. If heavy knocking is heard ASTM specification D 4814. Some
The eighth digit of the Vehicle when using gasoline rated at gasolines contain an
Identification Number (VIN) shows 87 octane or higher, the engine octane-enhancing additive called
the code letter or number that needs service. methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
identifies the vehicle's engine. The tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend
VIN is at the top left of the If the vehicle has the 6.2L V8 engine
against the use of gasolines
instrument panel. See Vehicle (VIN Code 2), use premium
containing MMT. See Fuel Additives
Identification Number (VIN) on unleaded gasoline with a posted
on page 970.
page 121. octane rating of 91 or higher. You
can also use regular unleaded
Vehicles that have a yellow fuel cap gasoline rated at 87 octane or California Fuel
can use either unleaded gasoline or higher, but the vehicle's acceleration Requirements
ethanol fuel containing up to 85% could be slightly reduced, and a
ethanol (E85). See Fuel E85 (85% If the vehicle is certified to meet
slight audible knocking noise,
Ethanol) on page 971. For all other California Emissions Standards, it is
commonly referred to as spark designed to operate on fuels that
vehicles, use only the unleaded knock, might be heard. If the octane
gasoline described under meet California specifications. See
is less than 87, you might notice a
Recommended Fuel on page 969. the underhood emission control
label. If this fuel is not available in To check the fuel availability, ask an marketers providing TOP TIER
states adopting California Emissions auto club, or contact a major oil Detergent Gasoline can be found at
Standards, the vehicle will operate company that does business in the www.toptiergas.com.
satisfactorily on fuels meeting country where you will be driving. For customers who do not use TOP
federal specifications, but emission TIER Detergent Gasoline regularly,
control system performance might Fuel Additives one bottle of GM Fuel System
be affected. The malfunction Treatment PLUS, added to the fuel
indicator lamp could turn on and the To provide cleaner air, all gasolines
in the United States are now tank at every engine oil change, can
vehicle might fail a smogcheck test. help clean deposits from fuel
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on required to contain additives that
help prevent engine and fuel system injectors and intake valves. GM Fuel
page 521. If this occurs, return to System Treatment PLUS is the only
your authorized dealer for diagnosis. deposits from forming, allowing the
emission control system to work gasoline additive recommended by
If it is determined that the condition General Motors. It is available at
is caused by the type of fuel used, properly. In most cases, nothing
should have to be added to the fuel. your dealer.
repairs might not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. However, some gasolines contain Gasolines containing oxygenates,
only the minimum amount of such as ethers and ethanol, and
additive required to meet U.S. reformulated gasolines might be
Fuels in Foreign Environmental Protection Agency available in your area. We
Countries regulations. To help keep fuel recommend that you use these
Never use leaded gasoline or any injectors and intake valves clean gasolines, if they comply with the
other fuel not recommended in the and avoid problems due to dirty specifications described earlier.
previous text on fuel. Costly repairs injectors or valves, look for gasoline However, E85 (85% ethanol) and
caused by use of improper fuel that is advertised as TOP TIER other fuels containing more than
would not be covered by the vehicle Detergent Gasoline. Look for the 15% ethanol must not be used in
warranty. TOP TIER label on the fuel pump to vehicles that were not designed for
ensure gasoline meets enhanced those fuels.
detergency standards developed by
the auto companies. A list of
Notice: This vehicle was not Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) At a minimum, E85 should meet
designed for fuel that contains ASTM Specification D 5798 or
methanol. Do not use fuel Vehicles that have a yellow fuel cap CGSB Specification 3.512. Filling
containing methanol. It can can use either unleaded gasoline or the tank with fuel mixtures that do
corrode metal parts in the fuel ethanol fuel containing up to 85% not meet ASTM or CGSB
system and also damage plastic ethanol (E85). For all other vehicles, specifications can affect driveability
and rubber parts. That damage use only the unleaded gasoline and could cause the malfunction
would not be covered under the described under Recommended indicator lamp to come on. As the
vehicle warranty. Fuel on page 969. outside temperature approaches
Some gasolines that are not We encourage the use of E85 in freezing, ethanol fuel distributors
reformulated for low emissions can vehicles that are designed to use it. should supply winter grade ethanol,
contain an octane-enhancing The ethanol in E85 is a renewable the same as with unleaded
additive called fuel, meaning it is made from gasoline.
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese renewable sources such as corn It is best not to alternate repeatedly
tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant and other crops. between gasoline and E85. If you
where you buy gasoline whether the Many service stations will not have do switch fuels, it is recommended
fuel contains MMT. We recommend an 85% ethanol fuel (E85) pump that you add as much fuel as
against the use of such gasolines. available. The U.S. Department of possible do not add less than
Fuels containing MMT can reduce Energy has an alternative fuels 11 L (3 gal) when refueling. You
spark plug life and affect emission website (www.afdc.energy.gov/afdc/ should drive the vehicle immediately
control system performance. The locator/stations/) that can help you after refueling for at least 11 km
malfunction indicator lamp might find E85 fuel. Those stations that do (7 mi) to allow the vehicle to adapt
turn on. If this occurs, return to your have E85 should have a label to the change in ethanol
dealer for service. indicating ethanol content. Do not concentration.
use the fuel if the ethanol content is
greater than 85%.
E85 has less energy per liter Filling the Tank WARNING (Continued)
(gallon) than gasoline, so you will
need to refill the fuel tank more If the vehicle has a diesel engine,
often when using E85 than when see the Duramax diesel supplement . Do not leave the fuel pump
you are using gasoline. See Filling for more information. unattended.
the Tank on page 972. . Do not reenter the vehicle
Notice: Some additives are not { WARNING while pumping fuel.
compatible with E85 fuel and can Fuel vapors and fuel fires burn
. Keep children away from the
harm the vehicle's fuel system. fuel pump and never let
violently and can cause injury or
Do not add anything to E85. children pump fuel.
death.
Damage caused by additives
. To help avoid injuries to you
. Fuel can spray out if the fuel
would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. and others, read and follow cap is opened too quickly.
all the instructions on the fuel This spray can happen if the
Notice: This vehicle was not tank is nearly full, and is
pump island.
designed for fuel that contains more likely in hot weather.
methanol. Do not use fuel . Turn off the engine when Open the fuel cap slowly and
containing methanol. It can refueling. wait for any hiss noise to stop
corrode metal parts in the fuel . Keep sparks, flames, and then unscrew the cap all
system and also damage plastic smoking materials away the way
and rubber parts. That damage from fuel.
would not be covered under the
vehicle warranty. (Continued)
The tethered fuel cap is located When replacing the fuel cap, turn it Notice: If a new fuel cap is
behind a hinged fuel door on the clockwise until it clicks. It will require needed, be sure to get the right
driver side of the vehicle. Vehicles more effort to turn the fuel cap on type of cap from your dealer. The
that have a FlexFuel badge and a the last turn as you tighten it. Make wrong type of fuel cap might not
yellow fuel cap can use either sure the cap is fully installed. The fit properly, might cause the
unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel diagnostic system can determine if malfunction indicator lamp to
containing up to 85% ethanol (E85). the fuel cap has been left off or light, and could damage the fuel
See Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) on improperly installed. This would tank and emissions system. See
page 971. allow fuel to evaporate into the Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
To remove the fuel cap, turn it atmosphere. See Malfunction page 521.
slowly counterclockwise. Indicator Lamp on page 521.
If the vehicle is a dual fuel tank The TIGHTEN GAS CAP message
chassis cab model, and it runs out displays on the Driver Information
of fuel, refuel the front fuel tank first Center (DIC) if the fuel cap is not
to ensure a quick restart. properly installed. See Fuel System
Messages on page 541 for more
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not information.
top off or overfill the tank and wait a
few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the
{ WARNING
nozzle. Clean fuel from painted If a fire starts while you are
surfaces as soon as possible. See refueling, do not remove the
Exterior Care on page 1093. nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by
notifying the station attendant.
Leave the area immediately.
Filling a Portable Fuel WARNING (Continued) Towing

Container
. Place container on the General Towing
{ WARNING ground. Information
. Place the nozzle inside the fill Only use towing equipment that has
Filling a portable fuel container opening of the container
while it is in the vehicle can cause been designed for the vehicle.
before dispensing fuel, and Contact your dealer or trailering
fuel vapors that can ignite either keep it in contact with the fill
by static electricity or other dealer for assistance with preparing
opening until filling is the vehicle for towing a trailer. Read
means. You or others could be complete. the entire section before towing a
badly burned and the vehicle . Do not smoke while trailer.
could be damaged. Always:
pumping fuel. For towing a disabled vehicle, see
. Use approved fuel Towing the Vehicle on page 1089.
containers. For towing the vehicle behind
. Remove container from another vehicle such as a motor
vehicle, trunk, or pickup bed home, see Recreational Vehicle
before filling. Towing on page 1089.
(Continued)
Driving Characteristics Towing a trailer requires a certain

and Towing Tips
{ WARNING amount of experience. The
combination you are driving is
When towing a trailer, exhaust longer and not as responsive as the
Driving with a Trailer gases may collect at the rear of vehicle itself. Get acquainted with
When towing a trailer: the vehicle and enter if the the handling and braking of the rig
. Become familiar with the state liftgate, trunk/hatch, or rear-most before setting out for the open road.
and local laws that apply to window is open.
Before starting, check all trailer hitch
trailer towing. When towing a trailer: parts and attachments, safety
. Do not tow a trailer during the . Do not drive with the liftgate, chains, electrical connectors, lamps,
first 800 km (500 mi) to prevent trunk/hatch, or rear-most tires, and mirrors. If the trailer has
damage to the engine, axle, window open. electric brakes, start the
or other parts. combination moving and then apply
. Fully open the air outlets on the trailer brake controller by hand
. Then during the first 800 km or under the instrument to be sure the brakes work.
(500 mi) of trailer towing, do not panel.
drive over 80 km/h (50 mph) and During the trip, check occasionally
do not make starts at full throttle.
. Also adjust the climate to be sure that the load is secure
control system to a setting and the lamps and any trailer
. Vehicles can tow in D (Drive). that brings in only outside air. brakes still work.
Shift the transmission to a lower See Climate Control System
gear if the transmission shifts in the Index. Following Distance
too often under heavy loads and/
For more information about Stay at least twice as far behind the
or hilly conditions.
Carbon Monoxide, see Engine vehicle ahead as you would when
Exhaust on page 932. driving the vehicle without a trailer.
This can help to avoid heavy
braking and sudden turns.
Passing When turning with a trailer, make The Tow/Haul Mode may be used if
wider turns than normal. Do this so the transmission shifts too often.
More passing distance is needed
the trailer will not strike soft See Tow/Haul Mode on page 938.
when towing a trailer. The
shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees, When towing at high altitude on
combination will not accelerate as
or other objects. Avoid jerky or steep uphill grades, consider the
quickly and is longer so it is
sudden maneuvers. Signal well in following: Engine coolant will boil at
necessary to go much farther
advance. a lower temperature than at normal
beyond the passed vehicle before
returning to the lane. If the trailer turn signal bulbs burn altitudes. If the engine is turned off
out, the arrows on the instrument immediately after towing at high
Backing Up cluster will still flash for turns. It is altitude on steep uphill grades, the
Hold the bottom of the steering important to check occasionally to vehicle may show signs similar to
wheel with one hand. To move the be sure the trailer bulbs are still engine overheating. To avoid this,
trailer to the left, move that hand to working. let the engine run while parked,
the left. To move the trailer to the preferably on level ground, with the
Driving on Grades automatic transmission in P (Park)
right, move your hand to the right.
Always back up slowly and, Reduce speed and shift to a lower for a few minutes before turning the
if possible, have someone gear before starting down a long or engine off. If the overheat warning
guide you. steep downgrade. If the comes on, see Engine Overheating
transmission is not shifted down, the on page 1021.
Making Turns brakes might get hot and no longer
work well. Parking on Hills
Notice: Making very sharp turns
while trailering could cause the
trailer to come in contact with the
Vehicles can tow in D (Drive). Shift
the transmission to a lower gear if
{ WARNING
vehicle. The vehicle could be the transmission shifts too often Parking the vehicle on a hill with
damaged. Avoid making very under heavy loads and/or hilly the trailer attached can be
sharp turns while trailering. conditions. dangerous. If something goes
(Continued)
Leaving After Parking on a Hill Check periodically to see that all

WARNING (Continued) hitch nuts and bolts are tight.
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
wrong, the rig could start to move.
People can be injured, and both
2. Start the engine. Trailer Towing
the vehicle and the trailer can be 3. Shift into a gear. If the vehicle has a diesel engine,
damaged. When possible, always 4. Release the parking brake. see the Duramax diesel supplement
park the rig on a flat surface. for more information.
5. Let up on the brake pedal.
6. Drive slowly until the trailer is hybrid supplement for more
If parking the rig on a hill: clear of the chocks. information.
1. Press the brake pedal, but do 7. Stop and have someone pick up
not shift into P (Park) yet. Turn If the vehicle is bi-fuel, see the
and store the chocks. bi-fuel supplement for more
the wheels into the curb if facing
downhill or into traffic if facing Maintenance when Trailer information.
uphill. Towing Do not tow a trailer during break-in.
2. Have someone place chocks The vehicle needs service more See New Vehicle Break-In on
under the trailer wheels. often when pulling a trailer. See page 923 for more information.
3. When the wheel chocks are in Maintenance Schedule on
place, release the regular brakes page 113. Things that are { WARNING
until the chocks absorb the load. especially important in trailer
operation are automatic The driver can lose control when
4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then transmission fluid, engine oil, axle pulling a trailer if the correct
apply the parking brake and shift lubricant, belts, cooling system, and equipment is not used or the
into P (Park). brake system. It is a good idea to vehicle is not driven properly. For
5. Release the brake pedal. inspect these before and during example, if the trailer is too
the trip. heavy, the brakes may not work
(Continued)
Trailering is different than just Trailer weight rating (TWR) is

WARNING (Continued) driving the vehicle by itself. calculated assuming the tow vehicle
Trailering means changes in has only the driver but all required
well or even at all. The driver and handling, acceleration, braking, trailering equipment. Weight of
passengers could be seriously durability, and fuel economy. additional optional equipment,
injured. The vehicle may also be Successful, safe trailering takes passengers, and cargo in the tow
damaged; the resulting repairs correct equipment, and it has to be vehicle must be subtracted from the
would not be covered by the used properly. trailer weight rating.
vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer
The following information has many For kingpin weight and trailer
only if all the steps in this section
time-tested, important trailering tips tongue weight information, see
have been followed. Ask your
and safety rules. Many of these are Weight of the Trailer Tongue later
dealer for advice and information important for your safety and that of in this section.
about towing a trailer with the your passengers. So please read
vehicle. Use the following chart to determine
this section carefully before pulling a how much the vehicle can weigh,
trailer. based upon the vehicle model and
Notice: Pulling a trailer options.
Weight of the Trailer
improperly can damage the
vehicle and result in costly How heavy can a trailer safely be? Weights listed apply for
repairs not covered by the vehicle conventional trailers and fifth-wheel
It depends on how the rig is used. trailers unless otherwise noted.
warranty. To pull a trailer Speed, altitude, road grades,
correctly, follow the advice in this outside temperature, and how much
section and see your dealer for the vehicle is used to pull a trailer
important information about are all important. It can depend on
towing a trailer with the vehicle. any special equipment on the
To identify the trailering capacity of vehicle, and the amount of tongue
the vehicle, read the information in weight the vehicle can carry. See
Weight of the Trailer later in this Weight of the Trailer Tongue later
section. in this section for more information.
Vehicle Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR (a)

1500 Series 2WD Regular Cab Standard Box
4.3L V6 (b) 3.23 2 177 kg (4,800 lbs) 4 309 kg (9,500 lbs)
4.3L V6 With Automatic 3.73 2 449 kg (5,400 lbs) 4 536 kg (10,000 lbs)
Transmission (b)
4.3L V6 With Manual 3.73 1 860 kg (4,100 lbs) 3 938 kg (8,683 lbs)
Transmission (b)
4.8L V8 (b) 3.23 2 132 kg (4,700 lbs) 4 309 kg (9,500 lbs)
4.8L V8 (b) 3.73 3 266 kg (7,200 lbs) 5 443 kg (12,000 lbs)
5.3L LMG V8 (b) 3.08 2 994 kg (6,600 lbs) 5 216 kg (11,500 lbs)
5.3L LMG V8, K5L HD 3.08 3 357 kg (7,400 lbs) 5 534 kg (12,200 lbs)
Cooling Pkg
5.3L LMG V8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg 3.42 4 128 kg (9,100 lbs) 6 350 kg (14,000 lbs)
1500 Series 2WD Extended Cab Standard Box
4.3L V6 (b) 3.23 1 996 kg (4,400 lbs) 4 309 kg (9,500 lbs)
4.8L V8 (b) 3.23 2 132 kg (4,700 lbs) 4 536 kg (10,000 lbs)
4.8L V8 (b) 3.73 3 039 kg (6,700 lbs) 5 443 kg (12,000 lbs)
5.3L V8 (b) 3.08 2 812 kg (6,200 lbs) 5 216 kg (11,500 lbs)
5.3L V8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg (b) 3.08 3 130 kg (6,900 lbs) 5 534 kg (12,200 lbs)

5.3L V8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg 3.42 4 400 kg (9,700 lbs) 6 804 kg (15,000 lbs)
Conventional Trailer
Fifth-Wheel Trailer
Fifth-Wheel Trailer
6.2L V8 NHT Max Trailering Pkg 3.73 4 853 kg (10,700 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)
Fifth-Wheel Trailer
1500 Series 2WD Crew Cab Short Box (b)
4.8L V8 3.23 2 132 kg (4,700 lbs) 4 536 kg (10,000 lbs)
4.8L V8 3.73 3 039 kg (6,700 lbs) 5 443 kg (12,000 lbs)
5.3L V8 (LMG) 3.08 2 812 kg (6,200 lbs) 5 216 kg (11,500 lbs)
5.3L V8 (LMG) K5L HD 3.08 3 130 kg (6,900 lbs) 5 534 kg (12,200 lbs)
Cooling Pkg
5.3L V8 (LC9) XFE 3.08 3 175 kg (7,000 lbs) 5 534 kg (12,200 lbs)

5.3L V8 (LMG) K5L HD 3.42 4 355 kg (9,600 lbs) 6 804 kg (15,000 lbs)
Cooling Pkg
1500 Series 2WD Regular Cab Long Box
4.3L V6 (b) 3.23 2 132 kg (4,700 lbs) 4 309 kg (9,500 lbs)
4.3L V6 (b) 3.73 2 359 kg (5,200 lbs) 4 536 kg (10,000 lbs)
4.8L V8 (b) 3.23 2 313 kg (5,100 lbs) 4 536 kg (10,000 lbs)
4.8L V8 (b) 3.73 3 221 kg (7,100 lbs) 5 443 kg (12,000 lbs)
5.3L V8 3.08 2 948 kg (6,500 lbs) 5 216 kg (11,500 lbs)
Fifth-Wheel Trailer
1500 Series 2WD Extended Cab Long Box
5.3L V8 (b) 3.08 2 722 kg (6,000 lbs) 5 216 kg (11,500 lbs)

Fifth-Wheel Trailer
1500 Series 4WD Regular Cab Standard Box
4.3L V6 (b) 3.73 2 313 kg (5,100 lbs) 4 536 kg (10,000 lbs)
4.8L V8 (b) 3.42 2 722 kg (6,000 lbs) 4 990 kg (11,000 lbs)
5.3L V8 (b) 3.08 2 903 kg (6,400 lbs) 5 216 kg (11,500 lbs)
Fifth-Wheel Trailer
1500 Series 4WD Extended Cab Standard Box
4.8L V8 (b) 3.42 2 495 kg (5,500 lbs) 4 990 kg (11,000 lbs)
5.3L V8 (b) 3.08 2 767 kg (6,100 lbs) 5 216 kg (11,500 lbs)

Fifth-Wheel Trailer
Fifth-Wheel Trailer
Fifth-Wheel Trailer
1500 Series 4WD Crew Cab Short Box (b)
4.8L V8 3.42 2 495 kg (5,500 lbs) 4 990 kg (11,000 lbs)
5.3L V8 3.08 2 722 kg (6,000 lbs) 5 216 kg (11,500 lbs)

4.3L V6 (b) 3.73 2 223 kg (4,900 lbs) 4 536 kg (10,000 lbs)
4.8L V8 (b) 3.42 2 631 kg (5,800 lbs) 4 990 kg (11,000 lbs)
5.3L V8 (b) 3.08 2 858 kg (6,300 lbs) 5 216 kg (11,500 lbs)
Fifth-Wheel Trailer
5.3L V8 (b) 3.08 2 631 kg (5,800 lbs) 5 216 kg (11,500 lbs)
Fifth-Wheel Trailer
2500 Series 2WD Extended Cab Standard Box HD
6.0L V8 3.73 4 445 kg (9,800 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)

6.0L V8 Conventional Trailer 4.10 5 897 kg (13,000 lbs) 9 299 kg (20,500 lbs)
6.0L V8 Fifth-Wheel Trailer 4.10 6 486 kg (14,300 lbs) 9 299 kg (20,500 lbs)
2500 Series 2WD Crew Cab Standard Box HD
6.0L V8 3.73 4 400 kg (9,700 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)
2500 Series 2WD Regular Cab Long Box HD
6.0L V8 3.73 4 627 kg (10,200 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)
6.0L V8 Payload Performance 3.73 4 536 kg (10,000 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)
Pkg (UB7)
2500 Series 2WD Extended Cab Long Box HD
6.0L V8 3.73 4 400 kg (9,700 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)

2500 Series 2WD Crew Cab Long Box HD
6.0L V8 3.73 4 354 kg (9,600 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)
2500 Series 4WD Extended Cab Standard Box HD
6.0L V8 3.73 4 309 kg (9,500 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)
2500 Series 4WD Crew Cab Standard Box HD
6.0L V8 3.73 4 264 kg (9,400 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)
2500 Series 4WD Regular Cab Long Box HD
6.0L V8 3.73 4 491 kg (9,900 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)

2500 Series 4WD Extended Cab Long Box HD
6.0L V8 3.73 4 264 kg (9,400 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)
2500 Series 4WD Crew Cab Long Box HD
6.0L V8 3.73 4 218 kg (9,300 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)
6.0L V8 (Single Rear Wheels) 4.10 5 897 kg (13,000 lbs) 9 299 kg (20,500 lbs)
Fifth-Wheel Trailer
6.0L V8 (Dual Rear Wheels) 3.73 4 354 kg (9,600 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)
Fifth-Wheel Trailer

Fifth-Wheel Trailer
6.0L V8 (Dual Rear Wheels) 3.73 4 128kg (9,100 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)
6.0L V8 (Dual Rear Wheels) 3.73 4 173kg (9,200 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)
Fifth-Wheel Trailer
Fifth-Wheel Trailer
3500 Series 2WD Crew Cab Standard Box
6.0L V8 3.73 4 309kg (9,500 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)

3500 Series 2WD Crew Cab Long Box
Fifth-Wheel Trailer
Fifth-Wheel Trailer

Fifth-Wheel Trailer
3500 Series 4WD Crew Cab Standard Box
6.0L V8 3.73 4 173 kg (9,200 lbs) 7 257 kg (16,000 lbs)
3500 Series 4WD Crew Cab Long Box
Fifth-Wheel Trailer

(a) The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle
and trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment, and conversions. The GCWR for the vehicle should not be
exceeded.
(b) This model is neither designed nor intended to tow fifth-wheel or gooseneck trailers.
Ask your dealer for trailering can tow. See Vehicle Load Limits Trailer tongue weight (A) should be
information or advice. for more information about the 10 to 15 percent and fifth-wheel or
vehicle's maximum load capacity. gooseneck kingpin weight should be
Weight of the Trailer Tongue 15 to 25 percent of the loaded trailer
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is weight up to the maximums for
very important because it is also vehicle series and hitch type.
part of the vehicle weight. The
Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)
includes the curb weight of the
vehicle, any cargo carried in it, and
the people who will be riding in the
vehicle as well as trailer tongue
weight. Vehicle options, equipment,
passengers and cargo in the vehicle
reduce the amount of tongue weight
the vehicle can carry, which will also
reduce the trailer weight the vehicle
Maximum Tongue After loading the trailer, weigh the

Vehicle Series Hitch Type Weight trailer and then the tongue,
separately, to see if the weights are
1500 Weight Carrying 363 kg (800 lb) proper. If they are not, adjustments
1500 Weight Distributing 499 kg (1,100 lb) might be made by moving some
items around in the trailer.
2500/3500 Weight Carrying or 680 kg (1,500 lb)
Standard Box Weight Distributing Total Weight on the Vehicle's
Tires
2500/ Weight Carrying or 907 kg (2,000 lb)
3500 Long Box Weight Distributing Be sure the vehicle's tires are
inflated to the inflation pressures
2500 Fifth-Wheel Gooseneck 1 361 kg (3,000 lb) found on the Certification Tire label
3500 Single Rear Fifth-Wheel Gooseneck 1 814 kg (4,000 lb) on the drivers door or see Vehicle
Wheels Load Limits on page 915 for more
information. Make sure not to
3500 Dual Rear Fifth-Wheel Gooseneck 2 495 kg (5,500 lb) exceed the GVWR limit for the
Wheels vehicle, or the RGAWR, with the tow
vehicle and trailer fully loaded for
the trip including the weight of the
Do not exceed the maximum Trailer rating may be limited by the trailer tongue. If using a
allowable tongue weight for the vehicle's ability to carry tongue weight-distributing hitch, make sure
vehicle. Choose the shortest hitch weight. Tongue or kingpin weight not to exceed the RGAWR before
extension that will position the hitch cannot cause the vehicle to exceed applying the weight distribution
ball closest to the vehicle. This will the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight spring bars.
help reduce the effect of trailer Rating) or the RGAWR (Rear Gross
tongue weight on the rear axle. Axle Weight Rating). See Total
Weight on the Vehicle's Tires later
in this section for more information.
Weight of the Trailering Fifth-wheel and gooseneck hitches

Combination may also be used. See Weight of
the Trailer Tongue under Trailer
It is important that the combination Towing on page 977 for rating limits
of the tow vehicle and trailer does with various hitch types.
not exceed any of its weight ratings
GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR, Trailer If a step-bumper hitch will be used,
Weight Rating, or Tongue Weight. the bumper could be damaged in
The only way to be sure it is not sharp turns. Make sure there
exceeding any of these ratings is to is ample room when turning to avoid
weigh the tow vehicle and trailer contact between the trailer and the
combination, fully loaded for the trip, bumper.
getting individual weights for each of Consider using sway controls with
these items. any trailer. Ask a trailering
professional about sway controls or
Towing Equipment refer to the trailer manufacturer's
recommendations and instructions.
Hitches
The correct hitch equipment helps Weight-Distributing Hitch and
maintain combination control. Many Adjustment
trailers can be towed with a A weight distributing hitch may be
weight-carrying hitch which simply useful with some trailers. Use the
features a coupler latched to the following guidelines to determine if a
hitch ball, or a tow eye latched to a weight distributing hitch should
pintle hook. Other trailers may be used.
require a weight-distributing hitch
that uses spring bars to distribute
the trailer tongue weight among the
two vehicle and trailer axles.
Weight Distributing Hitch

Vehicle Series Trailer Weight Usage Hitch Distribution
1500 Up to 7000 lbs Optional Refer to trailer
manufacturers
recommendation
1500 7001 to 9900 lbs Required 50%
1500 Over 9900 lbs Required 100%
2500/3500 Up to 18000 lbs Optional Refer to trailer
manufacturers
recommendation
B. Front of Vehicle initial measurement after coupling

When using a weight-distributing the trailer to the tow vehicle and
hitch, measure distance (A) before adjusting the hitch.
coupling the trailer to the hitch ball. Fifth-Wheel and Gooseneck
If the hitch requires 50% Trailering
distribution, measure the height
again after the trailer is coupled and Fifth-wheel and gooseneck trailers
adjust the spring bars so the can be used with many pickup
distance (A) is as close as possible models. These trailers place a
to halfway between the two larger percentage of the weight
measurements. When 100% (kingpin weight) on the tow vehicle
distribution is required the spring than conventional trailers. Make
bars should be adjusted so the sure this weight does not cause the
A. Body to Ground Distance vehicle to exceed GAWR or GVWR.
distance (A) is the same as the
Fifth-wheel or gooseneck kingpin Safety Chains the instructions for the trailer brakes
weight should be 15 to 25 percent of so they are installed, adjusted, and
Always attach chains between the
the trailer weight up to the maximum maintained properly.
vehicle and the trailer. Cross the
amount specified in the trailering Do not tap into the vehicle's
safety chains under the tongue of
chart for the vehicle. See Weight of hydraulic brake system.
the trailer to help prevent the tongue
the Trailer under Trailer Towing on
from contacting the road if it
becomes separated from the hitch.
Auxiliary Battery
The hitch should be located in the Instructions about safety chains The auxiliary battery provision can
pickup bed so that its centerline is may be provided by the hitch be used to supply electrical power
over or slightly in front of the rear manufacturer or by the trailer to additional equipment that may be
axle. Take care that it is not so far manufacturer. If the trailer being added, such as a slide-in camper.
forward that it will contact the back towed weighs up to 2 271 kg If the vehicle has this provision, this
of the cab in sharp turns. This is (5,000 lbs) with a factory-installed relay will be located on the driver
especially important for short box step bumper, safety chains may be side of the vehicle, next to the
pickups. Trailer pin box extensions attached to the attaching points on underhood electrical center.
and sliding fifth-wheel hitch the bumper; otherwise, safety Be sure to follow the proper
assemblies can help this condition. chains should be attached to holes installation instructions included with
There should be at least six inches on the trailer hitch platform. Always any electrical equipment that is
of clearance between the top of the leave just enough slack so the installed.
pickup box and the bottom of the combination can turn. Never allow
trailer shelf that extends over safety chains to drag on the ground. Notice: Leaving electrical
the box. equipment on for extended
Trailer Brakes periods will drain the battery.
Make sure the hitch is attached to
A loaded trailer that weighs more Always turn off electrical
the tow vehicle frame rails. Do not
than 900 kg (2,000 lbs) needs to equipment when not in use and
use the pickup box for support.
have its own brake system that is do not use equipment that
adequate for the weight of the
trailer. Be sure to read and follow
exceeds the maximum amperage Heavy-DutyTrailer Wiring Harness

. Red: Battery Feed*
rating of 40 amperes for the Package . Dark Blue: Trailer Brake*
auxiliary battery provision.
*The fuses for these two circuits are
Trailer Wiring Harness installed in the underhood electrical
center, but the wires are not
The vehicle is equipped with one of
connected. They should be
the following wiring harnesses for
connected by your dealer or a
towing a trailer or hauling a slide-in
qualified service center. The fuse
camper.
and wire for the ITBC is factory
Basic Trailer Wiring installed and connected if the
vehicle is equipped with an ITBC.
All regular, extended cab and crew
The fuse for the battery feed is not
cab pickups have a seven-wire
required if the vehicle has an
trailer towing harness.
auxiliary battery. If the vehicle does
For vehicles not equipped with not have an auxiliary battery, have
heavy duty trailering, the harness is For vehicles equipped with heavy your dealer or authorized service
secured to the vehicle's frame duty trailering, the harness center install the required fuse.
behind the spare tire mount. The connector is mounted in the bumper.
The seven-wire harness contains If charging a remote (non-vehicle)
harness requires the installation of a
the following trailer circuits: battery, press the Tow/Haul Mode
trailer connector, which is available
button, if equipped, located at the
through your dealer. . Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal end of the shift lever. This will boost
If towing a light-duty trailer with a . Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn the vehicle system voltage and
standard four-way round pin Signal properly charge the battery. If the
connector, an adapter is available trailer is too light for Tow/Haul
from your dealer.
. Brown: Taillamps Mode, or the vehicle is not equipped
. White: Ground with Tow/Haul, turn on the
. Light Green: Back-up Lamps
headlamps as a second way to Electric Brake Control Wiring

boost the vehicle system and Provisions
charge the battery.
These wiring provisions are
Camper/Fifth-Wheel Trailer Wiring included with the vehicle as part of
Package the trailer wiring package. These
The seven-wire camper harness is provisions are for an electric brake
located under the front edge of the controller. The instrument panel
pickup box on the driver side of the contains blunt cut wires behind the
vehicle, attached to the frame steering column for the trailer brake
bracket. A connector must be added controller. The harness contains the
to the wiring harness which following wires:
connects to the camper. . Dark Blue: Brake Signal to
If the vehicle is equipped with the
The harness contains the following Trailer Connector
Heavy-Duty Trailering option,
camper/trailer circuits: please refer to Heavy-Duty Trailer . Red/Black: Battery
. Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal Wiring Package earlier in this . Light Blue/White: Brake Switch
section.
. Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn . White: Ground
Signal When the camper-wiring harness is
ordered without the heavy-duty The harness should be installed by
. Brown: Taillamps trailering package, a seven-wire your dealer or a qualified service
. White: Ground harness with a seven-pin connector center.
is located at the rear of the vehicle If the vehicle is equipped with an
. Light Green: Back-up Lamps
and is tied to the vehicle's frame. Integrated Trailer Brake Control
. Red: Battery Feed (ITBC) System, the blunt cuts exist,
. Dark Blue: Trailer Brake but are not connected further in the
harness. If an aftermarket trailer
brake controller is installed, the
ITBC must be disconnected. Do not

. When pulling a heavy trailer or a
power both ITBC and aftermarket large or heavy load in
controllers to control the trailer stop-and-go traffic.
brakes at the same time. . When pulling a heavy trailer or a
large or heavy load in busy
Tow/Haul Mode
parking lots where improved low
This indicator light on the instrument speed control of the vehicle is
panel cluster comes on when the desired.
Tow/Haul Mode is on. Operating the vehicle in Tow/Haul
Tow/Haul is a feature that assists when lightly loaded or with no trailer
when pulling a heavy trailer or a at all will not cause damage.
large or heavy load. See Tow/Haul However, there is no benefit to the
Mode on page 938 for more selection of Tow/Haul when the
information. vehicle is unloaded. Such a
selection when unloaded may result
Tow/Haul is designed to be most in unpleasant engine and
effective when the vehicle and transmission driving characteristics
trailer combined weight is at least and reduced fuel economy. Tow/
75 percent of the vehicle's Gross Haul is recommended only when
Pressing this button at the end of Combined Weight Rating (GCWR). pulling a heavy trailer or a large or
the shift lever turns on and off the See Weight of the Trailer under heavy load.
Tow/Haul Mode. Trailer Towing on page 977. Tow/
Haul is most useful under the
following driving conditions:
. When pulling a heavy trailer or a
large or heavy load through
rolling terrain.
Integrated Trailer Brake cause the vehicles antilock brake or ITBC system is fully functional only
Control System StabiliTrak systems to activate, when the ignition is in ON or
power sent to the trailer's brakes will in RUN.
be automatically adjusted to The ITBC system can only be used
minimize trailer wheel lock-up. This with trailers with electric brakes.
does not imply that the trailer has
StabiliTrak.
The vehicle may have a Trailer
{ WARNING
Sway Control (TSC) feature. See Connecting a trailer that has a
The vehicle may have an Integrated Trailer Sway Control (TSC) on surge, air,
Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system page 9104. or electric-over-hydraulic trailer
for electric trailer brakes. brake system may result in
The vehicle may have a Hill Start
This symbol is located on the Trailer Assist (HSA) feature. See Hill Start reduced or complete loss of trailer
Brake Control Panel on vehicles Assist (HSA) on page 955. braking. There may be an
with an Integrated Trailer Brake increase in stopping distance or
Control system. The power output to If the vehicles brake, antilock brake,
or StabiliTrak systems are not trailer instability which could
the trailer brakes is based on the result in personal injury or
amount of brake pressure being functioning properly, the ITBC
system may not be fully functional damage to the vehicle, trailer,
applied by the vehicles brake or other property. Use the ITBC
system. This available power output or may not function at all. Make sure
all of these systems are fully system only with electric brakes.
to the trailer brakes can be adjusted
to a wide range of trailering operational to ensure full
situations. functionality of the ITBC system.
The ITBC system is integrated with The ITBC system is powered

the vehicles brake, antilock brake, through the vehicle's electrical
and StabiliTrak (if equipped) system. Turning the ignition off will
systems. In trailering conditions that also turn off the ITBC system. The
Trailer Brake Control Panel available to the electric trailer

. Pressing a Trailer Gain button
brakes and allows manual If the Trailer Brake Display Page
application of the trailer brakes. The is not currently displayed,
Trailer Brake Control Panel is used pressing a Trailer Gain button
along with the Trailer Brake Display will first recall the current Trailer
Page on the DIC to adjust and Gain setting. After the Trailer
display power output to the trailer Brake Display Page is displayed,
brakes. each press and release of the
gain buttons will then cause the
Trailer Brake DIC Display Page Trailer Gain setting to change.
The ITBC system displays . Activating the Manual Trailer
messages on the vehicles Driver Brake Apply lever.
Information Center (DIC). See
Driver Information Center (DIC) on
. Connecting a trailer equipped
page 529 for more information. with electric trailer brakes.
A. Manual Trailer Brake Apply
Lever The display page indicates Trailer All DIC warning and service
Gain setting, power output to the messages must first be
B. Trailer Gain Adjustment Buttons acknowledged by the driver by
electric trailer brakes, trailer
The ITBC system has a control connection, and system operational pressing the odometer trip stem or
panel located on the instrument status. the DIC Vehicle Information button
panel to the left of the steering (if equipped) before the Trailer
column. See Instrument Panel The Trailer Brake Display Page can Brake Display Page can be
(Base/Uplevel Version) on page 12 be displayed by performing any of displayed and Trailer Gain can be
or Instrument Panel (Premium the following actions: adjusted.
Version) on page 15 for more . Scrolling through the DIC menu TRAILER GAIN: This setting is
information. The control panel pages using the odometer trip displayed any time the Trailer Brake
allows adjustment to the amount of stem or the DIC Vehicle Display Page is active. This setting
output, referred to as trailer gain, Information button (if equipped). can be adjusted from 0.0 to 10.0
with either a trailer connected or when the systems are active. See Manual Trailer Brake Apply
disconnected. To adjust the Trailer Trailer Sway Control (TSC) on The Manual Trailer Brake Apply
Gain, press one of the Trailer Gain page 9104 and Hill Start Assist Lever is located on the Trailer Brake
adjustment buttons located on the (HSA) on page 955. Control Panel and is used to apply
Trailer Brake Control Panel. Press The Trailer Output will indicate - - - the trailers electric brakes
and hold a gain button to cause the - - - on the Trailer Brake Display independent of the vehicles brakes.
Trailer Gain to continuously adjust. Page whenever the following occur: This lever is used in the Trailer Gain
To turn the output to the trailer off, Adjustment Procedure to properly
adjust the Trailer Gain setting to . No trailer is connected
adjust the power output to the trailer
0.0 (zero). . A trailer without electric brakes brakes. Sliding the lever to the left
0.0 (zero) gain is the factory default is connected (no DIC message will apply only the trailer brakes.
setting. To properly adjust trailer is displayed) The power output to the trailer is
gain, see Trailer Gain Adjustment . A trailer with electric brakes has indicated in the Trailer Brake
Procedure later in this section. become disconnected (a Display Page on the DIC. If the
TRAILER OUTPUT: This is CHECK TRAILER WIRING vehicles service brakes are applied
displayed any time a trailer with message will also be displayed while using the Manual Trailer Brake
electric brakes is connected. Output on the DIC) Apply Lever, the trailer output power
to the electric brakes is based on will be the greater of the two.
. There is a fault present in the
the amount of vehicle braking wiring to the electric trailer The trailer's and the vehicle's brake
present and relative to the Trailer brakes (a CHECK TRAILER lamps will come on when either
Gain setting. Output is displayed WIRING message will also be vehicle braking or manual trailer
from 0 to 10 bars for each gain displayed on the DIC) brakes are applied.
setting.
. There is a fault in the ITBC
Non-hybrid vehicles with Trailer system (a SERVICE TRAILER
Sway Control (TSC) or Hill Start BRAKE SYSTEM message will
Assist (HSA), output to the electric also be displayed in the DIC)
trailer brakes may be displayed
Trailer Gain Adjustment Procedure electrical connections. See 5. Drive the vehicle with the trailer
Trailer Gain should be set for a Vehicle Load Limits on attached on a level road surface
specific trailering condition and must page 915 for more information. representative of the towing
be adjusted any time vehicle 3. After the electrical connection is condition and free of traffic at
loading, trailer loading, or road made to a trailer equipped with about 32 to 40 km/h (20 to
surface conditions change. electric brakes: 25 mph) and fully apply the
Manual Trailer Brake Apply
Setting the Trailer Gain properly is . A TRAILER CONNECTED Lever.
needed for the best trailer stopping message will be briefly
performance. A trailer that is displayed on the DIC. Adjusting trailer gain at speeds
over-gained may result in locked lower than 32 to 40 km/h (20 to
. The Trailer Brake Display 25 mph) may result in an
trailer brakes. A trailer that is Page will appear on the
under-gained may result in not incorrect gain setting.
DIC showing TRAILER
enough trailer braking. Both of these GAIN and TRAILER 6. Adjust the Trailer Gain to just
conditions may result in poorer OUTPUT. below the point of trailer wheel
stopping and stability of the vehicle lock-up, indicated by trailer
and trailer. . In the Trailer Output display wheel squeal or tire smoke when
on the DIC, - - - - - - will a trailer wheel locks.
Use the following procedure to disappear if there is no
correctly adjust Trailer Gain for each error present. Connecting a Trailer wheel lock-up may not
towing condition: trailer without electric occur if towing a heavily loaded
1. Make sure the trailer brakes are brakes will not clear the six trailer. In this case, adjust the
in proper working condition. dashed lines. Trailer Gain to the highest
allowable setting for the towing
2. Connect a properly loaded trailer 4. Adjust the Trailer Gain by using condition.
to the vehicle and make all the gain adjustment (+ / -)
necessary mechanical and buttons on the Trailer Brake
Control Panel.
7. Re-adjust Trailer Gain any time CHECK TRAILER WIRING: This electrical fault in the trailer
vehicle loading, trailer loading or message will be displayed if: wiring. This message will also
road surface conditions change 1. The ITBC system first turn off if the driver
or if trailer wheel lock-up is determines connection to a acknowledges this message.
noticed at any time while towing. trailer with electric brakes and To determine if the electrical fault is
Other ITBC-Related DIC Messages then the trailer harness becomes on the vehicle side or trailer side of
disconnected from the vehicle. the trailer wiring harness
In addition to displaying TRAILER connection, do the following:
GAIN and TRAILER OUTPUT If the disconnect occurs while
through the DIC, trailer connection the vehicle is stationary, this 1. Disconnect the trailer wiring
and ITBC system status are message will automatically turn harness from the vehicle.
displayed on the DIC. off in about 30 seconds. This 2. Turn the ignition off.
message will also turn off if the
TRAILER CONNECTED: This driver acknowledges this 3. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the
message will be briefly displayed message or if the trailer harness ignition back to RUN.
when a trailer with electric brakes is is re-connected.
first connected to the vehicle. This 4. If the CHECK TRAILER WIRING
message will automatically turn off If the disconnect occurs while message re-appears, the
in about 10 seconds. The driver can the vehicle is moving, this electrical fault is on the
also acknowledge this message message will continue until the vehicle side.
before it automatically turns off. ignition is turned off. This If the CHECK TRAILER WIRING
message will also turn off if the message only re-appears when
driver acknowledges this connecting the trailer wiring
message or if the trailer harness harness to the vehicle, the
is re-connected. electrical fault is on the
2. There is an electrical fault in the trailer side.
wiring to the electric trailer
brakes. This message will
continue as long as there is an
SERVICE TRAILER BRAKE An authorized GM dealer may be the instrument panel cluster to notify
SYSTEM: This message will be able to diagnose and repair the driver to reduce speed. If the
displayed when there is a problem problems with the trailer. However, trailer continues to sway, StabiliTrak
with the ITBC system. If this any diagnosis and repair of the will reduce engine torque to help
message persists over multiple trailer is not covered under the slow the vehicle. See StabiliTrak
ignition cycles, there is a problem vehicle warranty. Please contact System on page 956 for more
with the ITBC system. Take the your trailer dealer for assistance information.
vehicle to an authorized GM dealer with trailer repairs and trailer Adding nondealer accessories can
to have the ITBC system diagnosed warranty information. affect the vehicle performance. See
and repaired. Accessories and Modifications on
If either the CHECK TRAILER Trailer Sway page 103 for more information.
WIRING or SERVICE TRAILER Control (TSC)
BRAKE SYSTEM message is
Non-hybrid vehicles with StabiliTrak
displayed while driving the vehicle,
have a Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
power is no longer available to the
feature. If the vehicle is towing a
trailer brakes. When traffic
trailer and the system detects that
conditions allow, carefully pull the
the trailer is swaying, the vehicle
vehicle over to the side of the road
brakes are applied without the driver
and turn the ignition off. Check the
pressing the brake pedal. If the
wiring connection to the trailer and
vehicle is equipped with the
turn the ignition back on. If either of
Integrated Trailer Brake Control
these messages continues, either
(ITBC) system, StabiliTrak may also
the vehicle or trailer needs service.
apply the trailer brakes. The TCS/
StabiliTrak warning light will flash on
Conversions and Adding a Snow Plow or the weights on the vehicle's axles
and the Gross Vehicle Weight
Add-Ons Similar Equipment Rating (GVWR), are not exceeded.
Before installing a snow plow on the The plow the vehicle can carry
Add-On Electrical vehicle, here are some things you depends on many things, such as:
need to know:
Equipment . The options the vehicle came
Notice: If the vehicle does not with, and the weight of those
Notice: Some electrical
have the snow plow prep options.
equipment can damage the
package, adding a plow can
vehicle or cause components to . The weight and number of
damage the vehicle, and the
not work and would not be passengers intended to be
repairs would not be covered by
covered by the warranty. Always carried.
warranty. Unless the vehicle was
check with your dealer before
built to carry a snow plow, do not . The weight of items added to the
adding electrical equipment.
add one to the vehicle. If the vehicle, like a tool box or
Add-on equipment can drain the vehicle has the snow plow prep truck cap.
vehicle's 12-volt battery, even if the package, called RPO VYU, then
vehicle is not operating. the payload the vehicle can carry
. The total weight of any
will be reduced when a snow additional cargo intended to be
The vehicle has an airbag system. carried.
Before attempting to add anything plow is installed. The vehicle can
electrical to the vehicle, see be damaged if either the front or Say, for example, you have a 318 kg
Servicing the Airbag-Equipped rear axle ratings or the Gross (700 lb) snow plow. The total weight
Vehicle on page 336 and Adding Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) of all occupants and cargo inside
Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped are exceeded. the cab should not exceed 135 kg
Vehicle on page 337. Some vehicles are built with a (300 lb). This means that you may
special snow plow prep package, only be able to carry one passenger.
called RPO VYU. If the vehicle has But, even this may be too much if
this option, you can add a plow to it, there is other equipment already
provided certain weights, such as adding to the weight of the vehicle.
Here are some guidelines for safely

. The snow plow manufacturer or
carrying a snow plow on the vehicle: installer can assist you in
determining the amount of rear
. Make sure the weight on the ballast required, to help make
front and rear axles does not sure the snowplow/vehicle
exceed the axle rating for each. combination does not exceed
. For the front axle, if more cargo the GVW rating, the front and
or passengers must be carried, rear axle ratings, and the front
appropriate counter ballast must and rear weight distribution ratio.
be installed rear of the rear axle. . The total vehicle must not
Counter ballast must be properly exceed the GVW rating.
secured so it will not move
during driving. Front axle reserve capacity is the
difference between the Gross Axle United States
. Follow the snow plow Weight Rating (GAWR) and the front
manufacturer's axle weight of the vehicle with full
recommendations regarding rear fuel and passengers. Basically, it is
ballast. Rear ballast may be the amount of weight that can be
required to ensure a proper front added to the front axle before
and rear weight distribution ratio, reaching the front GAWR.
even though the actual weight at
the front axle may be less than The front axle reserve capacity for
the front axle rating. the vehicle can be found in the
lower right corner of the
Certification/Tire label, as shown.
Canada
In order to calculate the amount of For example, adding a 318 kg

weight any front accessory, such as (700 lb) snow plow actually adds { WARNING
a snow plow, is adding to the front more than 318 kg (700 lb) to the
axle, use the following formula: front axle. Using the formula, if the On some vehicles that have
snow plow is 122 cm (4 ft) in front of certain front mounted equipment,
the front axle and the wheel base is such as a snow plow, it may be
305 cm (10 ft), then: possible to load the front axle to
W = 318 kg (700 lb) the front gross axle weight rating
A = 122 cm (4 ft) (GAWR) but not have enough
W.B. = 305 cm (10 ft) weight on the rear axle to have
proper braking performance. If the
(W x (A + W.B.))/W.B. =
(318 x (122 + 305))/305 = 445 kg brakes cannot work properly, you
(980 lbs) could have a crash. To help the
brakes work properly when a
So, if the front axle reserve capacity snow plow is installed, always
is more than 445 kg (980 lbs), the follow the snow plow
snow plow could be added without manufacturer or installer's
exceeding the front GAWR. recommendation for rear ballast
(W x (A + W.B.)) /W.B.= Weight the
accessory is adding to the Heavier equipment can be added on to ensure a proper front and rear
front axle. the front of the vehicle if it is weight distribution ratio, even
compensated for by carrying fewer though the actual front weight
Where: passengers, less cargo, or by may be less than the front
W = Weight of added accessory positioning cargo toward the rear. GAWR, and the total vehicle
A = Distance that the accessory This has the effect of reducing the
is in front of the front axle weight is less than the gross
load on the front. However, the front vehicle weight rating (GVWR).
W.B. = Vehicle Wheelbase GAWR, rear GAWR, and the Gross Maintaining a proper front and
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) must
never be exceeded. (Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
The total vehicle reserve capacity Pickup Conversion to
for the vehicle can be found in the
lower right corner of the
Chassis Cab
rear weight distribution ratio is Certification/Tire label as shown We are aware that some vehicle
necessary to provide proper previously. owners might consider having the
braking performance. pickup box removed and a
See your dealer for additional
advice and information about using commercial or recreational body
Total vehicle reserve capacity is the a snow plow on the vehicle. Also, installed. Owners should be aware
difference between the GVWR and see Vehicle Load Limits on that, as manufactured, there are
the weight of the truck with full fuel page 915. differences between a chassis cab
and passengers. It is the amount of and a pickup with the box removed
weight that can be added to the Emergency Roof Lamp which could affect vehicle safety.
vehicle before reaching the GVWR. Provisions The components necessary to adapt
Keep in mind that reserve capacity a pickup to permit its safe use with
Vehicles with the RPO VYU snow a specialized body should be
numbers are intended as a guide plow prep package also have an
when selecting the amount of installed by the body builder.
emergency roof lamp provision
equipment or cargo the truck can package, RPO TRW. Wiring for the
carry. If unsure of the vehicle's front, emergency roof lamp is provided
rear, or total weight, go to a weigh above the overhead console. See
station and weigh the vehicle. Your Auxiliary Roof-Mounted Lamp on
dealer can also help with this. page 66 for switch location.
Vehicle Care 10-1
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-16

Vehicle Care Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
Headlamp Aiming
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-21 Bulb Replacement
General Information Overheated Engine Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Protection Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
California Proposition Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23 Headlamps, Front Turn
65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Engine Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23 Signal, Sidemarker, and
California Perchlorate Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . 10-24 Parking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Materials Requirements . . . . 10-3 Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24 Pick-Up Box Identification
Accessories and Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25 and Fender Marker
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Vehicle Checks Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Taillamps (Chassis Cab
Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29 Models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Doing Your Own
Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30 Taillamps, Turn Signal,
Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 Stoplamps, and Back-Up
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Noise Control System . . . . . . 10-32 Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Engine Compartment
Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-33 Center High-Mounted
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Automatic Transmission Shift Stoplamp (CHMSL) and
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Lock Control Function Cargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 10-9
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33 License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-39
Automatic Transmission
Ignition Transmission Lock Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-39
Fluid (4-Speed
Transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10 Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Automatic Transmission Park Brake and P (Park)
Fluid (6-Speed Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-34
Transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12 Wiper Blade
Manual Transmission Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15 Glass Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-35
Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
10-2 Vehicle Care
Electrical System When It Is Time for New General Information

Electrical System Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65
Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40 Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66 For service and parts needs, visit
Fuses and Circuit Different Size Tires and your dealer. You will receive
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40 Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68 genuine GM parts and GM-trained
Engine Compartment Fuse Uniform Tire Quality and supported service people.
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41 Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68 Genuine GM parts have one of
Instrument Panel Fuse Wheel Alignment and Tire these marks:
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45 Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-70
Wheels and Tires Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47 If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-72
All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49 Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73
Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49 Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-84
Summer Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-50 Jump Starting
Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84
Tire Terminology and
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54 Towing
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56 Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-89
Tire Pressure for High-Speed Recreational Vehicle
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89
Tire Pressure Monitor Appearance Care
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58 Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-93 California Proposition
Tire Pressure Monitor Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-96 65 Warning
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59 Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-99
Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62 Most motor vehicles, including this
Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63 one, contain and/or emit chemicals
Dual Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . 10-65 known to the State of California to
Vehicle Care 10-3
cause cancer and birth defects or handling, emissions systems, Vehicle Checks
other reproductive harm. Engine aerodynamics, durability, and
exhaust, many parts and systems, electronic systems like antilock
many fluids, and some component brakes, traction control, and stability Doing Your Own
wear by-products contain and/or control. These accessories or Service Work
emit these chemicals. modifications could even cause
malfunction or damage not covered
California Perchlorate by the vehicle warranty.
information.
Materials Requirements Damage to vehicle components
Certain types of automotive
resulting from modifications or the
installation or use of nonGM
{ WARNING
applications, such as airbag
certified parts, including control It can be dangerous to work on
initiators, safety belt pretensioners,
module or software modifications, is your vehicle if you do not have
and lithium batteries contained in
not covered under the terms of the the proper knowledge, service
Remote Keyless Entry transmitters,
vehicle warranty and may affect manual, tools, or parts. Always
may contain perchlorate materials.
remaining warranty coverage for follow owner manual procedures
Special handling may be necessary.
affected parts. and consult the service manual
For additional information, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ GM Accessories are designed to for your vehicle before doing any
perchlorate. complement and function with other service work.
systems on the vehicle. See your
Accessories and dealer to accessorize the vehicle
using genuine GM Accessories
Modifications installed by a dealer technician.
Adding nondealer accessories or Also, see Adding Equipment to the
making modifications to the vehicle Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
can affect vehicle performance and page 337.
safety, including such things as
airbags, braking, stability, ride and
10-4 Vehicle Care
If doing some of your own service Hood 2. Then go to the front of the
work, use the proper service vehicle and locate the secondary
manual. It tells you much more To open the hood: hood release, near the center of
about how to service the vehicle the grille.
than this manual can. To order the 3. Push the secondary hood
proper service manual, see Service release to the right.
Publications Ordering Information
on page 1316. 4. Lift the hood.
This vehicle has an airbag system. Before closing the hood, be sure
Before attempting to do your own all the filler caps are on properly.
1. Pull the handle with this symbol
service work, see Airbag System Then bring the hood from full
on it. It is inside the vehicle to
Check on page 338. open to within 152 mm (6 in)
the lower left of the steering
from the closed position, pause,
Keep a record with all parts receipts wheel.
then push the front center of the
and list the mileage and the date of hood with a swift, firm motion to
any service work performed. See fully close the hood.
Maintenance Records on
page 1116.
Notice: Even small amounts of
contamination can cause damage
to vehicle systems. Do not allow
contaminants to contact the
fluids, reservoir caps,
or dipsticks.
Vehicle Care 10-5
Engine Compartment Overview
5.3 L V8 Engine Shown (4.3 L V6 Engine, 4.8 L V8 Engine, 6.0 L V8 Engine, and 6.2 L V8 Engine Similar)
10-6 Vehicle Care
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on I. Engine Cooling Fan (Out of To ensure proper engine
page 1016. View). See Cooling System on performance and long life, careful
B. Coolant Surge Tank and page 1017. attention must be paid to engine oil.
Pressure Cap. See Cooling J. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. Following these simple, but
System on page 1017. See Power Steering Fluid on important steps will help protect
page 1024. your investment:
C. Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump
Starting on page 1084. K. Brake Master Cylinder
. Always use engine oil approved
Reservoir. See Brake Fluid on to the proper specification and of
D. Battery on page 1028. the proper viscosity grade. See
page 1026.
E. Remote Negative () Terminal Selecting the Right Engine Oil
(Out of View). See Jump L. Engine Compartment Fuse in this section.
Starting on page 1084. Block on page 1041. . Check the engine oil level
F. Automatic Transmission M. Windshield Washer Fluid regularly and maintain the
Dipstick (Out of View). See Reservoir. See Adding Washer proper oil level. See Checking
Checking the Fluid Level Fluid under Washer Fluid on Engine Oil and When to Add
under Automatic Transmission page 1024. Engine Oil in this section.
Fluid (4-Speed Transmission) If the vehicle has a diesel engine . Change the engine oil at the
on page 1010 or Automatic and/or an Allison Transmission, see appropriate time. See Engine Oil
Transmission Fluid (6-Speed the Duramax Diesel Supplement. Life System on page 109.
Transmission) on page 1012. . Always dispose of engine oil
G. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See When Engine Oil properly. See What to Do with
to Add Engine Oil under For diesel engine vehicles, see Used Oil in this section.
Engine Oil on page 106. Engine Oil in the Duramax diesel
H. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of supplement.
View). See Checking Engine
Oil under Engine Oil on
page 106.
Vehicle Care 10-7
Checking Engine Oil 2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it to the engine. If you find that you
with a paper towel or cloth, then have an oil level above the
It is a good idea to check the engine
push it back in all the way. operating range, i.e., the engine
oil level at each fuel fill. In order to
Remove it again, keeping the tip has so much oil that the oil level
get an accurate reading, the vehicle
down, and check the level. gets above the cross-hatched
must be on level ground. The
area that shows the proper
engine oil dipstick handle is a loop. When to Add Engine Oil operating range, the engine could
See Engine Compartment Overview
be damaged. You should drain
on page 105 for the location of the
out the excess oil or limit driving
engine oil dipstick.
of the vehicle and seek a service
Obtaining an accurate oil level professional to remove the
reading is essential: excess amount of oil.
1. If the engine has been running See Engine Compartment Overview
recently, turn off the engine and on page 105 for the location of the
allow several minutes for the oil If the oil is below the cross-hatched engine oil fill cap.
to drain back into the oil pan. area at the tip of the dipstick, add
Add enough oil to put the level
Checking the oil level too soon 1 L (1 qt) of the recommended oil
somewhere in the proper operating
after engine shutoff will not and then recheck the level. See
range. Push the dipstick all the way
provide an accurate oil level Selecting the Right Engine Oil in
back in when through.
reading. this section for an explanation of
what kind of oil to use. For engine Selecting the Right Engine Oil
{ WARNING oil crankcase capacity, see
Capacities and Specifications on Selecting the right engine oil
page 122. depends on both the proper oil
The engine oil dipstick handle
specification and viscosity grade.
may be hot; it could burn you. Notice: Do not add too much oil. See Recommended Fluids and
Use a towel or glove to touch the Oil levels above or below the Lubricants on page 1112.
dipstick handle. acceptable operating range
shown on the dipstick are harmful
10-8 Vehicle Care
Specification Viscosity Grade Engine oil system flushes are not

Use and ask for licensed engine oils SAE 5W-30 is the best viscosity recommended and could cause
with the dexos1 approved grade for the vehicle. Do not use engine damage not covered by the
certification mark. Engine oils other viscosity grade oils such as vehicle warranty.
meeting the requirements for the SAE 10W-30, 10W-40, or 20W-50. What to Do with Used Oil
vehicle should have the dexos1 Cold Temperature Operation: In an
approved certification mark. This Used engine oil contains certain
area of extreme cold, where the elements that can be unhealthy for
certification mark indicates that the temperature falls below 29C
oil has been approved to the dexos1 your skin and could even cause
(20F), an SAE 0W-30 oil may be cancer. Do not let used oil stay on
specification. used. An oil of this viscosity grade your skin for very long. Clean your
will provide easier cold starting for skin and nails with soap and water,
the engine at extremely low or a good hand cleaner. Wash or
temperatures. When selecting an oil properly dispose of clothing or rags
of the appropriate viscosity grade, containing used engine oil. See the
always select an oil of the correct manufacturer's warnings about the
specification. See Specification use and disposal of oil products.
earlier in this section for more
Notice: Failure to use the information. Used oil can be a threat to the
recommended engine oil or environment. If you change your
equivalent can result in engine Engine Oil Additives/Engine own oil, be sure to drain all the oil
damage not covered by the Oil Flushes from the filter before disposal. Never
vehicle warranty. Check with your dispose of oil by putting it in the
Do not add anything to the oil. The
dealer or service provider on trash or pouring it on the ground,
recommended oils with the dexos
whether the oil is approved to the into sewers, or into streams or
specification and displaying the
dexos1 specification. bodies of water. Recycle it by taking
dexos certification mark are all that
it to a place that collects used oil.
is needed for good performance and
engine protection.
Vehicle Care 10-9
Engine Oil Life System engine oil and filter must be How to Reset the Engine Oil
changed at least once a year and, Life System
When to Change Engine Oil at this time, the system must be
reset. For vehicles without the Reset the system whenever the
This vehicle has a computer system engine oil is changed so that the
that indicates when to change the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
message, an oil change is needed system can calculate the next
engine oil and filter. This is based engine oil change. Always reset the
on a combination of factors which when the OIL LIFE
REMAINING percentage is near engine oil life to 100% after every oil
include engine revolutions, engine change. It will not reset itself. To
temperature, and miles driven. 0%. Your dealer has trained service
people who will perform this work reset the system on most vehicles:
Based on driving conditions, the
mileage at which an oil change is and reset the system. It is also 1. Display the OIL LIFE
indicated can vary considerably. For important to check the oil regularly REMAINING on the DIC. If the
the oil life system to work properly, over the course of an oil drain vehicle does not have DIC
the system must be reset every time interval and keep it at the proper buttons, the vehicle must be in
the oil is changed. level. P (Park) to access this display.
If the system is ever reset See Driver Information Center
On some vehicles, when the system (DIC) on page 529.
has calculated that oil life has been accidentally, the oil must be
diminished, a CHANGE ENGINE changed at 5 000 km (3,000 mi) 2. Press and hold the SET/RESET
OIL SOON message comes on to since the last oil change. button on the DIC, or the trip
indicate that an oil change is Remember to reset the oil life odometer reset stem if the
necessary. See Engine Oil system whenever the oil is changed. vehicle does not have DIC
Messages on page 540. Change buttons, for more than
the oil as soon as possible within five seconds. The oil life will
the next 1 000 km (600 mi). It is change to 100%.
possible that, if driving under the
best conditions, the oil life system
might indicate that an oil change is
not necessary for up to a year. The
10-10 Vehicle Care
On all vehicles, the Engine Oil Life Automatic Transmission Notice: Too much or too little
System can be reset as follows: fluid can damage the
Fluid (4-Speed transmission. Too much can
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with Transmission)
the engine off. mean that some of the fluid could
come out and fall on hot engine
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal When to Check and Change parts or exhaust system parts,
slowly three times within Automatic Transmission Fluid starting a fire. Too little fluid
five seconds. A good time to check the automatic could cause the transmission to
3. Display the OIL LIFE transmission fluid level is when the overheat. Be sure to get an
REMAINING on the DIC. If the engine oil is changed. accurate reading if checking the
display shows 100%, the system transmission fluid.
Change the fluid and filter at the
is reset. See Driver Information intervals listed in Maintenance Wait at least 30 minutes before
Center (DIC) on page 529. Schedule on page 113 and be sure checking the transmission fluid level
If the vehicle has a CHANGE to use the transmission fluid listed in if you have been driving:
ENGINE OIL SOON message and it Recommended Fluids and . When outside temperatures are
comes back on when the vehicle is Lubricants on page 1112. above 32C (90F).
started and/or the OIL LIFE
REMAINING is near 0%, the engine
How to Check Automatic . At high speed for quite a while.
oil life system has not been reset. Transmission Fluid . In heavy traffic especially in
Repeat the procedure. Because this operation can be a hot weather.
little difficult, it may be best to have . While pulling a trailer.
this done at the dealer service
department. To get the right reading, the fluid
should be at normal operating
If not taken to the dealer, be sure to temperature, which is 82C to 93C
follow all the instructions here or a (180F to 200F).
false reading on the dipstick could
result.
Vehicle Care 10-11
Get the vehicle warmed up by 2. With the parking brake applied, 2. Flip the handle up, then pull out
driving about 24 km (15 miles) when place the shift lever in P (Park). the dipstick and wipe it with a
outside temperatures are above 3. With your foot on the brake clean rag or paper towel.
10C (50F). If it is colder than 10C pedal, move the shift lever 3. Push it back in all the way, wait
(50F), drive the vehicle in 3 (Third) through each gear range, three seconds and then pull it
until the engine temperature gauge pausing for about three seconds back out again.
moves and then remains steady for in each range. Then, position the
10 minutes. shift lever in P (Park).
A cold fluid check can be made 4. Let the engine run at idle for
after the vehicle has been sitting for three minutes or more.
eight hours or more with the engine
off, but this is used only as a Then, without shutting off the
reference. Let the engine run at idle engine, follow these steps:
for five minutes if outside
temperatures are 10C (50F) or 4. Check both sides of the dipstick,
more. If it is colder than 10C and read the lower level. The
(50F), the engine may have to idle fluid level must be in the COLD
longer. Should the fluid level be low area, below the cross-hatched
during this cold check, the fluid must area, for a cold check or in the
be checked when hot before adding HOT or cross-hatched area for a
fluid. Checking the fluid hot will give 1. Locate the transmission dipstick hot check. Be sure to keep the
you a more accurate reading of the handle with this graphic which is dipstick pointed down to get an
fluid level. located at the rear of the engine accurate reading.
compartment, on the passenger 5. If the fluid level is in the
Checking the Fluid Level side of the vehicle. acceptable range, push the
Prepare the vehicle as follows: See Engine Compartment dipstick back in all the way; then
1. Park the vehicle on a level Overview on page 105 for more flip the handle down to lock the
place. Keep the engine running. information on location. dipstick in place.
10-12 Vehicle Care
Consistency of Readings Notice: Use of the incorrect Automatic Transmission

automatic transmission fluid may
Always check the fluid level at least
Fluid (6-Speed
twice using the procedure described Transmission)
previously. Consistency (repeatable damages may not be covered by
readings) is important to maintaining the vehicle warranty. Always use
the automatic transmission fluid When to Check and Change
proper fluid level. If readings are still Automatic Transmission Fluid
inconsistent, contact the dealer. listed in Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 1112. It is usually not necessary to check
How to Add Automatic . After adding fluid, recheck the the transmission fluid level. The only
Transmission Fluid fluid level as described under reason for fluid loss is a
How to Check Automatic transmission leak or overheated
Refer to Recommended Fluids and
Transmission Fluid, earlier in transmission. If a small leak is
Lubricants on page 1112 to
this section. suspected, then use the following
determine what kind of transmission
checking procedures to check the
fluid to use. . When the correct fluid level is fluid level. However, if there is a
Using a funnel, add fluid down the obtained, push the dipstick back large leak, then it may be necessary
transmission dipstick tube only after in all the way; then flip the to have the vehicle towed to a
checking the transmission fluid handle down to lock the dipstick dealer service department and have
while it is hot. A cold check is used in place. it repaired before driving the vehicle
only as a reference. If the fluid level further.
is low, add only enough of the
Notice: Use of the incorrect
proper fluid to bring the level up to
automatic transmission fluid may
the HOT area for a hot check.
It does not take much fluid,
damages may not be covered by
generally less than 0.5 Liter (1 Pint).
the vehicle warranty. Always use
Do not overfill.
the automatic transmission fluid
listed in Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 1112.
Vehicle Care 10-13
Change the fluid and filter at the Before checking the fluid level, 6. Using the TRANS TEMP
scheduled maintenance intervals prepare the vehicle as follows: reading, determine and perform
listed in Maintenance Schedule on 1. Start the engine and park the the appropriate check
page 113. Be sure to use the vehicle on a level surface. Keep procedure. If the TRANS TEMP
transmission fluid listed in the engine running. reading is not within the required
Recommended Fluids and temperature ranges, allow the
Lubricants on page 1112. 2. Apply the parking brake and vehicle to cool, or operate the
place the shift lever in P (Park). vehicle until the appropriate
How to Check Automatic transmission fluid temperature is
3. With your foot on the brake
Transmission Fluid reached.
pedal, move the shift lever
Notice: Too much or too little through each gear range, Cold Check Procedure
fluid can damage the pausing for about three seconds
transmission. Too much can in each range. Then, move the Use this procedure only as a
mean that some of the fluid could shift lever back to P (Park). reference to determine if the
come out and fall on hot engine transmission has enough fluid to be
4. Allow the engine to idle (500 operated safely until a hot check
parts or exhaust system parts,
800 rpm) for at least 1 minute. procedure can be made. The hot
starting a fire. Too little fluid
Slowly release the brake pedal. check procedure is the most
could cause the transmission to
overheat. Be sure to get an 5. Keep the engine running and accurate method to check the fluid
accurate reading if checking the press the Trip/Fuel button or trip level. Perform the hot check
transmission fluid. odometer reset stem until procedure at the first opportunity.
TRANS TEMP (Transmission Use this cold check procedure to
Temperature) displays on the check fluid level when the
Driver Information Center (DIC). transmission temperature is
between 27C and 32C (80F
and 90F).
10-14 Vehicle Care
Hot Check Procedure

Use this procedure to check the
transmission fluid level when the
transmission fluid temperature is
between 71C and 93C (160F
and 200F).
1. Locate the transmission dipstick
at the rear of the engine 5. If the fluid level is below the The hot check is the most accurate
compartment, on the passenger COLD check band, add only method to check the fluid level. The
side of the vehicle. enough fluid as necessary to hot check should be performed at
bring the level into the COLD the first opportunity in order to verify
See Engine Compartment band. It does not take much the cold check. The fluid level rises
Overview on page 105 for more fluid, generally less than 0.5 Liter as fluid temperature increases, so it
information. (1 Pint). Do not overfill. is important to ensure the
2. Flip the handle up, then pull out 6. Perform a hot check at the first transmission temperature is within
the dipstick and wipe it with a opportunity after the range.
clean rag or paper towel. transmission reaches a normal
3. Install the dipstick by pushing it operating temperature between
back in all the way; wait 71C to 93C (160F to 200F).
three seconds, and then pull it 7. If the fluid level is in the
back out again. acceptable range, push the
4. Check both sides of the dipstick dipstick back in all the way, then
and read the lower level. Repeat flip the handle down to lock the
1. Locate the transmission dipstick
the check procedure to verify the dipstick in place.
at the rear of the engine
reading. compartment, on the passenger
side of the vehicle.
Vehicle Care 10-15
See Engine Compartment (160F and 200F), add or drain Manual Transmission
Overview on page 105 for more fluid as necessary to bring the
information. level into the HOT band. If the
Fluid
2. Flip the handle up, then pull out fluid level is low, add only It is not necessary to check the
the dipstick and wipe it with a enough fluid to bring the level manual transmission fluid level.
clean rag or paper towel. into the HOT band. It does not A transmission fluid leak is the only
take much fluid, generally less reason for fluid loss. If a leak
3. Install the dipstick by pushing it than 0.5 L (1 pint). Do not occurs, take the vehicle to your
back in all the way; wait overfill. dealer service department and have
three seconds, and then pull it it repaired as soon as possible. See
back out again. 6. If the fluid level is in the
acceptable range, push the Recommended Fluids and
4. Check both sides of the dipstick dipstick back in all the way, then Lubricants on page 1112 for the
and read the lower level. Repeat flip the handle down to lock the proper fluid to use.
the check procedure to verify the dipstick in place.
reading. Hydraulic Clutch
Consistency of Readings
It is not necessary to regularly
Always check the fluid level at least check brake/clutch fluid unless you
twice using the procedure described suspect there is a leak in the
previously. Consistency (repeatable system. Adding fluid will not correct
readings) is important to maintaining a leak. A fluid loss in this system
proper fluid level. If readings are still could indicate a problem. Have the
inconsistent, contact the dealer. system inspected and repaired.
5. Safe operating level is within the
HOT cross hatch band on the
dipstick. If the fluid level is not
within the HOT band, and the
transmission temperature is
between 71C and 93C
10-16 Vehicle Care
When to Check and What Do not remove the cap to check the If driving on dusty/dirty conditions,
to Use fluid level or to topoff the fluid level. inspect the filter at each engine oil
Remove the cap only when change.
necessary to add the proper fluid
until the level reaches the MIN line. How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter To inspect the air cleaner/filter,
If the vehicle has a diesel engine, remove the engine air cleaner/filter
see Pickup Models under Engine from the vehicle by following
The brake/hydraulic clutch fluid Air Cleaner/Filter in the Duramax Steps 1 through 6. When the engine
reservoir cap has this symbol on it. Diesel Supplement for the correct air cleaner/filter is removed, lightly
The common hydraulic clutch and inspection and replacement shake it to release loose dust and
brake master cylinder fluid reservoir procedures. dirt. If the engine air cleaner/filter
is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid as remains covered with dirt, a new
See Engine Compartment Overview filter is required. Never use
indicated on the reservoir cap. See
on page 105 for the location of the compressed air to clean the filter.
Engine Compartment Overview on
engine air cleaner/filter.
page 105 for reservoir location.
How to Check and Add Fluid When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Visually check the brake/clutch fluid
reservoir to make sure the fluid level Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the
is at the MIN (minimum) line on the scheduled maintenance intervals
side of the reservoir. The brake/ and replace it at the first oil change
hydraulic clutch fluid system should after each 80 000 km (50,000 mi)
be closed and sealed. interval. See Maintenance Schedule
Vehicle Care 10-17
Replacing the Engine Air Cleaner/

Filter { WARNING
Operating the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off can cause you or
others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air; it
helps to stop flames if the engine
backfires. Use caution when
3. Remove the engine air cleaner/ working on the engine and do not
filter from the housing. Take care drive with the air cleaner/filter off.
to dislodge as little dirt as
possible.
Cooling System
4. Clean the engine air cleaner/
filter sealing surfaces and the If the vehicle has the Duramax
1. Locate the air cleaner/filter housing. diesel engine, see the Duramax
assembly. See Engine diesel supplement for more
Compartment Overview on 5. Inspect or replace the engine air information.
page 105. cleaner/filter.
The cooling system allows the
2. Loosen the four screws on the 6. Reinstall the cover and tighten engine to maintain the correct
cover of the housing and lift up the screws. working temperature.
the cover.
10-18 Vehicle Care
Engine Coolant
{ WARNING
The cooling system in the vehicle is
Heater and radiator hoses, and filled with DEX-COOL engine
other engine parts, can be very coolant. This coolant is designed to
hot. Do not touch them. If you do, remain in the vehicle for 5 years or
you can be burned. 240 000 km (150,000 mi), whichever
occurs first.
Do not run the engine if there is a
leak. If you run the engine, it The following explains the cooling
5.3 L V8 Engine Shown (4.3 L could lose all coolant. That could system and how to check and add
V6 Engine, 4.8 L V8 Engine, 6.0 L cause an engine fire, and you coolant when it is low. If there is a
V8 Engine, and 6.2 L V8 Engine could be burned. Get any leak problem with engine overheating,
Similar) fixed before you drive the vehicle. see Engine Overheating on
page 1021.
A. Coolant Surge Tank
B. Coolant Surge Tank Notice: Using coolant other than What to Use
Pressure Cap DEX-COOL can cause premature
C. Engine Cooling Fan
engine, heater core, or radiator { WARNING
corrosion. In addition, the engine
coolant could require changing Adding only plain water or some
{ WARNING sooner, at 50 000 km (30,000 mi) other liquid to the cooling system
or 24 months, whichever occurs can be dangerous. Plain water
An electric engine cooling fan can first. Any repairs would not be and other liquids, can boil before
start even when the engine is not covered by the vehicle warranty. the proper coolant mixture will.
running. To avoid injury, always Always use DEX-COOL The coolant warning system is set
keep hands, clothing, and tools (silicate-free) coolant in the for the proper coolant mixture.
away from any engine vehicle. With plain water or the wrong
cooling fan.
(Continued)
Vehicle Care 10-19

. Helps keep the proper engine Checking Coolant
WARNING (Continued) temperature
The coolant surge tank is located in
mixture, the engine could get too Notice: If improper coolant the engine compartment on the
mixture, inhibitors, or additives passenger side of the vehicle. See
hot but you would not get the
are used in the vehicle cooling Engine Compartment Overview on
overheat warning. The engine
system, the engine could page 105 for more information on
could catch fire and you or others overheat and be damaged. Too
could be burned. Use a 50/ location.
much water in the mixture can
50 mixture of clean, drinkable freeze and crack engine cooling The vehicle must be on a level
water and DEX-COOL coolant. parts. The repairs would not be surface when checking the coolant
covered by the warranty. Use only level.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, the proper mixture of engine Check to see if coolant is visible in
drinkable water and DEX-COOL coolant for the cooling system. the coolant surge tank. If the coolant
coolant. If using this mixture, See Recommended Fluids and inside the coolant surge tank is
nothing else needs to be added. Lubricants on page 1112. boiling, do not do anything else until
This mixture: Never dispose of engine coolant by it cools down. If coolant is visible
. Gives freezing protection down putting it in the trash, pouring it on but the coolant level is not at or
to 37C (34F), outside the ground, or into sewers, streams, above the FULL COLD mark, add a
temperature or bodies of water. Have the coolant 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
changed by an authorized service water and DEX-COOL coolant at the
. Gives boiling protection up to center, familiar with legal coolant surge tank, but be sure the
129C (265F), engine requirements regarding used cooling system is cool before this
temperature coolant disposal. This will help is done.
. Protects against rust and protect the environment and your
corrosion health.
. Will not damage aluminum parts
10-20 Vehicle Care
If no coolant is visible in the surge

{ WARNING tank, add coolant as follows:
You can be burned if you spill
coolant on hot engine parts.
Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts
are hot enough. Do not spill
coolant on a hot engine.
1. Remove the coolant surge tank
Notice: This vehicle has a pressure cap when the cooling
specific coolant fill procedure. system, including the coolant
Failure to follow this procedure surge tank pressure cap and
The coolant level should be at or
could cause the engine to upper radiator hose, is no
above the FULL COLD mark. If it is
overheat and be severely longer hot.
not, there may be a leak in the
cooling system. damaged. Turn the pressure cap slowly
counterclockwise about one full
How to Add Coolant to the { WARNING turn. If a hiss is heard, wait for
Coolant Surge Tank for that to stop. A hiss means there
Gasoline Engines Steam and scalding liquids from a is still some pressure left.
If the vehicle has a diesel engine, hot cooling system can blow out 2. Keep turning the pressure cap
see Cooling System in the and burn you badly. Never turn slowly, and remove it.
Duramax Diesel Supplement for the the cap when the cooling system,
proper coolant fill procedure. including the surge tank pressure
cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling
system and surge tank pressure
cap to cool.
Vehicle Care 10-21
mixture to the coolant surge tank In addition, there are ENGINE

until the level reaches the FULL OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE,
COLD mark. ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE
5. Replace the pressure cap tightly. ENGINE, and ENGINE POWER IS
REDUCED messages in the Driver
6. Verify coolant level after the Information Center (DIC) on the
engine is shut off and the instrument panel. See Engine
coolant is cold. If necessary, Cooling System Messages on
repeat coolant fill procedure page 539 and Engine Power
Steps 1 through 6. Messages on page 541.
Notice: If the pressure cap is not If the decision is made not to lift the
tightly installed, coolant loss and hood when this warning appears,
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with possible engine damage may get service help right away. See
the proper mixture to the FULL occur. Be sure the cap is properly Roadside Assistance Program
COLD mark. and tightly secured. (Mexico) on page 137 or Roadside
Assistance Program (U.S. and
4. With the coolant surge tank Engine Overheating Canada) on page 1311.
pressure cap off, start the
engine and let it run until the If the vehicle has the Duramax If the decision is made to lift the
engine coolant temperature Diesel engine, see the Duramax hood, make sure the vehicle is
gauge indicates approximately Diesel Supplement for more parked on a level surface.
90C (195F). information. Then check to see if the engine
By this time, the coolant level The vehicle has several indicators cooling fans are running. If the
inside the coolant surge tank to warn of engine overheating. engine is overheating, both fans
may be lower. If the level is should be running. If they are not,
There is a coolant temperature
lower, add more of the proper do not continue to run the engine
gauge on the vehicle's instrument
and have the vehicle serviced.
panel. See Engine Coolant
Temperature Gauge on page 515.
10-22 Vehicle Care
Notice: Running the engine If there is an engine overheat

without coolant may cause WARNING (Continued) warning, but no steam is seen or
damage or a fire. Vehicle damage heard, the problem may not be too
would not be covered by the If you keep driving when the serious. Sometimes the engine can
warranty. See Overheated Engine vehicles engine is overheated, get a little too hot when the vehicle:
Protection Operating Mode on the liquids in it can catch fire. You
or others could be badly burned.
. Climbs a long hill on a hot day
page 1023 for information on
driving to a safe place in an Stop the engine if it overheats, . Stops after high-speed driving
emergency. and get out of the vehicle until the . Idles for long periods in traffic
engine is cool.
If Steam is Coming from the . Tows a trailer; see Trailer Towing
Engine Compartment See Overheated Engine on page 977.
Protection Operating Mode on
page 1023 for information on If the ENGINE OVERHEATED
{ WARNING driving to a safe place in an STOP ENGINE or the ENGINE
emergency. OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE
Steam from an overheated engine message appears with no sign of
can burn you badly, even if you steam, try this for a minute or so:
just open the hood. Stay away If No Steam is Coming from 1. Turn the air conditioning off.
from the engine if you see or hear the Engine Compartment
steam coming from it. Turn it off 2. Turn the heater on to the highest
and get everyone away from the The ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP temperature and to the highest
ENGINE or the ENGINE fan speed. Open the windows as
vehicle until it cools down. Wait
OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE necessary.
until there is no sign of steam or
message, along with a low coolant
coolant before you open condition, can indicate a serious
the hood. problem.
(Continued)
Vehicle Care 10-23
3. If stopped in a traffic jam, apply Overheated Engine Engine Fan

the brake, shift to N (Neutral);
otherwise, shift to the highest
Protection If the vehicle has a clutched engine
gear while driving D (Drive) or Operating Mode cooling fan, when the clutch is
3 (Third). engaged, the fan spins faster to
If an overheated engine condition provide more air to cool the engine.
If the temperature overheat gauge is exists and the ENGINE POWER IS In most everyday driving conditions,
no longer in the overheat zone or an REDUCED message displays, an the fan is spinning slower and the
overheat warning no longer overheat protection mode which clutch is not fully engaged. This
displays, the vehicle can be driven. alternates firing groups of cylinders improves fuel economy and reduces
Continue to drive the vehicle slowly helps to prevent engine damage. In fan noise. Under heavy vehicle
for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe this mode, a loss in power and loading, trailer towing, and/or high
vehicle distance from the vehicle in engine performance will be noticed. outside temperatures, the fan speed
front. If the warning does not come This operating mode allows the increases as the clutch more fully
back on, continue to drive normally. vehicle to be driven to a safe place engages, so an increase in fan
in an emergency. Driving noise may be heard. This is normal
If the warning continues, pull over,
extended km (mi) and/or towing a and should not be mistaken as the
stop, and park the vehicle
trailer in the overheat protection transmission slipping or making
right away.
mode should be avoided. extra shifts. It is merely the cooling
If there is no sign of steam, idle the system functioning properly. The fan
Notice: After driving in the
engine for five minutes while will slow down when additional
overheated engine protection
parked. If the warning is still
operating mode, to avoid engine cooling is not required and the
displayed, turn off the engine until it
damage, allow the engine to cool clutch disengages.
cools down. Also, see Overheated
before attempting any repair. The This fan noise may also be heard
Engine Protection Operating Mode
engine oil will be severely when starting the engine. It will go
later in this section.
degraded. Repair the cause of away as the fan clutch partially
coolant loss, change the oil and disengages.
reset the oil life system. See
Engine Oil on page 106.
10-24 Vehicle Care
If the vehicle has electric cooling When to Check Power Steering The level should be at the FULL
fans, the fans may be heard Fluid COLD mark. If necessary, add only
spinning at low speed during most enough fluid to bring the level up to
everyday driving. The fans may turn It is not necessary to regularly the mark.
off if no cooling is required. Under check power steering fluid unless
heavy vehicle loading, trailer towing, there is a leak suspected in the What to Use
high outside temperatures, system or an unusual noise is
To determine what kind of fluid to
or operation of the air conditioning heard. A fluid loss in this system
use, see Recommended Fluids and
system, the fans may change to could indicate a problem. Have the
Lubricants on page 1112. Always
high speed and an increase in fan system inspected and repaired.
use the proper fluid.
noise may be heard. This is normal How to Check Power Steering Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid
and indicates that the cooling Fluid may damage the vehicle and the
system is functioning properly. The
To check the power steering fluid: damages may not be covered by
fans will change to low speed when
the vehicle's warranty. Always
additional cooling is no longer 1. Turn the key off and let the use the correct fluid listed in
required. engine compartment cool down. Recommended Fluids and
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the Lubricants on page 1112.
Power Steering Fluid reservoir clean.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the Washer Fluid
dipstick with a clean rag. What to Use
4. Replace the cap and completely When windshield washer fluid needs
tighten it. to be added, be sure to read the
5. Remove the cap again and look manufacturer's instructions before
at the fluid level on the dipstick. use. Use a fluid that has sufficient
See Engine Compartment Overview protection against freezing in an
on page 105 for reservoir location. area where the temperature may fall
below freezing.
Vehicle Care 10-25
Adding Washer Fluid Notice Brakes

The vehicle has a low washer fluid . When using concentrated This vehicle has front disc brakes
message on the DIC that comes on washer fluid, follow the and could have rear drum brakes or
when the washer fluid is low. The manufacturer instructions for rear disc brakes.
message is displayed for adding water.
15 seconds at the start of each Disc brake pads have built-in wear
. Do not mix water with indicators that make a high-pitched
ignition cycle. When the WASHER ready-to-use washer fluid.
FLUID LOW ADD FLUID message warning sound when the brake pads
Water can cause the solution are worn and new pads are needed.
displays, washer fluid will need to to freeze and damage the
be added to the windshield washer The sound can come and go or be
washer fluid tank and other heard all the time the vehicle is
fluid reservoir. parts of the washer system. moving, except when applying the
. Fill the washer fluid tank only brake pedal firmly.
three-quarters full when it is
very cold. This allows for
fluid expansion if freezing
{ WARNING
occurs, which could damage The brake wear warning sound
the tank if it is means that soon the brakes will
completely full. not work well. That could lead to
Open the cap with the washer
. Do not use engine coolant a crash. When the brake wear
symbol on it. Add washer fluid until
the tank is full. See Engine (antifreeze) in the windshield warning sound is heard, have the
Compartment Overview on washer. It can damage the vehicle serviced.
page 105 for reservoir location. windshield washer system
and paint. Notice: Continuing to drive with
worn-out brake pads could result
in costly brake repair.
10-26 Vehicle Care
Some driving conditions or climates Brake linings should always be installing disc brake pads that are
can cause a brake squeal when the replaced as complete axle sets. wrong for the vehicle, can change
brakes are first applied or lightly the balance between the front and
applied. This does not mean Brake Pedal Travel rear brakes for the worse. The
something is wrong with the brakes. See your dealer if the brake pedal braking performance expected can
Properly torqued wheel nuts are does not return to normal height, change in many other ways if the
necessary to help prevent brake or if there is a rapid increase in wrong replacement brake parts are
pulsation. When tires are rotated, pedal travel. This could be a sign installed.
inspect brake pads for wear and that brake service might be
evenly tighten wheel nuts in the required. Brake Fluid
proper sequence to torque Brake Adjustment
specifications in Capacities and
Specifications on page 122. Every time the brakes are applied,
with or without the vehicle moving,
If the vehicle has rear drum brakes, the brakes adjust for wear.
they do not have wear indicators,
but if a rear brake rubbing noise is Replacing Brake System Parts
heard, have the rear brake linings The braking system on a vehicle is
inspected immediately. Rear brake The brake master cylinder reservoir
complex. Its many parts have to be is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid. See
drums should be removed and of top quality and work well together
inspected each time the tires are Engine Compartment Overview on
if the vehicle is to have really good page 105 for the location of the
removed for rotation or changing. braking. The vehicle was designed
Drum brakes have an inspection reservoir.
and tested with top-quality brake
hole to inspect lining wear during parts. When parts of the braking
scheduled maintenance. When the system are replaced, be sure to get
front brake pads are replaced, have new, approved replacement parts.
the rear brakes inspected, too. If this is not done, the brakes might
not work properly. For example,
Vehicle Care 10-27
There are only two reasons why the

brake fluid level in the reservoir { WARNING
might go down:
If too much brake fluid is added, it
. The brake fluid level goes down can spill on the engine and burn,
because of normal brake lining if the engine is hot enough. You
wear. When new linings are or others could be burned, and
installed, the fluid level goes the vehicle could be damaged.
back up. Add brake fluid only when work is
. A fluid leak in the brake done on the brake hydraulic
hydraulic system can also cause system. See Checking Brake
a low fluid level. Have the brake Fluid in this section.
hydraulic system fixed, since a
leak means that sooner or later The fluid level should be above
the brakes will not work well. When the brake fluid falls to a low MIN. If it is not, have the brake
level, the brake warning light comes hydraulic system checked to see if
Do not top off the brake fluid. on. See Brake System Warning there is a leak.
Adding fluid does not correct a leak. Light on page 524.
If fluid is added when the linings are After work is done on the brake
worn, there will be too much fluid Refer to the Maintenance Schedule hydraulic system, make sure the
when new brake linings are to determine when to check the level is above the MIN but not over
installed. Add or remove brake fluid, brake fluid. See Maintenance the MAX mark.
as necessary, only when work is Schedule on page 113.
What to Add
done on the brake hydraulic system. Checking Brake Fluid Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid
Check brake fluid by looking at the from a sealed container. See
brake fluid reservoir. See Engine Recommended Fluids and
Compartment Overview on Lubricants on page 1112.
page 105.
10-28 Vehicle Care
Always clean the brake fluid

. If brake fluid is spilled on the
reservoir cap and the area around vehicle's painted surfaces, WARNING (Continued)
the cap before removing it. This the paint finish can be
helps keep dirt from entering the damaged. Be careful not to known to the State of California to
reservoir. spill brake fluid on the cause cancer and reproductive
vehicle. If you do, wash it off harm. Wash hands after handling.
immediately.
{ WARNING
Vehicle Storage
With the wrong kind of fluid in the Battery
brake hydraulic system, the
brakes might not work well. This
If the vehicle is a Hybrid, see the
Hybrid Supplement for more
{ WARNING
could cause a crash. Always use information. Batteries have acid that can burn
the proper brake fluid. you and gas that can explode.
This vehicle has a maintenance free
battery (or batteries). Refer to the You can be badly hurt if you are
Notice replacement number on the original not careful. See Jump Starting on
battery label when a new battery is page 1084 for tips on working
. Using the wrong fluid can around a battery without
badly damage brake needed. See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 105 for battery getting hurt.
hydraulic system parts. For
example, just a few drops of location.
mineral-based oil, such as Infrequent Usage: Remove the
engine oil, in the brake { WARNING black, negative () cable from the
hydraulic system can battery to keep the battery from
damage brake hydraulic Battery posts, terminals, and running down.
system parts so badly that related accessories contain lead
and lead compounds, chemicals Extended Storage: Remove the
they will have to be replaced. black, negative () cable from the
Do not let someone put in (Continued) battery or use a battery trickle
the wrong kind of fluid. charger.
Vehicle Care 10-29
Four-Wheel Drive
Transfer Case
When to Check Lubricant
Refer to Maintenance Schedule on
page 113 to determine when to
check the lubricant.
How to Check Lubricant
Manual Shift Transfer Case Active Transfer Case

A. Fill Plug A. Fill Plug
B. Drain Plug B. Drain Plug
To get an accurate reading, the
vehicle should be on a level
surface.
If the level is below the bottom of
the fill plug (A) hole, located on the
Electric Shift Transfer Case transfer case, some lubricant will
need to be added. Add enough
A. Fill Plug lubricant to raise the level to the
B. Drain Plug bottom of the fill plug (A) hole. Use
care not to overtighten the plug.
10-30 Vehicle Care
When to Change Lubricant How to Check Lubricant

Refer to Maintenance Schedule on To get an accurate reading, the
page 113 to determine how often to vehicle should be on a level
change the lubricant. surface.
What to Use
Refer to Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 1112 to
determine what kind of lubricant
to use.
Front Axle
All Except 1500 Series
When to Check and Change
Lubricant A. Fill Plug
It is not necessary to regularly B. Drain Plug
check front axle fluid unless a leak . When the differential is cold, add
1500 Series
is suspected, or an unusual noise is enough lubricant to raise the
heard. A fluid loss could indicate a A. Fill Plug level from 0 mm (0 in) to 3.2 mm
problem. Have it inspected and B. Drain Plug (1/8 in) below the fill
repaired. plug (A) hole.
. When the differential is at
operating temperature (warm),
add enough lubricant to raise the
level to the bottom of the fill
plug (A) hole.
Vehicle Care 10-31
What to Use out along the axle tubes and has

Refer to Recommended Fluids and not drained back to the sump area.
Lubricants on page 1112 to Therefore, a reading taken
determine what kind of lubricant five minutes after the vehicle has
to use. been driven will appear to have a
lower fluid level than a vehicle that
has been stationary for an hour or
Rear Axle two. Remember that the rear axle
When to Check Lubricant assembly must be supported to get
a true reading.
It is not necessary to regularly
check rear axle fluid unless a leak is How to Check Lubricant
suspected or an unusual noise is
heard. A fluid loss could indicate a All Other Series and Engines
problem. Have it inspected and To get an accurate reading, the
repaired. vehicle should be on a level
All axle assemblies are filled by surface.
volume of fluid during production. . For all 4.3 L, 4.8 L and 5.3 L
They are not filled to reach a certain 1500 Series applications, the
level. When checking the fluid level proper level is 1.0 mm to
on any axle, variations in the 19.0 mm (0.04 in to 0.7 in)
readings can be caused by factory below the bottom of the fill hole,
fill differences between the minimum located on the rear axle. Add
and the maximum fluid volume. only enough fluid to reach the
Also, if a vehicle has just been 2500HD with 6.0 L proper level.
driven before checking the fluid . For all 6.0 L and 6.2 L 1500
level, it may appear lower than
Series applications, the proper
normal because fluid has traveled
level is from 15 mm to 40 mm
10-32 Vehicle Care
(0.6 in to 1.6 in) below the Noise Control System 2. The use of the vehicle after such
bottom of the fill plug hole, device or element of design has
located on the rear axle. Add The following information relates to been removed or rendered
only enough fluid to reach the compliance with federal noise inoperative by any person.
proper level. emission standards for vehicles with
a Gross Vehicle Weight Rating Among those acts presumed to
. For all 6.0 L 2500HD Series (GVWR) of more than 4 536 kg constitute tampering are the acts
applications, the proper level is (10,000 lbs). The noise control listed below.
from 0 mm to 13 mm (0 to 0.5 in) system warranty is given in your
below the bottom of the fill plug Insulation:
warranty booklet.
hole, located on the rear axle. Removal of the noise shields or any
Add only enough fluid to reach These standards apply only to underhood insulation.
the proper level. vehicles sold in the United States.
Engine:
. For all 6.6 L Duramax Diesel Federal law prohibits the following
acts or the causing thereof: Removal or rendering engine speed
2500HD Series applications and
governor, if the vehicle has one,
all 3500 Series applications, the 1. The removal or rendering inoperative so as to allow engine
proper level is from 17 mm to inoperative by any person, other speed to exceed manufacturer
21 mm (0.6 in to 0.8 in) below the than for purposes of specifications.
bottom of the fill plug hole, maintenance, repair or
located on the rear axle. Add replacement, of any device or Fan and Drive:
only enough fluid to reach the element of design incorporated . Removal of fan clutch, if the
proper level. into any new vehicle for the vehicle has one, or rendering
purpose of noise control, prior to clutch inoperative.
What to Use
its sale or delivery to the ultimate
Refer to Recommended Fluids and purchaser or while it is in use; or . Removal of the fan shroud, if the
Lubricants on page 1112 to vehicle has one.
determine what kind of lubricant
to use.
Vehicle Care 10-33
Air Intake: 2. Firmly apply both the parking Automatic Transmission

brake and the regular brake.
. Removal of the air cleaner
See Parking Brake on
Shift Lock Control
silencer. Function Check
page 954.
. Modification of the air cleaner.
Do not use the accelerator
Exhaust: pedal, and be ready to turn off { WARNING
. Removal of the muffler and/or the engine immediately if it
starts. When you are doing this
resonator. inspection, the vehicle could
. Removal of the exhaust pipes 3. For automatic transmission move suddenly. If the vehicle
and exhaust pipe clamps. vehicles, try to start the engine moves, you or others could be
in each gear. The vehicle should injured.
start only in P (Park) or
Starter Switch Check N (Neutral). If the vehicle starts
in any other position, contact 1. Before starting this check, be
{ WARNING your dealer for service. sure there is enough room
around the vehicle. It should be
When you are doing this For manual transmission
parked on a level surface.
inspection, the vehicle could vehicles, put the shift lever in
Neutral, push the clutch pedal 2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
move suddenly. If the vehicle
down halfway, and try to start See Parking Brake on
moves, you or others could be page 954.
the engine. The vehicle should
injured.
start only when the clutch pedal Be ready to apply the regular
is pushed down all the way to brake immediately if the vehicle
1. Before starting this check, be the floor. If the vehicle starts begins to move.
sure there is enough room when the clutch pedal is not
around the vehicle. pushed all the way down,
contact your dealer for service.
10-34 Vehicle Care
3. With the engine off, turn the On all vehicles, the ignition key Park on a fairly steep hill, with the
ignition on, but do not start the should come out only in LOCK/OFF. vehicle facing downhill. Keeping
engine. Without applying the Contact your dealer if service is your foot on the regular brake, set
regular brake, try to move the required. the parking brake.
shift lever out of P (Park) with . To check the parking brake's
normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of P (Park), contact Park Brake and P (Park) holding ability: With the engine
running and the transmission in
your dealer for service. Mechanism Check N (Neutral), slowly remove foot
pressure from the regular brake
Ignition Transmission { WARNING pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
Lock Check held by the parking brake only.
When you are doing this check,
While parked, and with the parking the vehicle could begin to move.
. To check the P (Park)
brake set, try to turn the ignition to You or others could be injured mechanism's holding ability:
LOCK/OFF in each shift lever and property could be damaged. With the engine running, shift to
position. Make sure there is room in front P (Park). Then release the
parking brake followed by the
. For automatic transmission of the vehicle in case it begins to
regular brake.
vehicles, the ignition should turn roll. Be ready to apply the regular
to LOCK/OFF only when the brake at once should the vehicle Contact your dealer if service is
shift lever is in P (Park). begin to move. required.
. For manual transmission
vehicles, the ignition should turn
to LOCK/OFF only when you
press the key release button.
Vehicle Care 10-35
Wiper Blade Replacement Headlamp Aiming

Windshield wiper blades should be Headlamp aim has been preset and
inspected for wear or cracking. See should need no further adjustment.
Maintenance Schedule on
page 113. If the vehicle is damaged in a crash,
the headlamp aim may be affected.
Replacement blades come in If adjustment to the headlamps is
3. Install the new blade onto the
different types and are removed in necessary, see your dealer.
arm connector and make sure
different ways. To remove the wiper
the grooved areas are fully set in
blade:
the locked position.
1. Pull the windshield wiper arm
For the proper type and size, see
connector away from the
Maintenance Replacement Parts on
windshield.
page 1115.
Glass Replacement
If the windshield or front side glass
must be replaced, see your dealer
to determine the correct
replacement glass.
2. Squeeze the grooved areas on
each side of the blade, and turn
the blade assembly away from
the arm connector.
10-36 Vehicle Care
Bulb Replacement Headlamps, Front Turn 2. If you are replacing the bulb on
the passenger side, remove the
For the proper type of replacement Signal, Sidemarker, and Engine Air Cleaner cover. See
bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs on Parking Lamps Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on
page 1039. page 1016 for more information.
For any bulbchanging procedure 3. Reach in and access the bulb
not listed in this section, contact sockets from inside the engine
your dealer. compartment.
4. Turn the bulb socket
Halogen Bulbs counterclockwise to remove it
from the headlamp assembly
{ WARNING and pull it straight out.
Halogen bulbs have pressurized 5. Unplug the electrical connector

gas inside and can burst if you from the old bulb by releasing
the clips on the bulb socket.
drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure 6. Replace it with a new bulb.
A. Park/Turn Signal/
to read and follow the instructions Sidemarker Lamp 7. Plug in the electrical connector.
on the bulb package.
B. LowBeam Headlamp 8. Reinstall the new bulb socket
into the headlamp assembly and
C. HighBeam Headlamp turn it clockwise to secure.
1. Open the hood. See Hood on
page 104
Vehicle Care 10-37
Pick-Up Box Identification Taillamps (Chassis Cab 4. Install a new bulb into the
socket, turn it clockwise, and
and Fender Marker Models) press it in until it is tight.
Lamps 5. Reinstall the lens and the four
The pick-up box identification lamps screws.
are LEDs. For replacement of the
LED lighting assembly contact your Taillamps, Turn Signal,
dealer.
Stoplamps, and Back-Up
To replace a pickup box fender Lamps
marker lamp bulb:
1. Press the tab from the back to
remove the lamp.
2. Turn the bulb socket
counterclockwise to remove from
the lamp assembly. A. Backup Lamp
3. Gently pry the bulb from the B. Stoplamp/Taillamp/Turn
socket. Signal Lamp
4. Install the new bulb in socket. To replace one of these bulbs:
5. Reinstall socket into lamp 1. Remove the four screws.
assembly.
2. Lift the lens off the lamp
6. Reinstall the lamp assembly. assembly. A. Stoplamp/Taillamp/Turn
Signal Lamp
3. Turn the old bulb
counterclockwise and pull it B. Back-up Lamp
straight out from the socket.
10-38 Vehicle Care
To replace one of these bulbs: 4. Pull the old bulb straight out To replace one of these bulbs:
1. Open the tailgate. See Tailgate from the socket.
on page 29 for more 5. Press a new bulb into the socket
information. and turn the socket clockwise
into the taillamp assembly.
6. Reinstall the taillamp assembly.
Center High-Mounted
1. Remove the two screws and lift
Stoplamp (CHMSL) and off the lamp assembly.
Cargo Lamp 2. On the reverse side of the lamp
assembly, remove the bulb
socket by turning it one quarter
turn counterclockwise and pull it
straight out.
3. Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out of the socket.
2. Remove the two rear lamp
assembly screws near the A. Cargo Lamp 4. Install the bulb by pushing the
tailgate latch strikerpost and pull bulb straight into the socket.
rearward until disengaging the B. Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
(CHMSL) Bulb 5. Install the bulb socket into the
two outer pins on the taillamp lamp assembly by turning it
assembly from the vehicle. one quarter turn clockwise.
3. Turn the bulb socket 6. Reinstall the lamp assembly and
counterclockwise to remove it tighten the screws.
from the taillamp assembly.
Vehicle Care 10-39
License Plate Lamp 3. Turn the bulb socket (C) one Exterior Lamp Bulb
quarter turn to release the bulb Number
socket from the lamp
housing (A). High-Beam 9005
Headlamp
4. Pull the bulb (B) from the bulb
socket (C). Low-Beam H11
Headlamp
5. Reverse the steps to install.
License 168
Replacement Bulbs Plate Lamp
Exterior Lamp Bulb Stoplamp/Taillamp/ 3047K
A. License Plate Lamp Housing Number Turn Signal Lamp
B. Bulb Back-up Lamp 3047K Stoplamp/Turn 1157
C. Bulb Socket Signal Lamp/
Back-up Lamp* 1156
Taillamp*
To replace one of these bulbs: Cargo Lamp and 912LL
* Chassis Cab Models
1. Using a small flat-bladed tool, Center
insert the blade end at the back High-Mounted
For replacement bulbs not listed
edge of the rear license plate Stoplamp
here, contact your dealer.
lamp housing (A). (CHMSL)
2. Gently push forward while lifting Fender Marker W5WLL
the back edge of the lamp Lamp (If Equipped)
housing from the bumper
Front Turn Signal 3157A
opening.
Lamp and
Parking Lamp
10-40 Vehicle Care
Electrical System Headlamp Wiring Fuses and Circuit

An electrical overload may cause Breakers
Electrical System the lamps to go on and off, or in
Overload some cases to remain off. Have the
headlamp wiring checked right away
The vehicle has fuses and circuit information.
if the lamps go on and off or
breakers to protect against an remain off. The wiring circuits in the vehicle are
electrical system overload. protected from short circuits by a
Windshield Wipers combination of fuses, circuit
When the current electrical load is
too heavy, the circuit breaker opens If the wiper motor overheats due to breakers and fusible thermal links.
and closes, protecting the circuit heavy snow or ice, the windshield This greatly reduces the chance of
until the current load returns to wipers will stop until the motor cools fires caused by electrical problems.
normal or the problem is fixed. This and will then restart. Look at the silver-colored band
greatly reduces the chance of circuit Although the circuit is protected inside the fuse. If the band is broken
overload and fire caused by from electrical overload, overload or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure
electrical problems. due to heavy snow or ice may you replace a bad fuse with a new
Fuses and circuit breakers protect cause wiper linkage damage. one of the identical size and rating.
power devices in the vehicle. Always clear ice and heavy snow If you ever have a problem on the
from the windshield before using the road and don't have a spare fuse,
Replace a bad fuse with a new one windshield wipers.
of the identical size and rating. you can borrow one that has the
If the overload is caused by an same amperage. Just pick some
If there is a problem on the road and electrical problem and not snow or feature of your vehicle that you can
a fuse needs to be replaced, the ice, be sure to get it fixed. get along without like the radio or
same amperage fuse can be accessory power outlet and use its
borrowed. Choose some feature of fuse, if it is the correct amperage.
the vehicle that is not needed to use Replace it as soon as you can.
and replace it as soon as possible.
Vehicle Care 10-41
Engine Compartment Lift the cover to access the fuse

block.
Fuse Block
Notice: Spilling liquid on any
If the vehicle has a diesel engine, electrical component on the
see the Duramax Diesel supplement vehicle may damage it. Always
for more information. keep the covers on any electrical
If the vehicle is a hybrid, see the component.
hybrid supplement for more To remove fuses, hold the end of
information. the fuse between your thumb and
The Engine Compartment Fuse index finger and pull straight out.
Block is located in the engine
compartment, on the driver side of
the vehicle.
10-42 Vehicle Care
Fuses Usage
6 Trailer Brake
Controller
7 Front Washer
8 Oxygen Sensor
9 Antilock Brakes
System 2
10 Trailer Back-up
Lamps
11 Driver Side
Low-Beam
Headlamp
12 Engine Control
Module (Battery)
13 Fuel Injectors,
Fuses Usage Fuses Usage Ignition Coils
1 Right Trailer Stop/ 3 Left Trailer Stop/ (Right Side)
Turn Lamp Turn Lamp 14 Transmission
2 Electronic 4 Engine Controls Control Module
Suspension (Battery)
5 Engine Control
Control, Automatic Module, Throttle 15 Vehicle Back-up
Level Control Control Lamps
Exhaust
Vehicle Care 10-43
Fuses Usage Fuses Usage Fuses Usage

16 Passenger Side 28 Fog Lamps 39 Climate Controls
Low-Beam (Battery)
29 Horn
Headlamp
40 Airbag System
30 Passenger Side
17 Air Conditioning (Ignition)
High-Beam
Compressor
Headlamp 41 Amplifier
18 Oxygen Sensors
31 Daytime Running 42 Audio System
19 Transmission Lamps (DRL)
43 Miscellaneous
Controls (Ignition)
32 Driver Side (Ignition), Cruise
20 Fuel Pump High-Beam Control
Headlamp
21 Fuel System 44 Not Used
Control Module 33 Daytime Running
45 Airbag System
Lamps 2
22 Not Used (Battery)
34 Sunroof
23 Not Used 46 Instrument Panel
35 Key Ignition Cluster
24 Fuel Injectors,
System, Theft
Ignition Coils 47 Power Take-Off
Deterrent System
(Left Side)
48 Auxiliary Climate
36 Windshield Wiper
25 Trailer Park Lamps Control (Ignition)
37 SEO B2 Upfitter
26 Driver Side Park 49 Center
Usage (Battery)
Lamps High-Mounted
38 Electric Adjustable Stoplamp (CHMSL)
27 Passenger Side
Pedals
Park Lamps 50 Rear Defogger
10-44 Vehicle Care
Fuses Usage J-Case Usage J-Case Usage

Fuses Fuses
51 Heated Mirrors
61 Antilock Brake 72 Left Bussed
52 SEO B1 Upfitter
System 1 Electrical Center 2
Usage (Battery)
62 Starter
53 Accessory Power Relays Usage
Outlet 63 Stud 2 (Trailer
Brakes) FAN HI Cooling Fan High
54 SEO Upfitter Speed
Usage 64 Left Bussed
Electrical Center 1 FAN LO Cooling Fan Low
55 Climate Controls Speed
(Ignition) 65 Not Used
FAN CNTRL Cooling Fan
56 Engine Control 66 Not Used Control
Module, Secondary
67 Transfer Case HDLP Low-Beam
Fuel Pump
(Ignition) 68 Stud 1 (Trailer LO/HID Headlamp
Connector Battery FOG LAMP Front Fog Lamps
J-Case Usage Power) (Optional -
40A Fuse A/C Air Conditioning
Fuses
Required) CMPRSR Compressor
57 Cooling Fan 1
69 Mid-Bussed STRTR Starter
58 Not Used Electrical Center 1 PWR/TRN Powertrain
59 Heavy Duty 70 Climate Control FUEL PMP Fuel Pump
Antilock Brake Blower
System PRK LAMP Parking Lamps
71 Not Used
60 Cooling Fan 2
Vehicle Care 10-45
Relays Usage
REAR Rear Defogger
DEFOG
RUN/CRNK Switched Power
Instrument Panel Fuse

Block
The vehicle may not be equipped Fuses Usage

with all of the fuses, relays, and
features shown. 3 Steering Wheel
Controls Backlight
Fuses Usage
The instrument panel fuse block 4 Driver Door Module
access door is located on the driver 1 Rear Seats
side edge of the instrument panel. 5 Dome Lamps, Driver
2 Rear Accessory
Side Turn Signal
Pull off the cover to access the fuse Power Outlet
block.
10-46 Vehicle Care
Fuses Usage Fuses Usage Circuit

Usage
Breaker
6 Driver Side Turn 17 Interior Lamps
Signal, Stoplamp LT DR Driver Side Power
18 Power Door Lock 1
Window Circuit
7 Instrument Panel (Unlock Feature)
Breaker
Back Lighting
19 Rear Seat
8 Passenger Side Turn Entertainment Harness
Signal, Stoplamp Connector Usage
20 Ultrasonic Rear
9 Passenger Door Parking Assist, Power Driver Door
Module, Driver Unlock Liftgate LT DR Harness
10 Power Door Lock 2 21 Power Door Lock 1 Connection
(Unlock Feature) (Lock Feature) BODY Harness Connector
11 Power Door Lock 2 22 Driver Information BODY Harness Connector
(Lock Feature) Center (DIC)
12 Stoplamps, Center 23 Rear Wiper Center Instrument Panel Fuse
HighMounted Block
24 Cooled Seats
Stoplamp
25 Driver Seat Module, The center instrument panel fuse
13 Rear Climate Controls block is located underneath the
Remote Keyless Entry
14 Power Mirror System instrument panel, to the left of the
steering column.
15 Body Control 26 Driver Power Door
Module (BCM) Lock (Unlock Feature)
16 Accessory Power
Outlets
Vehicle Care 10-47
Top View Harness Wheels and Tires

Connector Usage
HEADLINER 2 Headliner Tires
Harness Every new GM vehicle has
Connector 2 high-quality tires made by a
HEADLINER 1 Headliner leading tire manufacturer. See
Harness the warranty manual for
Connector 1 information regarding the tire
SEO/UPFITTER Special warranty and where to get
Equipment service. For additional
Option Upfitter information refer to the tire
Harness manufacturer.
Connector
Harness { WARNING
Circuit
Connector Usage . Poorly maintained and
Breaker Usage
BODY 2 Body Harness
CB1 Passenger Side improperly used tires are
Connector 2 dangerous.
Power Window Circuit
BODY 1 Body Harness Breaker . Overloading the tires can
Connector 1 cause overheating as a
CB2 Passenger Seat
BODY 3 Body Harness Circuit Breaker result of too much flexing.
Connector 3
CB3 Driver Seat Circuit There could be a blowout
HEADLINER 3 Headliner Breaker (Continued)
Harness
CB4 Rear Sliding Window
Connector 3
10-48 Vehicle Care
See Tire Pressure for

WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued) High-Speed Operation on
and a serious crash. See . Worn or old tires can page 1058 for inflation pressure
Vehicle Load Limits on cause a crash. If the tread adjustment for high speed
page 915. is badly worn, driving.
. Underinflated tires pose replace them. 20Inch Tires
the same danger as . Replace any tires that If the vehicle has 20inch P275/
overloaded tires. The have been damaged by 55R20 size tires, they are
resulting crash could impacts with potholes, classified as touring tires and
cause serious injury. curbs, etc. are designed for on road use.
Check all tires frequently . Improperly repaired tires The lowprofile, wide tread
to maintain the can cause a crash. Only design is not recommended for
recommended pressure. the dealer or an offroad driving or commercial
Tire pressure should be authorized tire service uses such as snow plowing. See
checked when the tires center should repair, Off-Road Driving on page 95
are cold. replace, dismount, and and Adding a Snow Plow or
. Overinflated tires are more mount the tires. Similar Equipment on
likely to be cut, punctured, page 9105 for additional
. Do not spin the tires in information.
or broken by a sudden excess of 56 km/h
impact such as when (35 mph) on slippery Notice: Lowprofile tires are
hitting a pothole. Keep surfaces such as snow, more susceptible to damage
tires at the recommended mud, ice, etc. Excessive from road hazards or curb
pressure. spinning may cause the impact than standard profile
(Continued) tires to explode. tires. Tire and/or wheel
assembly damage can occur
Vehicle Care 10-49
when coming into contact Consider installing winter tires on With winter tires, there may be
with road hazards like, the vehicle if frequent driving on decreased dry road traction,
potholes, or sharp edged snow or ice-covered roads is increased road noise, and shorter
objects, or when sliding into a expected. All-season tires provide tread life. After changing to winter
adequate performance for most tires, be alert for changes in vehicle
curb. The warranty does not
winter driving conditions, but they handling and braking.
cover this type of damage. may not offer the same level of
Keep tires set to the correct If using winter tires:
traction or performance as winter
inflation pressure and, when tires on snow or ice-covered roads. . Use tires of the same brand and
possible, avoid contact with See Winter Tires on page 1049. tread type on all four wheel
curbs, potholes, and other positions.
road hazards. Winter Tires . Use only radial ply tires of the
This vehicle was not, originally, same size, load range, and
All-Season Tires equipped with winter tires. Winter speed rating as the original
tires are designed for increased equipment tires.
This vehicle may come with
all-season tires. These tires are traction on snow and ice-covered Winter tires with the same speed
designed to provide good overall roads. Consider installing winter rating as the original equipment tires
performance on most road surfaces tires on the vehicle if frequent may not be available for H, V, W, Y,
and weather conditions. Original driving on snow or ice-covered and ZR speed rated tires. If winter
equipment tires designed to GM's roads is expected. See your dealer tires with a lower speed rating are
specific tire performance criteria for details regarding winter tire chosen, never exceed the tire's
have a TPC specification code availability and proper tire selection. maximum speed capability.
molded onto the sidewall. Original Also, see Buying New Tires on
equipment all-season tires can be page 1066.
identified by the last two characters
of this TPC code, which will
be MS.
10-50 Vehicle Care
Summer Tires criteria have a TPC specification

code molded onto the sidewall.
This vehicle may come with high
performance summer tires. These
GM's TPC specifications meet or
tires have a special tread and exceed all federal safety
compound that are optimized for guidelines.
maximum dry and wet road (C) DOT (Department of
performance. This special tread and Transportation): The
compound will decrease
Department of Transportation
performance in cold climates, and
on ice and snow. We recommend (DOT) code indicates that the
installing winter tires on the vehicle tire is in compliance with the
if frequent driving in cold U.S. Department of
temperatures or on snow or ice Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Transportation Motor Vehicle
covered roads is expected. See (A) Tire Size: The tire size Safety Standards.
Winter Tires on page 1049. code is a combination of letters DOT Tire Date of
and numbers used to define a Manufacture: The last four
Tire Sidewall Labeling particular tire's width, height, digits of the TIN indicate the tire
Useful information about a tire is aspect ratio, construction type, manufactured date. The first two
molded into the sidewall. The and service description. See the digits represent the week
examples show a typical Tire Size illustration later in this (01-52) and the last two digits,
passenger and light truck tire section for more detail. the year. For example, the third
sidewall. (B) TPC Spec (Tire week of the year 2010 would
Performance Criteria have a four-digit DOT date
Specification): Original of 0310.
equipment tires designed to
GM's specific tire performance
Vehicle Care 10-51
(D) Tire Identification Number (G) Maximum Cold Inflation aspect ratio, construction type,
(TIN): The letters and numbers Load Limit: Maximum load that and service description. See the
following the DOT code are the can be carried and the Tire Size illustration later in this
Tire Identification Number (TIN). maximum pressure needed to section for more detail.
The TIN shows the support that load. For (B) TPC Spec (Tire
manufacturer and plant code, information on recommended Performance Criteria
tire size, and date the tire was tire pressure see Tire Pressure Specification): Original
manufactured. The TIN is on page 1056 and Vehicle Load equipment tires designed to
molded onto both sides of the Limits on page 915. GM's specific tire performance
tire, although only one side may criteria have a TPC specification
have the date of manufacture. code molded onto the sidewall.
(E) Tire Ply Material : The type GM's TPC specifications meet or
of cord and number of plies in exceed all federal safety
the sidewall and under the tread. guidelines.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality (C) Dual Tire Maximum Load:
Grading (UTQG): Tire Maximum load that can be
manufacturers are required to carried and the maximum
grade tires based on three pressure needed to support that
performance factors: treadwear, load when used in a dual
traction, and temperature configuration. For information on
resistance. For more Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire recommended tire pressure see
information, see Uniform Tire (A) Tire Size: The tire size Tire Pressure on page 1056
Quality Grading on page 1068. code is a combination of letters and Vehicle Load Limits on
and numbers used to define a page 915.
particular tire's width, height,
10-52 Vehicle Care
(D) DOT (Department of manufactured. The TIN is

Transportation): The molded onto both sides of the
Department of Transportation tire, although only one side may
(DOT) code indicates that the have the date of manufacture.
tire is in compliance with the (F) Tire Ply Material : The type
U.S. Department of of cord and number of plies in
Transportation Motor Vehicle Passenger (PMetric) Tire
the sidewall and under the tread.
Safety Standards. (A) Passenger (PMetric) Tire:
(G) Single Tire Maximum The United States version of a
DOT Tire Date of Load: Maximum load that can
Manufacture: The last four metric tire sizing system. The
be carried and the maximum letter P as the first character in
digits of the TIN indicate the tire pressure needed to support that
manufactured date. The first two the tire size means a passenger
load when used as a single. For vehicle tire engineered to
digits represent the week information on recommended
(01-52) and the last two digits, standards set by the U.S. Tire
tire pressure see Tire Pressure and Rim Association.
the year. For example, the third on page 1056 and Vehicle Load
week of the year 2010 would Limits on page 915. (B) Tire Width: The threedigit
have a four-digit DOT date number indicates the tire section
of 0310. Tire Designations width in millimeters from
(E) Tire Identification Number sidewall to sidewall.
Tire Size
(TIN): The letters and numbers (C) Aspect Ratio: A twodigit
following the DOT code are the The examples show a typical number that indicates the tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN). passenger vehicle and light heighttowidth measurements.
The TIN shows the truck tire size. For example, if the tire size
manufacturer and plant code, aspect ratio is 75, as shown in
tire size, and date the tire was item C of the tire illustration, it
Vehicle Care 10-53
would mean that the tire's (LTMetric) tire illustration, it

sidewall is 75 percent as high as would mean that the tire's
it is wide. sidewall is 75 percent as high as
(D) Construction Code: A it is wide.
letter code is used to indicate (D) Construction Code: A
the type of ply construction in Light Truck (LTMetric) Tire letter code is used to indicate
the tire. The letter R means the type of ply construction in
radial ply construction; the (A) Light Truck (LTMetric) the tire. The letter R means
letter D means diagonal or bias Tire: The United States version radial ply construction; the
ply construction; and the letter B of a metric tire sizing system. letter D means diagonal or bias
means beltedbias ply The letters LT as the first two ply construction; and the letter B
construction. characters in the tire size mean means beltedbias ply
a light truck tire engineered to construction.
(E) Rim Diameter : Diameter of standards set by the U.S. Tire
the wheel in inches. and Rim Association. (E) Rim Diameter : Diameter of
(F) Service Description: These the wheel in inches.
(B) Tire Width: The threedigit
characters represent the load number indicates the tire section (F) Load Range: Load Range.
index and speed rating of the width in millimeters from (G) Service Description: The
tire. The load index represents sidewall to sidewall. service description indicates the
the load carrying capacity a tire load index and speed rating of a
is certified to carry. The speed (C) Aspect Ratio: A twodigit
number that indicates the tire tire. If two numbers are given as
rating is the maximum speed a in the example, 120/116, then
tire is certified to carry a load. heighttowidth measurements.
For example, if the tire size this represents the load index for
aspect ratio is 75, as shown in single versus dual wheel usage
item C of the light truck
10-54 Vehicle Care
(single/dual). The speed rating is Belt: A rubber coated layer of maximum capacity of fuel, oil,
the maximum speed a tire is cords between the plies and the and coolant, but without
certified to carry a load. tread. Cords may be made from passengers and cargo.
steel or other reinforcing DOT Markings: A code molded
Tire Terminology and materials. into the sidewall of a tire
Definitions Bead: The tire bead contains signifying that the tire is in
Air Pressure: The amount of steel wires wrapped by steel compliance with the U.S.
air inside the tire pressing cords that hold the tire onto Department of Transportation
outward on each square inch of the rim. (DOT) Motor Vehicle Safety
the tire. Air pressure is Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire Standards. The DOT code
expressed in kPa (kilopascal) in which the plies are laid at includes the Tire Identification
or psi (pounds per square inch). alternate angles less than Number (TIN), an alphanumeric
90 degrees to the centerline of designator which can also
Accessory Weight: The identify the tire manufacturer,
combined weight of optional the tread.
production plant, brand, and
accessories. Some examples of Cold Tire Pressure: The date of production.
optional accessories are amount of air pressure in a tire,
automatic transmission, power measured in kPa (kilopascal) GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight
steering, power brakes, power or psi (pounds per square inch) Rating. See Vehicle Load Limits
windows, power seats, and air before a tire has built up heat on page 915.
conditioning. from driving. See Tire Pressure GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight
Aspect Ratio: The relationship on page 1056. Rating for the front axle. See
of a tire's height to its width. Curb Weight: The weight of a Vehicle Load Limits on
motor vehicle with standard and page 915.
optional equipment including the
Vehicle Care 10-55
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Maximum Load Rating: The model name molding that is
Rating for the rear axle. See load rating for a tire at the higher or deeper than the same
Vehicle Load Limits on maximum permissible inflation moldings on the other sidewall
page 915. pressure for that tire. of the tire.
Intended Outboard Sidewall : Maximum Loaded Vehicle Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A
The side of an asymmetrical tire, Weight: The sum of curb tire used on passenger cars and
that must always face outward weight, accessory weight, some light duty trucks and
when mounted on a vehicle. vehicle capacity weight, and multipurpose vehicles.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric production options weight. Recommended Inflation
unit for air pressure. Normal Occupant Weight: The Pressure: Vehicle
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A number of occupants a vehicle manufacturer's recommended
tire used on light duty trucks and is designed to seat multiplied by tire inflation pressure as shown
some multipurpose passenger 68 kg (150 lbs). See Vehicle on the tire placard. See Tire
vehicles. Load Limits on page 915. Pressure on page 1056 and
Occupant Distribution : Vehicle Load Limits on
Load Index: An assigned page 915.
number ranging from 1 to 279 Designated seating positions.
that corresponds to the load Outward Facing Sidewall: The Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic
carrying capacity of a tire. side of an asymmetrical tire that tire in which the ply cords that
has a particular side that faces extend to the beads are laid at
Maximum Inflation Pressure: 90 degrees to the centerline of
The maximum air pressure to outward when mounted on a
vehicle. The side of the tire that the tread.
which a cold tire can be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is contains a whitewall, bears Rim: A metal support for a tire
molded onto the sidewall. white lettering, or bears and upon which the tire beads
manufacturer, brand, and/or are seated.
10-56 Vehicle Care
Sidewall: The portion of a tire tire's traction, temperature, and recommended inflation pressure.
between the tread and the bead. treadwear. Ratings are See Tire and Loading
Speed Rating: An determined by tire Information Label under Vehicle
alphanumeric code assigned to manufacturers using Load Limits on page 915.
a tire indicating the maximum government testing procedures.
speed at which a tire can The ratings are molded into the Tire Pressure
operate. sidewall of the tire. See Uniform Tires need the correct amount of
Tire Quality Grading on air pressure to operate
Traction: The friction between page 1068.
the tire and the road surface. effectively.
The amount of grip provided. Vehicle Capacity Weight: The Notice: Neither tire
number of designated seating underinflation nor
Tread: The portion of a tire that positions multiplied by
comes into contact with overinflation is good.
68 kg (150 lbs) plus the rated Underinflated tires, or tires
the road. cargo load. See Vehicle Load that do not have enough air,
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow Limits on page 915. can result in:
bands, sometimes called wear Vehicle Maximum Load on the
bars, that show across the tread
. Tire overloading and
Tire: Load on an individual tire overheating which could
of a tire when only 1.6 mm due to curb weight, accessory
(1/16 in) of tread remains. See lead to a blowout.
weight, occupant weight, and
When It Is Time for New Tires cargo weight. . Premature or
on page 1065. irregular wear.
Vehicle Placard: A label
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality permanently attached to a . Poor handling.
Grading Standards): A tire vehicle showing the vehicle . Reduced fuel economy.
information system that provides capacity weight and the original
consumers with ratings for a equipment tire size and
Vehicle Care 10-57
Overinflated tires, or tires that vehicle handling and ride Remove the valve cap from the
have too much air, can comfort. Never load the vehicle tire valve stem. Press the tire
result in: with more weight than it was gauge firmly onto the valve to
. Unusual wear. designed to carry. get a pressure measurement.
If the cold tire inflation pressure
. Poor handling. When to Check
matches the recommended
. Rough ride. Check the tires once a month pressure on the Tire and
or more. Loading Information label, no
. Needless damage from further adjustment is necessary.
road hazards. Do not forget the spare tire,
if the vehicle has one. See If the inflation pressure is low,
The Tire and Loading Full-Size Spare Tire on add air until the recommended
Information label on the vehicle page 1084 for additional pressure is reached. If the
indicates the original equipment information. inflation pressure is high, press
tires and the correct cold tire on the metal stem in the center
inflation pressures. The How to Check of the tire valve to release air.
recommended pressure is the Use a good quality pocket-type Re-check the tire pressure with
minimum air pressure needed to gauge to check tire pressure. the tire gauge.
support the vehicle's maximum Proper tire inflation cannot be
load carrying capacity. determined by looking at the tire. Return the valve caps on the
Check the tire inflation pressure valve stems to prevent leaks
For additional information and keep out dirt and moisture.
regarding how much weight the when the tires are cold, meaning
vehicle can carry, and an the vehicle has not been driven
example of the Tire and Loading for at least three hours or no
Information label, see Vehicle more than 1.6 km (1 mi).
Load Limits on page 915. How
the vehicle is loaded affects
10-58 Vehicle Care
Tire Pressure for Vehicles with P265/70R17 or P275/ Each tire, including the spare (if
55R20 size tires require inflation provided), should be checked
High-Speed Operation pressure adjustment when driving monthly when cold and inflated to
the vehicle at speeds of 160 km/h the inflation pressure recommended
{ WARNING (100 mph) or higher. Set the cold tire by the vehicle manufacturer on the
inflation pressure to 20 kPa (3 psi) vehicle placard or tire inflation
Driving at high speeds, 160 km/h above the recommended cold tire pressure label. (If your vehicle has
(100 mph) or higher, puts an pressure shown on the Tire and tires of a different size than the size
additional strain on tires. Loading Information label. indicated on the vehicle placard or
Sustained high-speed driving tire inflation pressure label, you
Return the tires to the
causes excessive heat buildup should determine the proper tire
recommended cold tire inflation
and can cause sudden tire failure. inflation pressure for those tires.)
pressure when high-speed driving
You could have a crash and you has ended. See Vehicle Load Limits As an added safety feature, your
or others could be killed. Some on page 915 and Tire Pressure on vehicle has been equipped with a
high-speed rated tires require page 1056. tire pressure monitoring system
inflation pressure adjustment for (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
high-speed operation. When Tire Pressure Monitor pressure telltale when one or more
speed limits and road conditions of your tires is significantly
are such that a vehicle can be System under-inflated.
driven at high speeds, make sure The Tire Pressure Monitor System
Accordingly, when the low tire
the tires are rated for high-speed (TPMS) uses radio and sensor
pressure telltale illuminates, you
operation, in excellent condition, technology to check tire pressure
should stop and check your tires as
and set to the correct cold tire levels. The TPMS sensors monitor
soon as possible, and inflate them
inflation pressure for the the air pressure in your tires and
to the proper pressure. Driving on a
vehicle load. transmit tire pressure readings to a
significantly under-inflated tire
receiver located in the vehicle.
causes the tire to overheat and can
lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
Vehicle Care 10-59
tread life, and may affect the pressure as intended. TPMS Tire Pressure Monitor
vehicle's handling and stopping malfunctions may occur for a variety
ability. of reasons, including the installation
Operation
Please note that the TPMS is not a of replacement or alternate tires or This vehicle may have a Tire
substitute for proper tire wheels on the vehicle that prevent Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).
maintenance, and it is the driver's the TPMS from functioning properly. The TPMS is designed to warn the
responsibility to maintain correct tire Always check the TPMS malfunction driver when a low tire pressure
pressure, even if under-inflation has telltale after replacing one or more condition exists. TPMS sensors are
not reached the level to trigger tires or wheels on your vehicle to mounted onto each tire and wheel
illumination of the TPMS low tire ensure that the replacement or assembly, excluding the spare tire
pressure telltale. alternate tires and wheels allow the and wheel assembly. The TPMS
TPMS to continue to function sensors monitor the air pressure in
Your vehicle has also been properly. the tires and transmit the tire
equipped with a TPMS malfunction pressure readings to a receiver
indicator to indicate when the See Tire Pressure Monitor
Operation on page 1059. located in the vehicle.
system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is Federal Communications
combined with the low tire pressure Commission (FCC) Rules and
telltale. When the system detects a with Industry Canada
malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then
Standards
remain continuously illuminated. See Radio Frequency Statement on
This sequence will continue upon page 1320 for information
subsequent vehicle start-ups as regarding Part 15 of the Federal When a low tire pressure condition
long as the malfunction exists. Communications Commission (FCC) is detected, the TPMS illuminates
Rules and with Industry Canada the low tire pressure warning light
When the malfunction indicator is located on the instrument cluster.
illuminated, the system may not be If the warning light comes on, stop
able to detect or signal low tire as soon as possible and inflate the
10-60 Vehicle Care
tires to the recommended pressure A Tire and Loading Information label TPMS Malfunction Light and
shown on the Tire and Loading shows the size of the original Message
Information label. See Vehicle Load equipment tires and the correct
Limits on page 915. inflation pressure for the tires when The TPMS will not function properly
they are cold. See Vehicle Load if one or more of the TPMS sensors
A message to check the pressure in are missing or inoperable. When the
a specific tire displays in the Driver Limits on page 915, for an example
of the Tire and Loading Information system detects a malfunction, the
Information Center (DIC). The low low tire pressure warning light
tire pressure warning light and the label and its location. Also see Tire
Pressure on page 1056. flashes for about one minute and
DIC warning message come on at then stays on for the remainder of
each ignition cycle until the tires are The TPMS can warn about a low the ignition cycle. A DIC warning
inflated to the correct inflation tire pressure condition but it does message also displays. The
pressure. If the vehicle has DIC not replace normal tire malfunction light and DIC warning
buttons, tire pressure levels can be maintenance. See Tire Inspection message come on at each ignition
viewed. For additional information on page 1062, Tire Rotation on cycle until the problem is corrected.
and details about the DIC operation page 1063 and Tires on Some of the conditions that can
and displays, see Driver Information page 1047. cause these to come on are:
Center (DIC) on page 529 and Tire Notice: Tire sealant materials are
Messages on page 544.
. One of the road tires has been
not all the same. A non-approved replaced with the spare tire. The
The low tire pressure warning light tire sealant could damage the spare tire does not have a
may come on in cool weather when TPMS sensors. TPMS sensor TPMS sensor. The malfunction
the vehicle is first started, and then damage caused by using an light and the DIC message
turn off as the vehicle is driven. This incorrect tire sealant is not should go off after the road tire
could be an early indicator that the covered by the vehicle warranty. is replaced and the sensor
air pressure is getting low and Always use only the matching process is performed
needs to be inflated to the proper GM-approved tire sealant successfully. See "TPMS Sensor
pressure. available through your dealer or Matching Process" later in this
included in the vehicle. section.
Vehicle Care 10-61

. The TPMS sensor matching . Operating electronic devices or using a TPMS relearn tool, in the
process was not done or not being near facilities using radio following order: driver side front tire,
completed successfully after wave frequencies similar to the passenger side front tire, passenger
rotating the tires. The TPMS could cause the TPMS side rear tire, and driver side rear.
malfunction light and the DIC sensors to malfunction. See your dealer for service or to
message should go off after If the TPMS is not functioning purchase a relearn tool.
successfully completing the properly, it cannot detect or signal a
sensor matching process. See There are two minutes to match the
low tire condition. See your dealer first tire/wheel position, and
"TPMS Sensor Matching for service if the TPMS malfunction
Process" later in this section. five minutes overall to match all four
light and DIC message come on tire/wheel positions. If it takes
. One or more TPMS sensors are and stay on. longer, the matching process stops
missing or damaged. The and must be restarted.
malfunction light and the DIC TPMS Sensor Matching
message should go off when the Process The TPMS sensor matching
TPMS sensors are installed and process is:
Each TPMS sensor has a unique
the sensor matching process is identification code. The identification 1. Set the parking brake.
performed successfully. See code needs to be matched to a new 2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with
your dealer for service. tire/wheel position after rotating the the engine off.
. Replacement tires or wheels do vehicles tires or replacing one or
not match the original equipment more of the TPMS sensors. Also,
tires or wheels. Tires and wheels the TPMS sensor matching process
other than those recommended should be performed after replacing
could prevent the TPMS from a spare tire with a road tire
functioning properly. See Buying containing the TPMS sensor. The
New Tires on page 1066. malfunction light and the DIC
message should go off at the next
ignition cycle. The sensors are
matched to the tire/wheel positions,
10-62 Vehicle Care
3. Press the Remote Keyless Entry the receiver is in relearn mode tire, and the TPMS sensor
(RKE) transmitter's Q and K and TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE matching process is no longer
buttons at the same time for message displays on the DIC active. The TIRE LEARNING
approximately five seconds. The screen. ACTIVE message on the DIC
horn sounds twice to signal the 4. Start with the driver side display screen goes off.
receiver is in relearn mode and front tire. 9. Turn the ignition switch to
the TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE LOCK/OFF.
message displays on the DIC 5. Place the relearn tool against
screen. the tire sidewall, near the valve 10. Set all four tires to the
stem. Then press the button to recommended air pressure
If the vehicle does not have activate the TPMS sensor. level as indicated on the Tire
RKE, press the Driver A horn chirp confirms that the and Loading Information label.
Information Center (DIC) vehicle sensor identification code has
information button until the been matched to this tire and Tire Inspection
PRESS V TO RELEARN TIRE wheel position.
POSITIONS message displays.
We recommend that the tires,
6. Proceed to the passenger side including the spare tire, if the
The horn sounds twice to signal front tire, and repeat the
the receiver is in relearn mode vehicle has one, be inspected
procedure in Step 5.
and TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE for signs of wear or damage at
message displays on the DIC 7. Proceed to the passenger side least once a month.
screen. rear tire, and repeat the
procedure in Step 5. Replace the tire if:
If the vehicle does not have RKE
or DIC buttons, press the trip 8. Proceed to the driver side rear . The indicators at three or
odometer reset stem on the tire, and repeat the procedure in more places around the tire
instrument cluster until the Step 5. The horn sounds two can be seen.
times to indicate the sensor
PRESS V TO RELEARN TIRE . There is cord or fabric
identification code has been
POSITIONS message displays. matched to the driver side rear showing through the tire's
The horn sounds twice to signal rubber.
Vehicle Care 10-63

. The tread or sidewall is inflation pressure, and check for Use this rotation pattern when
cracked, cut, or snagged damaged tires or wheels. If the rotating the tires if the vehicle
deep enough to show cord or unusual wear continues after the has single rear wheels.
fabric. rotation, check the wheel
. The tire has a bump, bulge, alignment. See When It Is Time
or split. for New Tires on page 1065
and Wheel Replacement on
. The tire has a puncture, cut, page 1070.
or other damage that cannot
be repaired well because of If your vehicle has dual rear
the size or location of the wheels, also see Dual Tire
damage. Rotation on page 1065.
Tire Rotation
Tires should be rotated every
12 000 km (7,500 mi). See Use this rotation pattern when
Maintenance Schedule on rotating the tires if the vehicle
page 113. has dual rear wheels (except
Tires are rotated to achieve a polished forged aluminum
uniform wear for all tires. The wheels).
first rotation is the most Vehicles with polished forged
important. aluminum dual wheels have
Anytime unusual wear is three unique wheels; a front, a
noticed, rotate the tires as soon rear outer and a rear inner.
as possible, check for proper tire These wheels cannot be rotated
10-64 Vehicle Care
to another position, however, When installing dual wheels,

they can be rotated from left to check that the vent holes in the WARNING (Continued)
right to the same position. inner and outer wheels on each off and cause an accident. When
side are lined up. changing a wheel, remove any
Adjust the front and rear tires to rust or dirt from places where the
the recommended inflation wheel attaches to the vehicle. In
pressure on the Tire and an emergency, a cloth or a paper
Loading Information label after towel can be used; however, use
the tires have been rotated. See a scraper or wire brush later to
Tire Pressure on page 1056 remove all rust or dirt.
and Vehicle Load Limits on
page 915. Lightly coat the center of the
Check that all wheel nuts are wheel hub with wheel bearing
properly tightened. See Wheel grease after a wheel change or
Nut Torque under Capacities tire rotation to prevent corrosion
Use this rotation pattern when and Specifications on or rust build-up. Do not get
rotating the tires if the vehicle page 122. grease on the flat wheel
has polished forged aluminum mounting surface or on the
dual rear wheels. The spare wheel nuts or bolts.
wheel can be used in any
{ WARNING
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor
position and can be rotated with Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the System (TPMS), if the vehicle
the rear inner wheels. parts to which it is fastened, can has one. See Tire Pressure
make wheel nuts become loose Monitor Operation on
after time. The wheel could come page 1059.
(Continued)
Vehicle Care 10-65
Check that the spare tire, if the more evenly if they are rotated. See
vehicle has one, is stored Tire Inspection on page 1062 and
properly. Push, pull, and then try Tire Rotation on page 1063. Also
to rotate or turn the tire. If it see Maintenance Schedule on
page 113.
moves, tighten the cable. See
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and
Tools under Tire Changing on { WARNING
page 1073. If the vehicle is operated with a
tire that is underinflated, the tire
Dual Tire Rotation can overheat. An overheated tire
When the vehicle is new, can lose air suddenly or catch
or whenever a wheel, wheel bolt, fire. You or others could be Treadwear indicators are one way to
or wheel nut is replaced, check the injured. Properly inflate all tires, tell when it is time for new tires.
wheel nut torque after including the spare. Treadwear indicators appear when
160, 1 600, and 10 000 km the tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)
(100, 1,000, and 6,000 mi) of driving. or less of tread remaining. Some
See Tire Pressure on page 1056,
For proper torque and wheel nut commercial truck tires may not have
for information on proper tire
tightening information, see treadwear indicators. See Tire
inflation.
Removing the Flat Tire and Inspection on page 1062 and Tire
Installing the Spare Tire under Tire Rotation on page 1063 for
Changing on page 1073. When It Is Time for New additional information.
The outer tire on a dual wheel setup
Tires
The rubber in tires ages over time.
generally wears faster than the Factors, such as maintenance, This also applies to the spare tire,
inner tire. Tires last longer and wear temperatures, driving speeds, if the vehicle has one, even if it is
vehicle loading, and road conditions never used. Multiple factors
affect the wear rate of the tires. including temperatures, loading
conditions, and inflation pressure
10-66 Vehicle Care
maintenance affect how fast aging Parking for an extended period can traction control, and tire
takes place. GM recommends that cause flat spots on the tires that pressure monitoring
tires, including the spare if may result in vibrations while performance. GM's TPC Spec
equipped, be replaced after six driving. When storing a vehicle for number is molded onto the tire's
years, regardless of tread wear. The at least a month, remove the tires or
sidewall near the tire size. If the
tire manufacturer date is the last raise the vehicle to reduce the
four digits of the DOT Tire weight from the tires. tires have an all-season tread
Identification Number (TIN) which is design, the TPC Spec number
molded into one side of the tire Buying New Tires will be followed by MS for mud
sidewall. The first two digits and snow. See Tire Sidewall
represent the week (01-52) and the GM has developed and matched Labeling on page 1050 for
last two digits, the year. For specific tires for the vehicle. The additional information.
example, the third week of the year original equipment tires installed
2010 would have a four-digit DOT were designed to meet General GM recommends replacing worn
date of 0310. Motors Tire Performance Criteria tires in complete sets of four (six
Specification (TPC Spec) for dual rear wheels). Uniform
Vehicle Storage tread depth on all tires will help
system rating. When
Tires age when stored normally replacement tires are needed, to maintain the performance of
mounted on a parked vehicle. Park GM strongly recommends the vehicle. Braking and
a vehicle that will be stored for at handling performance may be
least a month in a cool, dry, clean
buying tires with the same TPC
Spec rating. adversely affected if all the tires
area away from direct sunlight to are not replaced at the same
slow aging. This area should be free GM's exclusive TPC Spec time. If proper rotation and
of grease, gasoline or other system considers over a dozen maintenance have been done,
substances that can deteriorate critical specifications that impact
rubber. all four tires (six for dual rear
the overall performance of the wheels) should wear out at
vehicle, including brake system about the same time. See Tire
performance, ride and handling, Rotation on page 1063 for
Vehicle Care 10-67
information on proper tire

rotation. However, if it is WARNING (Continued) { WARNING
necessary to replace only one resulting in a crash or other Using bias-ply tires on the
axle set of worn tires, place the vehicle damage. Use the vehicle may cause the wheel
new tires on the rear axle (two correct size, brand, and type rim flanges to develop cracks
for single rear wheels, four for of tires on all wheels. after many miles of driving.
dual rear wheels). A tire and/or wheel could fail
This vehicle may have a
different size spare than the suddenly and cause a crash.
{ WARNING road tires originally installed Use only radial-ply tires with
Tires could explode during on the vehicle. When new, the the wheels on the vehicle.
improper service. Attempting vehicle included a spare tire
to mount or dismount a tire and wheel assembly with a If the vehicle tires must be
could cause injury or death. similar overall diameter as the replaced with a tire that does not
Only your dealer or authorized road tires and wheels, so it is have a TPC Spec number, make
tire service center should all right to drive on it. The sure they are the same size,
mount or dismount the tires. spare tire was developed for load range, speed rating, and
use on this vehicle and will not construction (radial) as the
affect vehicle handling. original tires.
{ WARNING Vehicles that have a tire
pressure monitoring system
Mixing tires of different sizes, could give an inaccurate
brands, or types may cause low-pressure warning if non-TPC
loss of control of the vehicle, Spec rated tires are installed.
(Continued) See Tire Pressure Monitor
System on page 1058.
10-68 Vehicle Care
The Tire and Loading Uniform Tire Quality

Information label indicates the { WARNING Grading
original equipment tires on the If different sized wheels are used,
vehicle. See Vehicle Load Limits Quality grades can be found
there may not be an acceptable
on page 915 for the label level of performance and safety if
where applicable on the tire
location and more information tires not recommended for those sidewall between tread shoulder
about the Tire and Loading wheels are selected. This and maximum section width. For
Information label. increases the chance of a crash example:
and serious injury. Only use GM Treadwear 200 Traction AA
Different Size Tires and specific wheel and tire systems Temperature A
Wheels developed for the vehicle, and
have them properly installed by a The following information relates
If wheels or tires are installed that GM certified technician. to the system developed by the
are a different size than the original United States National Highway
equipment wheels and tires, vehicle Traffic Safety Administration
performance, including its braking, See Buying New Tires on
page 1066 and Accessories and (NHTSA), which grades tires by
ride and handling characteristics,
stability, and resistance to rollover Modifications on page 103. treadwear, traction, and
may be affected. If the vehicle has temperature performance. This
electronic systems such as antilock applies only to vehicles sold in
brakes, rollover airbags, traction the United States. The grades
control, electronic stability control, are molded on the sidewalls of
or All-Wheel Drive, the performance most passenger car tires. The
of these systems can also be Uniform Tire Quality Grading
affected. (UTQG) system does not apply
to deep tread, winter tires,
compact spare tires, tires with
Vehicle Care 10-69
nominal rim diameters of graded 150 would wear one and straight-ahead braking traction
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), one-half (1) times as well on tests, and does not include
or to some limited-production the government course as a tire acceleration, cornering,
tires. graded 100. The relative hydroplaning, or peak traction
While the tires available on performance of tires depends characteristics.
General Motors passenger cars upon the actual conditions of
Temperature A, B, C
and light trucks may vary with their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the The temperature grades are A
respect to these grades, they
norm due to variations in driving (the highest), B, and C,
must also conform to federal
habits, service practices and representing the tire's resistance
safety requirements and
differences in road to the generation of heat and its
additional General Motors Tire
characteristics and climate. ability to dissipate heat when
Performance Criteria (TPC)
tested under controlled
standards. Traction AA, A, B, C conditions on a specified indoor
All Passenger Car Tires Must The traction grades, from laboratory test wheel. Sustained
Conform to Federal Safety highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, high temperature can cause the
Requirements In Addition To and C. Those grades represent material of the tire to degenerate
These Grades. the tire's ability to stop on wet and reduce tire life, and
Treadwear pavement as measured under excessive temperature can lead
controlled conditions on to sudden tire failure. The grade
The treadwear grade is a specified government test C corresponds to a level of
comparative rating based on the surfaces of asphalt and performance which all
wear rate of the tire when tested concrete. A tire marked C may passenger car tires must meet
under controlled conditions on a have poor traction performance. under the Federal Motor Safety
specified government test Warning: The traction grade Standard No. 109. Grades B and
course. For example, a tire assigned to this tire is based on A represent higher levels of
10-70 Vehicle Care
performance on the laboratory road, the tires and wheels might

test wheel than the minimum need to be rebalanced. See your { WARNING
required by law. Warning: The dealer for proper diagnosis.
Using the wrong replacement
temperature grade for this tire is wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel
established for a tire that is Wheel Replacement nuts can be dangerous. It could
properly inflated and not Replace any wheel that is bent, affect the braking and handling of
overloaded. Excessive speed, cracked, or badly rusted or the vehicle. Tires can lose air,
underinflation, or excessive corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming and cause loss of control, causing
loading, either separately or in loose, the wheel, wheel bolts and a crash. Always use the correct
combination, can cause heat wheel nuts should be replaced. wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel
buildup and possible tire failure. If the wheel leaks air, replace it. nuts for replacement.
Some aluminum wheels can be
repaired. See your dealer if any of
Wheel Alignment and Tire these conditions exist. Notice: The wrong wheel can
Balance Your dealer will know the kind of
also cause problems with bearing
life, brake cooling, speedometer
The tires and wheels were aligned wheel that is needed. or odometer calibration,
and balanced at the factory to Each new wheel should have the headlamp aim, bumper height,
provide the longest tire life and best same load-carrying capacity, vehicle ground clearance, and tire
overall performance. Adjustments to diameter, width, offset and be or tire chain clearance to the
wheel alignment and tire balancing mounted the same way as the one it body and chassis.
will not be necessary on a regular replaces.
basis. However, check the Whenever a wheel, wheel bolt,
alignment if there is unusual tire Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheel or wheel nut is replaced on a dual
wear or if the vehicle is pulling to nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor wheel setup, check the wheel nut
one side or the other. If the vehicle System (TPMS) sensors with new torque after 160, 1 600 and
vibrates when driving on a smooth GM original equipment parts. 10 000 km (100, 1,000 and 6,000 mi)
of driving.
Vehicle Care 10-71
For proper torque, see Wheel Nut Tire Chains WARNING (Continued)
Torque under Capacities and
Specifications on page 122.
See If a Tire Goes Flat on
{ WARNING and road conditions. Follow that
manufacturer's instructions. To
page 1072 for more information. If the vehicle has dual wheels or help avoid damage to the vehicle,
P265/65R18, P275/55R20, drive slowly, readjust, or remove
Used Replacement Wheels
LT265/70R17, LT265/70R18, the device if it is contacting the
LT265/60R20, P285/50R20,
{ WARNING P285/45R22 or 285/45R22 size
vehicle, and do not spin the
vehicle's wheels.
Replacing a wheel with a used tires, do not use tire chains. They
can damage the vehicle because If you do find traction devices that
one is dangerous. How it has will fit, install them on the rear
been used or how far it has been there is not enough clearance.
Tire chains used on a vehicle tires.
driven may be unknown. It could
fail suddenly and cause a crash. without the proper amount of
When replacing wheels, use a clearance can cause damage to Notice: If the vehicle does not
new GM original equipment the brakes, suspension, or other have dual wheels and has a tire
wheel. vehicle parts. The area damaged size other than P265/65R18, P275/
by the tire chains could cause you 55R20, LT265/70R17, LT265/
to lose control of the vehicle and 70R18, LT265/60R20, P285/50R20,
you or others may be injured in a P285/45R22, or 285/45R22, use
crash. tire chains only where legal and
only when you must. Use chains
Use another type of traction that are the proper size for the
device only if its manufacturer tires. Install them on the tires of
recommends it for use on the the rear axle. Do not use chains
vehicle and tire size combination on the tires of the front axle.
(Continued) Tighten them as tightly as
possible with the ends securely
10-72 Vehicle Care
fastened. Drive slowly and follow A rear blowout, particularly on a

the chain manufacturer's curve, acts much like a skid and { WARNING
instructions. If you can hear the may require the same correction as
chains contacting the vehicle, used in a skid. Stop pressing the Lifting a vehicle and getting under
stop and retighten them. If the accelerator pedal and steer to it to do maintenance or repairs is
contact continues, slow down straighten the vehicle. It may be dangerous without the
until it stops. Driving too fast or very bumpy and noisy. Gently brake appropriate safety equipment and
spinning the wheels with chains to a stop, well off the road, training. If a jack is provided with
on will damage the vehicle. if possible. the vehicle, it is designed only for
changing a flat tire. If it is used for
If a Tire Goes Flat { WARNING anything else, you or others could
be badly injured or killed if the
It is unusual for a tire to blowout vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack
Driving on a flat tire will cause
while driving, especially if the tires
permanent damage to the tire. is provided with the vehicle, only
are maintained properly. If air goes
Re-inflating a tire after it has been use it for changing a flat tire.
out of a tire, it is much more likely to
leak out slowly. But if there ever is a driven on while severely
blowout, here are a few tips about underinflated or flat may cause a If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire
what to expect and what to do: blowout and a serious crash. and wheel damage by driving slowly
Never attempt to re-inflate a tire to a level place, well off the road,
If a front tire fails, the flat tire that has been driven on while
creates a drag that pulls the vehicle if possible. Turn on the hazard
severely underinflated or flat. warning flashers. See Hazard
toward that side. Take your foot off
Have your dealer or an authorized Warning Flashers on page 65.
the accelerator pedal and grip the
tire service center repair or
steering wheel firmly. Steer to
maintain lane position, and then replace the flat tire as soon as
gently brake to a stop, well off the possible.
road, if possible.
Vehicle Care 10-73
Tire Changing
{ WARNING WARNING (Continued)
Removing the Spare Tire and
Changing a tire can be 6. Place wheel blocks on both
Tools
dangerous. The vehicle can slip sides of the tire at the
off the jack and roll over or fall opposite corner of the tire
causing injury or death. Find a being changed.
level place to change the tire. To
help prevent the vehicle from When the vehicle has a flat tire (B),
moving: use the following example as a
1. Set the parking brake firmly. guide to assist in the placement of
the wheel blocks (A).
2. Put an automatic
transmission in P (Park) or a
manual transmission in
1 (First) or R (Reverse).
3. For four-wheel-drive
vehicles, be sure the Crew Cab
transfer case is in a drive A. Wing Nut Retaining Tool Kit
gear not in N (Neutral).
B. Tool Kit
4. Turn off the engine and do
C. Wheel Blocks
not restart while the vehicle A. Wheel Block
is raised. D. Jack
B. Flat Tire
5. Do not allow passengers to E. Jack Knob
remain in the vehicle. The following information explains
F. Wing Nut Retaining Wheel
how to use the jack and change
(Continued) Blocks
a tire.
10-74 Vehicle Care
For regular cab models, the

equipment you will need is behind
the passenger seat. For extended
and crew cab models, the
equipment is on the shelf behind the
passenger side second row seat.
1. Turn the knob on the jack
counterclockwise to lower the
jack head to release the jack
from its holder.
2. Turn the wing nut
counterclockwise to remove the
Regular Cab Extended Cab
wheel blocks and the wheel
A. Wing Nut Retaining Tool Kit A. Wing Nut Retaining Tool Kit block retainer.
B. Tool Kit B. Tool Kit 3. Turn the wing nut used to retain
C. Wheel Blocks C. Wheel Blocks the storage bag and tools
counterclockwise to remove it.
D. Jack D. Jack
Use the jack handle extensions and
E. Jack Knob E. Jack Knob the wheel wrench to remove the
F. Wing Nut Retaining Wheel underbody-mounted spare tire.
Blocks
Vehicle Care 10-75
1. Open the spare tire lock cover

on the bumper and use the
ignition key to remove the spare
tire lock (J). To remove the spare
tire lock, insert the ignition key
turn and pull straight out.
3. Insert the hoist end (open

end) (F) of the extension through
the hole (G) in the rear bumper.
A. Spare Tire (Valve Stem Do not use the chiseled end of
Pointed Down) the wheel wrench.
B. Hoist Assembly Be sure the hoist end of the
C. Hoist Cable 2. Assemble the wheel wrench (H) extension (F) connects to the
and the two jack handle hoist shaft. The ribbed square
D. Tire/Wheel Retainer end of the extension is used to
extensions (I), as shown.
E. Hoist Shaft lower the spare tire.
F. Hoist End of Extension Tool 4. Turn the wheel wrench
G. Hoist Shaft Access Hole counterclockwise to lower the
spare tire to the ground.
H. Wheel Wrench Continue to turn the wheel
I. Jack Handle Extensions wrench until the spare tire can
be pulled out from under the
J. Spare Tire Lock (If equipped) vehicle.
10-76 Vehicle Care
5. Pull the spare tire out from under Removing the Flat Tire and The tools you will be using include
the vehicle. Installing the Spare Tire the jack (A), the wheel blocks (B),
the jack handle (C), the jack handle
Use the following pictures and extensions (D), and the wheel
instructions to remove the flat tire wrench (E).
and raise the vehicle.
1. Do a safety check before
proceeding. See If a Tire Goes
Flat on page 1072 for more
information.
6. Tilt the tire toward the vehicle

with some slack in the cable to
access the tire/wheel retainer.
Tilt the retainer and pull it
through the center of the wheel
along with the cable and spring.
7. Put the spare tire near the A. Jack
flat tire. B. Wheel Blocks
C. Jack Handle
D. Jack Handle Extension
E. Wheel Wrench
Vehicle Care 10-77
2. If the vehicle has wheel nut

caps, loosen them by turning the
wheel wrench counterclockwise.
If the vehicle has a center cap
with wheel nut caps, the wheel
nut caps are designed to stay
with the center cap after they are
loosened. Remove the entire
center cap.
3. Use the wheel wrench and turn it Front Position - 1500 Models
counterclockwise to loosen the 4. Position the jack under the
wheel nuts. Do not remove the vehicle, as shown. If the flat tire
wheel nuts yet. is on the front of the vehicle
(1500 Model vehicles), position
the jack under the bracket
attached to the vehicle's frame,
If the wheel has a smooth center behind the flat tire.
cap, place the chisel end of the
wheel wrench in the slot on the
wheel, and gently pry it out.
10-78 Vehicle Care
Front Position - All Other Models Rear Position 1500 Models Rear Position All Other Models
Position the jack under the 5. If the flat tire is on the rear, for For all other models, position the
vehicle, as shown. If the flat tire 1500 models position the jack jack under the rear axle between
is on the front of the vehicle (all under the rear axle about 5 cm the spring anchor and the shock
other models), position the jack (2 in) inboard of the shock absorber bracket.
on the frame behind the flat tire. absorber bracket. If a snow plow has been added
to the front of the vehicle, lower
the snow plow fully before
raising the vehicle.
Make sure that the jack head is
positioned so that the rear axle
is resting securely between the
grooves that are on the
jack head.
Vehicle Care 10-79
the ground so there is enough

{ WARNING room for the spare tire to fit WARNING (Continued)
under the wheel well.
Getting under a vehicle when it is changing a wheel, remove any
lifted on a jack is dangerous. rust or dirt from places where the
If the vehicle slips off the jack, wheel attaches to the vehicle. In
you could be badly injured or an emergency, a cloth or a paper
killed. Never get under a vehicle towel can be used; however, use
when it is supported only by a scraper or wire brush later to
a jack. remove all rust or dirt.
{ WARNING
Raising the vehicle with the jack
improperly positioned can
damage the vehicle and even 7. Remove all the wheel nuts and
make the vehicle fall. To help take off the flat tire.
avoid personal injury and vehicle
damage, be sure to fit the jack lift { WARNING
head into the proper location
before raising the vehicle. Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the
parts to which it is fastened, can
make wheel nuts become loose
6. Turn the wheel wrench 8. Remove any rust or dirt from the
after time. The wheel could come
clockwise to raise the vehicle. wheel bolts, mounting surfaces,
Raise the vehicle far enough off off and cause an accident. When
and spare wheel.
(Continued)
9. Install the spare tire.
10-80 Vehicle Care
{ WARNING { WARNING { WARNING

Never use oil or grease on bolts If wheel studs are damaged, they Wheel nuts that are improperly or
or nuts because the nuts might can break. If all the studs on a incorrectly tightened can cause
come loose. The vehicle's wheel wheel broke, the wheel could the wheels to become loose or
could fall off, causing a crash. come off and cause a crash. come off. The wheel nuts should
If any stud is damaged because be tightened with a torque wrench
10. Put the wheel nuts back on of a loose-running wheel, it could to the proper torque specification
with the rounded end of the be that all of the studs are after replacing. Follow the torque
nuts toward the wheel. damaged. To be sure, replace all specification supplied by the
studs on the wheel. If the stud aftermarket manufacturer when
11. Tighten each wheel nut by holes in a wheel have become using accessory locking wheel
hand. Then use the wheel larger, the wheel could collapse in nuts. See Capacities and
wrench to tighten the nuts until
operation. Replace any wheel if Specifications on page 122 for
the wheel is held against
its stud holes have become larger original equipment wheel nut
the hub.
or distorted in any way. Inspect torque specifications.
12. Turn the wheel wrench hubs and hubpiloted wheels for
counterclockwise to lower the damage. Because of loose
vehicle. Lower the jack Notice: Improperly tightened
running wheels, piloting pad wheel nuts can lead to brake
completely. damage may occur and require pulsation and rotor damage. To
replacement of the entire hub, for avoid expensive brake repairs,
proper centering of the wheels. evenly tighten the wheel nuts in
When replacing studs, hubs, the proper sequence and to the
wheel nuts or wheels, be sure to proper torque specification. See
use GM original equipment parts. Capacities and Specifications on
page 122 for the wheel nut
torque specification.
Vehicle Care 10-81
When reinstalling the regular wheel Storing a Flat or Spare Tire

and tire, also reinstall either the and Tools
center cap, or bolt-on hub cap,
depending on what the vehicle is
equipped with. For center caps,
{ WARNING
place the cap on the wheel and tap Storing a jack, a tire, or other
it into place until it seats flush with equipment in the passenger
the wheel. The cap only goes on compartment of the vehicle could
one way. Be sure to line up the tab
cause injury. In a sudden stop or
13. Tighten the nuts firmly in a on the center cap with the
collision, loose equipment could
crisscross sequence, as indentation on the wheel. For
strike someone. Store all these in
shown, by turning the wheel bolt-on hub caps, align the plastic
nut caps with the wheel nuts and the proper place.
wrench clockwise.
then tighten by hand. Then use the
For vehicles with dual wheels, have wheel wrench to tighten. Notice: Storing an aluminum
a technician check the wheel nut
wheel with a flat tire under your
tightness of all wheels with a torque
vehicle for an extended period of
wrench after the first 160 km
time or with the valve stem
(100 mi) and then 1600 km
pointing up can damage the
(1,000 mi) after that. Repeat this
wheel. Always stow the wheel
service whenever you have a tire
with the valve stem pointing
removed or serviced. See
down and have the wheel/tire
Capacities and Specifications on
repaired as soon as possible.
Store the tire under the rear of the
vehicle in the spare tire carrier.
10-82 Vehicle Care
1. Put the tire on the ground at the

rear of the vehicle with the valve
stem pointed down, and to
the rear.
2. Pull the cable and spring
through the center of the wheel.
Tilt the wheel retainer plate
down and through the center
wheel.
4. Insert the hoist end (F) through
Make sure the retainer is fully the hole (G) in the rear bumper
seated across the underside of and onto the hoist shaft.
the wheel.
A. Flat or Spare Tire (Valve Stem Do not use the chiseled end of
Pointed Down) the wheel wrench.
B. Hoist Assembly 5. Raise the tire part way upward.
C. Hoist Cable Make sure the retainer is seated
in the wheel opening.
D. Tire/Wheel Retainer
6. Raise the tire fully against the
E. Hoist Shaft underside of the vehicle by
F. Hoist End of Extension Tool turning the wheel wrench
G. Hoist Shaft Access Hole clockwise until you hear two
clicks or feel it skip twice. You
H. Wheel Wrench 3. Attach the wheel wrench (H) and cannot overtighten the cable.
extensions (I) together, as
I. Jack Handle Extensions shown.
J. Spare Tire Lock (If Equipped)
Vehicle Care 10-83
To store the jack and jack tools: 1. Put the tools (D) in the tool
bag (E) and place them in the
retaining bracket (C).
2. Tighten down the wing nut (C).
3. Assemble the wheel blocks (B)
and jack (G) together with the
wing nut (A) and retaining
bolt (H).
4. Position the jack (G) in the
mounting bracket (F). Position
the holes in the base of the
7. Make sure the tire is stored jack (G) onto the pin in the
securely. Push, pull (A), and then mounting bracket (F).
try to turn (B) the tire. If the tire A. Wing Nut Retaining Wheel 5. Return them to their original
moves, use the wheel wrench to Blocks location in the vehicle. For more
tighten the cable. B. Wheel Blocks information, refer to Removing
8. Reinstall the spare tire lock, the Spare Tire and Tools for
C. Wing Nut Retaining Tool Kit
if the vehicle has one. more information.
D. Wheel Wrench and Extensions
E. Tool Bag
F. Jack Mounting Bracket
G. Jack
H. Bolt Retaining Wheel Blocks
10-84 Vehicle Care
Full-Size Spare Tire Your vehicle may have a different Jump Starting
size spare tire than the road tires
Your vehicle, when new, had a originally installed on your vehicle. For more information about the
fully-inflated spare tire. A spare tire This spare tire was developed for vehicle battery, see Battery on
may lose air over time, so check its use on your vehicle, so it is all right page 1028.
inflation pressure regularly. See Tire to drive on it. If your vehicle has
Pressure on page 1056 and If the vehicle is a hybrid, see the
four-wheel drive and the different hybrid supplement for more
Vehicle Load Limits on page 915 size spare tire is installed, keep the
for information regarding proper tire information.
vehicle in two-wheel drive.
inflation and loading your vehicle. If the vehicle's battery (or batteries)
For instruction on how to remove, After installing the spare tire on your has run down, you may want to use
install or store a spare tire, see vehicle, you should stop as soon as another vehicle and some jumper
Removing the Flat Tire and possible and make sure the spare cables to start your vehicle. Be sure
Installing the Spare and Storing a tire is correctly inflated. Have the to use the following steps to do it
Flat or Spare Tire and Tools under damaged or flat road tire repaired or safely.
Tire Changing on page 1073. replaced as soon as you can and
installed back onto your vehicle.
Notice: If the vehicle has This way, the spare tire will be { WARNING
four-wheel drive and a different available in case you need it again.
size spare tire is installed, do not Batteries can hurt you. They can
drive in four-wheel drive until the Do not mix tires and wheels of be dangerous because:
flat tire is repaired and/or different sizes, because they will not . They contain acid that can
replaced. The vehicle could be fit. Keep your spare tire and its
burn you.
damaged and the repairs would wheel together. If your vehicle has a
not be covered by the warranty. spare tire that does not match your . They contain gas that can
Never use four-wheel drive when vehicle's original road tires and explode or ignite.
a different size spare tire is wheels in size and type, do not . They contain enough
installed on the vehicle. include the spare in the tire rotation. electricity to burn you.
(Continued)
Vehicle Care 10-85
2. If you have a vehicle with a procedure. Put the automatic

WARNING (Continued) diesel engine with two batteries, transmission in P (Park) or a
you should know before you manual transmission in Neutral
If you do not follow these steps begin that, especially in cold before setting the parking brake.
exactly, some or all of these weather, you may not be able to If you have a four-wheel-drive
things can hurt you. get enough power from a single vehicle, be sure the transfer
battery in another vehicle to start case is in a drive gear, not in
Notice: Ignoring these steps your diesel engine. If your Neutral.
could result in costly damage to vehicle has more than one Notice: If any accessories are left
the vehicle that would not be battery, using the battery that is on or plugged in during the jump
covered by the warranty. closer to the starter will reduce starting procedure, they could be
electrical resistance. This is damaged. The repairs would not
Trying to start the vehicle by located on the passenger side,
pushing or pulling it will not be covered by the vehicle
in the rear of the engine warranty. Whenever possible,
work, and it could damage the compartment.
vehicle. turn off or unplug all accessories
3. Get the vehicles close enough on either vehicle when jump
1. Check the other vehicle. It must so the jumper cables can reach, starting the vehicle.
have a 12-volt battery with a but be sure the vehicles are not
negative ground system. 4. Turn off the ignition on both
touching each other. If they are, vehicles. Unplug unnecessary
Notice: Only use a vehicle that it could cause an unwanted accessories plugged into the
has a 12-volt system with a ground connection. You would accessory power outlets. Turn
negative ground for jump not be able to start your vehicle, off the radio and all the lamps
starting. If the other vehicle does and the bad grounding could that are not needed. This will
not have a 12-volt system with a damage the electrical systems. avoid sparks and help save both
negative ground, both vehicles To avoid the possibility of the batteries. And it could save the
can be damaged. vehicles rolling, set the parking radio!
brake firmly on both vehicles
involved in the jump start
10-86 Vehicle Care
5. Open the hood on the other If your vehicle has a gasoline

vehicle and locate the engine, the remote negative (-) { WARNING
positive (+) and negative () terminal is a stud located on the
terminal locations on that right front of the engine, where Using an open flame near a
vehicle. the negative battery cable battery can cause battery gas to
attaches. explode. People have been hurt
The positive (+) terminal, is doing this, and some have been
located under a red plastic cover If your vehicle has a diesel blinded. Use a flashlight if you
at the positive battery post. To engine, the remote negative (-) need more light.
uncover the positive (+) terminal, terminal is the negative (-) post
open the red plastic cover. on the auxiliary battery on the Be sure the battery has enough
driver side of the engine water. You do not need to add
compartment. water to the battery installed in
For more information on the your new vehicle. But if a battery
location of the remote has filler caps, be sure the right
positive (+) and remote amount of fluid is there. If it is low,
negative () terminals, see add water to take care of that
Engine Compartment Overview first. If you do not, explosive gas
on page 105 could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that
{ WARNING can burn you. Do not get it on
you. If you accidentally get it in
An electric fan can start up even your eyes or on your skin, flush
when the engine is not running the place with water and get
and can injure you. Keep hands, medical help immediately.
clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
Vehicle Care 10-87
negative () cable to the 8. Do not let the other end touch

{ WARNING negative () terminal on the dead metal. Connect it to the
battery because this can cause positive (+) terminal of the good
Fans or other moving engine sparks. battery. Use a remote
parts can injure you badly. Keep positive (+) terminal if the vehicle
your hands away from moving has one.
parts once the engine is running.
9. Now connect the black
negative () cable to the
6. Check that the jumper cables do negative () terminal of the good
not have loose or missing battery. Use a remote
insulation. If they do, you could negative () terminal if the
get a shock. The vehicles could vehicle has one.
be damaged too.
Do not let the other end touch
Before you connect the cables, anything until the next step.
here are some basic things you
should know. Positive (+) will go 10. Connect the other end of the
to positive (+) or to a remote 5.3L Engine (4.3L, 4.8L, 6.0L, 6.2L negative () cable to a heavy,
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle unpainted metal engine part or
and 6.6L Similar)
has one. Negative () will go to a to the remote negative ()
heavy, unpainted metal engine 7. Connect the red positive (+) terminal, on the vehicle with
cable to the positive (+) terminal the dead battery.
part or to a remote negative ()
of the vehicle with the dead
terminal if the vehicle has one. 11. Start the vehicle with the good
battery.
Do not connect positive (+) to battery and run the engine for a
negative () or you will get a while.
short that would damage the
battery and maybe other parts
too. And do not connect the
10-88 Vehicle Care
12. Try to start the vehicle that had To disconnect the jumper cables
the dead battery. If it will not from both vehicles do the following:
start after a few tries, it 1. Disconnect the black
probably needs service. negative () cable from the
Notice: If the jumper cables are vehicle that had the bad battery.
connected or removed in the 2. Disconnect the black
wrong order, electrical shorting negative () cable from the
may occur and damage the vehicle with the good battery.
vehicle. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. 3. Disconnect the red positive (+)
Always connect and remove the cable from the vehicle with the
jumper cables in the correct good battery.
order, making sure that the Jumper Cable Removal 4. Disconnect the red positive (+)
cables do not touch each other or A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine cable from the other vehicle.
other metal. Part or Remote Negative () 5. Return the positive (+) terminal
Terminal cover, to its original position.
B. Good Battery or Remote
Positive (+) and Remote
Negative () Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote
Positive (+) Terminal
Vehicle Care 10-89

. Is the proper towing equipment
Towing Recreational Vehicle going to be used? See your
Towing dealer or trailering professional
Towing the Vehicle Recreational vehicle towing means for additional advice and
Notice: Incorrectly towing a towing the vehicle behind another equipment recommendations.
disabled vehicle may cause vehicle, such as a motor home. The . Is the vehicle ready to be
damage. The damage would not two most common types of towed? Just as preparing the
be covered by the vehicle recreational vehicle towing are vehicle for a long trip, make sure
warranty. known as dinghy towing and dolly the vehicle is prepared to be
towing. Dinghy towing is towing the towed.
Have the vehicle towed on a flatbed
vehicle with all four wheels on the
car carrier or a wheel lift tow truck. Dinghy Towing
ground. Dolly towing is towing the
If a wheel lift tow truck is used, the
vehicle with two wheels on the Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
drive wheels cannot contact the
ground and two wheels up on a
road while the vehicle is being
device known as a dolly.
towed. A wheel dolly must be used
to lift all drive wheels off the ground. Here are some important things to
consider before recreational vehicle
Consult your dealer or a
towing:
professional towing service if the
disabled vehicle must be towed. . What is the towing capacity of
the towing vehicle? Be sure to
To tow the vehicle behind another
read the tow vehicle
vehicle for recreational purposes,
manufacturer's
such as behind a motor home, see
recommendations.
Recreational Vehicle Towing in this
. What is the distance that will be
section.
travelled? Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how
long they can tow.
10-90 Vehicle Care
Notice: If the vehicle is towed Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles

with all four wheels on the { WARNING
ground, the drivetrain
components could be damaged. Shifting a four-wheel-drive
The repairs would not be covered vehicle's transfer case into
by the vehicle warranty. Do not N (Neutral) can cause the vehicle
tow the vehicle with all four to roll even if the transmission is
wheels on the ground. in P (Park). The driver or others
could be injured. Make sure the
Two-wheel-drive vehicles should not
parking brake is firmly set before
be towed with all four wheels on the
the transfer case is shifted to
ground. Two-wheel-drive
transmissions have no provisions N (Neutral).
for internal lubrication while being
towed. 4. Shift the transfer case to
Use the following procedure to N (Neutral). See Shifting into
dinghy tow a four-wheel-drive Neutral under Four-Wheel Drive
vehicle: on page 941 for the proper
1. Position the vehicle being towed procedure to select the Neutral
behind the tow vehicle and shift position for the vehicle.
the transmission to P (Park). 5. Release the parking brake only
2. Turn the engine off and firmly set after the vehicle being towed is
the parking brake. firmly attached to the towing
vehicle.
3. Securely attach the vehicle
being towed to the tow vehicle. 6. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF
and remove the key the
steering wheel will still turn.
Vehicle Care 10-91
After towing, see Shifting Out of Notice: If a two-wheel drive Front Towing (Front Wheels Off
Neutral under Four-Wheel Drive on vehicle is towed with the rear the Ground) Four-Wheel-Drive
page 941 for the proper procedure wheels on the ground, the Vehicles
to take the vehicle out of the Neutral transmission could be damaged.
position. The repairs would not be covered
by the vehicle warranty. Never
Dolly Towing tow the vehicle with the rear
Front Towing (Front Wheels Off wheels on the ground.
the Ground) Two-Wheel-Drive Two-wheel-drive vehicles should not
Vehicles be towed with the rear wheels on
the ground. Two-wheel-drive
transmissions have no provisions
for internal lubrication while being
towed.
To dolly tow a twowheeldrive
vehicle, the vehicle must be towed
Use the following procedure to dolly
with the rear wheels on the dolly.
tow a four-wheel-drive vehicle from
See Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Off
the front:
the Ground) later in this section for
more information. 1. Attach the dolly to the tow
vehicle following the dolly
manufacturer's instructions.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the
dolly.
3. Shift the transmission to
P (Park).
4. Firmly set the parking brake.
10-92 Vehicle Care
8. Release the parking brake only Use the following procedure to dolly
{ WARNING after the vehicle being towed is tow a two-wheel-drive vehicle from
firmly attached to the towing the rear:
Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle.
vehicle's transfer case into 1. Attach the dolly to the tow
N (Neutral) can cause the vehicle 9. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF. vehicle following the dolly
to roll even if the transmission is After towing, see Shifting Out of manufacturer's instructions.
in P (Park). The driver or others Neutral under Four-Wheel Drive on 2. Drive the rear wheels onto the
could be injured. Make sure the page 941. dolly.
parking brake is firmly set before 3. Firmly set the parking brake.
the transfer case is shifted to
Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Off
the Ground) See Parking Brake on
N (Neutral). page 954.
TwoWheelDrive Vehicles
4. Put the transmission in P (Park).
5. Use an adequate clamping
device designed for towing to 5. Secure the vehicle to the dolly
ensure that the front wheels are following the manufacturer's
locked into the straight position. instructions.
6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly 6. Use an adequate clamping
following the manufacturer's device designed for towing to
instructions. ensure that the front wheels are
locked into the straight position.
7. Shift the transfer case to
N (Neutral). See Shifting into 7. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
Neutral under Four-Wheel Drive
on page 941 for the proper
procedure to select the neutral
position for the vehicle.
Vehicle Care 10-93
FourWheelDrive Vehicles Appearance Care

Use the following procedure to dolly
{ WARNING
tow a four-wheel-drive vehicle from Shifting a four-wheel-drive Exterior Care
the rear: vehicle's transfer case into
1. Attach the dolly to the tow N (Neutral) can cause the vehicle Washing the Vehicle
vehicle following the dolly to roll even if the transmission is To preserve the vehicle's finish,
manufacturer's instructions. in P (Park). The driver or others wash it often and out of direct
could be injured. Make sure the sunlight.
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the
dolly. parking brake is firmly set before Notice: Do not use
the transfer case is shifted to petroleum-based, acidic,
3. Firmly set the parking brake. N (Neutral). or abrasive cleaning agents as
See Parking Brake on
they can damage the vehicle's
page 954.
7. Shift the transfer case to paint, metal, or plastic parts.
4. Put the transmission in P (Park). N (Neutral). See Shifting into If damage occurs, it would not be
5. Secure the vehicle to the dolly Neutral under Four-Wheel Drive covered by the vehicle's warranty.
following the manufacturer's on page 941 for the proper Approved cleaning products can
instructions. procedure to select the neutral be obtained from your dealer.
position for the vehicle. Follow all manufacturer
6. Use an adequate clamping directions regarding correct
device designed for towing to 8. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF. product usage, necessary safety
ensure that the front wheels are After towing, see Shifting Out of precautions, and appropriate
locked into the straight position. Neutral under Four-Wheel Drive on disposal of any vehicle care
page 941. product.
Notice: Avoid using
high-pressure washes closer than
30 cm (12 in) to the surface of the
vehicle. Use of power washers
10-94 Vehicle Care
exceeding 8,274 kPa (1,200 psi) cleaners that are marked safe for Protecting Exterior Bright Metal
can result in damage or removal painted surfaces to remove foreign Parts
of paint and decals. matter. Regularly clean bright metal parts
Rinse the vehicle well, before Occasional hand waxing or mild with water or chrome polish on
washing and after, to remove all polishing should be done to remove chrome or stainless steel trim,
cleaning agents completely. If they residue from the paint finish. See if necessary.
are allowed to dry on the surface, your dealer for approved cleaning For aluminum, never use auto or
they could stain. products. chrome polish, steam, or caustic
Dry the finish with a soft, clean Do not apply waxes or polishes to soap to clean. A coating of wax,
chamois or an all-cotton towel to uncoated plastic, vinyl, rubber, rubbed to a high polish, is
avoid surface scratches and water decals, simulated wood, or flat paint recommended for all bright metal
spotting. as damage can occur. parts.
Finish Care Notice: Machine compounding or Cleaning Exterior Lamps/
aggressive polishing on a Lenses and Emblems
Application of aftermarket clearcoat basecoat/clearcoat paint finish
sealant/wax materials is not may damage it. Use only Use only lukewarm or cold water, a
recommended. If painted surfaces non-abrasive waxes and polishes soft cloth, and a car washing soap
are damaged, see your dealer to that are made for a basecoat/ to clean exterior lamps, lenses and
have the damage assessed and clearcoat paint finish on the emblems. Follow instructions under
repaired. Foreign materials such as vehicle. "Washing the Vehicle" in this
calcium chloride and other salts, ice section.
melting agents, road oil and tar, tree To keep the paint finish looking new,
sap, bird droppings, chemicals from keep the vehicle garaged or Windshield and Wiper Blades
industrial chimneys, etc., can covered whenever possible. Clean the outside of the windshield
damage the vehicle's finish if they with glass cleaner.
remain on painted surfaces. Wash
the vehicle as soon as possible.
If necessary, use non-abrasive
Vehicle Care 10-95
Clean rubber blades using a lint-free Tires and dust. Always wash the
cloth or paper towel soaked with chrome with soap and water after
Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner to
windshield washer fluid or a mild exposure.
clean the tires.
detergent. Wash the windshield Notice: To avoid surface damage,
thoroughly when cleaning the Notice: Using petroleum-based
do not use strong soaps,
blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and tire dressing products on the
chemicals, abrasive polishes,
a buildup of vehicle wash/wax vehicle may damage the paint
cleaners, brushes, or cleaners
treatments may cause wiper finish and/or tires. When applying
that contain acid on aluminum or
streaking. a tire dressing, always wipe off
chrome-plated wheels. Use only
any overspray from all painted
Replace the wiper blades if they are approved cleaners. Also, never
surfaces on the vehicle.
worn or damaged. Damage can be drive a vehicle with aluminum or
caused by extreme dusty Wheels and Trim Aluminum chrome-plated wheels through an
conditions, sand, salt, heat, sun, or Chrome automatic car wash that uses
snow, and ice. silicone carbide tire cleaning
Use a soft, clean cloth with mild brushes. Damage could occur
Weatherstrips soap and water to clean the wheels. and the repairs would not be
Apply silicone grease on After rinsing thoroughly with clean covered by the vehicle warranty.
weatherstrips to make them last water, dry with a soft, clean towel.
longer, seal better, and not stick or A wax may then be applied. Steering, Suspension, and
squeak. Lubricate weatherstrips Notice: Chrome wheels and other Chassis Components
once a year. Black marks from chrome trim may be damaged if Visually inspect the front and rear
rubber material on painted surfaces the vehicle is not washed after suspension and steering system for
can be removed by rubbing with a driving on roads that have been damaged, loose, or missing parts or
clean cloth. See Recommended sprayed with magnesium, signs of wear. Inspect the power
Fluids and Lubricants on calcium, or sodium chloride. steering for proper hook-up, binding,
page 1112. These chlorides are used on leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Visually
roads for conditions such as ice
10-96 Vehicle Care
check constant velocity joints, material to parts repaired or Interior Care

rubber boots, and axle seals for replaced to restore corrosion
leaks. protection. To prevent dirt particle abrasions,
regularly clean the vehicle's interior.
Body Component Lubrication Original manufacturer replacement Immediately remove any soils. Note
parts will provide the corrosion that newspapers or dark garments
Lubricate all key lock cylinders, protection while maintaining the
hood hinges, liftgate hinges, and the that can transfer color to home
vehicle warranty. furnishings can also permanently
steel fuel door hinge unless the
components are plastic. Applying Finish Damage transfer color to the vehicle's
silicone grease on weatherstrips interior.
Quickly repair minor chips and
with a clean cloth will make them scratches with touch-up materials Use a soft bristle brush to remove
last longer, seal better, and not stick available from your dealer to avoid dust from knobs and crevices on the
or squeak. corrosion. Larger areas of finish instrument cluster. Using a mild
damage can be corrected in your soap solution, immediately remove
Underbody Maintenance hand lotions, sunscreen, and insect
dealer's body and paint shop.
Use plain water to flush dirt and repellent from all interior surfaces or
debris from the vehicle's underbody. Chemical Paint Spotting permanent damage may result.
Your dealer or an underbody car Airborne pollutants can fall upon Your dealer may have products for
washing system can do this. If not and attack painted vehicle surfaces cleaning the interior. Use cleaners
removed, rust and corrosion can causing blotchy, ring-shaped specifically designed for the
develop. discolorations, and small, irregular surfaces being cleaned to prevent
Sheet Metal Damage dark spots etched into the paint permanent damage. Apply all
surface. cleaners directly to the cleaning
If the vehicle is damaged and cloth. Do not spray cleaners directly
requires sheet metal repair or on any switches or controls.
replacement, make sure the body Cleaners should be removed
repair shop applies anti-corrosion quickly. Never allow cleaners to
Vehicle Care 10-97
remain on the surface being 3.78 L (1 gal) of water. Notice: Cleaning the windshield
cleaned for extended periods A concentrated soap solution will with water during the first three to
of time. leave a residue that creates six months of ownership will
Cleaners may contain solvents that streaks and attracts dirt. Do not reduce tendency to fog.
can become concentrated in the use solutions that contain strong
or caustic soap. Speaker Covers
interior. Before using cleaners, read
and adhere to all safety instructions . Do not heavily saturate the Vacuum around a speaker cover
on the label. While cleaning the upholstery when cleaning. gently, so that the speaker will not
interior, maintain adequate be damaged. Clean spots with just
. Do not use solvents or cleaners water and mild soap.
ventilation by opening the doors and containing solvents.
windows. Coated Moldings
To prevent damage, do not clean Interior Glass
Coated moldings should be cleaned.
the interior using the following To clean, use a terry cloth fabric
cleaners or techniques: dampened with water. Wipe droplets
. When lightly soiled, wipe with a
left behind with a clean dry cloth. sponge or soft lint-free cloth
. Never use a razor or any other dampened with water.
sharp object to remove a soil Commercial glass cleaners may be
from any interior surface. used, if necessary, after cleaning . When heavily soiled, use warm
the interior glass with plain water. soapy water.
. Never use a brush with stiff
bristles. Notice: To prevent scratching,
never use abrasive cleaners on
. Never rub any surface automotive glass. Abrasive
aggressively or with excessive cleaners or aggressive cleaning
pressure. may damage the rear window
. Do not use laundry detergents or defogger.
dishwashing soaps with
degreasers. For liquid cleaners,
use approximately 20 drops per
10-98 Vehicle Care
Fabric/Carpet/Suede 3. Start on the outside edge of the Cleaning High Gloss Surfaces
soil and gently rub toward the and Vehicle Information and
Start by vacuuming the surface
center. Rotate the cleaning cloth Radio Displays
using a soft brush attachment. If a
to a clean area frequently to
rotating brush attachment is being For vehicles with high gloss
prevent forcing the soil in to the
used during vacuuming, only use it surfaces or vehicle displays, use a
fabric.
on the floor carpet. Before cleaning, microfiber cloth to wipe surfaces.
gently remove as much of the soil 4. Continue gently rubbing the Before wiping the surface with the
as possible using one of the soiled area until there is no microfiber cloth, use a soft bristle
following techniques: longer any color transfer from brush to remove dirt that could
the soil to the cleaning cloth. scratch the surface. Then use the
. Gently blot liquids with a paper
towel. Continue blotting until no 5. If the soil is not completely microfiber cloth by gently rubbing to
more soil can be removed. removed, use a mild soap clean. Never use window cleaners
solution followed only by club or solvents. Periodically hand wash
. For solid soils, remove as much the microfiber cloth separately,
soda or plain water.
as possible prior to vacuuming. using mild soap. Do not use bleach
If the soil is not completely or fabric softener. Rinse thoroughly
To clean:
removed, it may be necessary to and air dry before next use.
1. Saturate a clean lint-free use a commercial upholstery
colorfast cloth with water or club cleaner or spot lifter. Test a small Notice: Do not attach a device
soda. Microfiber cloth is hidden area for colorfastness before with a suction cup to the display.
recommended to prevent lint using a commercial upholstery This may cause damage and
transfer to the fabric or carpet. cleaner or spot lifter. If ring would not be covered by the
formation occurs, clean the entire warranty.
2. Remove excess moisture by
gently wringing until water does fabric or carpet.
not drip from the cleaning cloth. Following the cleaning process, a
paper towel can be used to blot
excess moisture.
Vehicle Care 10-99
Instrument Panel, Leather, Do not use cleaners that increase Care of Safety Belts
Vinyl, & Other Plastic Surfaces gloss, especially on the instrument
Keep belts clean and dry.
panel. Reflected glare can decrease
Use a soft microfiber cloth visibility through the windshield
dampened with water to remove
dust and loose dirt. For a more
under certain conditions. { WARNING
thorough cleaning, use a soft Notice: Use of air fresheners may Do not bleach or dye safety belts.
microfiber cloth dampened with a cause permanent damage to It may severely weaken them. In
mild soap solution. plastics and painted surfaces. a crash, they might not be able to
If an air freshener comes in provide adequate protection.
Notice: Soaking or saturating contact with any plastic or
leather, especially perforated Clean safety belts only with mild
painted surface in the vehicle, soap and lukewarm water.
leather, as well as other interior blot immediately and clean with a
surfaces, may cause permanent soft cloth dampened with a mild
damage. Wipe excess moisture
from these surfaces after
soap solution. Damage caused by Floor Mats
air fresheners would not be
cleaning and allow them to dry covered by the vehicle warranty.
naturally. Never use heat, steam, { WARNING
spot lifters, or spot removers. Do
not use cleaners that contain If a floor mat is the wrong size or
silicone or wax-based products. is not properly installed, it can
Cleaners containing these interfere with the pedals.
solvents can permanently change Interference with the pedals can
the appearance and feel of leather cause unintended acceleration
or soft trim and are not and/or increased stopping
recommended. distance which can cause a crash
and injury. Make sure the floor
mat does not interfere with the
pedals.
10-100 Vehicle Care
Use the following guidelines for

proper floor mat usage.
. The original equipment floor
mats were designed for the
vehicle. If the floor mats need
replacing, it is recommended
that GM certified floor mats be
purchased. Non-GM floor mats
may not fit properly and may
interfere with the pedals. Always
check that the floor mats do not
interfere with the pedals.
. Use the floor mat with the
correct side up. Do not turn
it over.
. Do not place anything on top of
the driver side floor mat.
. Use only a single floor mat on
the driver side.
. Do not place one floor mat on
top of another.
Service and Maintenance 11-1
Service and General Information transportation, and online

scheduling to assist with service
Maintenance This maintenance section applies to
vehicles with a gasoline engine. For
needs.
Your dealer recognizes the
diesel engine vehicles, see the
importance of providing
General Information maintenance schedule section in
competitively priced maintenance
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 the Duramax diesel supplement.
and repair services. With trained
Your vehicle is an important technicians, the dealer is the place
Maintenance Schedule investment. This section describes for routine maintenance such as oil
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-3 the required maintenance for the changes and tire rotations and
Special Application Services vehicle. Follow this schedule to help additional maintenance items like
Special Application protect against major repair tires, brakes, batteries, and wiper
Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 expenses resulting from neglect or blades.
inadequate maintenance. It may
Additional Maintenance Notice: Damage caused by
also help to maintain the value of
improper maintenance can lead to
and Care the vehicle if it is sold. It is the
costly repairs and may not be
Additional Maintenance responsibility of the owner to have
covered by the vehicle warranty.
and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9 all required maintenance performed.
Maintenance intervals, checks,
Recommended Fluids, Your dealer has trained technicians inspections, recommended fluids,
Lubricants, and Parts who can perform required and lubricants are important to
Recommended Fluids and maintenance using genuine keep the vehicle in good working
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12 replacement parts. They have condition.
Maintenance Replacement up-to-date tools and equipment for
The Tire Rotation and Required
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15 fast and accurate diagnostics. Many
Services are the responsibility of the
dealers have extended evening and
Maintenance Records vehicle owner. It is recommended to
Saturday hours, courtesy
Maintenance Records . . . . . . 11-16 have your dealer perform these
services every 12 000 km/7,500 mi.
11-2 Service and Maintenance
Proper vehicle maintenance helps to The Additional Required Services -

keep the vehicle in good working Severe are for vehicles that are: { WARNING
condition, improves fuel economy, . Mainly driven in heavy city traffic
and reduces vehicle emissions. Performing maintenance work can
in hot weather. be dangerous and can cause
Because of the way people use . Mainly driven in hilly or serious injury. Perform
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. mountainous terrain. maintenance work only if the
There may need to be more required information, proper tools,
frequent checks and services. The . Frequently towing a trailer.
and equipment are available.
Additional Required Services - . Used for high speed or If they are not, see your dealer to
Normal are for vehicles that: competitive driving. have a trained technician do the
. Carry passengers and cargo . Used for taxi, police, or delivery work. See Doing Your Own
within recommended limits on service. Service Work on page 103.
the Tire and Loading Information
label. See Vehicle Load Limits Refer to the information in the
on page 915. Maintenance Schedule Additional
Required Services - Severe chart.
. Are driven on reasonable road
surfaces within legal driving
limits.
. Use the recommended fuel. See
Recommended Fuel on
page 969.
Refer to the information in the
Maintenance Schedule Additional
Required Services - Normal chart.

. Check engine coolant level. See
Maintenance for more than a year. The engine oil
and filter must be changed at least Engine Coolant on page 1018.
Schedule once a year and the oil life system . Check windshield washer fluid
must be reset. Your trained dealer level. See Washer Fluid on
Owner Checks and Services technician can perform this work. page 1024.
At Each Fuel Stop If the engine oil life system is reset
accidentally, service the vehicle
. Visually inspect windshield wiper
. Check the engine oil level. See within 5 000 km/3,000 mi since the blades for wear, cracking,
Engine Oil on page 106. last service. Reset the oil life or contamination. See Exterior
system when the oil is changed. Care on page 1093. Replace
Once a Month worn or damaged wiper blades.
See Engine Oil Life System on
. Check the tire inflation page 109. See Wiper Blade Replacement
pressures. See Tire Pressure on on page 1035.
page 1056. Tire Rotation and Required . Check tire inflation pressures.
. Inspect the tires for wear. See Services Every 12 000 km/ See Tire Pressure on
Tire Inspection on page 1062. 7,500 mi page 1056.
. Check the windshield washer Rotate the tires, if recommended for . Inspect tire wear. See Tire
fluid level. See Washer Fluid on the vehicle, and perform the Inspection on page 1062.
page 1024. following services. See Tire .
Rotation on page 1063. Visually check for fluid leaks.
Engine Oil Change . Inspect engine air cleaner filter.
. Check engine oil level and oil
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL life percentage. If needed, See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on
SOON message displays, have the change engine oil and filter, and page 1016.
engine oil and filter changed within reset oil life system. See Engine . Inspect brake system.
the next 1 000 km/600 mi. If driven Oil on page 106 and Engine Oil
under the best conditions, the Life System on page 109.
engine oil life system might not
indicate the need for vehicle service

. Visually inspect steering, . Check parking brake and
suspension, and chassis automatic transmission park
components for damaged, loose, mechanism. See Park Brake and
or missing parts or signs of P (Park) Mechanism Check on
wear. See Exterior Care on page 1034.
page 1093. . Check accelerator pedal for
. Check restraint system damage, high effort, or binding.
components. See Safety System Replace if needed.
Check on page 320. . Visually inspect gas strut for
. Visually inspect fuel system for signs of wear, cracks, or other
damage or leaks. damage. Check the hold open
. Visually inspect exhaust system ability of the strut. See your
and nearby heat shields for dealer if service is required.
loose or damaged parts. . Inspect sunroof track and seal,
. Lubricate body components. See if equipped. See Sunroof (Crew
Exterior Care on page 1093. Cab) on page 221 or Sunroof
(Extended Cab) on page 220.
. Check starter switch. See Starter .
Switch Check on page 1033. Check hybrid low pressure
coolant level, if equipped.
. Check automatic transmission
shift lock control function. See
. Verify spare tire key lock
Automatic Transmission Shift operation and lubricate as
Lock Control Function Check on needed. See Tire Changing on
page 1033. page 1073.
. Check ignition transmission lock.
See Ignition Transmission Lock
Check on page 1034.

Footnotes Maintenance
Schedule Additional Required
Services Normal
(1) Check all fuel and vapor lines
and hoses for proper hook-up,
routing, and condition. Check that
the purge valve, if the vehicle has
one, works properly. Replace as
needed.
(2) Or every four years, whichever
comes first.
(3) Do not directly power wash the
transfer case output seals. High
pressure water can overcome the
seals and contaminate the transfer
case fluid. Contaminated fluid will
decrease the life of the transfer
case and should be replaced.
(4) Or every five years, whichever
comes first. See Cooling System on
page 1017.
(5) Or every 10 years, whichever
comes first.
(6) Inspect for fraying, excessive
cracking, or damage; replace,
if needed.

Footnotes Maintenance (5) Or every five years, whichever Special Application

Schedule Additional Required comes first. See Cooling System on
Services Severe page 1017. Services
(1) Extreme service. For vehicles (6) Or every 10 years, whichever . Vehicles with Dual Wheels:
mainly driven off-road in four-wheel comes first. Check dual wheel nut torque at
drive or used in farming, mining, 160 km/100 mi, 1 600 km/
(7) Inspect for fraying, excessive
forestry, Department of Natural 1,000 mi and 9 700 km/6,000 mi.
cracking, or damage; replace,
Resources (DNR), or snow plowing.
if needed. . Severe Commercial Use
(2) Check all fuel and vapor lines Vehicles Only: Lubricate chassis
and hoses for proper hook-up, components every 5 000 km/
routing, and condition. Check that 3,000 mi.
the purge valve, if the vehicle has . Have underbody flushing service
one, works properly. Replace as
performed once a year.
needed.
(3) Or every four years, whichever
comes first.
(4) Do not directly power wash the
transfer case output seals. High
pressure water can overcome the
seals and contaminate the transfer
case fluid. Contaminated fluid will
decrease the life of the transfer
case and should be replaced.
Additional Battery Brakes

The battery supplies power to start Brakes stop the vehicle and are
Maintenance and Care the engine and operate any crucial to safe driving.
Your vehicle is an important additional electrical accessories. . Signs of brake wear may include
investment and caring for it properly . To avoid breakdown or failure to chirping, grinding, or squealing
may help to avoid future costly start the vehicle, maintain a noises, or difficulty stopping.
repairs. To maintain vehicle battery with full cranking power. . Trained dealer technicians have
performance, additional
maintenance services may be . Trained dealer technicians have access to tools and equipment
required. It is recommended that the diagnostic equipment to test to inspect the brakes and
your dealer perform these services the battery and ensure that the recommend quality parts
their trained dealer technicians connections and cables are engineered for the vehicle.
know your vehicle best. Your dealer corrosionfree.
Fluids
can also perform a thorough Belts
assessment with a multipoint Proper fluid levels and approved
inspection to recommend when your . Belts may need replacing if they fluids protect the vehicles systems
vehicle may need attention. The squeak or show signs of and components. See
following list is intended to explain cracking or splitting. Recommended Fluids and
the services and conditions to look . Trained dealer technicians can Lubricants on page 1112 for GM
for that may indicate services are inspect the belts and approved fluids.
required. recommend replacement when . Engine oil and windshield
necessary. washer fluid levels should be
checked at every fuel fill.
. Instrument cluster lights may
come on to indicate that fluids
may be low and need to be
filled.
Hoses Shocks and Struts rubber; cracks or cuts in the

Hoses transport fluids and should Shocks and struts help aid in control tread or sidewall; or a bulge or
be regularly inspected to ensure for a smoother ride. split in the tire.
that there are no cracks or leaks. . Signs of wear may include
. Trained dealer technicians can
With a multipoint inspection, your steering wheel vibration, bounce/ inspect and recommend the right
dealer can inspect the hoses and sway while braking, longer tires. Your dealer can also
advise if replacement is needed. stopping distance, or uneven provide tire/wheel balancing
tire wear. services to ensure smooth
Lamps vehicle operation at all speeds.
Properly working headlamps, . As part of the multipoint Your dealer sells and services
taillamps, and brake lamps are inspection, trained dealer name brand tires.
important to see and be seen on technicians can visually inspect
the road. the shocks and struts for signs Vehicle Care
of leaking, blown seals, To help keep the vehicle looking like
. Signs that the headlamps need or damage, and can advise
attention include dimming, failure new, vehicle care products are
when service is needed. available from your dealer. For
to light, cracking, or damage.
The brake lamps need to be Tires information on how to clean and
checked periodically to ensure protect the vehicles interior and
Tires need to be properly inflated, exterior, see Interior Care on
that they light when braking. rotated, and balanced. Maintaining page 1096 and Exterior Care on
. With a multipoint inspection, the tires can save money, fuel, and page 1093.
your dealer can check the lamps can reduce the risk of tire failure.
and note any concerns. . Signs that the tires need to be
replaced include three or more
visible treadwear indicators; cord
or fabric showing through the
Wheel Alignment Wiper Blades

Wheel alignment is critical for Wiper blades need to be cleaned
ensuring that the tires deliver and kept in good condition to
optimal wear and performance. provide a clear view.
. Signs that the alignment may . Signs of wear include streaking,
need to be adjusted include skipping across the windshield,
pulling, improper vehicle and worn or split rubber.
handling, or unusual tire wear. . Trained dealer technicians can
. Your dealer has the required check the wiper blades and
equipment to ensure proper replace them when needed.
wheel alignment.
Windshield
For safety, appearance, and the
best viewing, keep the windshield
clean and clear.
. Signs of damage include
scratches, cracks, and chips.
. Trained dealer technicians can
inspect the windshield and
recommend proper replacement
if needed.
Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
This maintenance section applies to vehicles with a gasoline engine. If the vehicle has a diesel engine and/or an
Allison Transmission, see the maintenance schedule section in the Duramax diesel supplement.
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Engine Oil Use only engine oil licensed to the dexos1 specfication, or equivalent, of
the proper SAE viscosity grade. ACDelco dexos1 Synthetic Blend is
recommended. See Engine Oil on page 106.
Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL coolant.
See Engine Coolant on page 1018.
Hydraulic Brake System DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 12377967, in
Canada 89021320).
Hydraulic Clutch System DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 12377967, in
Canada 89021320).
Windshield Washer Automotive windshield washer fluid that meets regional freeze protection
requirements.
Power Steering System GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part No. 89021184, in Canada 89021186).
Automatic Transmission DEXRON-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Manual Transmission Synchromesh Transmission Fluid (GM Part No. 12345349, in
Canada 10953465).
Key Lock Cylinders Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Floor Shift Linkage Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. 89021668, in Canada 89021674)
or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2 Category LB or GC-LB.
Chassis Lubrication Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) or
lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Front Axle (1500 Series)- Four-Wheel SAE 80W-90 Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 89021671, in
Drive Canada 89021672).
Front Axle (1500, 2500 HD, and SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 89021677, in
3500 HD Series) Canada 89021678).
Rear Axle SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 89021677, in
Canada 89021678).
Transfer Case (Four-Wheel Drive) DEXRON-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Front Axle Propshaft Spline or Spline Lubricant, Special Lubricant (GM Part No. 12345879, in
One-Piece Propshaft Spline Canada 10953511).
(Two-Wheel Drive with 4-Speed Auto.
Trans.)
Rear Driveline Center Spline Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) or
lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Hood Hinges Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Body Door Hinge Pins, Tailgate Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, in
Hinge and Linkage, and Fuel Door Canada 10953474).
Hinge
Tailgate Handle Pivot Points, Hinges, Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, in
Latch Bolt, and Linkage Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip Conditioning Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) or
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 10953481).
Weatherstrip Squeaks Synthetic Grease with Teflon, Superlube (GM Part No. 12371287, in
Canada 10953437).
Maintenance Replacement Parts

Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see the Duramax diesel supplement for more information.
Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Standard Filter 15908916* A3086C*
High Capacity Filter 15908915 A3085C
Oil Filter
4.3L V6 25010792 PF47
4.8L V8; 5.3L V8; 6.0L V8; 6.2L V8 89017524 PF48
Spark Plugs
4.3L V6 12568387 41-101
4.8L V8; 5.3L V8; 6.0L V8; 6.2L V8 12621258 41-110
Wiper Blades 55.0 cm (21.6 in) 25877402
*15908915 (A3085C) high-capacity air cleaner filter may be substituted.
Maintenance Records
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.
Odometer
Date Serviced By Services Performed
Reading
Odometer
Reading
Odometer
Reading
Technical Data 12-1
Technical Data Vehicle Identification Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN is
Vehicle Identification the engine code. This code
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) identifies the vehicle's engine,
Vehicle Identification specifications, and replacement
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 parts. See Engine Specifications
Service Parts Identification under Capacities and Specifications
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 on page 122 for the vehicle's
engine code.
Vehicle Data
Capacities and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Service Parts
Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-6 Identification Label
This label, on the inside of the glove
box, has the following information:
. Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN).
. Model designation.
This legal identifier is in the front . Paint information.
corner of the instrument panel, on .
the left side of the vehicle. It can be Production options and special
seen through the windshield from equipment.
outside. The VIN also appears on Do not remove this label from the
the Vehicle Certification and Service vehicle.
Parts labels and certificates of title
and registration.
12-2 Technical Data
Vehicle Data
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 1112 for more information.
If the vehicle has a diesel engine, see the Duramax diesel supplement for more information.
Capacities
Application
Metric English
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
amount, see the refrigerant label located under the
hood. See your dealer for more information.
Cooling System
4.3L V6 1500 Series 15.6 L 16.5 qt
4.8L V8 1500 Series 16.0 L 16.9 qt
5.3L V8 1500 Series 16.0 L 16.9 qt
6.0L V8 2500 Series and 3500 Series 15.5 L 16.4 qt
6.2L V8 1500 Series 15.9 L 16.8 qt
Technical Data 12-3
Capacities
Application
Metric English
Engine Oil with Filter
4.3L V6 4.3 L 4.5 qt
4.8L V8; 5.3L V8; 6.0L V8; 6.2L V8 5.7 L 6.0 qt
Fuel Tank
1500 Series Standard and Short Box 98.4 L 26.0 gal
1500 Series Long Box 128.7 L 34.0 gal
2500 Series and 3500 Series Standard Box 136.3 L 36.0 gal
2500 Series and 3500 Series Long Box 136.3 L 36.0 gal
3500 Series Chassis Cab 240.4 L 63.5 gal
3500 Chassis Cab Front Tank 89.0 L 23.5 gal
3500 Chassis Cab Rear Tank (if equipped) 151.4 L 40.0 gal
Transfer Case Fluid 1.5 L 1.6 qt
12-4 Technical Data
Capacities
Application
Metric English
Transmission Fluid - Automatic (Pan Removal and Filter Replacement)
4-Speed Transmission 4L60-E Electronic Transmission 4.7 L 5.0 qt
6-Speed Transmission 6L80-E 5.7 L 6.0 qt
6-Speed Transmission 6L90-E 6.0 L 6.3 qt
6-Speed Transmission Allison 7.0 L 7.4 qt
Transmission Fluid - Manual (Drain and Refill)
1500 Series 4.4 L 4.6 qt
3500 Series 3.5 L 3.7 qt
Wheel Nut Torque 190 Y 140 ft lb
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
Technical Data 12-5
Engine Specifications
Engine VIN Code Spark Plug Gap
4.3L V6 (LU3) X 1.52 mm (0.060 in)
4.8L V8 (L20) A 1.02 mm (0.040 in)
5.3L V8 FlexFuel with Active Fuel Management (Iron 0 1.02 mm (0.040 in)
Block) (LMG)
5.3L V8 FlexFuel with Active Fuel Management(Aluminum 7 1.02 mm (0.040 in)
Block) (LC9)
6.0L V8 FlexFuel with Active Fuel Management(Aluminum J 1.02 mm (0.040 in)
Block)(LZ1)
6.0L V8 (Iron Block) (L96) G 1.02 mm (0.040 in)
6.2L V8 FlexFuel (Aluminum Block) (L9H) 2 1.02 mm (0.040 in)
12-6 Technical Data
Engine Drive Belt Routing
V8 Engines
V6 Engines If the vehicle has a diesel engine,
see the Duramax diesel supplement
for more information.
information.
Customer Information 13-1
Customer Roadside Assistance Program Reporting Safety Defects

(Mexico) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 Reporting Safety Defects to
Information Roadside Assistance the United States
Program (U.S. and Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11 Reporting Safety Defects to
Customer Information Scheduling Service the Canadian
Customer Satisfaction Appointments (U.S. and Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
Procedure (U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12 Reporting Safety Defects to
Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2 Courtesy Transportation General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
Customer Satisfaction Program (U.S. and
Procedure (Mexico) . . . . . . . . 13-4 Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13 Vehicle Data Recording and
Customer Assistance Offices Collision Damage Repair Privacy
(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . . 13-5 (U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . 13-14 Vehicle Data Recording and
Customer Assistance Offices Service Publications Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19
(Mexico) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-16 Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-19
Customer Assistance for Text OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20
Telephone (TTY) Users (U.S. Navigation System . . . . . . . . . 13-20
and Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6 Radio Frequency
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-6 Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-20
GM Mobility Reimbursement Radio Frequency
Program (U.S. and Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20
Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
13-2 Customer Information
Customer Information STEP TWO: If after contacting a

member of dealership management,
When contacting Chevrolet,
remember that your concern will
it appears your concern cannot be likely be resolved at a dealer's
Customer Satisfaction resolved by your dealership without facility. That is why we suggest
Procedure (U.S. and further help, in the U.S., call the following Step One first.
Canada) Chevrolet Customer Assistance STEP THREE U.S. Owners:
Center at 1-800-222-1020. In Both General Motors and your
Your satisfaction and goodwill are Canada, call General Motors of
important to your dealer and to dealer are committed to making
Canada Customer Care Centre at sure you are completely satisfied
Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns 1-800-263-3777 (English),
with the sales transaction or the with your new vehicle. However,
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). if you continue to remain unsatisfied
operation of the vehicle will be
resolved by your dealer's sales or We encourage you to call the after following the procedure
service departments. Sometimes, toll-free number in order to give your outlined in Steps One and Two, you
however, despite the best intentions inquiry prompt attention. Have the can file with the Better Business
of all concerned, misunderstandings following information available to Bureau (BBB) Auto Line Program
can occur. If your concern has not give the Customer Assistance to enforce your rights.
been resolved to your satisfaction, representative: The BBB Auto Line Program is an
the following steps should be taken: . Vehicle Identification out-of-court program administered
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern Number (VIN). This is available by the Council of Better Business
with a member of dealership from the vehicle registration or Bureaus to settle automotive
management. Normally, concerns title, or the plate at the top left of disputes regarding vehicle repairs or
can be quickly resolved at that level. the instrument panel and visible the interpretation of the New Vehicle
If the matter has already been through the windshield. Limited Warranty. Although you may
reviewed with the sales, service, . Dealership name and location. be required to resort to this informal
or parts manager, contact the owner dispute resolution program prior to
. Vehicle delivery date and filing a court action, use of the
of your dealership or the general
present mileage. program is free of charge and your
manager.
case will generally be heard within
40 days. If you do not agree with the STEP THREE Canadian For further information concerning
decision given in your case, you Owners: In the event that you do eligibility in the Canadian Motor
may reject it and proceed with any not feel your concerns have been Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),
other venue for relief available addressed after following the call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call
to you. procedure outlined in Steps One the General Motors Customer Care
You may contact the BBB Auto Line and Two, General Motors of Canada Centre, 1-800-263-3777 (English),
Program using the toll-free Limited wants you to be aware of its 1-800-263-7854 (French),
telephone number or write them at participation in a no-charge or write to:
the following address: Mediation/Arbitration Program. The Mediation/Arbitration Program
General Motors of Canada Limited c/o Customer Care Centre
BBB Auto Line Program has committed to binding arbitration
Council of Better Business Bureaus, General Motors of Canada Limited
of owner disputes involving Mail Code: CA1-163-005
Inc. factory-related vehicle service
4200 Wilson Boulevard 1908 Colonel Sam Drive
claims. The program provides for Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Suite 800 the review of the facts involved by
Arlington, VA 22203-1838 an impartial third party arbiter, and Your inquiry should be accompanied
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100 may include an informal hearing by the Vehicle Identification
www.dr.bbb.org/goauto before the arbiter. The program is Number (VIN).
designed so that the entire dispute
This program is available in all settlement process, from the time
50 states and the District of you file your complaint to the final
Columbia. Eligibility is limited by decision, should be completed in
vehicle age, mileage, and other about 70 days. We believe our
factors. General Motors reserves impartial program offers advantages
the right to change eligibility over courts in most jurisdictions
limitations and/or discontinue its because it is informal, quick, and
participation in this program. free of charge.
Customer Satisfaction the good intentions of all parties STEP THREE

involved, sometimes a
Procedure (Mexico) misunderstanding may occur.
If your case is not resolved in a
reasonable amount of time by your
If you have a problem that has not dealer, please call the General
been satisfactorily handled through Motors Customer Assistance
the normal means, we suggest the Center (CAC) and provide the
following steps: following information:
STEP ONE . Name
Explain your case to your dealer . Address
Did you get the Warranty Extension service agent, service manager, . Phone number
Plan? This plan is recommended by dealer sales agent, or sales
General Motors to supplement the manager, depending on your case.
. Model year
warranty included with the new . Brand
vehicle purchase. Make sure that they have all
necessary information. They are . Vehicle Identification
See your dealer for details. interested in your continual Number (VIN)
satisfaction.
Customer Assistance . Mileage
Procedure STEP TWO . Delivery date
Owner satisfaction and goodwill are If you are not satisfied, please . Description of the problem
very important to your dealer and contact the general manager or your
. Dealership name
General Motors. dealership owner to ask for their
help. If they are not able to resolve . Dealership address
Normally, any problem with the
your case, ask them to contact the
transaction, sale, or usage of the See Customer Assistance Offices
right people at General Motors for
vehicle must be handled by your (U.S. and Canada) on page 135 or
support, if needed.
dealer sales or service departments. Customer Assistance Offices
However, we recognize that despite (Mexico) on page 135.
Customer Assistance Canada All e-mail inquiries to the Customer

Assistance Center (CAC) should be
Offices (U.S. and Canada) General Motors of Canada Limited
sent to: [email protected].
Customer Care Centre, Mail Code:
Chevrolet encourages customers to
CA1-163-005 Mexico
call the toll-free number for
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
assistance. However, if a customer From Mexico City
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
wishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet,
www.gm.ca 5329-0811
the letter should be addressed to:
1-800-263-3777 (English) From Other Mexico Locations
United States and Puerto Rico 1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text 01-800-466-0811
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Telephone devices (TTYs)) United States and Canada
Center Roadside Assistance:
P.O. Box 33170 1-800-268-6800 1-866-466-8190
Detroit, MI 48232-5170 Overseas Costa Rica
www.Chevrolet.com
Please contact the local General 00-800-052-1005
1-800-222-1020
Motors Business Unit. Guatemala
1-800-833-2438 (For Text
Telephone Devices (TTYs)) 1-800-999-5252
Roadside Assistance: Customer Assistance
1-800-243-8872 Offices (Mexico) Panama
From U.S. Virgin Islands: To contact the Customer Assistance 00-800-052-0001
1-800-496-9994 Center (CAC), use the phone
numbers listed in this section. Dominican Republic
Customer assistance is available 1-888-751-5301
Monday through Friday, 08:00 to
20:00 hours, and Saturdays from
08:00 to 15:00 hours.
El Salvador Online Owner Center D (Preferred Dealer

800-6273 Information): Select a preferred
Online Owner Experience dealer and view dealer location,
Honduras (U.S.) my.chevrolet.com maps, phone numbers, and hours.
800-0122-6101 The Chevrolet online owner J (Warranty Tracking
experience is a one-stop resource Information): Track the vehicles
Customer Assistance for that allows interaction with warranty information.
Chevrolet and keeps important
Text Telephone (TTY) vehicle-specific information in one J (Recall Information): View
Users (U.S. and Canada) place. active recalls or search by Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN). See
To assist customers who are deaf, Membership Benefits Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
hard of hearing, or speech-impaired on page 121.
and who use Text Telephones E (Vehicle Information):
(TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY Download owner manuals and view H (Other Account Information):
equipment available at its Customer vehicle-specific how-to videos. View GM Card, SiriusXM Satellite
Assistance Center. Any TTY user in G (Maintenance Information): radio, and OnStar account
the U.S. can communicate with View maintenance schedules, information.
Chevrolet by dialing: required alerts, OnStar onboard F (Live Chat Support): Chat live
1-800-833-2438. TTY users in vehicle diagnostic information, and with online help representatives.
Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830. schedule service appointments. Visit my.chevrolet.com to register
I (Service History): View your vehicle.
printable dealer-recorded service
records and self-recorded service
records.
Chevrolet Owner Centre GM Mobility General Motors of Canada also has

(Canada) chevroletowner.ca a Mobility Program. Call
Reimbursement Program 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for
Take a trip to the Chevrolet Owner (U.S. and Canada) details. TTY users call
Centre: 1-800-263-3830.
. Chat live with online help
representatives. Roadside Assistance
. Use the Vehicle Tools section. Program (Mexico)
. Access third party enthusiast As a new owner, your vehicle is
sites and social media networks. automatically enrolled in the
. Locate owner resources such as Roadside Assistance program. The
This program is available to services are available at no cost
lease-end, financing, and qualified applicants for cost
warranty information. under the terms and conditions of
reimbursement of eligible the program. The Roadside
. Retrieve your favorite articles, aftermarket adaptive equipment Assistance program is not part of,
quizzes, tips, and multimedia required for the vehicle, such as or included, in the coverage
galleries organized into the hand controls or a wheelchair/ provided by the New Vehicle Limited
Features and Auto Care scooter lift for the vehicle. Warranty.
Sections. For more information on the limited Roadside Assistance provides
. Download the owner manual for offer, visit www.gmmobility.com or assistance to the driver and
your vehicle, quickly and easily. call the GM Mobility Assistance passengers while driving the vehicle
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text within your city of residence or on
. Find the Telephone (TTY) users, call
Chevrolet-recommended any passable road in Mexico, the
1-800-833-9935. United States, and Canada.
maintenance services for your
vehicle. Services are subject to the
limitations described in the following This service is limited to the

. Emergency Towing: Tow to the
pages. Program coverage varies by transfer of the vehicle to the nearest dealer for warranty
country. repair facility. service if the vehicle cannot be
driven.
Roadside Assistance is available . Emergency Fuel Delivery:
24 hours a day, 365 days of Delivery of enough fuel for the If the vehicle is involved in an
the year. vehicle to get to the nearest accident during the commission
service station. of a crime, administrative
This program expires two years violation, or breach of traffic
from the date of the invoice for the . Lock-Out Service: Service to regulations, Roadside
vehicle, regardless of vehicle unlock the vehicle if you are Assistance will not provide
mileage and changes in vehicle locked out. service. When the vehicle is not
ownership. . Battery Jump Start: Service to accessible to be towed, all
For more information about the jump start a dead battery. maneuvers required to access it
renewal of this program at the end will be at the owner's expense.
. *Emergency Messages:
of its term, contact the Chevrolet Transmission of urgent phone If the vehicle is in another city
Customer Assistance Center at messages. outside of your residence,
01-800-466-0800. Roadside Assistance is limited
. *Emergency Calls: Call for
Services Provided to moving the vehicle to the
emergency services.
nearest dealer. If you would like
. Flat Tire Change: If unable to . *Dealership Location the vehicle moved to a different
change a flat tire, Roadside Assistance: Information dealer, you will be asked to
Assistance will provide towing regarding addresses and cover the difference in cost at
service to the nearest authorized telephone numbers for Chevrolet the time of the move.
Chevrolet dealership. It is the dealers.
owner's responsibility for the If the vehicle cannot be received
repair or replacement of the tire. by the nearest Chevrolet dealer
due to scheduling conflicts, the
vehicle will be taken to a safe
place where it will remain for up
to 48 hours until it can be taken for these services, you must pay availability at the chosen
to the dealer. If the storage costs the difference at the time of destination. Restrictions apply
exceed the amount authorized, service. based on vehicle specifications.
the owner is responsible to pay Roadside Assistance will If you are on the road, taxi
the difference at the time of coordinate hotel service to the nearest bus
service. Contact Roadside accommodations for all vehicle station or airport will be
Assistance for more information travelers for up to two nights. provided.
on authorized amounts.
A rental car will be provided for . *Complimentary
. *Trip Interruption: This service up to two days and the vehicle Transportation for Vehicle Pick
is provided if you are prevented must be returned to its original Up: Transportation to pick up
from further usage of your destination, excluding vehicles your vehicle after repairs are
vehicle while traveling and it is with a carrying capacity greater complete. Once the dealer has
not possible for the nearest than 3.5 tons. reported that the vehicle has
Chevrolet dealership to repair been repaired, Roadside
the vehicle the same day, Complimentary Transportation: If
you prefer to continue your trip Assistance will provide bus or
requiring the vehicle to stay at commercial airline one-way
the dealership for a night or to the intended destination or
return to your place of service (subject to availability)
more. If this happens, in addition for the person designated by you
to the previously listed services residence, and the trip requires
more than eight hours driving on to collect your vehicle at the
and prior to confirmation by the dealership's location if you or the
dealership, you are entitled to the road, transportation for the
driver and passengers by first designated person are not in the
choose one of the following same town or city as the
alternatives, within the limits of class bus or coach commercial
airline will be provided to a dealership.
existing Roadside Assistance
program guidelines. If the costs location chosen by Roadside *These services are not provided for
exceed the amount authorized Assistance, depending on U.S. or Canada residents. All
services provided in the U.S. and
Canada are at the owner's expense

. Acts of terrorism, riot or uproar, Routine vehicle repair costs are not
and will be reimbursed by Roadside armed forces or police actions covered by the Roadside
Assistance. which prevent timely delivery of Assistance program. For more
assistance services. information, see your new vehicle
Services Not Included in Roadside warranty.
Assistance
. Food service, beverages,
telephone calls, or other extra Contacting Roadside Assistance
Roadside Assistance does not costs. Accommodation costs
cover or reimburse services for the apply only to Mexico per the Roadside Assistance services are of
following: terms and conditions of the no cost to you and available
. Events caused by fraud or bad Roadside Assistance program. 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
faith by the driver. Costs are only incurred in situations
. Any damage to the vehicle that exceed the limits of the
. Vehicle immobilization situations without intent, derived from the program, some of which are listed
due to a major force or services provided. previously in this section.
unforeseen circumstances, such . Cost of towing a trailer when
as natural phenomena of an To contact Roadside Assistance by
choosing a Chevrolet dealer that phone, use the following numbers:
extraordinary nature, is nearest to the temporary
earthquakes, volcanic eruptions, storage facility for the disabled Mexico
and other cyclonic storms. vehicle. 01-800-466-0800
. Vehicle immobilization situations . Cost of all maneuvers required
arising from car accidents United States
to access the vehicle when it is
caused by the driver of the not available to be towed. 1-866-466-8901
vehicle or third parties. This
means any occurrence that
. Cost of fuel provided. Canada
causes physical injury to the 1-800-268-6800
occupants and/or the vehicle
caused by external forces. E-mail
[email protected]
Chevrolet reserves the right to make

. Location of the vehicle. Chevrolet and General Motors of
any changes or discontinue the . Model, year, color, and license Canada Limited reserve the right to
Roadside Assistance program at plate number of the vehicle. limit services or payment to an
any time without notification. owner or driver if they decide the
. Odometer reading, Vehicle claims are made too often, or the
Identification Number (VIN), and
Roadside Assistance delivery date of the vehicle.
same type of claim is made many
times.
Program (U.S. and . Description of the problem.
Canada) Services Provided
Coverage . Emergency Fuel Delivery:
For U.S.-purchased vehicles, call
1-800-243-8872; (Text Telephone Services are provided up to 5 years/ Delivery of enough fuel for the
(TTY): 1-888-889-2438). 160 000 km (100,000 mi), whichever vehicle to get to the nearest
comes first. service station.
For Canadian-purchased vehicles,
call 1-800-268-6800. In the U.S., anyone driving the . Lock-Out Service: Service to
vehicle is covered. In Canada, a unlock the vehicle if you are
Service is available 24 hours a day, person driving the vehicle without locked out. A remote unlock may
365 days a year. permission from the owner is not be available if you have OnStar.
Calling for Assistance covered. For security reasons, the driver
must present identification
When calling Roadside Assistance, Roadside Assistance is not a part of
before this service is given.
have the following information the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
ready: Chevrolet and General Motors of . Emergency Tow from a Public
Canada Limited reserve the right to Road or Highway: Tow to the
. Your name, home address, and make any changes or discontinue nearest Chevrolet dealer for
home telephone number. the Roadside Assistance program at warranty service, or if the vehicle
. Telephone number of your any time without notification. was in a crash and cannot be
location. driven. Assistance is also given
when the vehicle is stuck in the
sand, mud, or snow.

. Flat Tire Change: Service to Services Specific to
. Alternative Service: If
change a flat tire with the spare Canadian-Purchased Vehicles assistance cannot be provided
tire. The spare tire, if equipped, right away, the Roadside
must be in good condition and . Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement Assistance advisor may give
properly inflated. It is the owner's is approximately $5 Canadian. permission to get local
responsibility for the repair or Diesel fuel delivery may be emergency road service. You will
replacement of the tire if it is not restricted. Propane and other receive payment, up to $100,
covered by the warranty. fuels are not provided through after sending the original receipt
this service. to Roadside Assistance.
. Battery Jump Start: Service to
jump start a dead battery. . Lock-Out Service: Vehicle Mechanical failures may be
registration is required. covered, however any cost for
Services Not Included in parts and labor for repairs not
. Trip Interruption Benefits and covered by the warranty are the
Roadside Assistance
Assistance: Must be over owner responsibility.
. Impound towing caused by 250 kilometers from where your
violation of any laws. trip was started to qualify.
General Motors of Canada
Scheduling Service
. Legal fines. Appointments (U.S. and
Limited requires
. Mounting, dismounting, pre-authorization, original Canada)
or changing of snow tires, detailed receipts, and a copy of
chains, or other traction devices. the repair orders. Once When the vehicle requires warranty
authorization has been received, service, contact your dealer and
. Towing or services for vehicles request an appointment. By
driven on a non-public road or the Roadside Assistance advisor
will help to make arrangements scheduling a service appointment
highway. and advising the service consultant
and explain how to receive
payment. of your transportation needs, your
dealer can help minimize your
inconvenience.
If the vehicle cannot be scheduled Several Courtesy Transportation destination with minimal interruption
into the service department options are available to assist in of your daily schedule. This includes
immediately, keep driving it until it reducing inconvenience when one-way or round-trip shuttle service
can be scheduled for service, warranty repairs are required. within reasonable time and distance
unless, of course, the problem is Courtesy Transportation is not a parameters of your dealer's area.
safety related. If it is, please call part of the New Vehicle Limited
your dealership, let them know this, Public Transportation or Fuel
Warranty. A separate booklet Reimbursement
and ask for instructions. entitled Limited Warranty and
If your dealer requests you to bring Owner Assistance Information If the vehicle requires overnight
the vehicle for service, you are furnished with each new vehicle warranty repairs, and public
urged to do so as early in the work provides detailed warranty coverage transportation is used instead of
your dealer's shuttle service, the
day as possible to allow for information.
same-day repair. expense must be supported by
Transportation Options original receipts and can only be up
to the maximum amount allowed by
Courtesy Transportation Warranty service can generally be GM for shuttle service. In addition,
Program (U.S. and completed while you wait. However,
for U.S. customers, should you
if you are unable to wait, GM helps
Canada) arrange transportation through a
to minimize inconvenience by
friend or relative, limited
To enhance your ownership providing several transportation reimbursement for reasonable fuel
experience, we and our participating options. Depending on the
expenses may be available. Claim
dealers are proud to offer Courtesy circumstances, your dealer can offer
amounts should reflect actual costs
Transportation, a customer support one of the following: and be supported by original
program for vehicles with the Shuttle Service receipts. See your dealer for
Bumper-to-Bumper (Base Warranty information regarding the allowance
Coverage period in Canada), Shuttle service is the preferred
amounts for reimbursement of fuel
extended powertrain, and/or means of offering Courtesy
or other transportation costs.
hybrid-specific warranties in both Transportation. Dealers may provide
the U.S. and Canada. shuttle service to get you to your
Courtesy Rental Vehicle Additional Program repairs diminish the vehicle resale
Your dealer may arrange to provide Information value, and safety performance can
you with a courtesy rental vehicle or be compromised in subsequent
All program options, such as shuttle collisions.
reimburse you for a rental vehicle service, may not be available at
that you obtain if the vehicle is kept every dealer. Please contact your Collision Parts
for an overnight warranty repair. dealer for specific information about
Rental reimbursement will be limited Genuine GM Collision parts are new
availability. All Courtesy
and must be supported by original parts made with the same materials
Transportation arrangements will be
receipts. This requires that you sign and construction methods as the
administered by appropriate dealer
and complete a rental agreement parts with which the vehicle was
personnel.
and meet state/provincial, local, and originally built. Genuine GM
rental vehicle provider requirements. General Motors reserves the right to Collision parts are the best choice to
Requirements vary and may include unilaterally modify, change, ensure that the vehicle's designed
minimum age requirements, or discontinue Courtesy appearance, durability, and safety
insurance coverage, credit card, etc. Transportation at any time and to are preserved. The use of Genuine
You are responsible for fuel usage resolve all questions of claim GM parts can help maintain the GM
charges and may also be eligibility pursuant to the terms and New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
responsible for taxes, levies, usage conditions described herein at its
Recycled original equipment parts
fees, excessive mileage, or rental sole discretion.
may also be used for repair. These
usage beyond the completion of the parts are typically removed from
repair. Collision Damage Repair vehicles that were total losses in
It may not be possible to provide a (U.S. and Canada) prior crashes. In most cases, the
like vehicle as a courtesy rental. parts being recycled are from
If the vehicle is involved in a
undamaged sections of the vehicle.
collision and it is damaged, have the
A recycled original equipment GM
damage repaired by a qualified
part may be an acceptable choice to
technician using the proper
maintain the vehicle's originally
equipment and quality replacement
designed appearance and safety
parts. Poorly performed collision
performance; however, the history of able to recommend a collision repair If the vehicle is leased, the leasing
these parts is not known. Such parts center that has GM-trained company may require you to have
are not covered by the GM New technicians and comparable insurance that ensures repairs with
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any equipment. Genuine GM Original Equipment
related failures are not covered by Manufacturer (OEM) parts or
that warranty. Insuring the Vehicle Genuine Manufacturer replacement
Aftermarket collision parts are also Protect your investment in the GM parts. Read the lease carefully, as
available. These are made by vehicle with comprehensive and you may be charged at the end of
companies other than GM and may collision insurance coverage. There the lease for poor quality repairs.
not have been tested for the vehicle. are significant differences in the
quality of coverage afforded by
If a Crash Occurs
As a result, these parts may fit
poorly, exhibit premature durability/ various insurance policy terms. If there has been an injury, call
corrosion problems, and may not Many insurance policies provide emergency services for help. Do not
perform properly in subsequent reduced protection to the GM leave the scene of a crash until all
collisions. Aftermarket parts are not vehicle by limiting compensation for matters have been taken care of.
covered by the GM New Vehicle damage repairs through the use of Move the vehicle only if its position
Limited Warranty, and any vehicle aftermarket collision parts. Some puts you in danger, or you are
failure related to such parts is not insurance companies will not instructed to move it by a police
covered by that warranty. specify aftermarket collision parts. officer.
When purchasing insurance, we Give only the necessary information
Repair Facility recommend that you ensure that the to police and other parties involved
GM also recommends that you vehicle will be repaired with GM in the crash.
choose a collision repair facility that original equipment collision parts.
If such insurance coverage is not For emergency towing see
meets your needs before you ever Roadside Assistance Program
need collision repairs. Your dealer available from your current
insurance carrier, consider switching (Mexico) on page 137 or Roadside
may have a collision repair center Assistance Program (U.S. and
with GM-trained technicians and to another insurance carrier.
Canada) on page 1311.
stateoftheart equipment, or be
Gather the following information: Managing the Vehicle Damage If another party's insurance
. Driver name, address, and Repair Process company is paying for the repairs,
telephone number. you are not obligated to accept a
In the event that the vehicle requires repair valuation based on that
. Driver license number. damage repairs, GM recommends insurance company's collision policy
.
that you take an active role in its repair limits, as you have no
Owner name, address, and repair. If you have a pre-determined
telephone number. contractual limits with that company.
repair facility of choice, take the In such cases, you can have control
. Vehicle license plate number. vehicle there, or have it towed there. of the repair and parts choices as
Specify to the facility that any long as the cost stays within
. Vehicle make, model, and
required replacement collision parts reasonable limits.
model year.
be original equipment parts, either
. Vehicle Identification new Genuine GM parts or recycled
Number (VIN). original GM parts. Remember,
Service Publications
. Insurance company and policy recycled parts will not be covered by Ordering Information
number. the GM vehicle warranty.
Service Manuals
. General description of the Insurance pays the bill for the repair,
but you must live with the repair. Service Manuals have the diagnosis
damage to the other vehicle. and repair information on the
Depending on your policy limits,
Choose a reputable repair facility your insurance company may engines, transmission, axle,
that uses quality replacement parts. initially value the repair using suspension, brakes, electrical,
See Collision Parts earlier in this aftermarket parts. Discuss this with steering, body, etc.
section. the repair professional, and insist on Service Bulletins
If the airbag has inflated, see What Genuine GM parts. Remember,
if the vehicle is leased, you may be Service Bulletins give additional
Will You See after an Airbag
obligated to have the vehicle technical service information
Inflates? on page 328.
repaired with Genuine GM parts, needed to knowledgeably service
even if your insurance coverage General Motors cars and trucks.
does not pay the full cost.
Each bulletin contains instructions Current and Past Models Reporting Safety
to assist in the diagnosis and
Technical Service Bulletins and Defects
service of the vehicle.
Manuals are available for current
Owner Information and past model GM vehicles.
Reporting Safety Defects
Owner publications are written ORDER TOLL FREE:
specifically for owners and intended 1-800-551-4123 Monday Friday to the United States
to provide basic operational 8:00 AM 6:00 PM Eastern Time Government
information about the vehicle. The For Credit Card Orders Only If you believe that your vehicle
Owner Manual includes the (VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit has a defect which could cause
Maintenance Schedule for all Helm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com.
models.
a crash or could cause injury or
Or write to: death, you should immediately
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, inform the National Highway
Owner Manual, and Warranty Helm, Incorporated
Attention: Customer Service Traffic Safety Administration
Booklet.
47911 Halyard Drive (NHTSA) in addition to notifying
RETAIL SELL PRICE: Plymouth, MI 48170 General Motors.
$35.00 (U.S.) plus handling and
shipping fees. Prices are subject to change without If NHTSA receives similar
notice and without incurring complaints, it may open an
Without Portfolio: Owner obligation. Allow ample time for investigation, and if it finds that
Manual only. delivery. a safety defect exists in a group
RETAIL SELL PRICE: All listed prices are quoted in U.S. of vehicles, it may order a recall
$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling and funds. Make checks payable in U.S. and remedy campaign.
shipping fees. funds. However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual
problems between you, your
dealer, or General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may call Reporting Safety Defects Reporting Safety Defects
the Vehicle Safety Hotline to the Canadian to General Motors
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
Government In addition to notifying NHTSA (or
http://www.safercar.gov; or If you live in Canada, and you Transport Canada) in a situation like
write to: believe that the vehicle has a safety this, notify General Motors.
defect, notify Transport Canada Call 1-800-222-1020, or write:
Administrator, NHTSA immediately, and notify General
1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E. Chevrolet Motor Division
Motors of Canada Limited. Call
Washington, D.C. 20590 Chevrolet Customer Assistance
Transport Canada at
Center
You can also obtain other 1-800-333-0510 or write to:
P.O. Box 33170
information about motor Transport Canada Detroit, MI 48232-5170
vehicle safety from Road Safety Branch
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777
http://www.safercar.gov. 80 rue Noel
(English) or 1-800-263-7854
Gatineau, QC J8Z 0A1
(French), or write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Care Centre, Mail Code:
CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Vehicle Data Event Data Recorders These data can help provide a
better understanding of the
Recording and This vehicle is equipped with an circumstances in which crashes and
event data recorder (EDR). The injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are
Privacy main purpose of an EDR is to recorded by your vehicle only if a
The vehicle has a number of record, in certain crash or near non-trivial crash situation occurs; no
computers that record information crash-like situations, such as an air data are recorded by the EDR under
about the vehicles performance and bag deployment or hitting a road normal driving conditions and no
how it is driven. For example, the obstacle, data that will assist in personal data (e.g., name, gender,
vehicle uses computer modules to understanding how a vehicles age, and crash location) are
monitor and control engine and systems performed. The EDR is recorded. However, other parties,
transmission performance, to designed to record data related to such as law enforcement, could
monitor the conditions for airbag vehicle dynamics and safety combine the EDR data with the type
deployment and deploy them in a systems for a short period of time, of personally identifying data
crash, and, if equipped, to provide typically 30 seconds or less. The routinely acquired during a crash
antilock braking to help the driver EDR in this vehicle is designed to investigation.
control the vehicle. These modules record such data as:
To read data recorded by an EDR,
may store data to help the dealer . How various systems in your special equipment is required, and
technician service the vehicle. vehicle were operating; access to the vehicle or the EDR is
Some modules may also store data needed. In addition to the vehicle
about how the vehicle is operated,
. Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were manufacturer, other parties, such as
such as rate of fuel consumption or law enforcement, that have the
average speed. These modules may buckled/fastened;
.
special equipment, can read the
retain personal preferences, such as How far (if at all) the driver was information if they have access to
radio presets, seat positions, and depressing the accelerator and/ the vehicle or the EDR.
temperature settings. or brake pedal; and,
GM will not access this data or
. How fast the vehicle was share it with others except: with the
traveling. consent of the vehicle owner or,
if the vehicle is leased, with the OnStar Terms and Conditions and personal information or link with any
consent of the lessee; in response Privacy Statement on the OnStar other GM system containing
to an official request by police or website. personal information.
similar government office; as part of
GM's defense of litigation through Navigation System Radio Frequency
the discovery process; or, as
required by law. Data that GM If the vehicle is equipped with a Statement
collects or receives may also be navigation system, use of the This vehicle has systems that
used for GM research needs or may system may result in the storage of operate on a radio frequency that
be made available to others for destinations, addresses, telephone comply with Part 15 of the Federal
research purposes, where a need is numbers, and other trip information. Communications Commission (FCC)
shown and the data is not tied to a See the navigation manual for rules and with Industry Canada
specific vehicle or vehicle owner. information on stored data and for Standards RSSGEN/210/220/310.
deletion instructions.
Operation is subject to the following
OnStar two conditions:
Radio Frequency
If the vehicle is equipped with 1. The device may not cause
OnStar and has an active
Identification (RFID)
harmful interference.
subscription, additional data may be RFID technology is used in some
collected through the OnStar vehicles for functions such as tire 2. The device must accept any
system. This includes information pressure monitoring and ignition interference received, including
about the vehicles operation; about system security, as well as in interference that may cause
collisions involving the vehicle; the connection with conveniences such undesired operation of the
use of the vehicle and its features; as Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) device.
and, in certain situations, the transmitters for remote door locking/ Changes or modifications to any of
location and approximate GPS unlocking and starting, and these systems by other than an
speed of the vehicle. Refer to the in-vehicle transmitters for garage authorized service facility could void
door openers. RFID technology in authorization to use this equipment.
GM vehicles does not use or record
OnStar 14-1
OnStar OnStar Overview Press = to:

. Make a call, end a call,
or answer an incoming call.
OnStar Overview .
OnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1 Give OnStar Hands-Free Calling
voice commands.
OnStar Services . Give OnStar Turn-by-Turn
Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 Navigation voice commands.
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 Requires the available Directions
Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 If equipped, this vehicle has a and Connections service plan.
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3 comprehensive, in-vehicle system
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5 that can connect to a live Advisor PressQ to connect to a live
for Emergency, Security, Navigation, Advisor to:
OnStar Additional Information Connection, and Diagnostic
OnStar Additional Services.
. Verify account information or
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5 update contact information.
The OnStar system status light is .
next to the OnStar buttons. If the Get driving directions. Requires
status light is: the available Directions and
Connections service plan.
. Solid Green: System is ready. . Receive On-Demand
. Flashing Green: On a call. Diagnostics for a check of the
. Red: Indicates a problem. vehicles key operating systems.
. Receive Roadside Assistance.
PressQ or call 1-888-4ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827) to speak to an
Advisor.
14-2 OnStar
Press the OnStar Emergency button OnStar Services equipped with automatic door locks,
> to get a priority connection to an and can help police locate the
Emergency Advisor available vehicle if it is stolen.
24/7 to: Emergency
. Get help for an emergency. With Automatic Crash Response, Navigation
the built-in system can automatically
. Be a Good Samaritan or OnStar navigation requires the
connect to help in most crashes,
respond to an AMBER Alert. Directions and Connections
even if help cannot be requested.
service plan.
. Get crisis assistance and
Press > to connect to an
evacuation routes. Press Q to receive directions or
Emergency Advisor. GPS
have them sent to the vehicle
technology is used to identify the
navigation screen, if equipped.
vehicle location and can provide
Destinations can also be forwarded
critical information to emergency
to the vehicle from MapQuest.com.
personnel. The Advisor is also
The OnStar mapping database is
trained to offer critical assistance in
continuously updated. Visit
emergency situations before first
www.onstar.com for coverage maps.
responders arrive.
Turn-by-Turn Navigation
Security
1. Press Q to connect to a live
OnStar provides services like Stolen Advisor.
Vehicle Assistance, Remote Ignition
Block, and Roadside Assistance, 2. Request directions.
if the vehicle is equipped with these 3. Directions are downloaded to the
services. OnStar can unlock the vehicle.
vehicle doors remotely, if it is
4. Follow the voice-guided
commands.
OnStar 14-3
Using Voice Commands 2. Say Repeat. System responds Destination Download: Press Q,
During a Planned Route with the last direction given, then then request the Advisor to
responds with OnStar ready, download directions to the
Cancel Route then a tone. navigation system in the vehicle.
1. Press =. System responds: 3. Say Goodbye. Exits voice After the call ends, press the Go
OnStar ready, then a tone. Say commands. button on the navigation screen to
Cancel route. System begin driving directions.
Get My Destination
responds: Do you want to Destinations can also be
cancel directions? 1. Press =. System responds: downloaded on the go. For
2. Say Yes. System responds: OnStar ready, then a tone. information about eNav, Destination
OK, request completed, thank 2. Say Get my destination. Download, and coverage maps visit
you, goodbye. System responds with address www.onstar.com.
Route Preview and the distance to the
destination, then responds with Connections
1. Press =. System responds: OnStar ready, then a tone. OnStar Hands-Free Calling allows
OnStar ready, then a tone. 3. Say Goodbye. Exits voice calls to be made and received from
2. Say Route preview. System commands. the vehicle. The vehicle can also be
responds with the next three controlled from a cell phone through
maneuvers. Other Navigation Services the OnStar RemoteLink mobile app.
Available from OnStar See www.onstar.com for
3. Say Goodbye. Exits voice coverage maps.
commands. OnStar eNav: Allows subscribers
to send destinations from
Repeat MapQuest.com to their Turn-by-Turn
Navigation or screen-based
1. Press =. System responds:
navigation system. When ready, the
OnStar ready, then a tone. directions will be downloaded to the
vehicle.
14-4 OnStar
Hands-Free Calling Retrieve My Number 5. Say Yes or say No to try

again. System responds: OK,
1. Press =. System responds: 1. Press =. System responds: storing <name tag>.
OnStar ready. OnStar ready.
Place a Call Using a Stored
2. Say Call. System responds: 2. Say My number. System
Number
Please say the name or number responds: Your OnStar
to call. Hands-Free Calling number is. 1. Press =. System responds:
3. Say the entire number without End a Call OnStar ready.
pausing, including a 1 and the 2. Say Call <name tag>. System
area code. System responds: Press=. System responds: Call responds: OK, calling
OK calling. ended. <name tag>.
Calling 911 Emergency Store a Name Tag for Speed Verify Minutes and Expiration
Dialing
1. Press=. The system responds Press = and say Minutes then
OnStar Ready, followed by 1. Press =. System responds: Verify to check how many minutes
a tone. OnStar ready. remain and their expiration date.
2. Say Call. The system responds 2. Say Store. System responds: OnStar Mobile App
Please say the name or number Please say the number you
to call. would like to store. Download the OnStar RemoteLink
mobile app to your iPhone, Android,
3. Say 911 without pausing. The 3. Say the entire number without or BlackBerry smartphone to check
system responds 911. pausing. System responds: vehicle fuel level, oil life, or tire
4. Say Call. The system responds Please say the name tag. pressure; to start the vehicle (if
OK, dialing 911. 4. Pick a name tag. System equipped) or unlock it; or to connect
responds: About to store <name to an OnStar Advisor. For OnStar
tag>. Does that sound OK? RemoteLink information and
compatibility, see www.onstar.com.
OnStar 14-5
Diagnostics OnStar Additional Diagnostics, Remote Door Unlock,

Roadside Assistance, Turn-by-Turn
OnStar Vehicle Diagnostics will Information Navigation, and Hands-Free Calling
perform a vehicle check every are available on most vehicles. Not
month. It will check the engine, Transferring Service all OnStar services are available
transmission, antilock brakes, and everywhere or on all vehicles. For
major vehicle systems. It also Press Q to request account transfer
eligibility information. The Advisor more information, a full description
checks the tire pressures, if the of OnStar services, system
vehicle is equipped with the Tire can assist in canceling or removing
limitations, and OnStar terms and
Pressure Monitoring System. If a account information. If OnStar
conditions, see www.onstar.com
diagnostics check is needed receives information that vehicle
ownership has changed, OnStar (U.S.) or www.onstar.ca (Canada);
between e-mails, press Q, and an contact OnStar at 1-888-4ONSTAR
may send a voice message to the
Advisor can run a check. (1-888-466-7827) or TTY
vehicle, requesting updated account
information. 1-877-248-2080; or press Q to
speak with an Advisor. OnStar
Reactivation for Subsequent services require a vehicle electrical
Owners system, wireless service, and GPS
satellite technologies to be available
Press Q and follow the prompts to and operating for features to
speak to an Advisor as soon as function properly. These systems
possible after acquiring the vehicle. may not operate if the battery is
The Advisor will update vehicle discharged or disconnected.
records and will explain the OnStar
service offers and options available. OnStar service cannot work unless
your vehicle is in a place where
How OnStar Service Works OnStar has an agreement with a
Automatic Crash Response, wireless service provider for service
Emergency Services, Crisis Assist, in that area, and the wireless
Stolen Vehicle Assistance, Vehicle service provider has coverage,
14-6 OnStar
network capacity, reception, and Services for People with OnStar.com

technology compatible with OnStar Disabilities The website provides access to
service. Service involving location
Advisors provide services to help account information, manages the
information about the vehicle cannot
subscribers with physical disabilities OnStar subscription, and allows
work unless GPS signals are
and medical conditions. viewing of videos of each service.
available, unobstructed, and
Get subscription plan pricing and
compatible with the OnStar Press Q for help with: sign up for OnStar Vehicle
hardware. OnStar service may not
. Locating a gas station with an Diagnostics. Click on the My
work if the OnStar equipment is not
attendant to pump gas. Account tab on the home page.
properly installed or it has not been
properly maintained. If equipment or . Finding a hotel, restaurant, etc., OnStar Personal Identification
software is added, connected, that meets accessibility needs. Number (PIN)
or modified, OnStar service may not
work. Other problems beyond the
. Providing directions to the A PIN is needed to access some of
control of OnStar may prevent closest hospital or pharmacy in the OnStar services, like Remote
service such as hills, tall buildings, urgent situations. Door Unlock and Stolen Vehicle
tunnels, weather, electrical system Assistance. You will be prompted to
TTY Users change the PIN the first time when
design and architecture of the
vehicle, damage to the vehicle in a OnStar has the ability to speaking with an Advisor. To
crash, or wireless phone network communicate to the deaf, change the OnStar PIN, call OnStar
congestion or jamming. hard-of-hearing, or speech-impaired and provide the Advisor with the
customers while in the vehicle. The current number.
See Radio Frequency Statement on available dealer-installed TTY
page 1320 for information system can provide in-vehicle
regarding Part 15 of the Federal access to all of the OnStar services,
Communications Commission (FCC) except Virtual Advisor and OnStar
rules and Industry Canada Turn-by-Turn Navigation.
OnStar 14-7
Warranty Global Positioning Cellular and GPS Antennas

OnStar equipment may be System (GPS) Avoid placing items over or near the
warranted as part of the New . Obstruction of the GPS can antenna to prevent blocking cellular
Vehicle Limited Warranty. The occur in a large city with tall and GPS signal reception. Cellular
manufacturer of the vehicle buildings; in parking garages; reception is required for OnStar to
furnishes detailed warranty around airports; in tunnels, send remote signals to the vehicle.
information. underpasses, or parking
garages; or in an area with very
Unable to Connect to OnStar
Languages dense trees. If GPS signals are Message
The vehicle can be programmed to not available, the OnStar system If there is limited cellular coverage
respond in French or Spanish. should still operate to call or the cellular network has reached
Press Q and ask an Advisor. OnStar. However, OnStar could maximum capacity, this message
Advisors can speak French or have difficulty identifying the may come on. Press Q to try the
Spanish. exact location. call again or try again after driving a
. In emergency situations, OnStar few miles into another cellular area.
Potential Issues can use the last stored GPS
Some OnStar services are disabled location to send to emergency Vehicle and Power Issues
after five days. OnStar cannot responders. OnStar services require a vehicle
perform Remote Door Unlock or electrical system, wireless service,
. A temporary loss of GPS can
Stolen Vehicle Assistance after the and GPS satellite technologies to be
cause loss of the ability to send
vehicle has been off continuously available and operating for features
a Turn-by-Turn Navigation route.
for five days. After five days, OnStar to function properly. These systems
The Advisor may give a verbal
can contact Roadside Assistance may not operate if the battery is
route or may ask for a call back
and a locksmith to help gain access discharged or disconnected.
after the vehicle is driven into an
to the vehicle.
open area.
14-8 OnStar
Add-on Electrical Equipment

The OnStar system is integrated
into the electrical architecture of the
vehicle. Do not add any electrical
equipment. See Add-On Electrical
Equipment on page 9105. Added
electrical equipment may interfere
with the operation of the OnStar
system and cause it to not operate.
Privacy
The complete OnStar Privacy
Statement may be found at
www.onstar.com. Privacy-sensitive
users of wireless communications
are cautioned that the privacy of any
information sent via wireless cellular
communications cannot be assured.
Third parties may unlawfully
intercept or access transmissions
and private communications without
consent.
INDEX i-1
A Airbag System (cont'd) Appearance Care

What Will You See after an Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-93
Accessories and
Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28 Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-96
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
When Should an Airbag Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25 Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Active Fuel Management . . . . . 9-32
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-24 Assistance Program,
Add-On Electrical
Airbags Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7, 13-11
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-105
Adding Equipment to the Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Adding a Snow Plow or
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37 CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17
Similar Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 9-105
Light On-Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18 CD/DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-23
Additional Information
On-Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18 Audio System
OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5
On-Off Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29 Fixed Mast Antenna . . . . . . . . . .7-16
Adjustable Throttle and
Passenger Status Indicator . . .5-20 Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-16
Brake Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17 Rear Seat (RSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-48
Adjustments
Servicing Airbag-Equipped Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-2
Lumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36 Automatic
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-16
System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Alarm Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Airbag System
Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-33
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 Transmission
How Does an Airbag
Antenna Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10, 10-12
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17 Automatic Transmission
Passenger Sensing
Antilock Brake Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-37
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32
System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53 Shift Lock Control
What Makes an Airbag
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24 Function Check . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27
i-2 INDEX
Auxiliary Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-23 C

Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-34 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Roof Mounted Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Center High-Mounted
California
Axle, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30 Stoplamp (CHMSL) and
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-69
Axle, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 Cargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Perchlorate Materials
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
B Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Camera, Rear Vision . . . . . . . . . . 9-64
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84 Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iii
Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 Headlamps, Front Turn
Capacities and
Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 Signal, Sidemarker, and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Voltage and Charging Parking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Carbon Monoxide
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38 License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-39
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32
Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-35 Pick-up Box Identification
Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50 and Fender Marker
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12
Brake Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Cargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Pedal and Adjustable Taillamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Cautions, Danger, and
Throttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24 Taillamps, Turn Signal,
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
System Warning Light . . . . . . . .5-24 Stoplamps, and
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25 Back-up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-53 Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66
Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-2
Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-55 Center High-Mounted
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 Stoplamp (CHMSL) and
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-54 Cargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38 Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71
INDEX i-3
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 5-21 Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 D

Check Connections
Damage Repair, Collision . . . . . 13-14
Engine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21 OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-3
Danger, Warnings, and
Ignition Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Transmission Lock . . . . . . . . 10-34 Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-19
Child Restraints Coolant
Daytime Running
Infants and Young Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-41 Engine Temperature
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Lower Anchors and Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-47 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
Devices
Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-39 Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39
Auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-34
Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55, 3-58 Courtesy Transportation
Diagnostics
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-43 Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5
Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-59
Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Cleaning Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Door
Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-93 Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39
Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-96 Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-5
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Climate Control Systems . . . 8-1, 8-4 Text Telephone (TTY)
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . 8-1, 8-4 Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-6
Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Dual Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 Customer Information
Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1, 8-4 Service Publications
Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . 12-6
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-16
Driver Information
Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Customer Satisfaction
Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Clutch, Hydraulic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2, 13-4
Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 13-14
i-4 INDEX
Driving E Engine (cont'd)

Characteristics and Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
E85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-71
Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-75 Cooling System Messages . . .5-39
Electrical Equipment,
Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-6
Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-105
Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32
Electrical System
For Better Fuel Economy . . . . .1-32 Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Engine Compartment
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11 Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9
Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 9-11 Oil Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40
Fuses and Circuit
If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . .9-14 Oil Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Overheated Protection
Instrument Panel Fuse
Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .9-15 Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41
Emergency
Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10 Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12 Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-33
Engine
Dual Automatic Climate Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26
Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Check and Service Engine
Dual Tire Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-93
Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65 Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-19
Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-5
DVD Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Rear Seat Entertainment Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Coolant Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-38 Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Coolant Temperature
DVD/CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23 Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . 6-2
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
INDEX i-5
F Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30 Fuses

Front Fog Lamp Engine Compartment
Fan
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28 Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Front Seats Fuses and Circuit
Fast Idle System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Features
Heated and Ventilated . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Instrument Panel Fuse
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-68 Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
Filter,
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-70
Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . . . . . . .9-71 G
Economy Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-32 Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . 5-54
Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-5
Filling a Portable Fuel Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-54
Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-74 Gasoline
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-72 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-69
Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-99
Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . .9-70 Gauges
Fluid
Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .9-69 Engine Coolant
Automatic
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13 Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Transmission . . . . . . . 10-10, 10-12
Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . .5-27 Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Management, Active . . . . . . . . . .9-32 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Four-Wheel Drive
Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-69 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-41
Requirements, California . . . . .9-69 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12
Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-84 Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12
Fog Lamps
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 Warning Lights and
Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . 10-29, 9-41 Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10
Four-Wheel-Drive Light . . . . . . . . 5-25
i-6 INDEX
General Information Heated and Ventilated Front Infants and Young Children,
Service and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-74 Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Heater Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Glass Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35 Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29 Instrument Panel
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Heating and Air Storage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
GM Mobility Reimbursement Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1, 8-4 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
High-Speed Operation . . . . . . . . 10-58 J
H Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36 Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-11
Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . 9-55
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-5
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 K
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Key and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 5-41
Headlamps Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
How to Wear Safety Belts Keyless Entry
Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35 Remote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-2
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 I L
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Idle System Labeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-50
Headlamps, Front Turn Fast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-28 Lamps
Signal, Sidemarker, and Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24 Auxiliary Roof
Parking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36 Ignition Transmission Lock Mounted Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-28 Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34 Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2 Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 6-3
Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
INDEX i-7
Lamps (cont'd) Lights Locks

Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Airbag On-Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18 Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Exterior Lamps Off Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17 Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Antilock Brake System Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39 (ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24 Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-21 Brake System Warning . . . . . . .5-24 Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41 Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Pick-up Box Identification Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28 Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
and Fender Marker . . . . . . . . 10-37 Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-27 Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . 5-27
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Lower Anchors and Tethers
Taillamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37 Four-Wheel-Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25 for Children (LATCH
Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19 Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28 System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28 Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
LATCH System High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2 Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Replacing Parts after a Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-55 Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . .5-16 M
LATCH, Lower Anchors and Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28 Maintenance
Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-47 StabiliTrak OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25 Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-16
Lighter, Cigarette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26 Maintenance Schedule
Lighting Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25 Recommended Fluids
Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 Traction Control System and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-12
Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 (TCS)/StabiliTrak . . . . . . . . . .5-26 Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-41
Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-59 Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-21
Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37
i-8 INDEX
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . 9-39 Mirrors O

Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15 Automatic Dimming
Object Detection System
Manual Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12
Messages Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43 Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Battery Voltage and Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38 Park Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Oil
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6
Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39 Trailer Tow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . .10-9
Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .5-39 Monitor System, Tire
Engine Oil Pressure
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40 Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40
Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41 N Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41 Navigation Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-39
Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41 OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2 Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Object Detection System . . . . .5-42 Vehicle Data Recording OnStar
Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-42 and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20 System, In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-33
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43 New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-23 OnStar Additional
Starting the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . .5-43 Noise Control System . . . . . . . . 10-32 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44
OnStar Connections . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44
OnStar Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37
Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46
INDEX i-9
OnStar Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31 Power (cont'd)

OnStar Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 Assist, Ultrasonic . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-62 Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
OnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1 Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-54 Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
OnStar Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 Brake and P (Park) Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Operation, Infotainment Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-34 Pregnancy, Using Safety
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-32 Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Ordering Passenger Airbag Status Privacy
Service Publications . . . . . . . . 13-16 Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 Radio Frequency
Outlets Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-32 Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-20
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Perchlorate Materials Program
Overheated Engine Requirements, California . . . . . 10-3 Courtesy Transportation . . . . 13-13
Protection Personalization Proposition 65 Warning,
Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46 California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-21 Phone
Overview, Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-50 R
Infotainment Pick-up Box Identification Radio Frequency
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3, 7-4, 7-6 and Fender Marker Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 13-20
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37 Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20
P Pickup Conversion to Radios
Park Chassis Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-108 AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-10
Shifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29 Power CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-23
Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-16
Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14 Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12
Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-28 Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-59
i-10 INDEX
Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Replacement Roof

Rear Seat Audio (RSA) Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20, 2-21
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39 Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63
Rear Seat Entertainment Replacement Parts Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-6
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38 Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38 Running the Vehicle While
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) . . . . . . .7-48 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-15 Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-38
Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . 9-64 Replacing LATCH System S
Rear Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55 Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 Replacing Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-17 System Parts after a Crash . . . 3-21 Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Reporting Safety Defects How to Wear Safety Belts
Recommended Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-18 Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-69 General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18 Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-19
Recommended Fluids and U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17 Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12 Restraints Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Records Where to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-45 Replacing after a Crash . . . . . .3-21
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-16 Retained Accessory Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-19
Recreational Vehicle Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28 Safety Defects Reporting
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89 Ride Control Systems Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-18
Reimbursement Program, Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42 General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 Roads U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Driving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10 Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Roadside Assistance Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7, 13-11 Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Scheduling Appointments . . . . . 13-12
INDEX i-11
Seats Service (cont'd) Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-33

Adjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Maintenance, General Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 Starting the Vehicle
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1 Messsages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
Heated and Ventilated Front . . . 3-9 Publications Ordering Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 3-5 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16 Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Scheduling Appointments . . . 13-12 Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-5 Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36 Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Shift Lock Control Function Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Check, Automatic Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Securing Child Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33 Storage Areas
Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55, 3-58 Shifting Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Security Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29 Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28 Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31 Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43 Signals, Turn and Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2 Lane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10 Snow Plow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-105 Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Vehicle Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10 Specifications and Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20, 2-21
Service Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 Switches
Accessories and Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Airbag On-Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3 StabiliTrak Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-3 OFF Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25 System
Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-56 Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Maintenance Records . . . . . . .11-16 Start Assist, Hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55 Noise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
i-12 INDEX
T Tires (cont'd) Traction

Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50 Control System (TCS)/
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Terminology and StabiliTrak Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54 Trailer
Taillamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Uniform Tire Quality Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . 9-104
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68 Tow Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-6
Wheel Alignment and Tire Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-77
Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 2-12
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70 Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-70 Transmission
Throttle, Adjustable . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
When It Is Time for New Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-33
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65 Fluid, Automatic . . . . . 10-10, 10-12
Tires
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49 Fluid, Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66
Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71
Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-25 Transportation Program,
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73
Towing Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52
Driving Characteristics . . . . . . . .9-75 Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-93 Truck-Camper Loading
Dual Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65
General Information . . . . . . . . . .9-74 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Full-Size Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84
Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-89 Turn and Lane-Change
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-72
Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-77 Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-59
Trailer Sway Turn Signal
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62
Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-104 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89
Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-58
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63
INDEX i-13
U Vehicle (cont'd) Wheels

Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Alignment and Tire
Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . . . 9-62
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10 Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70
Uniform Tire Quality
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89 Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68
Vehicle Care Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70
Universal Remote System . . . . . 5-54
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56 When It Is Time for New
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-58
Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-54
Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-45
Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
V W Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Vehicle Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
Warning
Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10 Windshield
Brake System Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Warning Lights, Gauges,
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Winter
and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Identification Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1 Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49
Cautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .iv
Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-15 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-35
Hazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46
Reminder Messages . . . . . . . . . .5-45
i-14 INDEX
2 NOTES

2013 Chevrolet Silverado

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2013 Chevrolet Silverado

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2013 Chevrolet Silverado

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What are the main sections covered in the owner's manual?

What are the main sections covered in the owner's manual?

What safety features are discussed?

What safety features are discussed?

Chevrolet Silverado Owner Manual - 2013 - crc2 - 8/13/12 Black plate (1,1)

2013 Chevrolet Silverado Owner Manual M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

2013 Chevrolet Silverado Owner Manual M

Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47 OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

Please refer to the purchase Canadian Vehicle Owners

Danger, Warnings, and Vehicle Symbol Chart

j : LATCH System Child

In Brief Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27

E. Instrument Cluster on page 104. Pedal Adjust Button (If

W. Climate Control Systems (with

Instrument Panel (Premium Version)

F. Tow/Haul Mode on page 938 (If page 104.

V. StabiliTrak System on Initial Drive

Power Windows Press the switch to lower the

To adjust a power seat, if equipped:

Power Reclining Seatbacks Memory Features Heated and Ventilated

To adjust a power seatback,

J: Press to heat the seat and Safety Belts Passenger Sensing

Exterior Mirrors 4. Press either (A) or (B) again to

Manual Mirrors Heated Mirrors

Adjustment Steering Wheel Throttle and Brake Pedal

Climate Control System (With Air Conditioning)

A. Fan Control E. Outside Air

Climate Control System (With Heater Only)

A. Fan Control See Climate Control Systems (with

Dual Automatic Climate Control System Transmission

The Range Selection Mode switch,

Vehicle Features f : Turn to manually select radio

Cruise Control [ : Press to disengage cruise Driver Information

3 : Press to display the V : Press to set or reset certain Rear Vision

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1

Keys, Doors, and Exterior Mirrors

2-2 Keys, Doors, and Windows

With an active OnStar subscription,

Remote Keyless Entry Remote Keyless Entry

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-3

when Q is pressed again within Pressing K on the RKE transmitter

2-4 Keys, Doors, and Windows

programmed to this vehicle, all 3. Insert the new battery, positive

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-5

2-6 Keys, Doors, and Windows

For example, if Q and then / are Remote Start Ready

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-7

There are several ways to lock and Power Door Locks

2-8 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Pressing the power lock switch Lockout Protection

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-9

Doors WARNING (Continued)

2-10 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Tailgate Removal 1. Raise the tailgate slightly, pull Vehicle Security

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-11

2-12 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-13

2-14 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-15